JP2023105393A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To appropriately carry out detection and notification of errors when a plurality of errors is generated.SOLUTION: A first error (e.g., hopper error) and a second error (e.g., selector error) can be detected. Up until a predetermined period elapses from the time when the first error is detected, the first error is prevented from being cancelled even if cancellation operation for the first error is executed. Also, the second error is prevented from being detected up until the predetermined period elapses. Even when a factor of the second error occurs during the predetermined period, the predetermined period is not varied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 146

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-described problems by the following solutions (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). The present invention corresponds to the initial invention 4 among the initial inventions 1 to 15 described later.
The present invention (11th embodiment) is
capable of detecting a first error (hopper error) and a second error (selector error);
making it impossible to cancel the first error until a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined timing after the detection of the first error (including the timing of the moment when the first error is detected);
not detecting the second error until the predetermined period of time elapses;
Even if the second error factor occurs during the predetermined period, the predetermined period does not change (FIG. 146).
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine as an example of a game machine in the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of the reel in 1st Embodiment. In the first embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window and each reel and the effective lines, and (B) is a diagram showing the designation of symbol positions. FIG. 11 is a diagram (1) showing types of winnings, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the first embodiment; It is a diagram (2) showing the types of wins, etc., the symbol combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table|table in 1st Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation conditions of the game state in 1st Embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is left first stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, left first stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and left first when the small win C1 condition device is activated FIG. 10 is a diagram showing left reel symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the display window at the time of stop, (2) is a stop display in the display window at the second left stop after the middle first stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. It is a figure which shows the symbol of the left reel which becomes possible. In the first embodiment, it is a diagram showing symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination C2 condition device are activated. In the first embodiment, it is a diagram showing symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when a small combination D1 condition device to a small combination F2 condition device are activated. In the first embodiment, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the minor win F2 condition device are activated, only the symbols of the middle reels are diagrams showing the symbol combination of "PB=1" arrangement. . In the first embodiment, it is a diagram showing a symbol combination in which only the symbols on the right reel are arranged "PB=1" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the minor win F2 condition device are activated. . In the first embodiment, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the minor win F2 condition device are activated, only the symbols on the left reel are in the "PB=1" arrangement. . In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when the small win 01 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when the small win 02 is won, and (3) is a view showing the stop roll when the small win is won. It is a diagram showing a stop roll at the time of 03 winning. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when the small win 04 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when the small win 05 is won, and (3) is a view showing the stop roll when the small win is won. It is a figure which shows the stop number at the time of 06 winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of the reel in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (1) showing types of wins, etc., symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the second embodiment; It is a diagram (2) showing the types of wins, etc., symbol combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table|table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation conditions of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, (1) is left first stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, left first stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and left first when the small win C1 condition device is activated FIG. 10 is a diagram showing left reel symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the display window at the time of stop, (2) is a stop display in the display window at the second left stop after the middle first stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. It is a figure which shows the symbol of the left reel which becomes possible. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of the reel in the modification of 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. In the modifications of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, (1) is the left first stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, the left first stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and the small win C1 It is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window at the time of the left first stop when the condition device is activated, and (2) is the left second after the middle first stop when the small combination C1 condition device is activated FIG. 10 is a diagram showing symbols on the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the display window when the game is stopped; In the modification of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop rolls when winning a small win 01, and (2) is a diagram showing the stop rolls when winning a small win 02. (3) is a diagram showing a stop roll when winning a small winning combination 03. FIG. In the modification of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 04, and (2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when winning a small win 05. (3) is a diagram showing a stop roll when winning a small winning combination of 06. FIG. It is a figure explaining the structure of main CPU, ROM, and RWM in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in RWM usage areas in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the third embodiment; FIG. 35 is a diagram following FIG. 34 showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the third embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display substrate in the third embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the relationship between a digit and a segment in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the third embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing the LED display counter 2 ( _SC_LED_DSP2) and a signal output from the output port 6, and (C) is a diagram illustrating an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) in the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing blinking request flag generation processing (S_LED_FLASH) in the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a ratio display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in a modification of the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in a modification of the third embodiment; It is a block diagram showing a timer circuit and the like for executing interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 4 shows an example of a program for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission in the fourth embodiment, (A) and (B) showing a main processing program, and (C) showing an interrupt processing program. 14 is a flow chart showing program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in 4th Embodiment, and shows the example which does not have an interrupt prohibition period by main processing. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in 4th Embodiment, and shows the example which has an interrupt prohibition period by main processing. 14 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment; FIG. In the fourth embodiment, it is a time chart showing an interrupt cycle when there is no interrupt disabled period in the main process. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example in which an interrupt disabled period in main processing is set between interrupt processing 1 and interrupt processing 2 in the fourth embodiment; In the fourth embodiment, it is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is an interrupt disabled period. In the fourth embodiment, it is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is an interrupt disabled period. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 3) in which the timing at which the load processing is scheduled to be executed is an interrupt disabled period in the fourth embodiment; 10 is a time chart showing the relationship (example 1) between reel rotation and error detection and notification in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 76 (example 1); FIG. 15 is a time chart (example 2) showing a case where settings are changed after an error is detected during reel rotation in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 78 (example 2); FIG. 15 is a time chart showing a case (example 3) in which a plurality of errors are detected during setting confirmation in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 80 (example 3); In the fifth embodiment, a time chart showing a case (example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 are stopped and before the start switch is operated (game start)) be. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 82 (example 4); FIG. 21 is an external perspective view showing a main control board, a socket, and a main chip not attached to the socket in the sixth embodiment; FIG. 4 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing in more detail the main chip mounted in the socket; FIG. 85 is an arrow view (front view) seen from the Z1 direction in FIG. FIG. 85 is an arrow view (side view) seen from the Z2 direction. (A) is an enlarged view showing product names and company names, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z3-Z3 in (A). FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between three types of stepped portions; It is a figure which shows the positional relationship (example 1) of the board|substrate and a predetermined electronic component in 7th Embodiment, (A) shows a top view, (B) shows a front view. (A) is a view viewed from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90(A), and (B) is a view viewed from the Z5 direction (bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90(B). be. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship (example 2) of the board|substrate and a predetermined electronic component in 7th Embodiment, (A) shows a top view, (B) shows a side view (enlarged view). FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the positional relationship (example 3) between the substrate and the predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, (A) is a front view (mounting surface of the predetermined electronic component), and (B) is a side view. , and (C) shows a back view. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a modification of Example 3 of FIG. 93, where (A) shows a front view (mounting surface of predetermined electronic components), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor in an eighth embodiment; FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in RWM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment; In the eighth embodiment, it is a diagram for explaining the interrupt initialization address, (A) is a diagram showing the data details of the interrupt initialization address, (B) is the relationship between the interrupt priority and the interrupt priority setting value It is a figure which shows. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining vector address values and data values stored in the vector addresses in the eighth embodiment, where (A) shows vector address values and (B) shows interrupt factors and automatically assigned values; (C) shows an example of the data value of the vector address. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a process from power-on to transition to user mode in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a program example starting from “0000H” in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM in the eighth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example when a vector address is set to "00F4H" in the eighth embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by an RST instruction in the eighth embodiment, (A), (B), and (C) showing examples 1, 2, and 3, respectively; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing program code area setting addresses and their data values in the eighth embodiment; In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the type of combination, the probability of winning, the number of payouts for each order of pressing the stop switch, etc., and (b) is a diagram showing the ball payout performance of the biased combination. . In the ninth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 1) when the stop switch is operated in the recommended pressing order during the advantageous section and non-AT. In the ninth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 1) when the stop switch is operated in the non-recommended pressing order during the advantageous section and non-AT. In the ninth embodiment, it is a diagram showing a flow of effects (example 2) when the stop switch is operated in the recommended pressing order during the advantageous section and non-AT. In the ninth embodiment, it is a diagram showing a flow of effects (example 2) when the stop switch is operated in the non-recommended pressing order during the advantageous section and non-AT. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating the transition of (image) layers when a recommended image is displayed in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 111 is a diagram following FIG. 110; In the ninth embodiment, it is a time chart (when replay is not won) showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the bet operation and the start switch operation are performed after the demonstration display, and (a) is a recommended push. (b) shows a non-recommended pushing order time. In the ninth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the start switch is operated 60 seconds after winning the replay, and (a) shows the recommended pressing order. , (b) shows the non-recommended pressing sequence. In the ninth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the bet operation is performed within 3 seconds after the complete stop and the start operation is performed 60 seconds after the complete stop. ) indicates the recommended push order, and (b) indicates the non-recommended push order. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing a push order instruction number setting process in step S181 of FIG. 115; FIG. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing effect group number setting processing in step S182 of FIG. 115. FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between a winning combination (biased combination) and an instruction monitor and image display in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing temporary storage processing 1 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart following FIG. 119; FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing another example of FIG. 120; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing temporary storage processing 2 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart continued from FIG. 122; FIG. 20 is a side cross-sectional view of a slot machine according to a tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (1) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (2) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (3) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (4) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (5) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (6) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (7) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (8) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (9) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a time chart (2) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (4) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 15 is a time chart (5) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (6) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a time chart (7) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (8) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when power is turned off during door open notification in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart (2) which shows the operation|movement aspect when a power supply is turned off during door opening alerting|reporting in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door open notification in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a time chart showing Example 1 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a time chart showing Example 2 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a time chart showing Example 3 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an example (example 4) in which power is interrupted while the first error is occurring in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 149 is a time cheat showing an example (re5) in which the power is cut off while the first error is occurring in the eleventh embodiment, and is a modification of FIG. 149 ; FIG. 16 is a time chart showing example 6 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a time chart showing example 7 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a time chart showing an example 8 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a time chart showing Example 9 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 31 is an external perspective view showing a slot machine in a twelfth embodiment; FIG. 12A is a front view of the door cylinder, and FIG. 12B is a side view of the door key inserted through the door key insertion opening in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a front view showing the positional relationship between the door key insertion slot and the door key in the twelfth embodiment; In the twelfth embodiment, (a) is a front view explaining various dimensions of the door key cylinder, and (b) is a plan view and a side view showing dimensions of the power plug. It is a schematic diagram explaining the locking device in 12th Embodiment, and is the front view seen from the inside of the front door to the outside (player side). FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a state when the cam is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 159 in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a state when the cam is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees from the state of FIG. 159 in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a front view showing a structure for locking the door key at that position after the front door is opened in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 12A is a side view showing the setting key and the setting key cylinder in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 12B is a side view showing the setting key inserted, and FIG. It is a side view showing the state of when. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angles of the door key and the setting key and the rotation torque corresponding to the rotation angles in the twelfth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation stage in 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the kind of production|presentation in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the event names, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of effects 01, 03, and 14 in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the event names, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of effects 15, 16, and 17 in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the event names, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of production 18, production 20, production 21, and production 22 in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the event names, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of effects 23, 24, and 25 in the thirteenth embodiment;

In this specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
A “bet” is a bet of medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, the actual medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "reservation")" is different from the above-described "bet" and refers to the accumulation of medals inside the slot machine 10 . As used herein, the term "credit" does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "throwing in" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Also, the “specified number” refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number of "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number of "1".
For convenience of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to anything other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the bet number is "1" (the bet number at that time) when one medal is inserted (before the game starts).

“Maintenance” means that the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
“Take care bet” means that the player bets on medals by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47 .
“Cleaning credit” means that the player credits medals (adding credits) by cleaning the medals from the medal slot 47 .

“Bet medals” means the medals that are bet on.
“Reserved Medals” means Medals that are credited (reserved).
A "reserved bet" is a bet in which a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later) to bet part or all of the credited medals within a bettable range in the game. It means to
“Automatic bet” means that the number of medals that were betted in the previous game is automatically betted by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when the replay wins.
Here, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination has been stopped and displayed (meaning that the symbol combination has stopped on the active line; the same shall apply hereinafter), this is referred to as "winning a small combination".
On the other hand, in the "Regulations Concerning Approval and Model Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as "rules")", when the symbol combination corresponding to replaying is stopped and displayed, the conditional device for replaying is activated. are interpreted as not “winning”.
However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the combinations (replay combination), and stopping display of a symbol combination corresponding to replay may be referred to as "replay winning".
“Settlement” means paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

“Payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning a winning combination or paying out medals through the above settlement. When paying out medals to the player based on winning a role, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)) and paying out the medals. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled such that, for example, "50" is credited as the limit number of medals, and medals exceeding the credit number of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "grant". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may also be referred to as the "number of awards."

The "game medium" is medals in this embodiment, but electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium in the case of, for example, an enclosed (ECO) gaming machine. It should be noted that "electronic information" means that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is used to play a game on a game machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing.
Note that the "game medium" may also be referred to as "game value".

Further, when the game medium is electronic information, "payout of medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the gaming machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not mean only that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later). addition) is also included.

``N-1'' game, ``N'' game, ``N+1'' game, . When it is a number, the game of the "N"th game is called "this time game". Also, the game of the "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N+1"th game is referred to as the "next game".

In this specification, numbers with "(B)" at the end of numbers (especially 8 bits) mean binary numbers. Similarly, numbers with "(H)", "H" or "h" at the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numeric value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000(B)" in binary and as "10(H)", "10H" or "10h" in hexadecimal. . Numerical values representing decimal numbers are written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" The trailing sign may be omitted.

Also, the probability that a desired pattern to be stopped and displayed on the effective line can be stopped on the effective line during the period from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (the maximum number of moving frames) is called "pull-in." rate (PB)”.
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (effective line). line) is called "PB≠1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. It is called "PB=1".

Further, the "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the activated line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means that the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is advantageous/disadvantageous in the game result (symbol combination that stops on the active line), and the game has a payout or has a payout number. An operation mode in which many symbol combinations stop, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift (falls) to a disadvantageous RT stops. The "advantageous operation mode" is also called a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

``A game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42'' is, for example, a game in which a plurality of types of small wins (bells) with different payout numbers are won repeatedly (a game in which a so-called "push order bell" is won) ), the types of small wins (bells) to be won differ depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (the number of payouts differs). Also, for example, in a game in which a plurality of types of replays are won (when duplicate replays are won; a game in which a so-called "push order replay" is won), the RT may change depending on the type of replay won.

The “instruction function” means a function of instructing the player how to operate the stop switch 42 . The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 .
In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
It should be noted that "display" is to show the content of the "instruction" in a visible manner, and "notification" is to inform the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".

Further, there is a possibility that notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not limited to notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous may be the "activation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous is the "operation of the instruction function". It may also be referred to as "activation".
For example, when the pushing order bell has a six-choice pushing order, the payout when winning the pushing order bell is one of 1, 3, 4, 10, or a dropout (non-winning), depending on the order of pushing. assume that
Here, informing of the pressing order for winning the 10-card combination is informing of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "activation of the instruction function".
On the other hand, the notification of the pushing order for winning the one-hand, three-hand, or four-hand, may be regarded as "notification of advantageous operation mode (operation of instruction function)", and "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notification of

The pressing order for winning the 4-card winning combination is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card winning combination, so it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, the number of payouts is "4" for the number of bets of "3", and the number of difference in the game is "+1".
Similarly, the pushing order for winning the 3-card hand is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card hand. However, since the number of payouts is "3" for the number of bets of "3" and the difference number is maintained at the current state (the difference number is not decreased), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.

Furthermore, similarly, the pushing order for winning a winning combination of 1 is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is a pushing order that does not win a winning combination of 10 cards. Further, in this operation mode, the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets of "3", and the difference number is reduced. However, since it can be said that it is an operation mode that does not miss a role, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operation mode.

In this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated when the winning order of the bell is won, the operation mode (correct order of pressing) in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts wins is reported.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)"), but the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later) has a margin. , when winning the push order bell, it is conceivable to notify the pushing order for winning, for example, a 3-card hand or a 4-card hand as described above, and control the difference counter value to maintain the current state.

Also, in this embodiment, the activation of the pointing function is limited to one defined number. For example, assume that the specified number for activating the pointing function is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" in AT, when the game is started with the bet number of "3" and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the number of bets "2", the instruction function cannot be operated even if the winning order bell is won.

The "game section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section". In addition, the 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a game section that was won in the advantageous section lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous section), but the current regulations for the 6 machine do not include "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, it is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" means that a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pushing order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct pushing order), which will be described later, is sent to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ) and has no effect on performance related to the instruction function (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery for the role, it is possible to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).

Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, the pressing order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function cannot be displayed. Therefore, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). Refers to a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that contradicts the content of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the received signal related to the instruction function.

In addition, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function does not need to be activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may always be operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 . Therefore, AT is always in the advantageous interval and AT is never executed in the non-advantageous interval.

In addition, in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the ball output rate in a predetermined period It is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules.
For example, when the upper limit value of the difference number counter is approached during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is temporarily not reported from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. (not activating the indicating function) is also conceivable.

In addition, various settings can be made for the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first method is to set “advantageous section=AT”. In this case, winning the advantageous section and winning the AT are equivalent. Then, AT is started from the first game in the advantageous section. Also, the AT ends when the advantageous section ends.

Secondly, it is possible to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, the AT start (execution) condition is not satisfied just by moving to the advantageous section. When it is decided to execute, the AT is executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT when shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (a period in which AT is likely to win)) or the like.

When shifting to the sign after shifting to the advantageous section, the game may be shifted to the main sign without fail, and after the predetermined number of games of the main sign is completed, the game may be shifted to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous section or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether to be the main omen or the false omen, and when it is determined to be the main omen, the transition to AT may be made after the end of the main omen. . Further, when the false sign is determined, after the false sign ends, the advantageous section may be maintained, or the section may be shifted to the normal section.
Furthermore, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated when the AT termination condition is satisfied. Alternatively, although the AT ends, if the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, the number of games in the advantageous section is determined when the advantageous section is started, and a lottery or the like regarding the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous interval, the initial number of games in the advantageous interval is determined, and during the advantageous interval, it is decided (lottery, etc.) whether the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous interval should be added. Things are mentioned.
Furthermore, a predetermined termination condition is set for the advantageous section, and when the predetermined termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if the advantageous section has a remaining number of games (or AT's remaining number of games), at that time Ending the advantageous section with

Here, the "predetermined condition for ending the advantageous section" means that the difference counter value (described later) exceeds "2400 (D)" or the advantageous section clear counter (remaining number of games in the advantageous section) described later is " 0” has been reached. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In an advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is lit. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be always lit during the advantageous section, or may be illuminated when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" is, for example, when the instruction function is operated in a game state in which the area Sim is in an advantageous area and the area Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

In addition, the "interval Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even if the combination of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbols corresponding to the combination is stopped), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell, the highest payout is achieved). This is the payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. The calculation of the section Sim ball-out rate does not include the number of balls (number of payouts) due to the operation of the accessory (such as 1BB operation). In addition, in the game winning the replay, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in the replay based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game winning the replay), the number of bets It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for the game winning the replay and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the “game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds “1”” includes RT and the main game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is set to exceed “1”.
Here, RTs with a section Sim payout rate exceeding "1" include, for example, RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback section, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, AT can be mentioned as the main game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous interval ends, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is extinguished during, for example, a game end check process, which will be described later, or a game start setting process in the next game of the last game in the advantageous interval. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing by executing the processing for initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

The “process related to the advantageous section” includes, for example, the following processes.
1) Advantageous section (transfer) lottery 2) Advantageous section clear counter update (subtraction, clear)
3) Updating the difference counter (calculation, clearing)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Also, the “processing related to the instruction function” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (activation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games becomes "0"), updating the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), updating the AT difference number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)

According to the current rules, both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one prescribed number of times in one gaming state (RT), except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number "3" enables execution of the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. and
However, during the advantageous interval, it is necessary to update the advantageous interval clear counter and update the difference number counter regardless of the specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that such processing (advantageous section transition lottery) is not executed. However, this is not the only option, and the processing relating to the advantageous section may be executed even if the combination lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the combination lottery result is non-winning, if the non-winning probability is a predetermined value or more (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function Processing (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone), when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone is set from the next game. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and execute the notification of the correct pressing order (process related to the instruction function) in the game in which the advantageous zone is won.
However, it is permissible to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (process related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section and AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called "role ratio monitor" or "ratio indicator") 74 consists of, for example, four LEDs, and a two-digit identification segment (which one of the following five items is indicated). is displayed by a predetermined symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratio of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the role ratio (total), when the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the role ratio (total) is displayed in the identification segment and "50" is displayed. Show on ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of the numbers that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, the number of games is counted until it reaches at least "175000" games. When the total number of games is less than "175000", the ratio is displayed by, for example, blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the ratio is displayed by lighting display, for example. Even after the cumulative number of games reaches "175000" or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Also, "6000 games" is the total number of games for 15 sets of "400" games for one set.

The “advantageous section ratio” refers to the ratio (proportion) of staying in the advantageous section to the total game section (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the role is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, by the total number of payouts. In the case of a slot machine in which no role is installed, the "indicated role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum total of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated is counted by the instruction-inclusive role-thing counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function. "10" is added to the instructed accessory counter.
On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order from the displayed order and, for example, one bell wins, "1" is displayed in the instruction-containing accessory counter. is added.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an order different from the displayed order of pushes, and the winning combination is not obtained (when the combination is not won), the indicated role counter is displayed. is not added to In other words, the count value in the previous game remains unchanged.

When the common bell is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the push order bell is won, and the push order instruction information (dummy) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the instruction function is activated. and a case where it is not operated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts in the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct key pressing order by image or sound.

In addition, as special roles (accessories), BB (first-class role continuous operation device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special role; regular bonus), and MB (second-class role continuous Actuator; second type big bonus) can be mentioned.
Here, BB is a device capable of continuously operating RB. That is, the RB game is continuously executed during the BB game. Also, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of paid out medals during the RB game exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of medals to be paid out during the BB game exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game ends.

Also, MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (second class special role). That is, the CB game is continuously executed during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the result of the lottery by the lottery lottery means 61, all minor winnings are repeatedly won, and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the instant when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (maximum moving frame number is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game ends.

Also, when a special role is won, winning information of the special role is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role stops on the effective line.
A game in which the special role is not won is called "non-internal", and the special role is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role is not stopped on the effective line, that is, the special role is won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal".

Also, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line (BB wins), the BB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in the current game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased by continuously executing the RB game. Then, when the number of paid out medals during the BB game exceeds a predetermined number, the BB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the BB game.

Furthermore, if BB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to BB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of BB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line. A game state in which winning information of BB is carried over is called "inside BB".
It should be noted that the transition timing into the inside of the BB can be appropriately set. For example, in the game in which the BB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, it may be moved to the inside of the BB. You can move inside.

Also, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the effective line (RB wins), the RB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in the game this time. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Then, when the number of paid out medals during the RB game exceeds a predetermined number, the RB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the RB game.

Furthermore, if RB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to RB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of RB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to RB stops on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of RB is carried over is called "inside RB".
It should be noted that the transition timing into the inside of the RB can be appropriately set in the same manner as the timing of transition into the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the RB. You can move inside.

Also, when the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line (MB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the MB game is started from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. When the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the MB game.
Furthermore, when the MB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the effective line, the MB winning information is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside the MB".

“RT” means that the type (number) of the role to be selected by lottery and its winning probability are in a unique lottery state, and “RT transition” means transition from one RT to another RT By doing so, it means that the winning probability of at least one replay subject to lottery changes.
Therefore, the type of replay and its winning probability in one RT are values specific to that RT, and it is impossible that the replay type and its winning probability are all the same between one RT and another RT. do not have. However, there is no problem if one RT and another RT have the same total replay winning probability.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, when "RT" is referred to herein, it includes non-RT.

"Continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the first class special bonus (RB) to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts".
For example, when the total number of payouts for the number of games played is "6000" and the total number of payouts is "2000", and the number of payouts when the "first class special bonus (RB)" is activated is "500", the "continuous bonus Ratio (6000 games)” becomes “25 (%)”.

Further, the "accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory to the total number of payouts. Here, the "accessories" include, in addition to the above-mentioned first class special accessories, second-class special accessories (CB) and MB (also called 2BB). is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if the game machine does not have the function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "--".
For example, if "RB (first class special role)" is not provided, there is no continuous role ratio, so when ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is set to "-- ” lights up.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74, and a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, it is stipulated by regulation that the advantageous section ratio and the instructed accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Further, it is stated that the role product ratio should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the continuous role product ratio should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a game machine with a specification of 70% or less advantageous section ratio is called a "7U" type, and a game machine with a specification of 70% or less instruction-inclusive role ratio is called a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (total) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instructed accessory ratio (total) is displayed.
In the '7U' type, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section should be '70'% or less, but in the '7P' type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is The number of payouts may be 70% or less, and for example, the entire period or most of the game sections may be advantageous sections.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, set so that you win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and set so that you win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set so that the advantageous section lottery is won with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The "7U" type cannot refer to the setting value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type refers to the setting value itself and performs processing related to the instruction function. Is possible.

Also, the management information display LED 74 can be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment as in the case of the slot machine (rotary type game machine). Then, the real-time (during measurement) base value for every "60000" out balls (the "base value" indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls), and "60000 ”, the base values of 1, 2, and 3 times before are displayed in sequence. For example, the identification seg of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification seg of the previous base value is displayed as "b1." is displayed, and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines among game machines.

<First embodiment>
In the first embodiment, in a game in which a plurality of types of small winnings (bells) with different payout numbers are repeatedly won (a game in which a so-called "push order bell" is won), a prize is won depending on the operation mode (push order) of the stop switch 42. This is a slot machine in which the game result (the number of payouts) is advantageous/disadvantageous due to the difference in the types of small wins (combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line).
A first embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a game machine according to the first embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 .
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (not meant to include only those shown in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52 . The input port 51 is a connection portion for inputting a signal such as an operation switch, and the output port 52 is a connection portion for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as the motor 32 .
In FIG. 1, input peripherals are indicated by arrows from which signals from the peripherals are directed to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows from the main control board 50 to the peripherals. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data table) necessary for progressing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. , and payout at the time of winning.

Further, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55 and an MPU including registers are mounted. Note that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including the RWM 83, the ROM 84, and the sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is sent inside the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b) are provided in the medal selector (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
A medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is first detected by the path sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46 . The blocker 45 permits/disallows insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is allowed, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35 . The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that forms a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side by closing an opening (opening leading to a medal return opening) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the payout corresponding to the winning combination ends). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits insertion of medals at least when no game is played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided. The insertion sensor 44 is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. is configured to be detected by Then, based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on/off, it is determined whether or not the correct medals have been inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply "switch")" is based on the operation of the operation body by the player (operator) (receiving external force) to switch on / off of the electric signal. It refers to a device (including electric circuits and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (while the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the off state). When the player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body of the operation switch), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal is sent to the main control board 50 indicating that the operation switch is turned on. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the light is turned on. You may

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is a lever (bar) shape (therefore also referred to as "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bed switch 40, a stop switch 42, and an adjustment switch. The operation body 43 is in the shape of a push button (thus, it is also called "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43").

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, for example, an LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/non-permission state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that the operation is possible. shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to be stopped. After that, the rest of the stop switches 42 become operable when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 controlled to stop is terminated and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 is turned off. later. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. The LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not yet been operated, while still emitting red light, are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
A bet switch for betting two cards may be provided without being limited to this.

In addition, the specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the accessory is not activated/when the accessory is activated. Concretely, it is set such that when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when the 1BB is activated, there are 3 sheets, and when the 2BB is activated, there are 2 sheets. Two medals can be inserted by operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, and three medals can be inserted by operating it three times. Also, when the prescribed number is 3, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows 3 medals to be inserted at once, and when the prescribed number is 2, operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at a time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets is 3.

Also, the start switch 41 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle and right reels).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are to be stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals betted and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50 . In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this manner, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .

The display substrate 75 is mounted with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, upper digits and lower digits.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the player's winning number) when a winning combination is won, and is composed of upper and lower digits, similar to the credit number display LED 76. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be extinguished when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

Also, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying pressing order instruction information (notifying an advantageous pressing order) in a game that notifies the pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the pressing order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pressing order instruction information.
It should be noted that, during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80 .

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the pattern display device.
The symbol display device includes (three in this embodiment) reels 31 that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31 , and reel sensors 33 that detect the positions of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by reel control means 65, which will be described later.
Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. A stop switch 42 operated when stopping the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, and when stopping the middle reel 31, a stop switch 42 is operated. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 , and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42 .
The left reel 31 may be called the first reel 31 , the middle reel 31 may be called the second reel 31 , and the right reel 31 may be called the third reel 31 .

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of kinds of patterns (symbols forming a combination of patterns corresponding to a role) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31 .
Also, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33 . A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbols on the reference position at the instant when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 are stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the pattern on the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, by how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 is driven, the symbol counted from the symbol on the reference position can be stopped on the effective line. can be identified.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the paid out medals from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 .
The payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 consists of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. When the medals are paid out, the predetermined moving member is moved by the medals. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within the range of the predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, when it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are ON even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (stored bet), or inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (repair bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) performs a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and rotates all the reels 31. Control to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are moved up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

By pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, which will be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so that the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result determined by means).

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with the following winning lottery means 61 and the like. Each means below in this embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 lotteries (determines and selects) winning numbers. Here, the "lottery of the winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the regulations of the Entertainment Business Act (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines, model testing, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"), The result of the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device that becomes operable in the game, In addition, the accessory condition device is determined. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. winning number determination means for determining a winning number.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. continue to count.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs by collating the random number extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 . In this embodiment, a win flag is provided for each role for all the roles. Then, when any winning combination is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that combination is turned on (a winning flag is set). Note that the winning of a combination includes the case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and the case where there are multiple winning combinations (double winning).

The pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won). decision).
The "pressing order" of the pressing order instruction number selected here means a pressing order (correct pressing order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when the bell is won, it means the order of pushing the high bell (correct order of pushing). In addition, at the time of replay duplicate winning, it refers to a pushing order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a pushing order that does not fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique pushing order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during the AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-described acquisition number display LED 78 with the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically " =*” (“*”=1, 2, . . . ). Thus, the function of displaying push order indication information when a conditional device with an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an indication function.
Also, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined), the sub control board 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct key pressing order on the image display device 23 .

It should be noted that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Note that it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number in the normal section.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, which is the effect group number corresponding to the winning number.
Here, an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the selected effect group. The number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, unlike the pressing order instruction number.

Also, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number every game, it is possible to output the effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct pressing order based on the effect group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when winning the push order bell or push order replay, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Furthermore, after the win number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the win flag in the current game, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the win flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is operated Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is ON, the reel control means 65 validates a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is ON) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they can be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the winning flag is turned off) is not stopped on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed of about 80 times per minute.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving symbol number from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thus, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum moving symbol number from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 1 symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the pattern of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reels 31 are not stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number stops on the effective line, the reels 31 are stopped when the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so as not to stop the symbol combination of the combination that does not correspond to the winning number on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when the bell is won in the pressing order), the order of priority of the winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with a predetermined order of priority, the drawing-in stop control of the symbol associated with the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning judgment means 66 judges whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 stopped on the active line corresponds to any winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. Specifically, from the conditional device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination that stops on the effective line before the reel 31 actually stops is set in advance. Alternatively, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reels 31 are stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only when winning a winning number having a correct pressing order during AT). , effect group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, etc. of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to performance peripheral devices such as the following performance lamps 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program, various data, etc. for performing a lottery related to an effect as data for effect.

The effect lamps 21 are made up of LEDs, for example, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and are used to illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three patterns that are vertically continuous and visible from the display window) from behind. Fluorescent lamps that illuminate symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blink when winning a winning combination are included.

Also, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effects images during the game (correct pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices that operate in the game, etc.). , and game information (such as the number of games played during the operation of the accessory, the number of games won during the advantageous section (AT), the number of winnings, etc.).

In this embodiment, the "special role (accessory)" includes "1BB (first class continuous action device; first class big bonus)" and "RB (first first class special role; regular bonus)". Prepare. Therefore, the "special game" includes "1BB game" and "RB game".
Also, in this embodiment, "1BB" has two types, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B." Hereinafter, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B" are collectively referred to as "1BB".

During the 1BB game, the RB game is continuously executed.
In this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to RB is not set. Therefore, during the 1BB game, the RB game is continuously executed without stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RB.

Also, during the RB game, every game, a lottery by the role lottery means 61 wins "1-card role ALL" or "small role ALL". As a result, during the RB game, that is, during the 1BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is higher than during the non-internal and internal 1BB.
Furthermore, during the RB game, the specified number (the number of bets of medals that can start the game) becomes "3", and "1-card role ALL" is won with a probability of "60535/65536", and "1 ” medals are paid out. Therefore, during the RB game, that is, during the 1BB game, the player's medals decrease.
Furthermore, the RB game ends when the game is executed “2” times, when there is a win “2” times, or when the ending condition of the 1BB game is satisfied. In other words, the end condition of the RB game is set to that the game has been executed "2" times, that the game has been won "2" times, or that the end condition of the 1BB game has been satisfied.

In addition, the 1BB game continues until the total number of acquired medals (number of payouts, number of awards) exceeds "210", and ends when the total number of acquired medals exceeds "210". That is, the end condition of the 1BB game is set that the total number of acquired medals exceeds "210".
Then, when the RB game ends and the conditions for ending the 1BB game are not satisfied, the RB game is executed again. Thus, the RB game is continuously executed during the 1BB game.
Further, when the RB game ends, when the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied, the 1BB game ends and shifts to non-internal mode.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied during the RB game, the RB game is ended, the 1BB game is ended, and the game shifts to the non-internal state.

Also, the combination lottery means 61 determines the "winning number" by lottery. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". Furthermore, when a winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. Then, when a conditional device number is generated, the conditional device corresponding to the conditional device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the combination corresponding to the activated conditional device can be stopped and displayed on the active line (the winning combination is awarded).

In addition, the "condition device number" includes a "accessory condition device number" and a "small combination and replay condition device number".
Furthermore, the "accessory condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special role (accessory), and in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 described later, it has "1" to "2". .
Furthermore, "small win and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a small win or replay, and in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Prepare.

Also, when a special role is won, an accessory condition device corresponding to the winning of the special role becomes operable. For example, winning 1BB enables the 1BB conditional device.
Furthermore, when a minor winning combination is won, the minor winning combination condition device corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination becomes operable, and when winning the replay, the replay condition device corresponding to the winning of the replay becomes operable. For example, when a small winning combination A1 is won, the small winning combination A1 condition device becomes operable.

In addition, when winning a special role that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later, the special role is won until the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped and displayed on the active line (the special role is won). Carry over the information to the next game.
Furthermore, when a special combination is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line, it is called "internal". That is, the game that carries over the winning information of the special combination is called "internal".

On the other hand, a game that has not won a special role that can carry over the winning information to the next game or later is called "non-internal". That is, a game that does not carry over winning information for a special role is called "non-internal".
In this embodiment, the game in which the special role is won is included in "non-inside", but the game in which the special role is won may be included in "inside".
"1BB" is a special role in which the winning information can be carried over to the next game or later. called "medium".

In addition, "special game" is also referred to as "accessory actuation". For example, "1BB game" is also referred to as "1BB operation", and "RB game" is also referred to as "RB operation".
Furthermore, "when the role product is not activated" includes a state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the activated role condition device is not stopped and displayed on the active line even though the role product condition device has been activated.
For example, when the "1BB condition device" is not working, or when the "1BB condition device" is working, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the effective line, "1BB not working ”. That is, when "1BB" is not won, or when "1BB" is won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the active line (inside 1BB), "1BB not activated It is time.

Also, as described above, in the present embodiment, "1BB" includes two types of "1BB-A" and "1BB-B", and "accessory condition device" includes "1BB-A condition device" and It has two types of "1BB-B condition device".
Furthermore, the winning combination of "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A", and the winning combination of "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B".

In addition, the "1BB-A condition device" draws only when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2") in the non-internal medium, and when three medals are inserted (medal bet) When the number is "3"), the lottery is not performed. That is, in non-internal games, the "1BB-A condition device" is subject to the lottery when two medals are inserted, but is not subject to the lottery when three medals are inserted.
On the other hand, in the "1BB-B condition device", a lottery is held only when 3 medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3") in the non-internal medium, and when 2 medals are inserted (medal (when the number of bets is "2"), no lottery will be held. That is, in the non-internal game, the "1BB-B condition device" is subject to the lottery when three medals are inserted, but is not subject to the lottery when two medals are inserted.

Further, when the "1BB-A conditional device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (a prize can be won).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-A conditional device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line, "1BB-A wins", and no medals are paid out in this game, but next time. From the game, it shifts to "1BB-A game" (when 1BB-A is activated).
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stop-displayed on the active line when the "1BB-A conditional device" is activated, the next game is shifted to "inside 1BB-A".
Then, in "1BB-A inside", when two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (a prize can be won), but "1BB-A inside" When three medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be stop-displayed on the active line (a prize can be won).
Furthermore, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line, "1BB-B wins" and no medals are paid out in the game this time, but in the next game. From the game, it shifts to "1BB-B game" (when 1BB-B is activated).
On the other hand, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stop-displayed on the active line, the game moves to "inside 1BB-B" from the next game.
In "1BB-B inside", when three medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (a prize can be won), but "1BB-B inside". When two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line.

The "set value" relates to the degree of advantage of the player, and in this embodiment, there are six levels of settings 1 to 6 (not shown). The higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state (setting change mode) in which the set values can be changed is entered. At this time, initialization processing (RWM clear processing) for initializing a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed.
Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting value cannot be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the condition for starting the "advantageous section" is the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 in the non-advantageous section, and the winning number "1" (small combination A1 condition device) to the winning number "18" (replay condition device) is set to be elected (determined).
That is, in the non-advantageous section, if any of the winning number "1" (minor combination A1 condition device) to the winning number "18" (replay condition device) is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the transition to the advantageous section is made. .

In this embodiment, the conditions for ending the "advantageous section" are that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" and that the advantageous section clear counter (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section) reaches "0". It is set that the information game (AT) has ended.
That is, when the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds "2400", the number of games in the advantageous section reaches "1500", or the information game (AT) ends, the advantageous section ends and the non-advantageous section transition to

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning any of the winning number "1" (small winning combination A1 condition device) to winning number "18" (replay condition device) in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in the non-internal is "50536/65536".
Therefore, even if the advantageous section ends and moves to the non-advantageous section, after that, in the "1" game to "2" game, the winning number "1" (small hand A1 condition device) to the winning number "18" (replay If you win one of the condition devices), you will move to the advantageous section.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when winning (determined) any of the winning number "13" (small winning combination G condition device) to winning number "15" (small winning combination I condition device) in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 , an AT lottery is executed. "Minor G Condition Device" to "Minor I Condition Device" have a relatively low probability of being activated (winning), and are called "rare win" or "rare small win". . The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "small combination G condition device" to "small combination I condition device" is activated is set to "10"%.
Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won, the execution right of the information game is granted. Then, when the player has the right to execute the information game and the conditions for starting the information game are satisfied, the information game is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the initial value of the game number of the information game is set to "50" games. When the execution right of the information game is granted and the conditions for starting the information game are satisfied, the information game is executed over "50" games.
Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won in the case where the player already has the right to execute the information game, the number of rights to execute the information game is added (added). For example, when there are "2" information game execution rights, the information game can be executed over "(50 games + 50 games =) 100 games".

Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won during execution of the information game, the number of remaining games of the information game is added (added). For example, when winning the AT lottery when the number of remaining games of the information game is "20" games, the number of remaining games of the information game becomes "(20 games + 50 games =) 70 games".
In addition, the operation of the instruction function and the effect of suggesting the pressing order can be executed only in the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function and the effect of suggesting the pressing order cannot be executed in the non-advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the operation of the instruction function and the performance suggesting the pressing order are performed in the advantageous section.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, each reel 31 consists of "20" frames. That is, each reel 31 has the number of symbols "20".
Moreover, in FIG. 2, the pattern number is also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number "0" is "Blue 7".

Further, in this embodiment, the time from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reel 31 stops is set within "190" ms. As a result, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reels 31 are stopped becomes "4" symbols.
For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the "replay" number "1" of the left reel 31 passes through the active line, the symbol is moved up to "4" symbols from the relevant symbol, and "5" is reached. It is possible to stop on the effective line until the turn "Red 7".
Therefore, if "4" specific patterns are arranged at intervals of "5" patterns on one reel 31, the specific patterns can always be stopped on the effective line no matter when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Specifically, on the left reel 31, “Replay” is arranged at Nos. “1”, “6”, “11” and “16”. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with "5" symbol intervals of "4". Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated for the left reel 31, "replay" can always be stopped on the active line.
In this way, the symbol arrangement that can always stop the target symbol on the active line regardless of the timing at which the stop switch 42 is operated is called the "PB=1" arrangement.
On the other hand, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate timing (within the range of the maximum number of moving symbols from the effective line), the symbol arrangement in which the target symbol cannot be stopped on the effective line is "PB≠1". called.

On the left reel 31, in addition to "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" are also arranged at "PB=1".
Also, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" are arranged continuously (in order) at "4" locations. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively on numbers "1" to "3", and also on numbers "6" to "8". They are arranged consecutively, arranged consecutively in numbers "11" to "13", and arranged consecutively in numbers "16" to "18".

Further, on the left reel 31, "0" number "blue 7", "5" number "red 7", "10" number "black BAR", and "15" number "white BAR" "4" symbol combination is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, at any timing when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line. .

Similarly, on the left reel 31, "4", "9" and "14" "Cherry" and "19" "Blank" are "PB=1" in total of these "4" symbols. Placement. Therefore, "Cherry" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line at any timing when the left stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, on the left reel 31, "cherry/blank" is arranged on "watermelon", "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR" is arranged on "cherry/blank", and "blue 7" is arranged on "cherry/blank". /Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR' is placed above 'Replay'. That is, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are arranged between "Watermelon" and "Replay".
As a result, on the left reel 31, ``blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR'', ``replay'', ``bell'', ``watermelon'' and ``cherry/blank'' are continuously arranged at ``4'' positions ( sequentially). Specifically, on the left reel 31, “blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR”, “replay”, “bell”, “watermelon” and “cherry/blank” are assigned numbers “0” to “4”. ”, arranged consecutively in numbers “5” to “9”, arranged consecutively in numbers “10” to “14”, and arranged consecutively in numbers “15” to "19" are also arranged continuously.

In addition, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay" and "Watermelon" are arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay" and "Watermelon" are continuously arranged at "4" locations. Specifically, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay" and "Watermelon" are arranged in succession from "0" to "3", and "5" to "8". ”, ”10” to ”13”, and ”15” to ”18”.

Further, on the middle reel 31, the “blue 7” of number “4”, the “red 7” of number “9”, the “black BAR” of number “14”, and the “white BAR” of number “19” are "4" symbol combination is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, at any timing when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line. .

In the middle reel 31, "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR" is arranged between "watermelon" and "cherry" (above "watermelon" and below "cherry"). .
As a result, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", "Watermelon" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are continuously (in order) at "4" locations on the middle reel 31. are placed. Specifically, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry", "Bell", "Replay", "Watermelon" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are numbered "0" to "4". are placed continuously (in order) in numbers 5 to 9, 10 to 14 are also placed in succession, and 15 to . 19" is also arranged continuously.

Also, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" are arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" are arranged continuously (in order) at "4" locations. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) in the numbers "19", "0" to "2". , Numbers 4 to 7 are arranged consecutively, Numbers 9 to 12 are arranged consecutively, and Numbers 14 to 17 are arranged consecutively. It is

Further, on the right reel 31, "3" "blue 7", "8" "red 7", "13" "black BAR", and "18" "white BAR" "4" symbol combination is "PB=1" arrangement. Therefore, no matter what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped on the effective line. .

Also, on the right reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is arranged between "Cherry" and "Replay" (above "Cherry" and below "Replay"). .
As a result, on the right reel 31, "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry" and "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR" are continuously (in order) at "4" locations. are placed. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry" and "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR" are assigned numbers "19" and "0". ~ are arranged consecutively (in order) in numbers "3", arranged consecutively in numbers "4" through "8", arranged consecutively in numbers "9" through "13", and " 14” to “18” are also arranged continuously.

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the display window 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and effective lines (display lines for displaying symbol combinations).
A reel 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18 .
In this embodiment, "3" reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that "3" consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18. - 特許庁
As a result, when each reel 31 is stopped, the consecutive "3" symbols of each reel 31 appear to be stopped and displayed in the upper, middle and lower stages of the display window 18, respectively. Therefore, when all the reels 31 are stopped, a total of "9" symbols (frames) can be seen from the display window 18. - 特許庁
In addition, in FIG. 3(A), the number at the lower right of each pattern indicates the pattern number.

FIG. 3(B) shows designations of symbol positions in this embodiment.
The positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when each reel 31 is stopped are called "upper stage", "middle stage", and "lower stage" in order from the top. Furthermore, the positions of the "3" symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the left reel 31 is stopped are called "upper left", "left middle", and "left lower" in order from the top. Similarly, the positions of the “3” symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the middle reel 31 is stopped are called “middle upper row”, “middle middle row”, and “middle lower row” in order from the top. The positions of the "3" symbols to be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of stop are called "upper right row", "right middle row", and "lower right row" in order from the top.

Also, as shown in FIG. 3(A), effective lines are set for "9" symbols visible from the display window 18 .
Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reels 31 are stopped, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a symbol combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations is a symbol combination line. This is the line where the player wins the prize when the player stops on that line.
Furthermore, an "invalid line" is a symbol combination line which is not set as an active line, and which is not subject to establishment of a symbol combination.
The valid line in this embodiment is a straight line passing through "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle", as shown in FIG. "Middle Line" only, and other lines are invalid lines.

For example, a straight "upper line" passing through "upper left" - "middle upper" - "upper right", a straight "lower line" passing through "lower left" - "middle lower" - "lower right", A straight "downward right line" passing through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right", a straight "upward right line" passing through "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right", A small chevron-shaped "small mountain line" passing through "lower left" - "middle middle" - "lower right", a small V-shaped "small V line" passing through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "upper right", In the present embodiment, all of the “curved lines” passing through the “upper left”-“middle middle”-“right middle” are invalid lines.

A valid line and an invalid line are collectively called a "symbol combination line".
The position and number of activated lines may be changed for each gaming state or the number of bets. For example, in a specific gaming state, the downward-sloping line may be the active line. Also, for a specific number of bets, a plurality of active lines ("5" lines, ie, an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward-sloping line, and a downward-sloping line) may be used.

FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are diagrams showing the types of combinations (such as combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the combination lottery means 61), symbol combinations, the number of payouts, and the like in this embodiment.
The roles are roughly divided into special roles, replays (replay roles), and minor roles.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts at the time of winning, etc. are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped and the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the combinations stops on the activated line (the winning combination is won), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out (dividend (profit) is awarded). ).
However, the payout number at the time of winning the special combination is set to "0". Also, in the replay, medals are automatically inserted, and a replay can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game states of the present embodiment are non-internal, 1BB internal (1BB-A internal, 1BB-B internal), and 1BB game in progress (1BB-A in game). , 1BB-B in game). Also, during non-inside, lottery is available when 2 medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2") and when 3 medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"). is different.
In FIGS. 4 and 5, "two" indicates "when two medals are inserted", and "three" indicates "when three medals are inserted". In addition, "inside" means "inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A and inside 1BB-B)", and "inside 1BB" means "during 1BB play (during 1BB-A play and 1BB- B during game)” is shown.

The winning combination numbers “1” to “82” shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 correspond to minor winning combinations. In the present embodiment, there are "82" types of small wins from "small win 01" to "small win 82".
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, "small win 01" to "small win 82" are played when two non-internal medals are inserted, when three non-internal medals are inserted, during 1BB internal and 1BB games. Any one of them is subject to a lottery, and the corresponding symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (winning) on the active line.

Also, as shown in FIG. 4, "small win 01" to "small win 06" are when two medals are inserted in non-internal mode, when three medals are in non-internal mode, during 1BB internal mode, and during 1BB game. , the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) at the time of winning is set to "10".
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, "small win 07" to "small win 78" are when two non-internal medals are inserted, when three non-internal medals are inserted, during 1BB internal, In both the 1BB game and the 1BB game, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) at the time of winning is set to "1".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, "minor win 79" to "minor win 82" are when two medals are inserted in non-internal mode, when three medals are in non-internal mode, during 1BB internal mode, and during 1BB game. 3, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be given) at the time of winning is set to "3".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 01" is only one combination number "1", and the symbols on the respective reels 31 are arranged "PB=1". That is, in the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 01", the symbols on all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the symbols are always stopped on the effective line). displayable) symbol combination.
Further, as shown in FIG. 19(1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 01" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (effective line) (when the "small winning combination 01" is won), , ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``lower right line'' (invalid line) passing through ``upper left row'', ``middle middle row'', and ``lower right row''.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 02" is only one combination number "2", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 03" is only one combination number "3". Further, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 04" is only one kind of "4", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 05" is only one kind of combination number "5". Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 06" is only one kind of winning combination number "6".
Furthermore, in the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 02" to "small winning combination 06", the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged in the same manner as the "small winning combination 01", respectively, of "PB=1". That is, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 02" to "small winning combination 06" are arranged such that all "three" symbols on reels 31 are arranged at "PB=1", similar to "small winning combination 01". It is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 02" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (effective line) (when the "small combination 02" is won), , ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' are stopped and displayed on the ``upper line'' (invalid line) passing through ``upper left row'' - ``middle upper row'' - ``upper right row''.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19(3), which will be described later, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 03" is "bell"-"bell"-"bell", and when the "small winning combination 03" wins, "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (effective line).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 04" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (effective line) (when the "small combination 04" is won), , ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``Right rising line'' (invalid line) passing through ``Lower left row'', ``Middle middle row'', and ``Upper right row''.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20(2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 05" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (effective line) (when the "small winning combination 05" is won), , ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``Mountain line'' (invalid line) passing through ``Lower left row'', ``Middle middle row'', and ``Lower right row''.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(3), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 06" is stopped and displayed on the "middle line" (effective line) (when the "small winning combination 06" is won), , ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``lower line'' (invalid line) passing through ``lower left row'', ``middle lower row'', and ``lower right row''.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 07" is only one kind of winning combination number "7", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are respectively arranged "PB=1", but the middle reel 31 The pattern of is arranged "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 07" has the symbols of the "2" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the right reel 31) arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement (operation timing of the stop switch 42 is The symbols on the other "1" reels 31 (middle reels 31) are "PB ≠ 1" (the operation of the stop switch 42 is It is a symbol combination consisting of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the active line according to the timing and when not stopped.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 08" is only one combination of the win number "8", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 09" is only one combination of the win number "9". The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "10" is only one kind of winning combination number "10".
Further, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 08" to "small winning combination 10" are all arranged such that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged at "PB=1", similarly to the "small winning combination 07". However, the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged "PB≠1".
That is, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 08" to "small winning combination 10" are the symbols of "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31), similar to "small winning combination 07". is a symbol combination in which the symbols are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 (middle reels 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 11" is only one kind of winning combination number "11", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are respectively arranged "PB=1", but the right reel 31 The pattern of is arranged "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 11" consists of symbols in which the symbols of the "2" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and other symbols. It is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement for “1” reels 31 (right reels 31).

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 12" is only one combination of the win number "12", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 13" is only one combination of the win number "13". The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "14" is only one combination of the winning combination number "14".
In addition, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 12" to "small winning combination 14" are all arranged such that the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged at "PB=1", similarly to the "small winning combination 11". However, the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged "PB≠1".
That is, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 12" to "small winning combination 14" are the symbols of "2" reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31), similarly to the "small winning combination 11". is a symbol combination in which "PB=1" is arranged and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (right reel 31) are in "PB≠1" arrangement. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 15" is only one kind of winning combination number "15". The pattern of is arranged "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 15" consists of symbols in which the symbols of the "2" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and other symbols. It is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement for "1" reels 31 (left reel 31).

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 16" is only one combination of the win number "16", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 17" is only one combination of the win number "17". The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "18" is only one kind of combination number "18".
Further, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 16" to "small winning combination 18" are all arranged such that the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged at "PB=1", similarly to the "small winning combination 15". However, the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged "PB≠1".
That is, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 16" to "small winning combination 18" are the symbols of "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31), similar to "small winning combination 15". is a symbol combination of "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols of the other "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are of "PB≠1" arrangement. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 19" is only one combination number "11", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 20" is only one combination number "20". Further, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 21" is only one combination number "21", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 22" is only one combination number "22".
The symbol combinations corresponding to “small win 19” to “small win 22” are all similar to “small win 11” to “small win 14”, and the symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 are respectively “PB= 1” arrangement, but the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement.
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 19" to "small win 22" are all "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and The symbols on the middle reel 31) consist of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 (right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 23" is only one combination number "23", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 24" is only one combination number "24". Further, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 25" is only one combination number "25", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 26" is only one combination number "26".
The symbol combinations corresponding to “small win 23” to “small win 26” are all similar to “small win 15” to “small win 18”, and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are respectively “PB= 1” arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement.
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 23" to "small winning combination 26" are all similar to "small winning combination 15" to "small winning combination 18", and "2" reels 31 (middle reel 31 The symbols on the right reel 31) consist of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 27" is only one combination number "27", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 28" is only one combination number "28". Further, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 29" is only one combination number "29", and the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 30" is only one combination number "30".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 27" to "small winning combination 30" are all similar to "small winning combination 07" to "small winning combination 10", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are respectively "PB= 1” arrangement, but the symbols on the middle reel 31 are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement.
That is, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 27" to "small winning combination 30" are all similar to "small winning combination 07" to "small winning combination 10", "2" reels 31 (left reel 31 and The symbols on the right reel 31) consist of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 (middle reel 31) are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 31" is only one combination number "31", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 are "PB=1". The patterns are arranged "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" consists of "1" reels 31 (middle reels 31) of which the symbols are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols. The symbols on the reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 32" to "small winning combination 46" are only one kind each of the winning combination numbers "32" to "46".
In addition, in the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 32" to "small winning combination 46", the symbols on the middle reel 31 are "PB=1" as in the case of the "small winning combination 31". The symbols of the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are respectively arranged "PB≠1".
That is, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 32" to "small winning combination 46" are similar to the "small winning combination 31", and the symbols on the "1" reels 31 (middle reels 31) are "PB= 1” arrangement and the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 47" is only one kind of winning combination number "47", and the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged at "PB=1". The symbols are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 47" consists of "1" reel 31 (right reel 31) symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols. The symbols on the reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are arranged such that "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 48" to "small winning combination 62" are only one kind each of the winning combination numbers "48" to "62".
In addition, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 48" to "small winning combination 62" are arranged such that the symbols on the right reel 31 are "PB=1", similar to "small winning combination 47". The symbols of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are respectively arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
That is, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 48" to "small winning combination 62" are similar to the "small winning combination 47", and the symbols on the "1" reel 31 (right reel 31) are "PB= 1” arrangement and the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31) are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the "minor winning combination 63" is only one kind of winning combination number "63", and the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged at "PB=1". The patterns are arranged "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 63" consists of symbols in which the symbols on the "1" reel 31 (left reel 31) are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols. The symbols on the reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1".

The symbol combinations corresponding to the “minor win 64” to “minor win 78” are only one type each of the win numbers “64” to “78”.
In addition, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the "minor win 64" to "minor win 78" have the symbol "PB=1" on the left reel 31, like the "minor win 63". The symbols of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are respectively arranged "PB≠1".
That is, all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the “small winning combination 64” to “small winning combination 78” are similar to the “small winning combination 63”, and the symbols on the “1” reel 31 (left reel 31) are “PB= 1” arrangement and the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement. .

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 79" is only one kind of combination number "79", and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are respectively arranged "PB=1", but the left reel 31 The pattern of is arranged "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 79" consists of symbols in which the symbols of the "2" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and other symbols. It is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement for “1” reels 31 (left reel 31).
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small combination 79" is stopped on the effective line (middle line) (when "small combination 79" is won), "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right""CHERRY" - "CHERRY" - "CHERRY" is stopped and displayed on the "right rising line" (invalid line) passing through ".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 80" is only one kind of combination number "80", and the symbols of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are respectively arranged "PB=1", similar to the "small winning combination 79". However, the symbols on the left reel 31 are arranged "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 80" has the symbols of "2" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) arranged at "PB=1" in the same way as the "small winning combination 79". The symbol combination is composed of symbols on the other “1” reel 31 (left reel 31) arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 80" is stopped and displayed on the active line (middle line) (when the "minor win 80" is won), the "lower left row" is displayed in the same way as the "minor win 79". - "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" are stopped and displayed on the "right rising line" (invalid line) passing through the "middle middle row" - "upper right row".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 81" is only one combination number "81". The pattern of is arranged "PB≠1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 81" consists of symbols in which the symbols of the "2" reels 31 (the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31) are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and other symbols. It is a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a “PB≠1” arrangement for “1” reels 31 (left reel 31).
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 81" is "cherry" - "cherry" - "cherry", and when the "small winning combination 81" is won, "cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" stops displaying.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 82" is only one combination number "82", and the symbols on the respective reels 31 are arranged "PB=1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 82" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement.
Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 82" is "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon", and when the "small winning combination 82" is won, "watermelon"-- "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" stops displaying.

The symbol combination corresponding to the "replay" is only one kind of combination number "83", and the symbols on each reel 31 are arranged "PB=1".
That is, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are in the "PB=1" arrangement.
Also, the symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay", and when "Replay" wins, "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" stops displaying.

As shown in FIG. 5, "Replay" is a lottery target when two medals are inserted in non-internal medium, when three medals are inserted in non-internal medium, and in 1BB internal, and the corresponding symbol combination is on the effective line. Although it is possible to stop display (win a prize), it is not subject to a lottery during the 1BB game, and therefore the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped displayed (win a prize) on the active line.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is stopped and displayed (winning), medals are automatically inserted and a replay can be executed.

The combination numbers "84" and "85" shown in FIG. 5 correspond to special awards (accessories). In this embodiment, there are two types of special roles, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B".
As shown in FIG. 5, "1BB-A" is subject to the lottery only when two medals are inserted in the non-internal middle, and is not subject to the lottery when three medals are inserted. On the other hand, "1BB-B" is a lottery target only when three medals are inserted, and is not subject to a lottery when two medals are inserted.

Also, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is only one combination number "84", and the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1", but the left reel 31 and the middle reel are arranged. Each of the 31 symbols is arranged "PB≠1".
As described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-A conditional device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A conditional device" is operated, the winning combination of "1BB The symbol combination corresponding to "-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (a prize can be won).

When the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-A'' is stopped and displayed on the active line when the ``1BB-A conditional device'' is activated, ``1BB-A won'' is displayed, and no medals are paid out in the game this time, but in the next game. Shift from game to "1BB-A game".
On the other hand, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stop-displayed on the active line, the game moves to "inside 1BB-A" from the next game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when two medals are inserted in the non-inside, the "1BB-A condition device" can be operated independently (single winning), and in the game in which the "1BB-A condition device" operates alone, " The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in the game in which the "1BB-A conditional device" operates alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped on the active line. If it is not displayed, the game shifts to "inside 1BB-A" from the next game.
In addition, when two medals of "inside 1BB-A" are inserted and the combination lottery means 61 does not win, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment. Since there is no possibility of non-winning in the role lottery means 61 during ``inside 1BB-A'', once the game shifts to ``inside 1BB-A'', thereafter the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-A'' is an effective line. never appear to stop.

In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is only one combination number "85", and the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged "PB=1" as in "1BB-A". However, the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.
As described above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the winning combination of "1BB The symbol combination corresponding to "-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line (a prize can be won).

When the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-B'' is stopped and displayed on the active line when the ``1BB-B condition device'' is activated, ``1BB-B wins'' and no medals are paid out in the game this time, but in the next game. Shift from game to "1BB-B game".
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stop-displayed on the active line when the "1BB-B conditional device" is activated, the next game is shifted to "inside 1BB-B".

In addition, in this embodiment, when three medals are inserted in the non-inside, the "1BB-B condition device" can be operated independently (single winning), and in the game in which the "1BB-B condition device" is operated alone, " The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in the game in which the "1BB-B conditional device" operates alone, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped on the active line. If it is not displayed, the game shifts to "inside 1BB-B" from the next game.
In addition, when three medals of "1BB-B inside" are inserted, if the combination lottery means 61 does not win, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment. Since there is no non-winning in the combination lottery means 61 during ``inside 1BB-B'', once it shifts to ``inside 1BB-B'', after that the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-B'' is the valid line. never appear to stop.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning role is not stop-displayed on the active line in the game in which the role is won, the role to be carried over from the next game onwards and the role not to be carried over are determined. .
The hand carried over is 1BB (“1BB-A” and “1BB-B”) in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is all set to "PB≠1", so even if 1BB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB will not stop displayed on the activated line (1BB is may not win). When 1BB is won, the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game and thereafter until 1BB is won.

On the other hand, when a small winning combination or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in the game in which the winning combination is won, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line. Regardless of whether the winning combination is stopped or not, the right to the winning combination will be extinguished at the end of the game.

6 to 9 are diagrams showing the condition device in this embodiment.
6 to 8 show a small win and replay condition device in this embodiment.
6 and 7, "push order 123" indicates the push order of "left center right", and "push order 132" indicates the push order of "left right center". Further, the "push order 213" indicates the push order of "middle left and right", and the "push order 231" indicates the push order of "middle right left". Furthermore, the "push order 312" indicates the push order of "right, left, middle", and the "push order 321" indicates the push order of "right, middle, left".

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the small winning combination condition device corresponds to the small winning combination and replay condition device number "17" from the "small winning combination A1 condition device" corresponding to the small winning combination and replay condition device number "1". It has 17 types up to "small win ALL condition device".
In addition, "small win A1 condition device" to "small win I condition device" are subject to lottery when 2 medals are inserted in non-internal, when 3 medals are inserted in non-internal, and during 1BB internal ( A lottery is performed), but it is not subject to lottery during 1BB game (lottery is not performed).

Furthermore, the "single hand ALL condition device" is subject to lottery when two medals are inserted during non-internal, when three medals are inserted during non-internal, during 1BB internal, and during 1BB game ( lottery will be held).
In addition, the "small win ALL condition device" is not subject to lottery (lottery is not performed) when 2 medals are inserted during non-internal, when 3 medals are inserted during non-internal, and during 1BB internal. A lottery is applied only during 1BB game (a lottery is performed).

Here, the following method can be used as the stop control of the reels 31 when multiple types of small wins with different payout numbers of medals are won.
As a first priority, when all the symbols (of the relevant reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.
Next, when it is not possible to stop and display all the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the active line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), as the second priority, "number of sheets priority" or The reel 31 is controlled to be stopped by one of the "number priority".

In addition, "preferred number of medals" means that the symbol of the reel 31 constituting the symbol combination with the largest number of medals to be paid out among the symbol combinations of multiple winning combinations is preferentially stopped and displayed on the active line (pulled in). ).
On the other hand, "quantity priority" means that the symbol of the relevant reel 31 is preferentially stopped and displayed on the activated line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is maximized.

In this embodiment, when the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are activated, multiple types of minor wins (bells) with different payout numbers of medals are repeatedly won (so-called "push order bell") state).
When the pressing order bell is won, the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number of balls when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number when the pressing order is incorrect.
As a result, when the bell is won by pressing the bell, the type of winning small combination (combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective line) differs depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42, thereby affecting the game result (the number of medals to be paid out). There will be advantages/disadvantages.

The "minor combination A1 condition device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column in FIG.
When the winning number "1" is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, a small winning combination and replay condition device number "1" are generated from this winning number "1". Then, the "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to the small win and replay condition device number "1" is activated.
Also, when the "minor combination A1 condition device" is activated, a state is entered in which 7 types of minor combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 6 are repeatedly won.

Furthermore, when the "small combination A1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, center, right (123)" when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the number priority is given to "1/1" (always) with a probability of " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 01" (10 coins paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the left first stop, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is given priority to the left middle row. When the middle second stop, "Bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row, and when the right third stop, "Watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed. A stop display is displayed in the right middle row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the "small win A1 condition device" is achieved by giving priority to the number of reels. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small win 01' to pay out '10', which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out, is stop-displayed on the effective line.
As shown in FIG. 19(1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is stopped and displayed on the active line, "Bell"-"Bell"- "Bell" pauses.

Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row (effective line).
As a result, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row.
That is, at the first stop on the left when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR", "replay" and "bell" of the left reel 31 are stopped within the display window 18. display.

In addition, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 01" is one type of "replay", and the pattern of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 01" is one type of "bell". The pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination 01" is one kind of "watermelon".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols of each reel 31 to constitute the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, to be stop-displayed, the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line at times.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left and right (132)", the number priority is given to "small win 07" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 08" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 to be described later, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row at the first left stop. After that, at the second stop on the right, the "Bell" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row in order to win either the "small winning combination 07" or the "small winning combination 08" based on the number priority. stop display. After that, at the middle and third stop, "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle stage.

As shown in FIG. 2, since "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is arranged only at "4", any symbol from "0" to "4" on the middle reel 31 is on the effective line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , "Blue 7" of the middle reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4".

Similarly, since "red 7" on the middle reel 31 is arranged only on the number "9", any symbol of the numbers "5" to "9" on the middle reel 31 is positioned on the activated line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is on, the "red 7" of the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that the "red 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle middle stage is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "blue 7" or "red 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "small win 07" or "small win 08" The probability of being able to stop and display the combination of symbols on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, "small winning combination 01" (10 payouts) is given priority to the number of reels. Pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Displayable.

Further, when the pressing order is correct at the left first stop, but the pressing order is incorrect at the right second stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) of the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 01". , and the "bell" symbol of "PB=1" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
As a result, the "Bell" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being stop-displayed on the activated line, so that the "Small Win 01" wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 07" and "small win 08" is one type of "replay", and the "small win 07" and "small win 08" are shown. The pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the is one type of "bell".
In this way, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left and right (213)", due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8""small win 31" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 32" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle and middle stages due to the number priority at the time of the middle first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, "Red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and at the third stop on the right, "Red 7" on the right reel 31 or ""Blue7" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is arranged only on the number "5", any symbol of the numbers "1" to "5" on the left reel 31 is on the effective line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , "red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

In addition, since "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "8", one of the symbols of numbers "4" to "8" on the right reel 31 is positioned on the activated line. Unless the right stop switch 42 is operated, the "red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle right line). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "3", any symbol of the number "19" or "0" to "3" on the right reel 31 is an effective line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated while positioned above, "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row. Since the probability that it can be displayed is ``1/2'', the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to ``small winning 31'' or ``small winning 32'' can be stopped and displayed on the active line is ``1/8''. .

Thus, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" (10 payout) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small winning combination 31' or a 'small winning combination 32' (1 coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the middle first stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 01" and the symbol of "PB=1" of the middle reel 31. "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, the ``watermelon'' on the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the ``bell'' on the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being stop-displayed on the activated line, so that the ``small win 01'' wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 31" and the "small win 32" is one kind of "red 7", and the "small win 31" and the "small win 32". ' is one kind of pattern of 'watermelon'.
In this way, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right and left (231)" when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" Similarly, due to the number priority, the reels are stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 31" or "small winning combination 32" (both are paid out one sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8". 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "right, left, middle (312)", by number priority, with a probability of "1/8", "small win 53" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 54" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the "cherry" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is placed in the right middle stage due to the number priority at the time of the right first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, the "white BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left, and at the third stop on the middle reel 31, the "black BAR" or " "White BAR" (all "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since the "white bar" on the left reel 31 is arranged only on the number "15", any symbol of the numbers "11" to "15" on the left reel 31 is on the effective line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
In addition, since the "black bar" of the middle reel 31 is arranged only at the number "14", any one of the symbols of the numbers "10" to "14" of the middle reel 31 is positioned on the activated line. Unless the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that the "black BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 is arranged only at the number "19", any of the symbols of numbers "15" to "19" of the middle reel 31 is positioned on the effective line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated when the reel 31 is on, the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. Since the probability that it can be displayed is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" or "small win 54" can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is "1/8". .

Thus, when the right reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" (10 payout) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A combination of symbols corresponding to a 'small winning combination 53' or a 'small winning combination 54' (one coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stop-displayed on the effective line.

Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the right first stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 01" and the symbol "PB=1" on the right reel 31. is stopped on the active line.
As a result, the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so that the "Small Win 01" wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 53" and "small win 54" is one type of "white BAR", and the "small win 53" and "small win 54" are shown. ' is one kind of pattern of 'Cherry'.
In this way, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

Even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)" when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 53" or "small winning combination 54" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated are "small win 01", "small win 07", "small win 08", and "small win 08". These are symbol combinations corresponding to "31st win", "32nd win", "53rd win", or "54th win".
Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 07" and "small winning combination 08" are composed of symbols in which the symbols on the "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and another "1 winning combination". " symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1".
Further, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 31", "small winning combination 32", "small winning combination 53" and "small winning combination 54" are arranged such that the symbols of "1" reels 31 are "PB=1". , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, "1" of the symbols on the reels 31 are composed of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, In addition, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “4”. Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (one) consisting of symbols in which the symbols on all the “3” reels 31 are arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the “2” reels 31 are arranged at “PB=1”. , and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 are larger than the number of symbol combinations (two) consisting of symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Further, when the "small win A1 condition device" is actuated and the pushing order is correct, when all the "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line. .
Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is correct, but if the second stop is incorrect, "PB = 1" is arranged at the first stop and the second stop. In the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is stopped and displayed on the effective line at the first stop, and at the second stop And at the time of the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

In addition, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (left middle row), and when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row) at the first stop of the middle reel 31, and ""Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (right middle row).
For this reason, when the "small win A1 condition device" of "inside 1BB-A" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stopped on the active line, and "inside 1BB-B"" The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-A'' is ``blank''-``red 7''-``replay'', and ``inside 1BB-A'' of ``small win A1 condition device''. It is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of the reels 31 with priority given to the number at the time of operation.
For example, since the symbol on the middle reel 31 of ``1BB-A'' is ``red 7,'' among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the ``small win A1 conditional device'' of ``1BB-A internal middle'' is activated, the middle The number of symbol combinations in which the symbol of the reel 31 is "Red 7" is "2". Therefore, since the number of symbols on the middle reel 31 is the same as the number of symbol combinations of "watermelon", the first stop (push When the order is wrong), the "watermelon" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the activated line by giving priority to the number.

Also, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "blank", which is a symbol that is not used in the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 conditional device" is activated. Therefore, the symbol on the left reel 31 of ``1BB-A'' does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority given to the number when the ``small win A1 condition device'' of ``inside 1BB-A'' is activated.
Similarly, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "replay", which is a symbol that is not used in the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 conditional device" is activated. Therefore, the symbol on the right reel 31 of ``1BB-A'' does not affect the stop control of the reel 31 with priority given to the number when the ``small win A1 condition device'' of ``inside 1BB-A'' is activated.

As for the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B", like the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A", reels with number priority when "small win A1 condition device" in "1BB-B inside" is activated It is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of 31.
In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is the stop control of the reel 31 with number priority when "small combination A2 condition device" to "small combination F2 condition device" of "inside 1BB-A" is activated. It is a symbol combination that does not affect.
Similarly, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is the stop control of the reel 31 with the number priority when the "small combination A2 condition device" to "small combination F2 condition device" of "inside 1BB-B" is activated. It is a symbol combination that does not affect the

In this embodiment, two types of "1BB-A" and "1BB-B" are provided as "1BB". Then, when two medals are inserted, a lottery for "1BB-A" is carried out, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed. Also, when three medals are inserted, a lottery for "1BB-B" is carried out, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed.
However, it is not limited to this, and "1BB" may be one type, and the number of inserted medals may always be "3". In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is a symbol that does not affect the stop control of the reels 31 with the number priority when the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" of "inside 1BB" is activated. A combination is preferred.

The "minor combination A2 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 6, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, just like when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "left center right (123)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order. becomes.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "1/1" probability (always) "small win The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "01" (10 coins paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left and right (132)", the number priority is given to "small win 09" or "small win 09" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 10" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left and right (213)", the number priority is given to "small win 33" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 34" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right, left (231)" when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left, right (213)" Similarly, due to the number priority, the reels are stopped and displayed on the active line with the probability of "1/8" that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 33" or "small winning combination 34" (both are paid out one card) 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of "right, left, middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 49" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 50" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
Even when the stop switch 42 was operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)" when the "small win A2 condition device" was activated, the stop switch 42 was operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)." In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 49" or "small winning combination 50" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

"Small win A2 condition device" replaces "small win 07" and "small win 08" of "small win A1 condition device" with "small win 09" and "small win 10", "small win A1 condition device"',"Small combination 31" and "Small combination 32" are replaced with "Small combination 33" and "Small combination 34", and "Small combination 53" and "Small combination 54" of "Small combination A1 condition device" are replaced with It is replaced with "small win 49" and "small win 50".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

The "minor combination B1 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 6, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "right and left center (132)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left and right middle (132)" when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the number priority is given to "small win 02" with a probability of "1/1" (always). (payout of 10), the reels 31 are stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 to be described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, at the time of left first stop, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is given priority to the left middle row. , and at the second stop on the right, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped at the middle right, and at the third stop on the middle, "Cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed. A stop display is displayed in the middle middle row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Thus, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, the "small win B1 condition device" corresponds to the "small win B1 condition device" with the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small win 02' to pay out '10', which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out, is stop-displayed on the effective line.
As shown in FIG. 19(2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" is stopped on the active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-" bell” stops.

Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row (effective line).
As a result, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, "blue 7", "red 7", "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, "blue 7/red 7/black BAR/white BAR", "replay" and "bell" of the left reel 31 are stopped within the display window 18. display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the pattern on the left reel 31 forming the "small win 02" is one type of "Replay", and the pattern on the middle reel 31 forming the "small win 02" is "Cherry". , and the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 02" is one type of "Replay".
In this way, by setting the types of symbols of each reel 31 to constitute the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated to be stopped when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the "small win B1 condition device" is activated. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line at times.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small win 11" or "small win 11" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 12" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row at the first left stop. After that, at the middle second stop, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle middle stage in order to make it possible to win either the "small winning combination 11" or the "small winning combination 12" according to the number priority. stop display. After that, at the right third stop, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the right reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "13", any symbol of the numbers "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is on the effective line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , the "black BAR" of the right reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle right line). Therefore, the probability that the "black bar" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "18", any symbol of the numbers "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on the activated line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is on the reel, the "white bar" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle right line). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "small win 11" or "small win 12". The probability of being able to stop and display the combination of symbols on the active line is "1/2".

Thus, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 02" (10 payouts) is given priority to the number. Pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line. Displayable.

Further, when the pressing order is correct at the left first stop, but the pressing order is incorrect at the middle second stop, the symbol (cherry) of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 02" is different from the symbol (cherry). In addition, the "bell" symbol of "PB=1" on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, the "Bell" of the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "Cherry" of the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being stop-displayed on the active line, so that the "Small Win 02" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 11" and "small win 12" is one type of "replay", and "small win 11" and "small win 12" are shown. The pattern of the middle reel 31 constituting the is one type of "bell".
In this way, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)", the number priority is "1/8" with a probability of "small win 35" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 36" (one coin is paid out in each case) is stop-displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle and middle stages due to the number priority at the time of the middle first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left, and at the third stop on the right, "black BAR" on the right reel 31 or " "White BAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the right middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is arranged only on the number "10", any symbol of the number "6" to "10" on the left reel 31 is on the effective line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "black bar" on the left reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

In addition, since the "black bar" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "13", any one of the symbols of the numbers "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is positioned on the activated line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated, the "black bar" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle right line). Therefore, the probability that the "black bar" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "18", any of the symbols of the numbers "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 are positioned on the effective line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is on the reel, the "white bar" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle right line). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row. Since the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 35" or "minor win 36" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 02" (10 payout) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small winning combination 35' or a 'small winning combination 36' (1 coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the middle first stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (cherry) of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 02" and the symbol of "PB=1" of the middle reel 31. "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "cherry" on the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so that the "small winning combination 02" is won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 35" and the "small winning combination 36" is one type of "black BAR", and the "small winning combination 35" and the "small winning combination 36". ' is one kind of pattern of 'watermelon'.
In this way, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right, left (231)" when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left, right (213)" Similarly, due to the number priority, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 35" or "small winning combination 36" (both are paid out one sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8". 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of "right, left, middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 47" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 48" (one coin is paid out in each case) is stop-displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 to be described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the right first stop, the "cherry" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is placed in the right middle stage due to the number priority. , and at the second stop on the left, "Red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed at the middle left row, and at the third stop on the middle reel 31, "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 or " "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As described above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
Further, the probability that "Red 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the probability that "Blue 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is also possible. Since it is "1/4", the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle row is "1/2".
Therefore, the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 47" or "small winning combination 48" can be stop-displayed on the active line is "1/8".

Thus, when the right reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 02" (10 payout) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small winning combination 47' or a 'small winning combination 48' (one coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the right first stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (replay) of the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 02" and the symbol of "PB=1" of the right reel 31. is stopped on the active line.
As a result, "Cherry" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and "Replay" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so that "Small win 02" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbol of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 47" and "small win 48" is one type of "red 7", and the "small win 47" and "small win 48" are shown. ' is one kind of pattern of 'Cherry'.
In this way, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

Even when the stop switch 42 was operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)" when the "small win B1 condition device" was activated, the stop switch 42 was operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)". In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 47" or "small winning combination 48" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated are "small win 02", "small win 11", "small win 12", "small win 12", and "small win 12". These are symbol combinations corresponding to "35th win", "36th win", "47th win", or "48th win".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 02" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 11" and "small winning combination 12" are composed of symbols in which the symbols on the "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and another "1 winning combination". " symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1".
Furthermore, in the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small win 35", "small win 36", "small win 47" and "small win 48", the symbols of "1" reels 31 are arranged "PB=1". , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, "1" reel 31 symbol is composed of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, In addition, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “4”. Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (one) consisting of symbols in which the symbols on all the “3” reels 31 are arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the “2” reels 31 are arranged at “PB=1”. , and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 are larger than the number of symbol combinations (two) consisting of symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Further, when the "small win B1 condition device" is actuated and the pressing order is correct, when all the "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the activated line. .
Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is correct, but when the second stop is incorrect, "PB = 1" is arranged at the first stop and the second stop. In the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the first stop is incorrect, the symbols with "PB = 1" arranged are stopped and displayed on the effective line at the first stop, and at the second stop And at the time of the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (left middle row), and when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row) at the first stop of the middle reel 31, and ""Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (right middle row).
For this reason, when the "small win B1 condition device" of "inside 1BB-A" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stopped on the active line, and "inside 1BB-B"" The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

The "minor combination B2 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 6, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "left and right middle (132)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated. Become.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left and right (132)", the number priority is given to "1/1" probability (always) "small win 02 (payout of 10), the reels 31 are stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small win 13" or "small win 13" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 14" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left and right (213)", the number priority is given to "small win 37" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 38" (one coin is paid out in each case) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right and left (231)" when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" Similarly, due to the number priority, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 37" or "small winning combination 38" (both are paid out one sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8". 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 57" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 58" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)", the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 57" or "small winning combination 58" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

"Small win B2 condition device" replaces "small win 11" and "small win 12" of "small win B1 condition device" with "small win 13" and "small win 14", "small win B1 condition device""Small combination 35" and "small combination 36" are replaced with "small combination 37" and "small combination 38", and "small combination 47" and "small combination 48" of "small combination B1 condition device" are replaced with It is replaced with "small win 57" and "small win 58".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated.

"Minor combination C1 condition device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "middle left/right (213)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the number priority is given to "1/1" probability (always) "small win 03 (payout of 10), the reels 31 are stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 to be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle and middle stages due to the number priority at the time of the middle first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed at the middle left, and at the third stop on the right, the "bell" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed. A stop display is displayed in the right middle row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second when the "small winning combination C1 conditional device" is activated, the "small winning combination C1 conditional device" is achieved by giving priority to the number of reels. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small win 03' to pay out '10', which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out, is stop-displayed on the effective line.
As shown in FIG. 19(3), which will be described later, when the "small winning combination 03" is won, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are stop-displayed on the middle line (valid line).

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row (effective line), and then, When the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line).
As a result, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, "replay" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Bell" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "Replay", "Bell" and "Watermelon" of the left reel 31 are played. Stop display in the display window 18 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pattern on the left reel 31 forming the "small win 03" is one type of "bell", and the pattern on the middle reel 31 forming the "small win 03" is also "bell". There is one type, and the pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 03" is also one type of "bell".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol of each reel 31 to constitute the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, to be stopped and displayed when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line at times.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", the number priority is given to "small win 15" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 16" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 to be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle stage at the time of the middle first stop. After that, at the second stop on the right, the "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the middle right row in order to make it possible to win either a "small win 15" or a "small win 16" based on the number priority. stop display. After that, at the third stop on the left, "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle left row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is arranged only on the number "5", any symbol of the numbers "1" to "5" on the left reel 31 is on the effective line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , "red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

Similarly, since "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is arranged only on the number "0", any symbol of the numbers "16" to "19" or "0" on the left reel 31 is an effective line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated while positioned above, "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Small win 15" or "Small win 16" The probability of being able to stop and display the combination of symbols on the active line is "1/2".

Thus, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 03" (10 payouts) is given priority to the number. Pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line. Displayable.

Further, when the pressing order is correct at the middle first stop, but the pressing order is incorrect at the right second stop, the symbol (bell) of the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 03" is different. Also, the "watermelon" symbol of "PB=1" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
As a result, the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "bell" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that the "small win 03" wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the pattern of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 15" and "small win 16" is one kind of "bell", and the "small win 15" and "small win 16" are shown. The pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the is one kind of "watermelon".
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination that is correct in the pressing order at the middle first stop, but can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the right second stop is set. By using one kind of symbols for each of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31, the number of symbol combinations that can be stop-displayed on the effective line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small win 63" or "small win 63" with a probability of "1/8" The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 64" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 to be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row due to the number priority at the time of the left first stop. , and when the middle and second stops, "red 7" or "blue 7" (both are "PB ≠ 1") of the middle reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle and middle rows, and when the right and third stops, the right ``Red 7'' (PB.noteq.1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 is arranged only on the number "9", any symbol of the numbers "5" to "9" on the middle reel 31 is on the effective line. If the middle stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , "red 7" of the middle reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that the "red 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle middle stage is "1/4".

In addition, since "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 is arranged only on the number "4", any one of the symbols of numbers "0" to "4" on the middle reel 31 is positioned on the effective line. Unless the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the "blue 7" of the middle reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability that "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4".

Furthermore, since "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "8", any one of the symbols "4" to "8" on the right reel 31 is positioned on the activated line. Unless the right stop switch 42 is operated, the "red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle right line). Therefore, the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability that it can be displayed is ``1/4'', the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to ``minor win 63'' or ``minor win 64'' can be stopped and displayed on the active line is ``1/8''. .

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 03" (10 payout) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a ``small winning combination 63'' or a ``small winning combination 64'' (one coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.

Further, when the pushing order is incorrect at the first left stop, the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 03" is different and the symbol "PB=1" on the left reel 31 is used. "Replay" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, the "replay" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "bell" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being stop-displayed on the activated line, so that the "small win 03" wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 constituting the "minor win 63" and "minor win 64" is one type of "replay", and the "minor win 63" and "minor win 64" are shown. The pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the is one type of "red 7".
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols of the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the left first stop are selected. By using one type for each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, (132)". In the same way as when, by the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 63" or "small winning combination 64" (both payout 1 sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of "right left middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 51" or "small win 51" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 52" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "cherry" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is placed in the right middle stage due to the number priority at the time of the right first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, the "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left, and at the third stop on the middle reel 31, the "black BAR" on the middle reel 31 or " "White BAR" (all "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is arranged only on the number "10", any symbol of the number "6" to "10" on the left reel 31 is on the effective line. If the left stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability that the "black bar" on the left reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle left row is "1/4".

Further, as described above, the probability that the "black bar" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "white bar" of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. Since the probability that it can be displayed is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 51" or "small win 52" can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is "1/8". .

Thus, when the right reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 03" (10 payout) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A combination of symbols corresponding to a 'small winning combination 51' or a 'small winning combination 52' (one coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stop-displayed on the effective line.

Further, when the pushing order is incorrect at the right first stop, the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 03" is different and the symbol "PB=1" on the right reel 31 is used. is stopped on the active line.
As a result, the "Cherry" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "Bell" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being stop-displayed on the activated line, so that "Small Win 03" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 51" and the "small win 52" is one type of "black BAR", and the "small win 51" and the "small win 52". ' is one kind of pattern of 'Cherry'.
In this way, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small combination C1 condition device" is activated.

Even when the stop switch 42 was operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)" when the "small win C1 condition device" was activated, the stop switch 42 was operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)". In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 51" or "small winning combination 52" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated are "small win 03", "small win 15", "small win 16", "small win These are symbol combinations corresponding to "51st win", "52nd win", "63rd win", or "64th win".
Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 03" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 15" and "small winning combination 16" are composed of symbols in which the symbols on the "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and another "1 " symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1".
Furthermore, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 51", "small win 52", "small win 63" and "small win 64", the symbols of "1" reels 31 are arranged "PB=1". , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, "1" of the symbols on the reels 31 are composed of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, In addition, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “4”. Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (one) consisting of symbols in which the symbols on all the “3” reels 31 are arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the “2” reels 31 are arranged at “PB=1”. , and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 are larger than the number of symbol combinations (two) consisting of symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Further, when the "small win C1 condition device" is actuated and the pressing order is correct, when all the "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the activated line. .
Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is correct, but if the second stop is incorrect, "PB = 1" is arranged at the first stop and the second stop. In the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is stopped and displayed on the effective line at the first stop, and at the second stop And at the time of the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

In addition, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (left middle row), and when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated "Bell" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row) at the first stop of the middle reel 31, and ""Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (right middle row).
For this reason, when the "small win C1 condition device" during "1BB-A inside" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped on the active line, and "1BB-B inside"" The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the "Small win C1 condition device" is activated.

"Minor combination C2 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 6, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, similarly to when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order. Become.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)", due to the number priority, the probability of "1/1" (always) "small win 03 (payout of 10), the reels 31 are stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)", due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/2""small win 17" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 18" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small win 65" or "small win 65" with a probability of "1/8". The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 66" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (132)", the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 65" or "small winning combination 66" (both 1 payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "right, left, middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 55" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 56" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
Even when the stop switch 42 was operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)" when the "small win C2 condition device" was activated, the stop switch 42 was operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)". In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 55" or "small winning combination 56" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

"Small win C2 condition device" replaces "small win 15" and "small win 16" of "small win C1 condition device" with "small win 17" and "small win 18", "small win C1 condition device""Small combination 51" and "Small combination 52" are replaced with "Small combination 55" and "Small combination 56", "Small combination C1 condition device""Small combination 63" and "Small combination 64" are replaced with It is replaced with "minor win 65" and "minor win 66".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

"Minor combination D1 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small combination D1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "middle, right, left (231)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the number priority is given to "1/1" probability (always) "small win 04 (payout of 10), the reels 31 are stopped and displayed on the active line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 to be described later, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the middle first stop, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is set to the middle middle stage due to the number priority. , and at the second stop on the right, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped on the middle right, and at the third stop on the left, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed. A stop display is displayed in the left middle row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second when the "small win D1 conditional device" is activated, the "small win D1 conditional device" corresponds to the "small win D1 conditional device" with priority given to the number of reels. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small win 04' to pay out '10', which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out, is stop-displayed on the effective line.
As shown in FIG. 20(1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 04" is stopped and displayed on the active line, "Bell"-"Bell"- "Bell" pauses.

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row (effective line), and then, When the right reel 31 is stopped second, "Replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stop-displayed in the right middle row (effective line), and then when the left reel 31 is stopped third. , stop-displays "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the middle reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, the left reel 31 ""Bell" is stop-displayed in the lower left row, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Cherry" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the middle reel 31 is stopped first, the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, the left reel 31 "bell ”, “Watermelon” and “Cherry/Blank” are stopped in the display window 18 .

The pattern on the left reel 31 forming the "small win 04" is one type of "watermelon", and the pattern on the middle reel 31 forming the "small win 04" is one type of "bell". The pattern of the right reel 31 that constitutes the winning combination 04" is one type of "Replay".
In this way, the pressing order when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the type of symbols of each reel 31 constituting the symbol combination to be stop-displayed when the correct answer is correct is set to one type, respectively, so that the "small win D1 condition device" is activated. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line at times.

When the "small hand D1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left and right (213)", due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/2""small hand 19" or " The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 20" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 to be described later, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle stage at the time of the middle first stop. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row in order to win either a "small win 19" or a "small win 20" based on the number priority. stop display. After that, at the right third stop, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the right reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As shown in FIG. 2, since the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "13", any symbol of the numbers "9" to "13" on the right reel 31 is on the effective line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated at the position of , the "black BAR" of the right reel 31 cannot be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle right line). Therefore, the probability that the "black bar" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is arranged only on the number "18", any symbol of the numbers "14" to "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on the activated line. If the right stop switch 42 is not operated when the player is on the reel, the "white bar" on the right reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle right line). Therefore, the probability that the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the “black BAR” or “white BAR” of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is “1/2”, so it corresponds to “small win 19” or “small win 20”. The probability of being able to stop and display the combination of symbols on the active line is "1/2".

In this way, when the "small win D1 conditional device" is activated, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 04" (10 payouts) is given priority. Pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Displayable.

Further, when the pressing order is correct at the middle first stop, but the pressing order is incorrect at the left second stop, the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 04" is different. , and the symbol "bell" of "PB=1" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
As a result, the "Bell" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being stop-displayed on the activated line, so that the "Small Win 04" wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 19" and "small winning combination 20" is one type of "bell", and the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 19" and "small winning combination 20". The pattern is also one type of "bell".
In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination that is correct in the pressing order at the middle first stop, but can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the left second stop is set. By using only one type of pattern for each of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the number priority is given to "small win 67" or "small win 67" with a probability of "1/8". The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 68" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 to be described later, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the left first stop, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row due to the number priority. , and at the second stop, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") of the middle reel 31 are stopped at the middle and middle rows, and at the third stop on the right, the right The "black BAR" (PB≠1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As described above, the probability that the "black bar" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "white bar" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is also "1/4", and the probability of being able to stop and display the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and the "black BAR" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability that it can be displayed is ``1/4'', the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to ``minor win 67'' or ``minor win 68'' can be stopped and displayed on the active line is ``1/8''. .

Thus, when the left reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 04" (10 payouts) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A combination of symbols corresponding to a ``small winning combination 67'' or a ``small winning combination 68'' (one coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stop-displayed on the effective line.
Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the first left stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 04" and the symbol "PB=1" on the left reel 31. "Replay" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, "replay" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and "watermelon" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so that "small win 04" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 67" and "small winning combination 68" is one type of "replay", and the pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 67" and "small winning combination 68" is one type. The pattern is one type of "black BAR".
In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols of the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that constitute a symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the left first stop are selected. By using one type for each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (132)", the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 67" or "small winning combination 68" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "right, left, middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 59" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 60" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the "Cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed in the right middle stage due to the number priority at the time of the right first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, the "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed at the middle left, and at the third stop on the middle reel 31, "red 7" or " "Blue 7" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the middle row.

As described above, the probability that the "black bar" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is also ``1/4'', and the probability of being able to stop and display ``Blue 7'' on the middle reel 31 in the middle row is also ``1/4''.
From the above, the probability that the "black bar" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. Since the probability that it can be displayed is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is "1/8". .

Thus, when the right reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win D1 conditional device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 04" (10 payouts) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a ``small winning combination 59'' or a ``small winning winning combination 60'' (1 coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stop-displayed on the effective line.
Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the right first stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (replay) of the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 04" and the symbol of "PB=1" of the right reel 31. is stopped on the active line.
As a result, "Cherry" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and "Replay" on the right reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that "Small win 04" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 59" and "small winning combination 60" is one type of "black BAR", and the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 59" and "small winning combination 60". is one type of "cherry".
In this way, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

Even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)" when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 59" or "small winning combination 60" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated are "small win 04", "small win 19", "small win 20", "small win 59", "minor win 60", "minor win 67" or "minor win 68".
Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 04" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 19" and "small winning combination 20" are composed of symbols in which the symbols on the "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "1 " symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1".
Furthermore, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59", "small win 60", "small win 67" and "small win 68", the symbols of "1" reels 31 are arranged "PB=1". , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, "1" of the symbols on the reel 31 consist of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, In addition, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “4”. Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (one) consisting of symbols in which the symbols on all the “3” reels 31 are arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the “2” reels 31 are arranged at “PB=1”. , and the symbol on the other reel 31 is greater than the number of symbol combinations (two) composed of symbols in the "PB.noteq.1" arrangement.

Further, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is correct, when all the "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the activated line. .
Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is correct, but when the second stop is incorrect, "PB = 1" is arranged at the first stop and the second stop. In the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the first stop is an incorrect answer, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is stopped and displayed on the effective line at the first stop, and at the second stop And at the time of the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

In addition, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (left middle row), and when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated "Bell" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row) at the first stop of the middle reel 31, and ""Cherry" (PB=1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line (right middle row).
For this reason, when the "small win D1 condition device" of "inside 1BB-A" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stopped on the active line, and "inside 1BB-B"" The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

The "small combination D2 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 7, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the order of pressing "middle right left (231)" will be the correct press order, and the other press order will be the incorrect press order, just like when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated. Become.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)" when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the number priority is given to "1/1" probability (always) "small win 04 (payout of 10), the reels 31 are stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small hand D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left middle (213)", the number priority is given, with a probability of "1/2""small hand 21" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 22" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

When the "small hand D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small hand 69" or "small hand 69" with a probability of "1/8" The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 70" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle (132)", the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 69" or "small winning combination 70" (both payout 1 sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "right, left, middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 59" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 60" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)", the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 59" or "small winning combination 60" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

"Small combination D2 condition device" replaces "small combination 19" and "small combination 20" of "small combination D1 condition device" with "small combination 21" and "small combination 22", "small combination D1 condition device""Small combination 59" and "Small combination 60" are replaced with "Small combination 61" and "Small combination 62", and "Small combination 67" and "Small combination 68" of "Small combination D1 condition device" are replaced with It is replaced with "small win 69" and "small win 70".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated.

The "minor combination E1 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 7, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)" when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the number priority is given to "small win 05" with a probability of "1/1" (always). (payout of 10), the reels 31 are stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is placed on the right middle stage due to the number priority at the time of the right first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped at the middle left, and at the third stop on the middle reel, "Bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed. A stop display is displayed in the middle middle row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second when the "small winning combination E1 conditional device" is activated, the "small winning combination E1 conditional device" is achieved by giving priority to the number of reels. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small win 05' to pay out '10', which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out, is stop-displayed on the effective line.
Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 20(2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 05" is stopped and displayed on the active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-" bell” stops.

Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row (effective line), and then, When the left reel 31 is stopped second, "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line).
Thus, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and "Cherry" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "bell", "watermelon" and "cherry/blank" of the left reel 31 are displayed. is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 .

The pattern on the left reel 31 forming the "small win 05" is one type of "watermelon", and the pattern on the middle reel 31 forming the "small win 05" is one type of "bell". The pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination 05" is one kind of "watermelon".
In this way, by setting the type of symbol of each reel 31 to constitute the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated to be stopped when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the "minor win E1 condition device" is activated. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line at times.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", the number priority is given to "small win 23" or "small win 23" with a probability of "1/2". The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 24" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle right row at the right first stop. After that, at the middle second stop, the "replay" (PB = 1) of the middle reel 31 is played in the middle and middle stages in order to make it possible to win either the "small winning combination 23" or the "small winning combination 24" according to the number priority. stop display. After that, at the third stop on the left, "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle left row.

As described above, the probability that "Red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row. The probability that it can be done is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "Minor win 23" or "Minor win 24" The probability of being able to stop and display the combination of symbols on the active line is "1/2".

Thus, when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the middle reel 31 is stopped second, "small winning combination 05" (10 payouts) is given priority to the number of reels. Pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the active line. Displayable.
Further, when the pressing order is correct at the right first stop, but the pressing order is incorrect at the middle second stop, the symbol (bell) of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 05" is different from the symbol (bell). In addition, "Replay", which is a symbol of "PB=1" on the middle reel 31, is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, "replay" of the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and "bell" of the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the active line, so that "small win 05" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 23" and "small winning combination 24" is one type of "watermelon", and the pattern of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 23" and "small winning combination 24" is one type. The pattern is one type of "replay".
In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination that is correct in the pressing order at the right first stop, but can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the middle second stop is set. By setting the right reel 31 and the middle reel 31 to have one kind of symbol respectively, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stop-displayed on the effective line when the "small win E1 condition device" is operated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small win 71" or "small win 71" or The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 72" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 to be described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row due to the number priority at the time of the left first stop. , and when the middle and second stops, "red 7" or "blue 7" (both are "PB ≠ 1") of the middle reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle and middle rows, and when the right and third stops, the right The "black BAR" (PB≠1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As described above, the probability that the "red 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "blue 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability of being able to do so is also "1/4", and the probability of being able to stop and display the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row. Since the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 71" or "minor win 72" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

Thus, when the left reel 31 is stopped first when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 05" (10 payouts) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A combination of symbols corresponding to a 'small winning combination 71' or a 'small winning combination 72' (1 coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stop-displayed on the effective line.
Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the left first stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 05" and the symbol of "PB=1" of the left reel 31. "Replay" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, "replay" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and "watermelon" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that "small win 05" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 71" and "small winning combination 72" is one type of "replay", and the pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 71" and "small winning combination 72" is one type. The pattern is one type of "black BAR".
In this way, when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols of the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the left first stop are selected. By using one type for each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (132)", the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" In the same way as when, by number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 71" or "small winning combination 72" (both are paid out one sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left and right (213)", the number priority is given to "small win 43" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 46" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle and middle stages due to the number priority at the time of the middle first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") of the left reel 31 are stopped at the middle left row, and at the third stop on the right, the right "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") of the reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As described above, the probability that the "black bar" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "white bar" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row. The probability that it can be done is also "1/4". In addition, the probability that “Red 7” on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also “1/4”, and the probability that “Blue 7” on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row is also “1/4”. It is "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle left row is "1/2". Then, the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is "1/4", and the probability that "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed in the middle right row is also possible. Since it is "1/4", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 43" or "small winning combination 46" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8".

Thus, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 05" (10 payouts) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a ``small winning combination 43'' or a ``small winning combination 46'' (one coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the middle first stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (bell) of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 05" and the symbol of "PB=1" of the middle reel 31. "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the effective line.
As a result, the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "bell" on the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that the "small win 05" wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the patterns of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 43" and "small win 46" are of two types, "black BAR" and "white BAR", and the "small win 43" and "small win 46" The symbols on the right reel 31 are two kinds of "red 7" or "blue 7", but the symbols of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 43" and "small win 46" are one kind of "watermelon". is.
In this way, the type of symbols of the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated is set to one kind, whereby the "small winning combination E1 condition device" It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line during operation.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right, left (231)" when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left, right (213)" Similarly, due to the number priority, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 43" or "small winning combination 46" (both are paid out one sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8". 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated are "small win 05", "small win 23", "small win 24", "small win Symbol combinations corresponding to "43rd win", "46th win", "71st win", or "72nd win".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 05" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 23" and "small winning combination 24" are composed of symbols in which the symbols on the "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and another "1 " symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1".
Furthermore, in the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small win 43", "small win 46", "small win 71" and "small win 72", the symbols on the "1" reels 31 are arranged "PB=1". , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, "1" of the symbols on the reels 31 are composed of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, In addition, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “4”. Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (one) consisting of symbols in which the symbols on all the “3” reels 31 are arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the “2” reels 31 are arranged at “PB=1”. , and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 are larger than the number of symbol combinations (two) consisting of symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Further, when the "small win E1 condition device" is actuated and the pressing order is correct, when all the three reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the activated line.
Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is correct, but if the second stop is incorrect, "PB = 1" is arranged at the first and second stops In the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbols with "PB = 1" arranged are stopped and displayed on the effective line at the first stop, and at the second stop And at the time of the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

In addition, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (left middle row), and when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row) at the first stop of the middle reel 31, and " Watermelon” (PB=1) is stop-displayed on the effective line (middle right row).
For this reason, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated during "1BB-A inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be stopped on the active line, and "1BB-B inside"" The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped displayed on the effective line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

The "minor combination E2 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 7, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the order of pressing "right, left, middle (312)" will be the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order will be the incorrect pressing order, just like when the "small win E1 condition device" is operating. Become.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)", the priority is given to the number of sheets, with a probability of "1/1" (always) "small win 05 (payout of 10), the reels 31 are stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of "right middle left (321)", the number priority is given to "small win 25" or "small win 25" with a probability of "1/2". The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 26" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small win 77" or "small win 77" with a probability of "1/8". The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 78" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (132)", the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 77" or "small winning combination 78" (both one payout) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small hand E2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left and right (213)", the number priority is given to "small hand 44" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 45" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right, left (231)" when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left, right (213)" Similarly, due to the number priority, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 44" or "small winning combination 45" (both are paid out one sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8". 31 is controlled to stop.

"Small win E2 condition device" replaces "small win 23" and "small win 24" of "small win E1 condition device" with "small win 25" and "small win 26", "small win E1 condition device"","small winning combination 43" and "small winning combination 46" are replaced with "small winning combination 44" and "small winning combination 45", and "small winning combination 71" and "small winning combination 72" of "small winning combination E1 condition device" are replaced with It is replaced with "minor win 77" and "minor win 78".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated.

The "small combination F1 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 7, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small combination F1 condition device" is activated, the pressing order of "right, middle, left (321)" is the correct pressing order, and the other pressing order is the incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is operated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", the number priority is given to the "small win F1 condition device" (always) with a probability of "1/1". The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "06" (10 coins paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, at the right first stop, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is placed in the right middle stage due to the number priority. is stop-displayed, and at the middle second stop, "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stop-displayed at the middle middle row, and at the left third stop, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed. A stop display is displayed in the left middle row. As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" with "PB=1" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Thus, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third, priority is given to the number of reels. A symbol combination corresponding to a ``small winning combination 06'' that pays out ``10'', which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to a ``small winning combination F1 condition device'', is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 06" is stopped and displayed on the active line, the lower line (invalid line) of "Bell"-"Bell"-" Bell” stops.

Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win F1 conditional device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle right row (effective line), and then, When the middle reel 31 is stopped second, "Replay" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle middle row (effective line), and then when the left reel 31 is stopped third. , stop-displays "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third. "Bell" is stop-displayed in the lower left row, "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Cherry" or "Blank" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row.
That is, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third. ”, “Watermelon” and “Cherry/Blank” are stopped in the display window 18 .

In addition, the pattern of the left reel 31 that constitutes the “small win 06” is one type of “watermelon”, and the pattern of the middle reel 31 that constitutes the “small win 06” is one type of “replay”. The pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the winning combination 06" is one kind of "watermelon".
In this way, the pressing order when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the type of symbols of each reel 31 constituting the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed when the correct answer is correct is set to one type, respectively, so that the "small win F1 condition device" is activated. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line at times.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right, left, middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 27" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 28" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 to be described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row at the right first stop. After that, at the second stop on the left, the "Bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the middle left row in order to win either the "small win 27" or the "small win 28" based on the number priority. stop display. After that, at the middle and third stop, "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB≠1") of the middle reel 31 are stopped and displayed in the middle stage.

As described above, the probability that the "red 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "blue 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability that it can be done is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that "red 7" or "blue 7" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", so it corresponds to "small win 27" or "small win 28" The probability of being able to stop and display the combination of symbols on the active line is "1/2".

Thus, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, "small win 06" (10 payouts) is given priority to the number. Pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Displayable.
Further, when the pressing order is correct at the right first stop, but the pressing order is incorrect at the left second stop, the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 06" is different. , and the symbol "bell" of "PB=1" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
As a result, the "Bell" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being stop-displayed on the activated line, so that the "Small Win 06" wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 27" and "small winning combination 28" is one type of "watermelon", and the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 27" and "small winning combination 28" is one type. The pattern is one type of "bell".
In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination that is correct in the pressing order at the right first stop, but can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the left second stop is set. By setting the right reel 31 and the left reel 31 to have one kind of symbol respectively, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stop-displayed on the effective line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small win 75" or "small win 75" with a probability of "1/8". The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 76" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 to be described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the left first stop, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is placed in the left middle row due to the number priority. , and at the second stop, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") of the middle reel 31 are stopped at the middle and middle rows, and at the third stop on the right, the right ``Red 7'' (PB.noteq.1) on the reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row.

As described above, the probability that the "black bar" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/4", and the "white bar" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. The probability that it will be possible is also "1/4", and the probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 will be stop-displayed in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the middle reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle middle row is "1/2", and the "red 7" of the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the right middle row. Since the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 75" or "minor win 76" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/8". .

Thus, when the left reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 06" (10 payout) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small winning combination 75' or a 'small winning combination 76' (1 coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the first left stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (watermelon) of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 06" and the symbol of "PB=1" of the left reel 31. "Replay" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, "replay" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and "watermelon" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that "small win 06" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 75" and "small winning combination 76" is one type of "replay", and the pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 75" and "small winning combination 76" is one type. The pattern is one type of "Red 7".
In this way, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the types of symbols of the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the left first stop are selected. By using one type for each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, (132)". In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 75" or "small winning combination 76" (both payout 1 sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left and right (213)", the number priority is given to "small win 39" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 40" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is placed in the middle and middle stages due to the number priority at the time of the middle first stop. , and at the second stop on the left, "Red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed at the middle left, and at the third stop on the right, "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 or ""WhiteBAR" (both "PB≠1") is stopped and displayed in the right middle row.

As described above, the probability that the “red 7” on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is “1/4”, and the “black BAR” on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row. The probability of being able to do so is also "1/4", and the probability of being able to stop and display the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the middle right row is also "1/4".
From the above, the probability that the "red 7" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle right row. Since the probability that it can be displayed is "1/2", the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" can be stopped and displayed on the activated line is "1/8". .

In this way, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 06" (10 payout) is stopped on the effective line due to the number priority. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small winning combination 39' or a 'small winning combination 40' (1 coin is paid out in each case) that pays out fewer medals than when displayed can be stop-displayed on the effective line.
Further, when the pressing order is incorrect at the middle first stop, the symbol is different from the symbol (replay) of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small win 06" and the symbol of "PB=1" of the middle reel 31. "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As a result, the "watermelon" of the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "replay" of the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that the "small win 06" can be won. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 39" and "small winning combination 40" is one type of "red 7", and the middle reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 39" and "small winning combination 40". is one type of "watermelon".
In this way, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right and left (231)" when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" Similarly, due to the number priority, the reels are stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 39" or "small winning combination 40" (both are paid out one sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8". 31 is controlled to stop.

As shown in FIG. 15, which will be described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated are "small win 06", "small win 27", "small win 28", and "small win 28". symbol combinations corresponding to "39", "40", "75" or "76".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 06" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 27" and "small winning combination 28" are composed of symbols in which the symbols on the "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and another "1 " symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1".
Furthermore, in the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 39", "small win 40", "small win 75" and "small win 76", the symbols of "1" reels 31 are arranged "PB=1". , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, "1" reel 31 symbols are arranged in a "PB=1" pattern, In addition, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “4”. Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (one) consisting of symbols in which the symbols on all the “3” reels 31 are arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the “2” reels 31 are arranged at “PB=1”. , and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 are larger than the number of symbol combinations (two) consisting of symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Further, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is correct, when all the "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the activated line. .
Furthermore, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is correct, but when the second stop is incorrect, "PB = 1" is arranged at the first stop and the second stop. In the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
In addition, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the first stop is incorrect, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is stopped and displayed on the effective line at the first stop, and at the second stop And at the time of the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

In addition, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (left middle row), and when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle middle row) at the first stop of the middle reel 31, and " Watermelon” (PB=1) is stop-displayed on the effective line (middle right row).
For this reason, when the "small win F1 condition device" of "inside 1BB-A" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stopped on the active line, and "inside 1BB-B"" The symbol combination corresponding to '1BB-B' is not stopped and displayed on the active line when the 'small win F1 condition device' is activated.

The "small combination F2 conditional device" includes 7 types of winning combinations described in the winning combination column of FIG. 7, and is described in the winning combination column of FIG. It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to the 7 types of small wins.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the "right middle left (321)" press order will be the correct press order, and the other press order will be the incorrect press order, just like when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated. becomes.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right middle left (321)", the number priority is given to "1/1" probability (always) "small win The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "06" (10 coins paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of "right left middle (312)", the number priority is given to "small win 29" or "small win 29" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 30" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", the number priority is given to "small win 73" or "small win 73" with a probability of "1/8". The reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 74" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle (132)", the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" In the same way as when, due to the number priority, with a probability of "1/8", the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 73" or "small winning combination 74" (both payout 1 sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line, The reel 31 is controlled to stop.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "middle left and right (213)", the number priority is given to "small win 41" or " The reels 31 are controlled to be stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the "small combination 42" (one coin is paid out) is stop-displayed on the activated line.
When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right, left (231)" when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left, right (213)" Similarly, due to the number priority, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 41" or "small winning combination 42" (both are paid out one sheet) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/8". 31 is controlled to stop.

"Small win F2 condition device" replaces "small win 27" and "small win 28" of "small win F1 condition device" with "small win 29" and "small win 30", "small win F1 condition device""Small combination 39" and "Small combination 40" are replaced with "Small combination 41" and "Small combination 42", and "Small combination 75" and "Small combination 76" of "Small combination F1 condition device" are replaced, It is replaced with "minor win 73" and "minor win 74".
The stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win F2 conditional device" is activated is the same as the stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win F1 conditional device" is activated.

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small winning combination G condition device" includes "small winning combination 79" and "small winning combination 80" as winning combinations. ” and “Small win 80” are won.
When the "minor win G condition device" is activated, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 79" or "minor win 80" (both "PB ≠ 1") is placed on the effective line. The reel 31 is controlled to be stopped so as to stop the display.

Specifically, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB≠1") of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line). "Cherry" (PB=1) on the reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle middle row (effective line), and when the right stop is performed, "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is stop-displayed in the right middle row (effective line). .
As described above, the probability that the "black bar" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/4", and the "white bar" on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row. The probability that it can be done is also "1/4".

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the "black BAR" or "white BAR" of the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row is "1/2". The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 79" or "minor win 80" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "1/2".
However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated (aiming at the "black BAR") at the timing when the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 will be displayed. (No. 10) or "White BAR" (No. 15) can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line). In this case, both "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 and "Watermelon" on the right reel 31 are arranged at "PB=1", so that "Minor Win 79" or "Minor Win 80" can always be won.
It should be noted that when the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 79" or "minor win 80" is displayed stopped on the active line, "cherry" - "cherry" - "cherry" stop displayed on the upward right line (disabled line). do.

As shown in FIG. 8, the "small winning combination H condition device" includes "small winning combination 81" as a winning combination. Become.
When the "small winning combination H condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are stopped so that the symbol combination (PB≠1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 81" is stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Control.

Specifically, during left stop, "cherry" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line), and during middle stop, "cherry" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. ) is stop-displayed in the middle middle row (effective line), and when the right stop is made, "cherry" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stop-displayed in the right middle row (effective line).
As shown in FIG. 2, the "cherries" of the left reel 31 are arranged at three positions of "4", "9" and "14". Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated while any of the symbols "0" to "14" on the left reel 31 is positioned on the activated line, the "cherry" on the left reel 31 will be displayed. The left stop switch 42 is operated when any one of the symbols "15" to "19" on the left reel 31 is positioned on the effective line. Then, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line (middle left row).

Therefore, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability that the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 can be stop-displayed on the effective line (middle left row) is "3/4". The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to "81" can be stopped and displayed on the active line is "3/4".
However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "black bar" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18 (aiming at the "black bar"), the number "9" on the left reel 31 will be displayed. Alternatively, "14""cherry" can be stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line). In this case, since the "Cherry" on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both arranged at "PB=1", the "small combination 81" can always be won.
When the "small winning combination 81" is won, "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" are stop-displayed on the middle line (effective line).

As shown in FIG. 8, the ``small winning combination I condition device'' includes a ``small winning combination 82'' as a winning combination. Become.
When the "small winning combination I condition device" is activated, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 82" is (always) with a probability of "1/1" on the effective line. The reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the stop display is made at .

Specifically, during the left stop, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line), and during the middle stop, the "watermelon" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. It is stop-displayed in the middle middle stage (effective line), and when the right stop is performed, the "watermelon" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stop-displayed in the right middle stage (effective line).
When the "small winning combination 82" is won, "watermelon" - "watermelon" - "watermelon" are stopped and displayed on the middle line (effective line).

"Single hand ALL condition device" includes all single hand ("small hand 07" to "small hand 78") as a winning hand, and when "single hand ALL condition device" is activated, all It will be in a state of being repeatedly elected to one role.
Then, when the "single hand ALL condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to any one of the "small hand 07" to "small hand 78" is stopped on the effective line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42. The reel 31 is controlled to be stopped so as to be displayed.
It should be noted that when the "1-card combination ALL condition device" is activated, any one of "small combination 07" to "small combination 78" (all "1-card payout") wins, and there is no non-winning.

The "minor win ALL condition device" includes all the minor wins ("minor win 01" to "minor win 82") as winning hands. It will be in a state of duplicate election.
When the "small win ALL condition device" is activated, the combination of symbols corresponding to any one of "small win 01" to "small win 06" is stop-displayed on the effective line according to the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42. The reel 31 is controlled so as to stop.
When the "small combination ALL condition device" is activated, any one of "small combination 01" to "small combination 06" (all "10 payouts") wins, and there is no non-winning.

As shown in FIG. 8, there is only one type of "replay condition device", which is a small win and replay condition device number "18".
As shown in FIG. 8, the "replay condition device" includes "replay" as a winning combination, and when the "replay condition device" is activated, "replay" is won.
When the "replay condition device" is activated, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the pattern combination (PB=1) corresponding to "replay" is (always) stop-displayed on the active line with a probability of "1/1". , the reel 31 is controlled to stop.

Specifically, during left stop, "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line), and during middle stop, "replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed. It is stop-displayed in the middle middle stage (effective line), and when the right stop is performed, "Replay" (PB=1) of the right reel 31 is stop-displayed in the right middle stage (effective line).
Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to "replay" is stop-displayed on the activated line, medals are automatically inserted and a replay can be executed.
When the "replay" wins, "replay" - "replay" - "replay" are stop-displayed on the middle line (valid line).

FIG. 9 shows a role item condition device. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, the role product condition device is "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the role product condition device number "1", and " Equipped with two types of 1BB-B condition device.
As shown in FIG. 10, the "1BB-A condition device" is subject to the lottery only when two medals are inserted in the non-internal state, and is not subject to the lottery when three medals are in the non-internal state.
On the other hand, the "1BB-B condition device" is subject to the lottery only when three medals are inserted in the non-internal medium, and is not subject to the lottery when two medals are inserted in the non-internal medium.

In addition, when two non-internal medals are inserted, when winning number "19" is won by lottery by role lottery means 61, accessory condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "19", The "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is activated.
On the other hand, when the winning number "20" is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 when three non-internal medals are inserted, the accessory condition device number "2" is generated from the winning number "20". Then, the "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "2" is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-A conditional device" is set to "1BB-A", and when the "1BB-A conditional device" is activated, the winning combination of "1BB- The symbol combination corresponding to "A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-A'' is stopped and displayed on the active line when the ``1BB-A conditional device'' is activated, ``1BB-A won'' is displayed, and no medals are paid out in the game this time, but in the next game. Shift from game to "1BB-A game".
On the other hand, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stop-displayed on the active line, the game moves to "inside 1BB-A" from the next game.

In addition, when two medals of "Inside 1BB-A" are inserted and the combination lottery means 61 does not win, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment. Since there is no possibility of non-winning in the role lottery means 61 during ``inside 1BB-A'', once the game shifts to ``inside 1BB-A'', thereafter the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-A'' is an effective line. never appear to stop.

Also, during the "1BB-A game", the "RB game" is continuously executed.
In this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is not set. are executed consecutively.
In addition, during the "RB game", only two types of "1-hand ALL condition device" and "small hand ALL-condition device" are the lottery targets of the winning lottery means 61, and every game, "1-hand ALL condition device". Or one of the "small win ALL condition device" is activated. Therefore, the probability of winning a small combination is higher during "RB game", that is, during "1BB-A game", than during non-internal and "1BB-A internal".

Furthermore, during the ``RB game'', the specified number (the number of medals that can be bet to start the game) becomes ``3'', and the ``1-card ALL condition device'' is activated with a probability of ``60535/65536''. , and "1" medals are paid out. Therefore, during the "RB game", that is, during the "1BB-A game", the player's medals are decreasing.
Further, the “RB game” ends when “2” games are played, “2” wins are made, or when the end condition of “1BB-A game” is met. That is, the end condition of the "RB game" is set to the execution of the game "2" times, the winning of "2" times, or the fulfillment of the end condition of the "1BB-A game". It is

In addition, the ``1BB-A game'' continues until the total number of medals acquired (the number of medals paid out and the number granted) exceeds '210', and ends when the total number of medals acquired exceeds '210'. . That is, the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is set to the total number of medals obtained exceeding "210".
Then, when the "RB game" ends and the conditions for ending the "1BB-A game" are not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again. In this way, the "RB game" is continuously executed during the "1BB-A game".
Further, when the "RB game" is completed and the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied, the "1BB-A game" is completed and the process shifts to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, the "1BB-A game" is ended, and the transition is made to the non-internal state. do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning combination of the "1BB-B conditional device" is set to "1BB-B", and when the "1BB-B conditional device" is activated, the winning combination of "1BB- The symbol combination corresponding to "B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
When the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-B'' is stopped and displayed on the active line when the ``1BB-B condition device'' is activated, ``1BB-B wins'' and no medals are paid out in the game this time, but in the next game. Shift from game to "1BB-B game".
On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stop-displayed on the active line when the "1BB-B conditional device" is activated, the next game is shifted to "inside 1BB-B".

In addition, when three medals of "1BB-B inside" are inserted, if the combination lottery means 61 does not win, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the active line, but in this embodiment. Since there is no non-winning in the combination lottery means 61 during ``inside 1BB-B'', once it shifts to ``inside 1BB-B'', after that the symbol combination corresponding to ``1BB-B'' is the valid line. never appear to stop.

Also, during the "1BB-B game", the "RB game" is continuously executed in the same manner as the "1BB-A game".
Furthermore, the “1BB-B game” continues in the same way as the “1BB-A game” until the total number of medals won (the number of medals paid out, the number of medals awarded) exceeds “210”. When the cumulative total exceeds "210" sheets, the process ends.
Then, when the "RB game" ends and the conditions for ending the "1BB-B game" are not met, the "RB game" is executed again.
Further, when the "RB game" ends and the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied, the "1BB-B game" is ended and the process shifts to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the termination condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is terminated, the "1BB-B game" is terminated, and the game shifts to the non-internal state. do.

FIG. 10 is a diagram (number table) showing the numbers of winning numbers for each game state in this embodiment.
In FIG. 10, "two" indicates "when two medals are inserted", and "three" indicates "when three medals are inserted". Further, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB-A" and "inside 1BB-B", and "inside 1BB" indicates "during 1BB-A playing" and "during 1BB-B playing".

Dividing the number shown in FIG. 10 by "65536" gives the winning probability of each winning number.
For example, in FIG. 10, the winning number "1" when two non-internal medals are inserted is "2500", so the winning probability of winning number "1" when two non-internal medals are inserted. becomes "2500/65536".
Also, for example, when winning number "1" is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, a small winning combination and replay condition device number "1" are generated from this winning number "1", and a small winning combination and replay condition device number "1" are generated. 1” is activated.

As shown in FIG. 10, "small win A1 condition device" to "small win I condition device" are subject to lottery during non-internal and internal (1BB-A internal and 1BB-B internal), During 1BB (during 1BB-A game, during 1BB-B game), the lottery is not applicable.
In addition, the "1-card combination ALL condition device" is a lottery target in all game states.
Furthermore, the "small combination ALL condition device" is a lottery only during 1BB (during 1BB-A game, during 1BB-B game), contrary to "small combination A1 condition device" to "small combination I condition device" Non-internal and internal (1BB-A internal and 1BB-B internal) are not eligible for the lottery.

In addition, the "replay condition device" is a lottery target for non-internal and internal (1BB-A internal, 1BB-B internal), as with "small hand A1 condition device" to "small hand I condition device" However, during 1BB (during 1BB-A game, 1BB-B game), it is not subject to lottery.
In addition, the "1BB-A conditional device" is subject to the lottery only when two medals are inserted in the non-internal state, and is not subject to the lottery in other game states.
On the other hand, the "1BB-B condition device" is subject to the lottery only when three medals are inserted in the non-internal state, and is not subject to the lottery in other game states.

That is, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is subject to the lottery, but the "1BB-B condition device" is not subject to the lottery.
On the other hand, when three non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" is subject to the lottery, but the "1BB-A condition device" is not subject to the lottery.
In addition, in this embodiment, in any game state, any one of the winning numbers "1" to "20" is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, and there is no chance of non-winning.

Next, transition of the game state in this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing game state transitions in this embodiment, and FIG. 12 is a diagram showing game state fluctuation conditions in this embodiment.
In FIG. 12, "∞" (infinite) in the column of the number of times means that the upper limit number of games is not set for each game state, and until the transition condition described in the column of the variation opportunity is satisfied, that game state remains in that state. means to maintain (continue)

The main control means 50 determines whether or not the game state transition condition is satisfied every game, when all the reels 31 are stopped, and shifts the game state when it is determined that the game state transition condition is satisfied. Control.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-internal. When shipped from the factory, it shifts to non-internal. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off and the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered. At this time, the initialization processing of the RWM 53 is executed, and it shifts to the non-internal state.

During non-internal, it is maintained until the "1BB-A conditional device" or "1BB-B conditional device" is activated. As described above, when two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is selected, and when three non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" is selected.
When two non-internal medals are inserted, the "1BB-A condition device" is activated (1BB-A won), and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB-A won). Then, it shifts to "1BB-A game" (1BB-A operation).
On the other hand, the "1BB-A condition device" was activated when two medals were inserted in the non-internal medium, but if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" did not stop and display on the active line, "1BB-A internal medium ”.

In addition, if "inside 1BB-A" is not won by the combination lottery means 61 when two medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, but three medals are inserted. Sometimes, even if the combination lottery means 61 does not win, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not stopped and displayed on the activated line.
However, as described above, in the present embodiment, there is no non-winning in the role lottery means 61 during "inside 1BB-A". Since the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not stop displayed on the active line, "1BB-A inside" will continue to be maintained.

In addition, when 3 medals are inserted, the "1BB-B condition device" is activated (1BB-B won), and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB-B won). Then, the game shifts to "1BB-B game" (1BB-B operation).
On the other hand, the "1BB-B condition device" was activated when three medals were inserted in the non-internal medium, but if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" was not displayed stopped on the active line, the "1BB-B internal medium ”.

In addition, in the case of "inside 1BB-B", if the combination lottery means 61 fails to win when three medals are inserted, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, but two medals are inserted. Sometimes, even if the combination lottery means 61 does not win, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not stopped and displayed on the effective line.
However, as described above, in the present embodiment, there is no non-winning in the role lottery means 61 during "inside 1BB-B". Since the symbol combination corresponding to "-B" is not stopped on the active line, "inside 1BB-B" is maintained.

Also, during the "1BB-A game", the "RB game" is continuously executed.
Furthermore, the “RB game” ends when “2” games are executed, “2” wins are made, or when the end condition of “1BB-A game” is met.
Furthermore, the ``1BB-A game'' continues until the total number of medals acquired (the number paid out and the number granted) exceeds '210', and ends when the total number of medals acquired exceeds '210'. .

Then, when the "RB game" ends and the conditions for ending the "1BB-A game" are not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
Further, when the "RB game" is completed and the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied, the "1BB-A game" is completed and the process shifts to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB-A game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, the "1BB-A game" is ended, and the transition is made to the non-internal state. do.

Also, during the "1BB-B game", the "RB game" is continuously executed in the same manner as the "1BB-A game".
Furthermore, the “1BB-B game” continues in the same way as the “1BB-A game” until the total number of medals won (the number of medals paid out, the number of medals awarded) exceeds “210”. When the cumulative total exceeds "210" sheets, the process ends.

Then, when the "RB game" ends and the conditions for ending the "1BB-B game" are not met, the "RB game" is executed again.
Further, when the "RB game" is completed and the end condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied, the "1BB-B game" is terminated and the process shifts to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the termination condition of the "1BB-B game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is terminated, the "1BB-B game" is terminated, and the transition is made to the non-internal state. do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20, the feature points of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" in this embodiment are activated, and the "minor win A1 condition The characteristic points of the stop control of the reel 31 at the time of operation of the "device" to "small win F2 condition device" will be described.
Fig. 13 (1) shows the left first stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and the "small win C1 condition device" when activated FIG. 10 is a diagram showing symbols of the left reel 31 that can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the first left stop.
FIG. 13(2) is a view showing the symbols of the left reel 31 that can be stop-displayed in the display window 18 at the time of the left second stop after the middle first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when "small win A1 condition device" to "small win C2 condition device" are activated, and FIG. 15 shows "small win D1 condition device" to "small win F2 It is a diagram showing a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the "conditional device" is activated.

FIG. 16 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbols of the middle reel 31 are arranged at "PB=1" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated. It is a diagram.
FIG. 17 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are activated. It is a diagram.
FIG. 18 shows a symbol combination in which only the symbol on the left reel 31 is arranged at "PB=1" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are activated. It is a diagram.

FIG. 19(1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when "small win 01" is won, and FIG. 19(2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when "small win 02" is won. (3) is a diagram showing a stop result when a "small win 03" is won.
FIG. 20(1) is a diagram showing the stop roll when "small win 04" is won, and FIG. 20(2) is a diagram showing the stop roll when "small win 05" is won. (3) is a diagram showing a stop result when a "small win 06" is won.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the probability is "1/1" due to the number priority. , the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 01" (10 coins paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

In addition, when the "small winning combination A1 conditional device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small winning combination 01". display.
As a result, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), the "black BAR" (No. There is a case where "Replay" (No. 11) of the reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row.
That is, the “black bar” (number 10), “replay” (number 11) and “bell” (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 .

As shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "right and left middle (132)" when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the probability is "1/1" due to the number priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small winning combination 02" (10 coins paid out) is stop-displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "small winning combination B1 conditional device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small winning combination 02". display.

As a result, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), the "black BAR" (No. There is a case where "Replay" (No. 11) on the reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left.
That is, the “black bar” (number 10), “replay” (number 11) and “bell” (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 .

As shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the probability of "1/1" is given by the number priority. The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 03" (10 coins paid out) is stop-displayed on the active line.
Further, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the middle reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle stage (effective line) in order to win the "small win 03". After that, at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small win 03".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the middle first stop, as shown in FIG. , "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed at the middle left stage, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed at the upper left stage.
That is, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. FIG. Also, the "black bar" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the probability is "1/8" due to the number priority. to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 63" or "small winning combination 64" (one payout in each case) on the active line.
Further, at the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is performed in order to win "small win 63" or "small win 64". A stop display is displayed in the left middle row.

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), the "black BAR" (No. There is a case where "Replay" (No. 11) on the reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell" (12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row.
That is, the “black bar” (number 10), “replay” (number 11) and “bell” (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18 .

In this way, when the "small combination A1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop, when the "small combination B1 condition device" is activated, and when the "small combination C1 condition device" is activated, the left first When stopped, as shown in FIG. 13(1), "black bar" (number 10), "replay" (number 11) and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. and
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating condition device (lottery result of the combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the pattern of the left reel 31 stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of left first stop. .

Further, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the middle first stop, as shown in FIG. (No. 12) and "Watermelon" (No. 13) can be stop-displayed in the display window 18, and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is not stop-displayed in the display window 18. - 特許庁
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) and the left second stop after the middle first stop (when the pushing order is correct) Different symbols on the reels 31 are stopped and displayed in the display window 18.例文帳に追加

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the pattern is different from the pattern (bell) of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 03", and "Replay", which is a symbol of "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is stop-displayed on the activated line.
As a result, the "replay" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being missed, and the "bell" on the left reel 31 can be prevented from being stop-displayed on the activated line, so that the "small win 03" wins. you can avoid it.

Furthermore, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 63" and "small winning combination 64" is one type of "replay", and the pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 63" and "small winning combination 64" is one type. The pattern is one type of "Red 7".
In this way, the types of symbols of the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed at the time of the left first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, are set respectively. By using one type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability that the ``red 7'' of the middle reel 31 constituting the ``minor win 63'' and the ``minor win 64'' can be stopped and displayed on the active line is ``1/4''. The probability that ``Blue 7'' of the middle reel 31 constituting the ``small winning combination 64'' can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also ``1/4'', and constitutes the ``small winning combination 63'' and the ``small winning combination 64''. The probability that the "red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stop-displayed on the active line is also "1/4".
As a result, it is possible to reduce the winning probability (acquisition rate) of the one-piece role when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to "1/8". Since it can be lowered, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right" when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, that is, the left reel 31 is first stopped, and then the second. When the middle reel 31 is stopped first, and the right reel 31 is stopped thirdly, "10", which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device", is paid out. The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is stop-displayed on the active line.
Furthermore, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 01" is one type of "replay", and the pattern of the middle reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 01" is one type of "bell". The pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small win 01" is one kind of "watermelon".

Further, the “replay” on the left reel 31 constituting the “small winning combination 01” is arranged in the “PB=1” arrangement, and the “bell” on the middle reel 31 constituting the “small winning combination 01” is also arranged in the “PB=1” arrangement. The "watermelon" on the right reel 31, which constitutes the "small winning combination 01", also has the "PB=1" arrangement.
In this way, the symbols of the respective reels 31 constituting the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the "small win A1 condition device" is arranged. The combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the ``small win A1 conditional device'' is activated is provided by setting the types of symbols of each reel 31 to constitute the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed when the operation is correct. can be reduced.

The "small win A2 condition device" is the same as the "small win A1 condition device".
As shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of "left, middle, right" when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, that is, the left reel 31 is stopped first, and the middle win is second. When the reel 31 is stopped and the right reel 31 is stopped thirdly, the maximum number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "small win A2 condition device" is "10". The symbol combination corresponding to "01" is stopped and displayed on the active line.
As described above, the symbols on the reels 31 forming the "small win 01" are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the types of symbols on the reels 31 forming the "small win 01" are one type. . This makes it possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated.

In addition, as described above, a straight line passing through "upper left" - "upper middle" - "upper right" is defined as "upper line", and passes through "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right". A straight line is called a "middle line", and a straight line passing through "lower left" - "middle lower" - "lower right" is called a "lower line". Furthermore, the straight line passing through "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right" is defined as "right downward line", and the straight line passing through "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right" Let the line be the "right rising line", and let the small chevron-shaped line passing through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "lower right" be the "mountain line". In this embodiment, only the "middle line" is the "effective line", and the others are "ineffective lines".

Then, as shown in FIG. 19(1), when the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 01"("replay"-"bell"-"watermelon") is stopped on the active line ("small winning combination 01" When a prize is won), ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``downward right line'' (invalid line) passing through ``upper left row'', ``middle middle row'', and ``lower right row''.
Also, as shown in FIG. 19 (2), when the symbol combination ("replay" - "cherry" - "replay") corresponding to "small winning combination 02" is stopped on the active line ("small winning combination 02" When a prize is won), ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``upper line'' (invalid line) passing through ``upper left row'', ``middle upper row'', and ``upper right row''.

Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 03" is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell". ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is displayed in a stopped state on the line (valid line).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (1), when the symbol combination ("watermelon"-"bell"-"replay") corresponding to "small combination 04" is stopped on the activated line ("small combination 04" When a prize is won), ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``right rising line'' (invalid line) passing through the ``lower left row'', ``middle middle row'', and ``upper right row''.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20(2), when the symbol combination ("watermelon"-"bell"-"watermelon") corresponding to "small winning combination 05" is stopped on the active line ("small winning combination 05" When winning a prize), ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``hill line'' (invalid line) passing through the ``lower left row'', ``middle middle row'', and ``lower right row''.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(3), when the symbol combination ("watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon") corresponding to "small winning combination 06" is stopped on the activated line ("small winning combination 06" When a prize is won), ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' - ``Bell'' is stopped and displayed on the ``lower line'' (invalid line) passing through the ``lower left row'', ``middle lower row'', and ``lower right row''.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20(1), when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 04" is stopped and displayed on the active line (when the "small win 04" is won), the left reel 31 "cherry" is stopped in the display window 18 (upper left).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 05" is stopped and displayed on the active line (when the "small winning combination 05" is won), the left reel 31 "cherry ” is stopped in the display window 18 (upper left).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(3), when the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 06" is stopped and displayed on the active line (when the "minor win 06" is won), the left reel 31 "cherry" is stopped in the display window 18 (upper left).
In this embodiment, the symbol combination that can be stop-displayed on the active line when the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the display window 18 is stop-displayed on the active lines of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. It is not a winning pattern combination regardless of the pattern that is played.
Further, in the present embodiment, when "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed on the active line, there is no winning symbol combination regardless of the symbols stop-displayed on the active lines of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. . That is, it does not have a so-called single reel winning combination in which, when a predetermined symbol on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, a prize is won regardless of the symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, there is a case where "cherry" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the first stop on the left when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated. However, there is a case where "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the pressing order is correct when the "small win D1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated.

Here, in this embodiment, the AT lottery is executed in the game in which the winning number "13" or "14" is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61. FIG. In addition, in the game where the winning number "13" is won, the "small win G condition device" is activated, and "small win 79" or "small win 80" ("Cherry" is aligned on the upward right line (invalid line). ) can be won, and in the game in which the winning number “14” is won, the “small win H condition device” is activated and “small win 81” (“Cherry” is aligned on the middle line (effective line)) wins. It becomes possible. Therefore, when "cherries" are aligned on the upper right line (invalid line) or the middle line (valid line), the player expects to win the AT lottery.

In addition, in the conventional slot machine 10, a combination related to cherry and a special combination (bonus) are simultaneously won (double winning) in a combination lottery, or an AT lottery is performed when a combination related to cherry is won, and a combination related to cherry is won. When "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 (upper left, middle left, or lower left) in the game, the cherry is displayed regardless of the stop display symbols on the active lines of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. Known to win prizes for roles. In such a slot machine 10, when "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 and a combination related to Cherry is won, the player expects to win a special combination or an AT lottery.

However, in the present embodiment, there is a case where "cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 even when the pressing order is correct when the "small win D1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated. However, at this time, the left reel 31 is at the second stop or the third stop, and at that time two or three "bells" are aligned on the invalid line.
As a result, the player is made to recognize that he or she has won a winning combination related to the bell, and even if "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18, excessive expectations of winning an AT lottery, etc., are avoided. I try not to let

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 20(1), "CHERRY" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the display window 18 (upper left). There is a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04". The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 04" is "watermelon"-"bell"-"replay", which is a winning symbol regardless of the stop display symbols on the active lines of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. not a combination. That is, the stop roll shown in FIG. 20(1) is not a stop roll that results in a win for cherries, nor is it a stop roll that results in a so-called single reel win. The stop outcomes shown in FIGS. 20(2) and (3) are the same as the stop outcomes shown in FIG. 20(1).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated are "small win 01", "small win 07", "small win 08", and "small win 08". These are symbol combinations corresponding to "31st win", "32nd win", "53rd win", or "54th win".
Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" is a symbol combination in which the symbols of all the "3" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement. The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is correct.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 07" and "small winning combination 08" are composed of symbols in which the symbols on the "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and another "1 winning combination". " symbols on the reels 31 are arranged in a pattern of "PB≠1". The symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 07" and "small winning combination 08" are correct in the pressing order at the first stop, but can be stop-displayed when the pressing order is incorrect at the second stop.
Further, the symbol combinations corresponding to the "small winning combination 31", "small winning combination 32", "small winning combination 53" and "small winning combination 54" are arranged such that the symbols of "1" reels 31 are "PB=1". , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in a "PB≠1" arrangement. The symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 31", "small winning combination 32", "small winning combination 53" and "small winning combination 54" can be stop-displayed when the pressing order is incorrect in the first stop.

In this way, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, "1" of the symbols on the reels 31 are composed of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, In addition, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “4”. Therefore, the number of symbol combinations (one) consisting of symbols in which the symbols on all the “3” reels 31 are arranged in a “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the “2” reels 31 are arranged at “PB=1”. , and the symbols on the other "1" reels 31 are larger than the number of symbol combinations (two) consisting of symbols in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Further, when the "small win A1 condition device" is actuated and the pushing order is correct, when all the "3" reels 31 are stopped, the symbols arranged "PB=1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line. .
Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the first stop is correct, but if the second stop is incorrect, "PB = 1" is arranged at the first stop and the second stop. In the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop results in an incorrect answer, the symbol with "PB = 1" arrangement is stopped and displayed on the effective line at the first stop, and at the second stop And at the time of the third stop, the symbols arranged "PB.noteq.1" are stopped and displayed on the effective line.

The symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each of the conditional devices of "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated is the same as that of "small win A1 condition device".
The symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when each conditional device of "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated is that the symbols of "1" reel 31 are arranged at "PB=1". and the symbols on the other “2” reels 31 are arranged “PB≠1”, A symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in "1" arrangement and symbols on other "1" reels 31 are arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement, and symbols on "3" reels 31. has a symbol combination consisting of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement.

In addition, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when each conditional device of "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol of "1" reel 31 is "PB = 1 , and the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when each of the conditional devices of "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbols of "2" reels 31 are "PB = The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in the “1” arrangement and symbols in which the symbols on the other “1” reels 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement is “2”.

Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when each conditional device of "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbols of "3" reels 31 are "PB = 1 The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged as "" is "1".
"1" reel 31 is composed of symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 are composed of symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. The number of symbol combinations consisting of "2" reels 31 is composed of symbols arranged in "PB=1", and the other "1" reel 31 symbols are arranged "PB≠1". The number of symbol combinations consisting of arranged symbols, and the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in "3" reels 31 are greater than the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols arranged in "PB=1".

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when the left reel 31 is first stopped when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, medals corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device" are displayed according to the subsequent stopping operation. The symbol combination corresponding to the 'small win 01' paying out '10' which is the maximum value among the number of payouts can be stop-displayed on the activated line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the middle reel 31 is first stopped when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 01" is displayed according to the subsequent stopping operation. is stop-displayed on the effective line.
Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when the right reel 31 is first stopped when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" is displayed according to the subsequent stop operation. A symbol combination corresponding to a 'small winning combination 53' or a 'small winning combination 54' that pays out '1' medals less than when stopped and displayed on the active line can be stopped and displayed on the active line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol of the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 31" and the "small winning combination 32" is "watermelon". The "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 has a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01", and is arranged at "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. It is a pattern that is
As a result, it is possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed when the pushing order is incorrect at the middle first stop when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, and the "bell" on the middle reel 31 " can be prevented from being statically displayed on the activated line, so that "small win 01" can be prevented from winning.

Also, the symbol of the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" and "small win 32" is one kind of "red 7", corresponding to the "small win 31" and "small win 32". The symbol of the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination to be played is one kind of "watermelon".
In this way, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 53" and "small winning combination 54" is "cherry". The "cherry" on the right reel 31 has a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01", and is arranged at "PB=1" on the right reel 31. It is a pattern that is
As a result, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the pressing order is incorrect due to the right first stop, it is possible to prevent the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and the "watermelon" on the right reel 31. ” can be prevented from being statically displayed on the activated line, so that “small win 01” can be prevented from winning.

In addition, the symbol of the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 53" and "small winning combination 54" is one type of "white BAR", corresponding to the "small winning combination 53" and "small winning combination 54". The symbol of the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination to be played is one type of "Cherry".
In this way, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, when the middle reel 31 is first stopped when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, medals corresponding to the "small win C1 condition device" are displayed according to the subsequent stop operation. The combination of symbols corresponding to the 'small win 03' which pays out '10', which is the maximum value among the number of payouts, can be stop-displayed on the effective line.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the left reel 31 is first stopped when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 03" is displayed according to the subsequent stopping operation. is stop-displayed on the effective line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the left reel 31 forming the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 63" and "minor win 64" is "replay". The "Replay" on the left reel 31 has a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 03", and is arranged at "PB=1" on the left reel 31. It is a pattern that is
As a result, when the pressing order is incorrect at the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, it is possible to prevent the "replay" of the left reel 31 from being missed, and the "bell" of the left reel 31 ” can be prevented from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that “small win 03” can be prevented from winning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbols of the middle reels 31 constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the "minor win 63" and "minor win 64" are "red 7" and "blue 7". Both "red 7" and "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 have different symbols from the symbols (bell) on the middle reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 03". 31, it is a pattern in which "PB≠1" is arranged.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol of the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 63" and "minor win 64" is "red 7". "Red 7" on the right reel 31 has a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03", and "PB≠1" on the right reel 31. It is a pattern that is arranged.

The symbols on the left reel 31 forming the symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 63" and "minor win 64" are one type of "replay" and correspond to the "minor win 63" and "minor win 64". The symbol of the right reel 31 constituting the symbol combination is one kind of "red 7".
In this way, the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, are each made to have one type of symbol type. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stop-displayed on the effective line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the left reel 31 has a portion where "black bar" (number 10), "replay" (number 11) and "bell" (number 12) are arranged in order. .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the left reel 31 "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. - 特許庁
Further, among the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11) and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, the "replay" stop-displayed in the middle left row is the "small win 63". and the symbols of the left reel 31 forming a symbol combination corresponding to the "minor win 64".

Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is activated, and when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the "small win C1 Similarly to the left first stop when the condition device is activated, the left reel 31's "black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) are stopped in the display window 18 Displayable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating condition device (lottery result of the combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the pattern of the left reel 31 stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of left first stop. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 14, "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B2 condition device" have "left middle right" or "left middle right" as the correct pressing order. That is, the "small win A1 conditional device" to "small win B2 conditional device" are correct in the pressing order at the time of the left first stop.
Here, the "small win A1 conditional device" to "small win B2 conditional device" are referred to as "right first stop correct group".

Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 31", "small win 32", "small win 53" and "small win 54" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.
Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small winning combination A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 33", "small winning combination 34", "small winning combination 49" and "small winning combination 50". is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 35", "small win 36", "small win 47" and "small win 48" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.
Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 37", "small win 38", "small win 57" and "small win 58" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

As described above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbol of "1" reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is composed of the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "small win C1 condition device" to "small win D2 condition device" have "middle left/right" or "middle right/left" as correct pressing order. That is, the "small win C1 conditional device" to "small win D2 conditional device" are correct in the pressing order at the time of the middle first stop.
Here, the "minor win C1 condition device" to "minor win D2 condition device" are referred to as "middle first stop correct group".

Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 51", "small win 52", "small win 63" and "small win 64" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.
Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 55", "small win 56", "small win 65" and "small win 66" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59", "small win 60", "small win 67" and "small win 68" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.
Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 61", "small win 62", "small win 69" and "small win 70" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

As described above, out of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbol of "1" reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1". The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is composed of the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, "small win E1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" have "right left middle" or "right middle left" as the correct pressing order. That is, "small win E1 conditional device" to "small win F2 conditional device" are correct in the pressing order at the time of the right first stop.
Here, the "minor win E1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are referred to as "right first stop correct group".

Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 43", "small win 46", "small win 71" and "small win 72" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.
Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 44", "small win 45", "small win 77" and "small win 78" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win E2 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 39", "small win 40", "small win 75" and "small win 76" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.
Symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 41", "small win 42", "small win 73" and "small win 74" among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated. is composed of "1" reel 31 symbols arranged in "PB=1" arrangement, and other "2" reels 31 symbols arranged in "PB≠1" arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of.

As described above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbol of "1" reel 31 is arranged in the "PB=1" arrangement. The number of symbol combinations is "16", which is composed of the symbols on the other "2" reels 31 arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "small combination C1 condition device" to "small combination F2 condition device" can be "middle left and right", "middle right left", "right left middle" or "right middle left" The correct answer should be pressed in order. That is, "small win C1 conditional device" to "small win F2 conditional device" are incorrect in the pressing order at the time of the left first stop.
Here, the "minor win C1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are referred to as "left first stop incorrect answer group".

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" are those in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 65" and "small win 66" are those in which the left reel 31 symbol is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 67" and "small winning combination 68" are those in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 69" and "small win 70" are those in which the left reel 31 symbol is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 71" and "small winning combination 72" are those in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 77" and "small winning combination 78" are those in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 75" and "small win 76" are those in which the left reel 31 symbol is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 73" and "small win 74" are those in which the left reel 31 symbol is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbol on the left reel 31 is arranged as "PB=1", which is included in the "left first stop incorrect answer group". , and the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are "16".
That is, as shown in FIG. 18, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 63" to "minor win 78" can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the condition device included in the "left first stop incorrect answer group" is activated. The symbols (replay) on the left reel 31 are arranged in the “PB=1” arrangement, and the symbols on the middle and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the “PB≠1” arrangement. It is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are present. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "small win A1 condition device" to "small win B2 condition device" and "small win E1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are "left middle right" , "Left-right center", "Right-left center", or "Right-center left" is the correct pressing order. That is, "small win A1 conditional device" to "small win B2 conditional device" and "small win E1 conditional device" to "small win F2 conditional device" become incorrect in order of pressing at the time of the middle first stop.
Here, "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win B2 condition device" and "minor win E1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are referred to as "middle first stop incorrect answer group".

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 31" and the "small winning combination 32" has the symbol "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. , and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 33" and "small win 34" has the symbol "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. , and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 35" and "small winning combination 36" has the symbol "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. , and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 37" and "small winning combination 38" has the symbol "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. , and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small winning combination E1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 43" and "small winning combination 46" has the symbol "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. , and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small winning combination E2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 44" and "small winning combination 45" are those in which the symbol on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" and "small win 40" has the symbol "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. , and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 41" and "small win 42" has the symbol "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. , and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 and 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbol on the middle reel 31 is arranged as "PB=1" , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are "16".
That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" to "small win 46" can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the condition device included in the "middle first stop incorrect answer group" is activated. The symbol combination is such that the symbol (watermelon) on the middle reel 31 is "PB=1", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are "PB≠1". It is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are present. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, "small combination A1 condition device" to "small combination D2 condition device" can be "left center right", "left center right", "middle left right" or "middle right left". The correct answer should be pressed in order. That is, "small win A1 conditional device" to "small win D2 conditional device" become incorrect in the pressing order at the time of the right first stop.
Here, the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win D2 condition device" are referred to as "right first stop incorrect answer group".

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 53" and "small win 54" has the symbol "PB=1" on the right reel 31. , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 49" and "small win 50" are those in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small winning combination B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 47" and "small winning combination 48" are those in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 57" and "small win 58" are those in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 51" and "small win 52" are those in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 55" and "small win 56" are those in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59" and "small win 60" have the symbol "PB=1" on the right reel 31. , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.
Of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 61" and "small win 62" are those in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is "PB=1." , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the conditional device is activated, the symbol on the right reel 31 is arranged in the “PB=1” arrangement, which is included in the “right first stop incorrect answer group”. , and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are "16".
That is, as shown in FIG. 17, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 53" to "small win 62" can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the condition device included in the "right first stop incorrect answer group" is activated. The symbols on the right reel 31 (cherry) are arranged in "PB=1", and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are arranged in "PB≠1". It is a symbol combination consisting of the symbols that are present. The number of these symbol combinations is "16".

Then, there is a group of correct answers at the first left stop, a correct group at the first middle stop, a correct group at the first right stop, an incorrect group at the first left stop, and an incorrect first stop at the middle. As explained in the section "Correct group" and "Incorrect group at right first stop", "1" reels 31 consist of symbols arranged in a "PB=1" arrangement, and the other "2" symbols. By setting the number of symbol combinations to be "16" consisting of symbols in which the symbols on the reels 31 are arranged "PB≠1", the "minor win A1 condition device" to "minor win F2 condition device" are operated. It is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at times.

That is, the condition devices included in the "middle first stop incorrect answer group" (small win A1 condition device, minor win A2 condition device, minor win B1 condition device, minor win B2 condition device, minor win E1 condition device, minor win E2 conditional device, small combination F1 conditional device, small combination F2 conditional device) is activated, the pressing order becomes incorrect at the time of the middle first stop. Then, regarding the symbol combination that enables the stop display at the middle first stop in the game when the condition device included in the "middle first stop incorrect answer group" is activated, the symbols of the middle reel 31 are arranged at "PB = 1" and There is one type (watermelon), and the symbols on the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both arranged "PB≠1".

In addition, in order to win the symbol combination (one) that can be stopped when the pushing order is correct in the game when the condition device included in the "middle first stop incorrect answer group" is activated, the "middle first stop" The number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) in the game when the conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group at pause" is activated is set to "2" for each conditional device ”.
This makes it possible to minimize the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed at the middle first stop in the game when the condition device included in the "incorrect answer group at middle first stop" is activated.
The “left first stop incorrect answer group” and the “right first stop incorrect answer group” are the same as the “middle first stop incorrect answer group”.

Here, in a conventional slot machine, a specification called an accelerator AT or the like is known. A slot machine equipped with this accelerator AT is provided with a plurality of types of push order bells, and is provided with a high bell and a low bell with different pattern combinations for each push order bell.
Note that the "high bell" means a bell with a large number of payouts, which is awarded when the pressing order is correct when the pressing order bell is won. In addition, the "low-priced bell" means a bell with a small number of payouts that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect when the pushing order bell is won.
In addition, during the non-internal and internal periods, a lottery is held for a role that includes all the bells in the order of pushing.In the game where each bell in the order of pushing is won, when the order of pushing is correct, the corresponding high bell wins and the order of pushing is determined. When the answer is incorrect, any corresponding low-level bell can be awarded without winning the high-level bell.

On the other hand, during the special game, the lottery for the pressing order bell is not performed, and instead, the lottery for the minor combination ALL, in which all the high-level bells and all the low-level bells are simultaneously won (double winning), is carried out. In the game in which the small win ALL is won, one of the higher bells wins.
Then, the winning probability of the minor winning combination ALL during the special game is set to be equal to or higher than the winning probability of each pressing order bell in the non-internal and internal modes, and the lottery result other than the winning of the minor winning combination ALL is set as non-winning, Or, it is set as a one-piece combination ALL winning in which all one-piece combinations are repeatedly won.
As a result, while making the winning probability of each high-level bell and each low-level bell during the special game equal to or higher than the winning probability of each high-level bell and low-level bell during the non-internal and internal modes, the player can medals are declining.

In addition, in this embodiment, by setting the winning probability of each pressing order bell (small combination A1 condition device to small combination F2 condition device) in non-internal and internal, to "2500/65536", each high eye bell The winning probability of (small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 06) is "5000/65536".
In addition, by setting the winning probability of the small winning combination ALL (small winning combination ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", each high-level bell (small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 06) is won during the special game. The probability is "5001/65536".
However, the winning probability of each minor combination during the special game may be set to be equal to or higher than the winning probability of each minor combination during the non-internal and internal modes. /65536".

By the way, the above-described conventional slot machine equipped with an accelerator AT is provided with a plurality of types of push order bells, and is provided with a high bell and a low bell with different symbol combinations for each push order bell. There have been problems that the total number of symbol combinations that can be stop-displayed when winning a regular bell is increased, and that the symbol combination corresponding to the high-order bell is difficult for the player to understand.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, by appropriately setting the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed in the game when the "minor combination A1 condition device" to "minor combination F2 condition device" are activated, respectively, Minimize the total number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed in the game when "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated, and correspond to "small win 01" to "small win 06" It is easy for the player to understand the stop result when the combination of symbols to be played is stop-displayed on the effective line.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment is advantageous/disadvantageous to the game result (the number of payouts) because the types of small wins to be won differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed in a game in which multiple types of small wins with different payout numbers are won. is generated, and the pattern arrangement is different from that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in the second embodiment.
In the pattern arrangement of the reel 31 in the second embodiment, the "bell" of the numbers "12" and "17" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. Replace the "2" and "7""bells" of the left reel 31 with "bell B", and replace all the "bells" of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A" It is a thing. Other than that, it is the same as the pattern arrangement of the reel 31 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, the "Bell" on the left reel 31 has the "PB=1" arrangement, but in the second embodiment, the "Bell A" on the left reel 31 has the "PB≠1" arrangement. , and "Bell B" on the left reel 31 are also arranged in "PB≠1". However, in the second embodiment, "Bell A" and "Bell B" on the left reel 31 are placed at "PB=1" by adding two symbols.

FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 are diagrams showing the types of combinations (such as combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the combination lottery means 61), symbol combinations, the number of payouts, and the like in this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the game states of this embodiment include non-inside, 1BB inside, and 1BB playing. Also, in this embodiment, there is only one type of special combination, ie, "1BB".
22 and 23, "during 1BB" indicates "during 1BB", and "during 1BB" indicates "during 1BB playing".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 01", "small winning combination 04" and "small winning combination 05" are obtained by replacing "bell" of the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 02" and "small winning combination 06" are the same as in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 03" replaces "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B", and "Bell" on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 in the first embodiment. " is replaced with "Bell A".

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 07" to "small win 10" are obtained by replacing "Bell" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".
The symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 11" to "small winning combination 14" are obtained by replacing "bell" of the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 15" is replaced with "Bell A" for "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment, and "Bell A" for "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment. is replaced with
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 16" is to replace "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "white BAR", and replace "bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A". is replaced with
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 17" replaces the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell B", and replaces the "Bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A". is replaced with
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 18" is to replace the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7" and replace the "bell" on the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A". is replaced with

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 19" to "small win 22" replace "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A/Bell B" in the middle reel 31 in the first embodiment. "Bell" is replaced with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 23" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 24" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with the "white BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 25" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with the "bell B".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 26" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 27" is obtained by replacing the "bell" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 28" is obtained by replacing the "bell" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "blue 7".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 29" is obtained by replacing the "bell" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 30" is obtained by replacing the "bell" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "white BAR".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 31" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 32" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with the "white BAR".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 33" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with the "bell B".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 34" is obtained by replacing "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 35" replaces the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A", and replaces the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "blue 7". ” is replaced with
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 36" replaces the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "white BAR", and replaces the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "blue 7". ” is replaced with

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 37" is to replace the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell B" and replace the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7". ” is replaced with
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 38" is that the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "red 7", and the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "red 7". ” is replaced with

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 39" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with the "bell A".
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 40" replaces "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "white BAR", and replaces "white BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "black BAR". ” is replaced with

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 41" replaces "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell B", and replaces "black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "white BAR". ” is replaced with
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 42" is obtained by replacing "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 43" replaces the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A" and replaces the "red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with the "white BAR." ” is replaced with
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 44" is that the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with the "white BAR", and the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with the "white BAR." ” is replaced with

The symbol combination corresponding to the "small winning combination 45" replaces the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell B", and replaces the "red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "black BAR." ” is replaced with
The symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 46" is to replace "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7" and replace "blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "black BAR." ” is replaced with

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small winning combination 47" to "small winning combination 82" and "replay" are the same as in the first embodiment.
The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is the same as the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" in the first embodiment.

Also, the "small combination condition device" and "replay condition device" are the same as in the first embodiment, and the "1BB condition device" is the same as the "1BB-A condition device" in the first embodiment. .

FIG. 24 is a diagram (number table) showing the numbers of winning numbers for each game state in the second embodiment.
In FIG. 24, "during 1BB" indicates "during 1BB", and "during 1BB" indicates "during 1BB playing".
As in the first embodiment, the winning probability of each winning number is obtained by dividing the set number shown in FIG. 24 by "65536".

As shown in FIG. 24, "small combination A1 condition device" to "small combination I condition device" are subject to lottery during non-inside and inside (during 1BB inside), but during 1BB (during 1BB game) Not eligible for lottery.
In addition, the "1-card combination ALL condition device" is a lottery target in all game states.
Furthermore, the "small combination ALL condition device" is a lottery target only during 1BB (during 1BB game), contrary to "small combination A1 condition device" to "small combination I condition device". Medium (inside 1BB) is not eligible for the lottery.

Furthermore, the "replay condition device" is a lottery target for non-internal and internal (1BB internal), as with "small hand A1 condition device" to "small hand I condition device", but in 1BB (1BB During play) is not eligible for the lottery.
In addition, the "1BB condition device" is a lottery target only in the non-internal state, and is not a lottery target in other game states.
In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in any game state, the lottery by the role lottery means 61 will win any one of the winning numbers "1" to "20" and will not be won. no.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing game state transitions in the second embodiment, and FIG. 26 is a diagram showing game state variation conditions in the present embodiment.
In FIG. 26, "∞" (infinite) in the number column indicates that no upper limit number of games is set for each game state. means to maintain (continue)

The main control means 50 determines whether or not the game state transition condition is satisfied every game, when all the reels 31 are stopped, and shifts the game state when it is determined that the game state transition condition is satisfied. Control.
First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-internal. When shipped from the factory, it shifts to non-internal. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off and the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered. At this time, initialization processing of the RWM 53 is executed, and the state shifts to the non-internal state.

During non-internal, it is maintained until the "1BB condition device" is activated.
Then, when the "1BB condition device" is activated (1BB win) while not inside, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is stopped and displayed on the active line (1BB winning), it shifts to "1BB game" (1BB activation). .
On the other hand, if the "1BB condition device" is activated during non-internal operation, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not stop-displayed on the active line, the operation shifts to "1BB internal operation".

In addition, when "inside 1BB" is not won by the combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" can be stopped and displayed on the active line.
However, in the present embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 never fails to win during "inside 1BB". Since there is no stop display during 1BB, it continues to maintain "inside 1BB".

Also, during the "during 1BB game", the "RB game" is continuously executed.
Furthermore, the “RB game” ends when “2” games are executed, “2” wins are made, or when the end condition of “1BB-A game” is satisfied.
Furthermore, the "1BB game" continues until the total number of medals obtained (the number of medals to be paid out and the number to be given) exceeds "210", and ends when the total number of medals obtained exceeds "210".

Then, when the "RB game" ends and the condition for ending the "1BB game" is not satisfied, the "RB game" is executed again.
In addition, when the "RB game" ends, when the end condition of the "1BB game" is satisfied, the "1BB game" ends and the process shifts to the non-internal state.
Furthermore, when the end condition of the "1BB game" is satisfied during the "RB game", the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB game" is ended to shift to the non-internal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the characteristic points of the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" or the like in the second embodiment is activated, and the reels when the "small win A1 condition device" or the like is activated 31 will be described.
Fig. 27 (1) is displayed at the first left stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, the left first stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and the left first stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing symbols on the left reel that can be stopped and displayed in the window;
FIG. 27(2) is a view showing symbols of the left reel that can be stop-displayed in the display window at the time of the left second stop after the middle first stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated.
In FIG. 27, the two-dot chain line passing through the middle left, middle middle, and middle right shows the effective line. The same applies to FIG. 29 to be described later.
In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "left, middle, right (123)" when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the number of sheets is given priority. , with a probability of "1/1", the symbol combination corresponding to the "small win 01" (PB = 1) is stopped on the effective line.
In addition, when the "small winning combination A1 conditional device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small winning combination 01". display.

As a result, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown on the left side of FIG. , "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row. As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the middle left row, and " There is a case where "Bell B" (No. 7) is stopped and displayed on the upper left.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5) and "Replay" (No. No. 6) and "Bell B" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of ``left and right middle (132)'' when the ``small win B1 condition device'' is activated, the ``small win B1 condition device'' symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to ``small winning combination 02'', which pays out ``10'' medals, which is the maximum value among the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to '', is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
In addition, when the "small winning combination B1 conditional device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, the "replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stopped in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small winning combination 02". display.

As a result, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown on the left side of FIG. , "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row. As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the middle left row, and " There is a case where "Bell B" (No. 7) is stopped and displayed on the upper left.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5) and "Replay" (No. No. 6) and "Bell B" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win C1 condition device" symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to ``small win 03'', which pays out ``10'' medals, which is the maximum value among the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to '', is stopped and displayed on the activated line.
Further, when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell A" (PB=1) of the intermediate reel 31 is moved to the middle middle row (effective line) in order to win the "small winning combination 03". After that, at the second stop on the left, "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the left reel 31 ("PB=1" arrangement in total of 2 symbols) is placed on the left in order to win "Small Win 03". Stop display in the middle (effective line).

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the middle first stop, as shown on the left side of FIG. There is a case where "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed on the lower left row, "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed on the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed on the upper left row, As shown on the right side of FIG. 27(2), "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row. , the "watermelon" (8th) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left.

That is, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12) and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6) and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 (No. 8) and "Watermelon" (No. 8) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 are not displayed. 5) is also not stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

When the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left center right (123)", "small win 63" is given with a probability of "1/8" due to the number priority. Alternatively, the symbol combination corresponding to "small combination 64" (one coin is paid out) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
Further, at the left first stop when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, "Replay" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is performed in order to win "small win 63" or "small win 64". A stop display is displayed in the left middle row.

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown on the left side of FIG. , "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row. As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped in the middle left row, and " There is a case where "Bell B" (No. 7) is stopped and displayed on the upper left.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11) and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5) and "Replay" (No. No. 6) and "Bell B" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In this way, when the "small combination A1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop is activated, when the "small combination B1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop is activated, and when the "small combination C1 condition device" is activated, the left first At the time of stop, as shown in FIG. 27(1), "black BAR" (10th), "replay" (11th) and "bell A" (12th) on the left reel 31, or "red bar" on the left reel 31 7” (No. 5), “Replay” (No. 6) and “Bell B” (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating condition device (lottery result of the combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the pattern of the left reel 31 stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of left first stop. .

Further, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the middle first stop, as shown in FIG. " (No. 12) and "Watermelon" (No. 13), or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7) and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 are stopped in the display window 18. Displayable. In this case, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" on the left reel 31 are not displayed. (No. 5) is also not stopped and displayed in the display window 18 .
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) and the left second stop after the middle first stop (when the pushing order is correct) Different symbols on the reels 31 are stopped and displayed in the display window 18.例文帳に追加

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the pattern is different from the pattern (bell) of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 03", and "Replay", which is a symbol of "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is stop-displayed on the activated line.
As a result, it is possible not to miss the "replay" on the left reel 31, and it is possible to prevent "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line. It is possible to prevent the small winning combination 03 from winning.

Furthermore, the pattern of the left reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 63" and "small winning combination 64" is one type of "replay", and the pattern of the right reel 31 constituting the "small winning combination 63" and "small winning combination 64" is one type. The pattern is one type of "Red 7".
In this way, the types of symbols of the left reel 31 and the right reel 31, which constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed at the time of the left first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect) when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, are set respectively. By using one type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability that the ``red 7'' of the middle reel 31 constituting the ``minor win 63'' and the ``minor win 64'' can be stopped and displayed on the active line is ``1/4''. The probability that ``Blue 7'' of the middle reel 31 constituting the ``small winning combination 64'' can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also ``1/4'', and constitutes the ``small winning combination 63'' and the ``small winning combination 64''. The probability that "Red 7" on the right reel 31 can be stopped and displayed on the active line is also "1/4".
As a result, it is possible to reduce the winning probability (acquisition rate) of the one-piece role when the pressing order is incorrect when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated, and eventually the ball output rate per game can be reduced. Since it can be lowered, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In addition, at the first stop on the left when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, ``Cherry'' on the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the second stop on the left after the first stop during the operation of the ``small win C1 condition device''. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much.

Although the first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the second embodiment, the "12" and "17""bells" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A", and the "2" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment ” and “7” are replaced with “Bell B”, and all “Bells” of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with “Bell A”. , but not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 28, "replay" of numbers "11" and "16" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "replay A", and "1" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "replay". ' and '6' may be replaced with 'replay B'.
Also, "cherry" of numbers "9" and "14" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "cherry A", and "cherry" of number "4" of the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "cherry". It may be replaced with "cherry B".

Furthermore, all "Replay" of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "Replay A", and all "Cherry" of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "Cherry A". can be replaced with
Other than that, the pattern arrangement of the reel 31 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2 is the same.
In the first embodiment, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", but in the modified example shown in FIG. 28, "Replay A" on the left reel 31 is arranged in "PB≠1". , and “Replay B” on the left reel 31 is also arranged in “PB≠1”. However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 28, "Replay A" and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 are placed at "PB=1" by adding two symbols.

In addition, since the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the winning combination in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 can be appropriately replaced.
For example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is "replay A/replay B"-"bell"-"watermelon", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" is "replay A/replay B". - "Cherry" - "Replay A".
Also, even if the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the minor combination condition device, the replay condition device, and the 1BB condition device can be the same as in the first embodiment.

Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, middle, right (123)" when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the "small win The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 01" that pays out the maximum "10" medals out of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "A1 condition device" is stop-displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "small winning combination A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, "replay A" or "replay B"("PB = 1” arrangement) is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown on the left side of FIG. , ``Replay A'' (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and the ``Bell'' (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row. As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped at the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (No. 7) is stopped and displayed on the upper left.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay A" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5) and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

Also, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left and right middle (132)" when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the "small win B1 The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 02" that pays out the maximum "10" medals out of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "conditional device" is stop-displayed on the activated line.
In addition, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, in order to win the "small win 02", the left reel 31 "replay A" or "replay B"("PB = 1” arrangement) is stopped and displayed in the middle left row (effective line).

As a result, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown on the left side of FIG. , ``Replay A'' (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and the ``Bell'' (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row. As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped at the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (No. 7) is stopped and displayed on the upper left.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay A" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5) and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left and right (213)" when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win C1 The symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to the "small winning combination 03" that pays out the maximum "10" medals out of the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the "conditional device" is stop-displayed on the activated line.
In addition, when the "small winning combination C1 condition device" is activated, the "bell" (PB=1) of the intermediate reel 31 is stopped at the middle middle stage (effective line) in order to win the "small winning combination 03". After that, at the second stop on the left, the "bell" (PB=1) of the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row (effective line) in order to win the "small win 03".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the middle first stop, as shown on the left side of FIG. is stop-displayed in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 is stop-displayed in the upper left row, As shown on the right side of FIG. 29(2), "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row. , the "watermelon" (8th) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper left.

That is, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12) and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 (No. 8) and "Watermelon" (No. 8) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" on the left reel 31 are not displayed. ” (No. 5) is also not stopped and displayed in the display window 18 .

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, center, right (123)" when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "small win The symbol combination corresponding to "63" or "small win 64" (both of which are paid out one card) is stopped and displayed on the active line.
In addition, when the "small win C1 conditional device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, "replay A" or "replay B" of the left reel 31 is performed in order to make it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64". ("PB=1" arrangement by combining two symbols) is stopped and displayed in the middle left row.

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop is performed, as shown on the left side of FIG. , ``Replay A'' (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and the ``Bell'' (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row. As shown on the right side, "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is stopped at the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is stopped on the middle left row, and There is a case where "Bell" (No. 7) is stopped and displayed on the upper left.
That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay A" (No. 11) and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5) and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 (No. 6) and "Bell" (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.

In this way, when the "small combination A1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop is activated, when the "small combination B1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop is activated, and when the "small combination C1 condition device" is activated, the left first At the time of stop, as shown in FIG. 29(1), "black BAR" (10th), "replay A" (11th) and "bell" (12th) on the left reel 31, or "red bar" on the left reel 31 7” (No. 5), “Replay B” (No. 6) and “Bell” (No. 7) can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating condition device (lottery result of the combination lottery means 61) from being guessed from the position of the pattern of the left reel 31 stopped and displayed in the display window 18 at the time of left first stop. .

Further, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the time of the left second stop after the middle first stop, as shown in FIG. " (No. 12) and "Watermelon" (No. 13), or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7) and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 are stopped in the display window 18 Displayable. In this case, "Cherry A" (9th) and "Black BAR" (10th) on the left reel 31 are not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (4th) and "Red" on the left reel 31 are not displayed. 7” (No. 5) is also not stopped and displayed in the display window 18.
In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) and the left second stop after the middle first stop (when the pushing order is correct) Different symbols on the reels 31 are stopped and displayed in the display window 18.例文帳に追加

Then, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the pattern is different from the pattern (bell) of the left reel 31 constituting the "small win 03", and "Replay A" or "Replay B", which is a symbol arranged at "PB=1", is stopped and displayed on the active line on the left reel 31 by combining two symbols.
As a result, it is possible to prevent ``Replay A'' or ``Replay B'' on the left reel 31 from being missed, and it is possible to prevent ``Bell'' on the left reel 31 from being stop-displayed on the activated line. It is possible to prevent the small winning combination 03 from winning.

In addition, at the first stop on the left when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, at the first stop on the left when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, and at the second stop on the left after the first stop during the operation of the "small win C1 condition device", the "cherry A" of the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18, "CHERRY B" is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18 either. Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, "Cherry A" of the left reel 31 is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18 even at the second stop on the left after the first stop in the middle. "CHERRY B" is not stopped and displayed in the display window 18 either. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much.

(2) In the first and second embodiments, the middle line is the effective line, but the effective line is not limited to the middle line, and the number of effective lines is not limited to "1".
For example, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, it is possible to set upper lines as valid lines and other lines as invalid lines.
Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" can be "bell"-"replay"-"cherry". In this case, when the "small winning combination 01" is won, as shown in FIG. ), “Bell”-“Bell”-“Bell” is stopped and displayed, so that the stop number can be the same as when “small win 01” is won in the first embodiment.

Similarly, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" can be "bell"-"bell"-"bell". In this case, when the "small winning combination 02" is won, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make the stop number the same as when the "small combination 02" is won.
Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" can be "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon". In this case, when the "small win 03" is won, as shown in FIG. 30(3), "watermelon"-"replay"-"watermelon" are stopped on the upper line (valid line), and the middle line (invalid line) is displayed. Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stop result can be the same as when "Small Win 03" is won in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" can be "cherry"-"replay"-"bell". In this case, when the "small winning combination 04" is won, as shown in FIG. ), “Bell”-“Bell”-“Bell” is stopped and displayed, so that the stop number can be the same as when “small win 04” is won in the first embodiment.
Further, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" can be "cherry"-"replay"-"cherry". In this case, when "small win 05" is won, as shown in FIG. 31(2), "Cherry"-"Replay"-"Cherry" are stopped and displayed on the upper line (valid line), and a mountain line (invalid line) is displayed. Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stop result can be the same as when "small win 05" is won in the first embodiment.

Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" can be "cherry"-"watermelon"-"cherry". In this case, when the "small win 06" is won, as shown in FIG. 31(3), "Cherry"-"Watermelon"-"Cherry" are stopped on the upper line (valid line), and the lower line (invalid line). Since "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is displayed in a stopped state, the stop result can be the same as when "small win 06" is won in the first embodiment.

Also, for example, the lower line can be set as the effective line, or the lower right line can be set as the effective line.
Further, for example, "5" lines, ie, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upward-sloping line, and the downward-sloping line can be set as effective lines.

(3) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, that is, "3" reels 31 are provided, but the number of reels 31 is not limited to "3". .
For example, "four" reels 31, ie, a first reel 31, a second reel 31, a third reel 31 and a fourth reel 31, may be arranged side by side. In this case, "4" stop switches 42 from the first stop switch 42 to the fourth stop switch 42 can be provided corresponding to the "4" reels 31, respectively.

(4) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of payouts for the small winning combination that wins when the pressing order is correct when operating the "small combination A1 condition device" to "small combination F2 condition device" is set to "10". However, the number is not limited to this, and for example, the number may be "8" or "15".
(5) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the payout number of the small combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect when the "small combination A1 condition device" to "small combination F2 condition device" are activated is "1". However, the number is not limited to this, and may be, for example, "2" or "3".

(6) In the first and second embodiments, there are 12 conditional devices from "minor combination A1 conditional device" to "minor combination F2 conditional device" as conditional devices that give advantage/disadvantage to the game result depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. Although the types are provided, they are not limited to this, and may be, for example, six types of "minor combination A condition device" to "minor combination F condition device".
(7) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 during operation of the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is "left middle right", "left middle right", There are six options: "center left and right", "center right left", "right left center", and "right center left". ', 'first stop is inside, second and third stops are optional', and 'first stop is right, second and third stops are optional'.

(8) In the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning number "1" (small winning combination A1 condition device) and the winning number "2" By setting the winning probabilities of conditional device) to "2500/65536" respectively, the winning probability of "small win 01" in non-internal and internal is set to "5000/65536".
Similarly, by setting the winning probability of winning number "3" (minor combination B1 condition device) to winning number "12" (minor combination F2 condition device) in non-internal and internal to "2500/65536" respectively , the winning probabilities of "small win 02" to "small win 06" in non-internal and internal are set to "5000/65536", respectively.
In addition, by setting the winning probability of the winning number "17" (small combination ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", the winning of "small combination 01" to "small combination 06" during the special game. The probability was set to "5001/65536" respectively.

However, the winning probability of each minor combination during the special game may be set to be equal to or higher than the winning probability of each minor combination during the non-internal and internal modes. ), that is, the winning probability of “small winning combination 01” to “small winning combination 06” during the special game may be set to “5000/65536”, for example.

(9) In the first and second embodiments, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won ("small combination A1 condition device" to "small combination F2 condition device" is activated) is "left middle right", " There are 6 options: left, right, center, left, right, center, right, left, right, left, and right, center, and left. In the above-described embodiment, "small win 01" to "small win 06") are awarded.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, three types of "small winning combination 01" to "small winning combination 03" may be used. Then, when the pressing order is correct when operating "small combination A1 condition device", "small combination A2 condition device", "small combination B1 condition device" and "small combination B2 condition device"("left middle right" or "left middle right" ”), “small win 01” may be awarded. Similarly, when the pressing order is correct when operating "small combination C1 condition device", "small combination C2 condition device", "small combination D1 condition device" and "small combination D2 condition device"("middle left and right" or "middle right left ”), “small win 02” may be awarded. Also, when the pressing order is correct when activating "small role E1 condition device", "small role E2 condition device", "small role F1 condition device" and "small role F2 condition device"("right left middle" or "right middle left ”), “small win 03” may be awarded.

In this case, the winning probability of each minor combination during the special game may be set to be equal to or higher than the winning probability of each minor combination during non-internal and internal. When the winning probability of winning number "12" (small combination F2 condition device) to winning number "12" (small combination F2 condition device) is set to "2500/65536" respectively, winning number "17" (small combination ALL condition device) during the special game winning probability can be set to, for example, "10000/65536".

(10) In the first and second embodiments, the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won ("small combination A1 condition device" to "small combination F2 condition device" is activated) is "left middle right", " There are six options: left-right middle, middle left-right, middle right-left, right-left middle, and right-center left. 3 stops are optional" (left --), "1st stop is middle, 2nd and 3rd stops are optional" (middle --), "1st stop is right, 2nd and 3rd stops are optional" ” (Right--).

In this case, as the pressing order bell, "left --" is the correct pressing order, "left correct bell condition device", "middle --" is the correct pressing order, "middle correct bell condition device", "right --" ” can be provided as a “right correct bell condition device” in which the correct answer is pressed.
Then, when the "left correct bell condition device" is activated, "small role 01" is awarded when the pressing order is correct, and when the "middle correct bell condition device" is activated, "small role 02" is awarded, and "right" is awarded. When the correct answer bell condition device is activated, the "small win 03" may be awarded.
In this case, the winning probabilities of the winning numbers corresponding to the ``left correct bell condition device'', ``middle correct bell condition device'' and ``right correct bell condition device'' in non-internal and internal are set to ``5000/65536'' respectively. If so, the winning probability of the winning number corresponding to the "minor combination ALL condition device" during the special game can be set to, for example, "5000/65536".

(11) In the first and second embodiments, a slot machine was taken as an example of gaming machines, but the present invention can also be applied to casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), for example.
Here, the sealed game machine (medal-less game machine) can eliminate, for example, the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37). Also, the medal slot 43 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) granted by winning a winning combination are stored in the stored number display LED 76 . In this case, it is conceivable that the stored number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (up to "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided.
The door switch 17 , setting key switch 152 , and setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when turning on/off the power.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning on the power", "turning on the power", or "resuming the supply of power".
Also, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects opening of the front door 12 and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 .
The front door 12 is normally closed. However, the front door 12 is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are supplied, and the like.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on. Thereby, the opening of the front door 12 can be detected.
The door switch 17 is turned on when the front door 12 is closed, and is turned off when the front door 12 is open. Opening may be detected.

The setting key switch 152 is in a setting change state in which setting values can be changed (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting changing") or in a setting confirmation state in which setting values cannot be changed but can be confirmed ("setting confirmation mode"). Alternatively, it is also referred to as "setting checking".).
By inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 is turned on (also referred to as "first mode"), and the setting key is turned on from this state. The setting key switch 152 is set to be turned off (also referred to as "second mode") by rotating it counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

A setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that also serves as the setting change switch 153 , the reset switch 153 , and the RWM clear switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state.
Also, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to return to the state before the error occurrence (to cancel the error state) after removing the error that has occurred.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 .

In the following description, the term "setting change (reset) switch 153", the "setting change switch 153", the "reset switch 153", and the "RWM clear switch 153" will be used. have
Various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 are called "operated" when they are in an on state, and "operated" when they are in an off state. There are cases where it is referred to as "not
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are integrated. may

In addition, in the third embodiment, the "game section" includes a "normal section" and an "advantageous section".
The “normal section” is a game section that prohibits the transmission of signals related to the instruction function to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80) and does not affect the performance of the instruction function at all (the instruction function is not activated) is a game section. That is, the normal section is a game section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified. In addition, there is a case where the normal section is referred to as a "non-advantageous section".
The “advantageous section” is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). That is, the advantageous section is a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (for example, correct pressing order) can be notified.

Further, in the third embodiment, an advantageous section display LED 77 is provided which can indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section. In a normal section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, and in an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. That is, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, it indicates that it is a normal section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates that it is an advantageous section. Thus, in the third embodiment, the display mode (turned off or lit) of the advantageous section display LED 77 and the game section (normal section or advantageous section) correspond to each other in a one-to-one relationship.
For example, as shown in FIG. 31, the segment P of the digit 4a of the acquisition number display LED78 can be used as the advantageous section display LED77. Also, an advantageous section display LED 77 can be provided separately from the acquired number display LED 78 .

It should be noted that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on immediately after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42). When the notification is started), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit. In this case, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates an advantageous section, but when the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit, it may be a normal section or an advantageous section.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating configurations of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
A main CPU 55 , an RWM 53 and a ROM 54 are provided on the main control board 50 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and a main CPU 55 is provided in this chip. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory has a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53 . Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are consecutive.

The storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and a non-used area, and the used area and the non-used area each have a control area and a data area.
Here, the "usage area" is a storage area in which information related to progress of the game is stored.
A "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also called a "program area".
Furthermore, the "data area" is a storage area in which information other than the program is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when the program is executed is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a storage area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. This is a storage area in which programs, etc. for fraud prevention are stored.
In addition, the "outside use area" has a control area and a data area like the use area. The control area of the used area may be called "first control area" or "first program area", and the control area outside the used area may be called "second control area" or "second program area".
Furthermore, the program stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the use area is called "first program", and the control area outside the use area (second control area, second program area) The program stored in is sometimes referred to as a "second program".

During the execution of the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54, reference (access) to the data stored in the data area of the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, but the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted. Referencing data stored in the external data area is prohibited.
Similarly, during the execution of the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the use area of the ROM 54, reference to the data stored in the data area outside the use area of the ROM 54 is permitted. Reference to data stored in the data area of the used area is prohibited.

Like the ROM 54, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and a non-used area, and the used area and the non-used area each have a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 32, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are used areas. F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are outside the use area.

During the execution of the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54, the data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 are permitted to be referenced (accessed) and rewritten (overwritten). However, data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced, but prohibited to be rewritten.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the use area of the ROM 54 is being executed, the data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced and rewritten. , and RWM 53, reference is allowed, but rewriting is prohibited. This is to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

In addition, in order to prevent data in the used area of the RWM 53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to program runaway or the like during execution of a program (second program) outside the used area, the used area of the RWM 53 is An unused area is provided between and outside the used area.
Furthermore, if interrupt processing enters during execution of a program (second program) outside the usage area, there is a possibility that the data in the usage area of the RWM 53 will be rewritten (overwritten) by the interrupt processing. Interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of (second program).

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the use area and the non-use area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 32, the RWM 53 has an unused area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.

Furthermore, among the storage areas of the internal memory as a whole, areas other than the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 include an internal register area, an unused area, and the like.
Further, the built-in register area is provided with, for example, A registers to L registers, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32, the addresses of the used area are set in the range from "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)".
Note that the data shown in FIG. 33 is for use in the explanation of the third embodiment, and the data stored in the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for set value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, it has set values "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0 (H)" to "5 (H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

The address "F001(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000(H)". Then, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the set value data (_NB_RANK) is stored at the address "F001 (H)" as the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, there are setting values "1" to "6", and "0(D)" to "5(D)" are stored in the address "F000(H)" as setting value data (_NB_RANK). Any value is stored, and any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" is stored as set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" , the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is displayed on the set value display LED 73 as the set value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit amount data is data to be displayed on the credit amount display LED 76 . In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the credit amount into a decimal number is stored as the credit amount data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored at address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , is data for displaying the upper digits (“2” in this example) of the number of credits. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the data value to be stored is in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit amount data itself is not provided, and the credit amount data is provided as the display data of the credit amount display LED 76 .

The address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). Acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 . In the acquisition amount data, similarly to the credit amount data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digits. Data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored as the winning number data in order to display the payout number corresponding to the winning minor winning combination on the winning number display LED 78.例文帳に追加Specifically, when a small win is won and medals are paid out, the win number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the win number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "01".

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" described later, for example, "8 (H)" is stored when an 8-card hand is won, and the payout number data is stored at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8"→"7"→...→"0".
On the other hand, the winning number data stored at the address "F011(H)" is "0"→"1"→"2"→ . . . , "1" is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 also counts up like "0"→"1"→"2"→...→"8".

In addition, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during setting change display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the winning number display LED 78, it is possible to recognize from the front side of the game machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (that there is no segment that cannot be lit).
Since the upper limit of the payout number of medals is 15, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is not the display of the payout number.

Furthermore, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to bet in the game this time) is satisfied, the number of acquired medals is displayed before the game starts (before betting becomes possible or the start switch 41 is operated). A specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) on the display LED 78 .
In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 to indicate the prescribed number "2". Therefore, when instructing the specified number, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data.

Furthermore, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Therefore, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data.
For example, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the pressing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED78.

Also, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data.
For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

The address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the action status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replays and accessories are operating.
For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1". Further, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. When a minor winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored, and medal payout processing is executed. Here, the payout number data is subtracted by "1" each time one medal is paid out ("1" is added to the number of credits or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. Thus, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041(H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the medal payout number update process of the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the relevant game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game when the winning combination is not won, the payout number data buffer is stored. "0" is overwritten.

The address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet upon winning a replay, and stores "2" or "3" in this embodiment.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, one of "0" to "3" is stored.

The address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which the status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in FIG. 36A, which will be described later, in the third embodiment, a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, and an input LED 79d are provided on the display substrate 75 as status display LEDs 79. It has six LEDs, a display LED 79e and a replay display LED 79f.
The state display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not three of the six LEDs, the game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f, should be lit.

As shown in FIG. 33, the D0 bit of the status display LED lighting data is assigned to the game start display LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the insertion display LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay display LED 79f. there is Each bit of the status display LED lighting data matches each bit of the LED display counter 1 in FIG. 40(A), which will be described later.
Then, "1" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and "0" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, when the game start display LED 79d is turned on and the insertion display LED 79e and replay display LED 79f are turned off, "00000001 (B)" is stored as the state display LED lighting data.

The address "F051(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which of digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated for each interrupt.
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display. Of the digits of this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digits of the credit number (stored number) display LED 76 and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76 . Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78 , digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 , and digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73 .
As for each bit of the LED display counter 1, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 2 signal, . . . , and the D4 bit to the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 1 takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 1 updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 so as to shift the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 to the right by one digit as it progresses from interrupt "1"→"2"→... (for each interrupt). . In addition, in the interrupt following the interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting it to the right by one digit. Set counter 1 to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of the LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, the digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are extinguished). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED D78) can be lit (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are extinguished). Become.

The address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value corresponding to normal operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation.
In the third embodiment, the value "00001111 (B)" is taken because digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit during normal operation. During setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000 (B)".

Address "F061(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" in the normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED flag is "1".
The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on.
Specifically, first, there are cases where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on when transitioning to the advantageous section, but is turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit when transitioning to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on once. The advantageous section may end without lighting.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct pressing order is notified) in a game state in which the interval Sim is in an advantageous interval and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", the advantageous interval is displayed. LED 77 is lit.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
Further, during the game end check processing in the final game of the advantageous interval, processing for turning off the advantageous interval display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied, the advantageous interval display LED flag storage area is initialized (the advantageous interval display LED flag is cleared). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the instruction function is activated is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating, the reel 31 until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
3) when at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating;
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game is finished) and before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the instruction function is activated, it is necessary to determine the winning combination in the game, so the time before the start switch 41 is operated (before the combination lottery) is excluded. .
When the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in the game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery for the winning combination is executed. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

The address "F063(H)" is the storage area for the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous interval clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous interval. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Also, the advantageous interval clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous interval but also during the normal interval. However, the minimum value is "0". Therefore, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", even if "1" is subtracted, the value after subtraction is "0". Therefore, during the normal section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game is shifted to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at maximum, and thus consists of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter, it is an advantageous interval.

The address "F065(H)" is the storage area for the difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference number counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the number of difference coins during the advantageous interval, and is also called "MY counter".
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets, but stores the "value corresponding to" the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference number counter consists of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets at least during the advantageous interval, and it is not necessary to count during the non-advantageous interval (normal interval).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in the advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section for each game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the update of the difference counter value is executed including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section every game, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number becomes negative in the game this time and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number becomes the carry-down data, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is the data that is carried down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (assuming that the difference number counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
3rd game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference number counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
Fifth game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
is updated as
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value reflecting the difference of the game is changed again. Since it is a calculated result, such a case also corresponds to "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the post-calculation difference counter value is a value that has undergone a carry-down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). A method of determining whether or not a digit has been digitized will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this manner, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses, for example, when the number of payouts is large relative to the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when a payout based on a winning of a small combination is made, but after that, the number of payouts is increased. falls below the number of bets, it eventually becomes "0".

The address "F067(H)" is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and this is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46, which will be described later. Also, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final AT game, which is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50), which will be described later. Further, the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

The address "F068(H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, the AT game number counter stops counting (decrementing) after it reaches "0".
The update (subtraction) of the AT game number counter during AT is after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) (step S281 in FIG. 46).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is maximum "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), the initial value is set to the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by a lottery or the like when AT is won. Moreover, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT, the number of AT games may be added, and when winning an additional lottery, the number of AT games may be increased. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.
This AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is exemplified, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is set. Also, when winning the addition, the number of additional winnings is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.

A 48-byte storage area at addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is a stack area of the used area.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "role ratio monitor" or a "ratio indicator", and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9 in order from the left).
Also, of the four LEDs constituting the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs (digits 6 and 7) on the left side are also called "identification segments" and display the type of information. The two LEDs (digits 8 and 9) on the right are also called "ratio segments" and display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Identification segment upper digit Digit 7: Identification segment lower digit Digit 8: Ratio segment upper digit Digit 9: Ratio segment lower digit There are cases where these are also referred to.

In the third embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information 1) to 6) as management information at predetermined time intervals.
1) Directed role ratio (cumulative) (7P.)
2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role ratio (cumulative) (7A.)
6) Accessory condition ratio (total) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the role ratio (total), when the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the role ratio (total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Show on ratio segment.
Here, "total" refers to the total sum of the numbers that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the number of games is counted until it reaches at least "175000" games.
When the total number of games is less than "175000", the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment by blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment by lighting display, for example.
Even after the cumulative number of games reaches "175000" or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Also, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets of "400" games for one set.

The "instruction-including role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the role is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, by the total number of payouts.
In the case of a slot machine in which no role is installed, the "indicated role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
In addition, the sum total of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated is counted by the instructed role product counter.

Regarding "the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated", for example, when a 15-piece combination is won based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated. adds the number of payouts "15" to the instructed accessory counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
For example, during a 1BB game, the minor combination condition device A1 to minor combination A6 condition device is activated, and the instruction function is activated (the correct order of pressing (the order of pressing the winning combination of 15 cards) is displayed). When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order (correct pressing order), and a 15-card combination (any of the small winning combination 01 to the small winning combination 06) is won, it is paid out to the instructed role counter and total payout (cumulative) counter. Add the number "15".

On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order from the displayed order, for example, when a 3-card combination is won, the instruction-inclusive accessory counter and the total payout ( Cumulative) Add the number of payouts "3" to the counter.
For example, in a game in which the minor combination condition device A1 to minor combination A6 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (the correct pressing order is displayed), the pressing order different from the displayed pressing order (incorrect pressing order order) and the stop switch 42 is operated, so when a 3-card combination (any of the 13th to 24th minor combination) is won, the number of payouts "3" ” is added.

In addition, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order from the displayed order of pushes, and the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the indicated role counter and The total payout (cumulative) counter has the same value as the previous game.
For example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the wrong answer, the combination is not won (no combination is won). Then, in a game in which the minor combination condition device A1 to minor combination A6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (correct pressing order is displayed), the pressing order different from the displayed pressing order (incorrect pressing order) When the stop switch 42 is operated in order), the winning combination is lost (when the combination is not won), the values of the instructed role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter become the same values as in the previous game. .

In the present embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order than the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated, and the winning combination is missed, the instructed accessory counter and the total payout are displayed. By executing the process of adding the payout number "0" to the (total) counter, the values of both counters are set to the same values as in the previous game.
When a winning combination is missed, the process of adding the number of payouts may be skipped. In other cases, it is necessary to configure the program so as to skip the process of adding the number of payouts.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is lost, a process of adding the payout number "0" to both counters is executed. As a result, the values of both counters can be set to the same values as in the previous game without inserting the process of judging whether or not the winning combination has been missed, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 can be reduced and the processing of the main CPU 55 can be performed. The burden can also be reduced.

"Continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the first class special bonus (RB) to the total number of payouts.
For example, when the total number of payouts in the number of games played is "6000" is "2000", and the number of payouts when the "first class special bonus (RB)" is activated is "500". Ratio (6000 games)” becomes “25 (%)”.

"Accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory to the total number of payouts.
Here, the "accessories" are, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special-accessories (RB), second-class special-accessories (CB) and MB (also referred to as 2BB). Equipment. CB is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.

The "accessory item state ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous actuating device is activated, by the total number of games played.
Further, the total sum of the number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuously actuating device is activated is counted by the accessory state counter.
In addition, in the above six items, if the game machine does not have the function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "--".
For example, if "RB (first class special role)" is not provided, there is no continuous role ratio, so when ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is set to "-- ” lights up.

According to the regulations, the instructed role ratio should be set to less than 70%, the role ratio to less than 70%, the continuous role ratio to less than 60%, and the role ratio to less than 50%. there is
By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the range defined by the regulations.

In addition, in order to make it possible for a device external to the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 200, to grasp the various ratio information, the various ratio information may be output as an external signal.
For example, the designated role ratio data, continuous role ratio (cumulative) data, role ratio (cumulative) data, and role ratio state ratio data displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) are used as external signals. It may be configured to enable output. At this time, a predetermined number of games (for example, "17500 times" for the continuous role ratio (cumulative) data and the role ratio (cumulative) data, the instructed role ratio data, and the role condition ratio data , "175,000 times", etc.) is not satisfied, predetermined information different from the current ratio information (eg, "FF (H)", etc.) is output as an external signal, and a predetermined number of games is output. When the conditions are satisfied, various ratio information may be output as an external signal.
Furthermore, the advantageous section ratio data, which is not displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), may be configured to be output as an external signal. In this case, an advantageous interval game number counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous interval and a storage area for advantageous interval ratio data indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the advantageous interval to the total number of games may be provided outside the use area of the RWM 53 .

34 and 35 are diagrams showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 in the third embodiment.
The addresses outside the use area are set in the range of "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", as shown in FIG.
The data shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 are used in the explanation of the third embodiment, and the data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 are not limited to these.

The 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" adds the number of games played at 400 games. This 400 game counter is a counter that cycles from "0" to "399 (D)" and is incremented by "1" each time a game is played. When "1" is added when the value of the 400 game counter is "399 (D)", the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0".

Contrary to the above, "399 (D)" may be set as the initial value of the 400 game counter, and "1" may be subtracted each time the game is played. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been executed. When "1" is subtracted when the value of the 400 game counter is "0", the initial value "399 (D)" is set to the 400 game counter.

The ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)" is for designating to which ring buffer the number of payout medals is added when medals are paid out in the game.
Specifically, at the address "F212(H)", any one of "0" to "14(D)" is stored as the ring buffer number.

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are storage areas of total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG. The total payout ring buffers 0-14 consist of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", where address "F213(H)" is the lower digit and address "F214(H)" is the upper digit. In FIGS. 34 and 35, the lowest address number is displayed for the storage area with the number of bytes of "2" or more.

One ring buffer stores the total number of payouts for 400 games. For example, the payout numbers for the 1st game to the 400th game are stored in the addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", and the next payout numbers for the 401st game to the 800th game are stored in the address "F215 ( H)” and “F216(H)”.
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400th game counter at the address "F210(H)". Further, it is determined by referring to the ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)" to which ring buffer value the number of medals to be paid out in the game is added (the value is updated).

When the total number of payouts from the 1st game to the 400th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at the addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total number from the 5601st game to the 6000th game is stored. The payout number is stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is cleared. is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Each of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 consists of 2 bytes. Assuming that the maximum number of payouts in one game is "15", the maximum number of payouts in 400 games is 6000, so the storage capacity is 2 bytes.
This point also applies to the continuous bonus ring buffers 0 to 14 and the bonus bonus ring buffers 0 to 14, which will be described later.

Further, the addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are storage areas of the continuous award payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Furthermore, the addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are storage areas of the prize payout ring buffers 0 to 14, respectively.

The total number-of-games counter of addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter for storing the number of games played (accumulated), and consists of 3 bytes. Since it is necessary to count "175000 (D)" games as the total number of games played, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes.
The total number of games counter continues counting even after the number of games exceeds "175000 (D)" games, and stops counting when 3 bytes are full ("FFFFFF (H)").

The instructed role product counter of the addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the role product is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, Consists of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter of addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of payouts of medals during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game in 6,000 games, the total number is 90,000. The same applies to the payout (6000 times) counter).

The continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter of the addresses “F276(H)” to “F278(H)” is a counter for counting the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated during 6000 games.
The accessory payout (6000 times) counter of addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during 6000 games.

Then, when there is a payout while the continuous accessory is not operating and the accessory is not operating, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added), and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout are updated (added). (6000 times) The counter is not updated.
Further, when there is a payout while the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is activated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated. is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout during continuous accessory operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and the bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First, when there is a payout of medals from the first game to the 6000th game, the total payout (6000 times ) counter, continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, each payout number during 400 game times from before "400×15-1" game (5999 games) to before "400×15-400" game (5600 games) from the game is the total payout (6000 times) counter value, continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter value, and bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter value.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the game reaches the 6000th game, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous bonus payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts at the time of continuous role payout operation from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the continuous role payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous role payout (6000 times) counter.

Furthermore, similarly, when the 6000th game is reached, the value of the award payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the award payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the prize payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts during the operation of the accessory from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts for the following number of games played.
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game to "400" game Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game to "800" game Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game to "1200" game Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game to "1600" game Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game to "2000" game Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game to "2400" Game item Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game item to "2800" game item Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game item to "3200" game item Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game item to "3600" game item '' Game total payout ring buffer 9: ``3601'' game to ``4000'' game Total payout ring buffer 10: ``4001'' game to ``4400'' game Total payout ring buffer 11: ``4401'' game to `` 4800" game total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game to "5200" game Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game to "5600" game Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game to "6000" game

Then, assuming that the 6000th game has been completed, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of payouts for each number of games.
Also, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0-14 match.
Let Σ1 be the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time, and Z1 be the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0.
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1-Z1
perform the operation of
again,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
perform the operation of
That is, the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts for 400 games from 5999 (400×15−1) games to 5600 (400×15−400) games is changed to the total payout ( 6000 times) A process of subtracting from the value "Σ1" stored in the counter is executed.

Next, a process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts for 400 games from 5999 (400×15−1) games to 5600 (400×15−400) games. to run.
After such calculation, the 6001st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts for the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “6001” game to “6400” game Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game to “800” game :
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game to "6000" game, and "6001" game to "6400" game

Similarly to the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is Σ2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then:
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2-Z2
and
and,
total payout ring buffer 1=0
and
After such calculation, the 6401st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above processing is repeated.

Also, although the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described, the same processing as above is performed when the role product is activated or when the continuous role product is activated.
Specifically, when the role product is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the role product payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the role product payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the process. Incidentally, when the accessory is activated, as described above, one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when the continuous accessory is operated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter. process. In addition, at the time of continuous role product operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, any of the role product payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the role product payout (6000 times) counter Also update.

The total payout (cumulative) counter of addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175000 (D)" games. .
Similarly, the continuous bonus payout (cumulative) counter for the addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of payouts when the continuous bonus is activated. At least "175000 (D)" counts the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory operation during the game.

Furthermore, in the same way, the bonus payout (total) counter for the addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts when the bonus is activated. "175000 (D)" Counts the number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory during the game.
Note that the three types of payout (6000 times) counters described above subtract the number of payouts from before 5999 games to before 5600 games every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters subtract values. never do.

The three types of payout (cumulative) counters consist of 3 bytes. For example, in 175000 games, assuming that 15 coins were paid out per game, the value is "175000×15=2625000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

Accessory state counters of addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" are counters that count the total number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous operation device is activated. Yes, and consists of 3 bytes.
The instructed role ratio data at the address "F288(H)" is the total ratio of the payout number when the role is activated and the payout number in the game in which the instruction function is activated to the total payout number. This is a storage area for storing material ratios.

The continuous role ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F289(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of continuous role operation to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
The role ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F28A(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.

The continuous role ratio (cumulative) data at the address "F28B(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of continuous role operation to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.
The role ratio (total) data at the address "F28C(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.

The accessory state ratio data at the address "F28D(H)" is the ratio of the sum of the number of games when the accessory is activated and the number of games when the accessory continuous operating device is activated to the total number of games played. This is a storage area for storing state ratios.
The calculation result buffer at the address "F28E(H)" is a storage area for temporarily storing the calculation result during the ratio calculation process.

The count upper limit flag of the address "F28F (H)" is the total number of games counter (addresses "F26D (H)" to "F26F (H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C (H)" to This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of "F27E(H)") is the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of payouts. The 'D2' to 'D7' bits are unused in the third embodiment.
For example, when the total number-of-games counter reaches the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)".

The payout number upper limit buffer at the address "F290 (H)" is 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, and if it exceeds 3 bytes full, the value after addition becomes 3 bytes full. is a storage area for storing the value of
For example, when the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the number of payouts in the game is "8 (H)", the counter value is set to "8 (H)". )” will cause overflow. Therefore, in order not to cause overflow of the total payout (cumulative) counter value, a value for becoming full of 3 bytes is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)"+"1(H)"="FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at the address "F291(H)" is a flag for specifying an object that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the identification seg and the ratio seg.
Regarding the instructed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (total), accessory ratio (total), and accessory state ratio, the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "175000". When there is, control is performed so that the identification segment is displayed blinking.
With respect to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment is displayed blinking. control to

It is desirable that the instructed character ratio, the continuous character ratio (cumulative), the character ratio (cumulative), and the character condition ratio are the ratios among 175,000 games (in order to reduce variations). is the ratio calculated from the number of games played in less than 175,000 games, a blinking identification seg is displayed to indicate this.
Similarly, the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios between 6000 times, but when the ratio is calculated based on the number of games played less than 6000 times, To indicate this, the identification segment is displayed blinking.

In addition, when the displayed value of the instructed accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory ratio (6000 times) is '70' or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink. .
Furthermore, when the displayed value of the continuous role product ratio (total) and the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink.
Furthermore, when the displayed value of the role item status ratio is "50" or more, control is performed so that the ratio seg blinks.

The reason why the slot machine of this embodiment is set as described above is that the instructed role ratio and the role ratio are designed to be less than "70"%, and the continuous role ratio is set to "60". %, and the state ratio of accessories, etc. is designed to be less than "50"%, and when the measured value does not fall within the range of the design value, the ratio seg blinks. to let them know by letting them know.

In addition, in the flashing request flags, the D0 bit corresponds to the instructed role product ratio flashing flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) flashing flag, and the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times flashing flag.
For example, when the calculated instructed accessory ratio is less than "70", the D0 bit of the flashing request flag is "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D0 bit of the flashing request flag is "1 ”.
Similarly, when the calculated continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the flash request flag is "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the flash request flag bit becomes "1".

In addition, when the calculated state ratio of the accessory, etc. is less than "50", the D5 bit of the flashing request flag is "0", and when it is "50" or more, the D5 bit of the flashing request flag is "1". ”.
Furthermore, when the total game number counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "1", and when it is "6000" or more, the D6 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "0". Become.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "175000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1", and when it is "175000" or more, the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0". .

The ratio display number of the address "F292(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the ratio displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process is the instructed accessory ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number of the address "F292(H)". Similarly, "2" is stored when the continuous role ratio (6000 times), "3" is stored when the role ratio (6000 times), and "3" is stored when the continuous role ratio (total). stores "4", stores "5" when it is the role product ratio (total), and stores "6" when it is the role product etc. state ratio.

The blinking switching flag at the address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether it is lit or extinguished when blinking the identification seg or the ratio seg during the interrupt process.
In this embodiment, when the blinking display is performed, it is set to repeat turning on and off about every 0.3 seconds. For about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag is "0" (value indicating lighting), and for about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag is "1" (value indicating lighting). is set to be

The display switching time of address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts about 5 seconds, which is the time to display one ratio, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.
In the present embodiment, the instructed character ratio display (about 5 seconds) → character continuous ratio (6000 times) display (about 5 seconds) → ... → character ratio (cumulative) display (about 5 seconds) → role Item condition ratio display (approximately 5 seconds)→Indicated accessory ratio (approximately 5 seconds)→ . . . are repeatedly displayed.
Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether or not approximately five seconds have elapsed, that is, whether or not the display ratio switching time has been reached.

The blinking switching time of the address "F296 (H)" is a counter that counts about 0.3 seconds when blinking the identification segment or the ratio segment, as described above. is a counter that is updated to "1".

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter for determining which of the digits 6 to 9 is to be lit, and is continuously updated for each interrupt. For each bit of the LED display counter 2, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 6 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 7 signal, the D2 bit to the digit 8 signal, and the D3 bit to the digit 4 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 2 takes a value of "00001000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 2 updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 so as to shift the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 to the right by one digit as the interrupt proceeds from "1" to "2" to . . . (for each interrupt). . In addition, in the interrupt following the interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting it to the right by one digit. Set counter 2 to "00001000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 2 repeats the values "4"→"3"→"2"→"1"→"4"→ . That is, four interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of the LED display counter 2 is
"N" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
:
becomes.

In the third embodiment, four interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 6 to 9 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", the digit 9 signal is output. By outputting the digit 9 signal, the digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", a digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (ratio segment upper digit) can be lit. Also, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", a digit 7 signal is output to enable lighting of the digit 7 (identification segment lower digit), and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)" , a digit 6 signal is output, and the digit 6 (higher order digit of the identification segment) can be lit.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at the address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area for storing the RWM checksum data calculated by the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) during the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN).
Here, the "RWM checksum data" is also called "complement data", "error detection data", or "error detection information", and is located at addresses "F000(H)" to When added to the data of "F1FF(H)" and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area (excluding "F2A0(H)"), it becomes "0". is a value.
That is, the data of the addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area ("F2A0(H)" are ) is added to the added value of the data of "F2A0(H)", the result is "0". In other words, the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is "0".

The power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at the address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored during the power-off processing.
When the power-off processing is executed normally, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF), and when the power-off processing is not executed normally, the power-off processing completed flag is stored. A value other than "55 (H)" is stored as (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at the address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completed flag are normal. It is stored during processing.
The RWM 53 checksum calculation result is normal (RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" is added to the sum of the data in the RWM 35 use area and outside the use area (excluding "F2A0(H)") is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). is stored.
On the other hand, when at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is not normal (abnormal), "00 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). remembered.

Stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3 (H)" is a storage area (save) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed. buffer).
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
A "stack pointer" is used to hold an address that indicates where data is saved (stored) in the stack area.

Then, when executing a program (second program) outside the used area, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, the program (second program) outside the used area is terminated, and the used area is restored. (first program), the stack pointer of the used area is restored from the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.例文帳に追加

A 24-byte storage area at addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the use area.

Next, the initialization of data in the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be described.
The data in the use area and outside the use area of the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized only by interruption/restart of power supply (power on/off, power switch 11 on/off).
In addition, even when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the use area of the RWM 53 and the data outside the use area are maintained without being initialized.

Further, it is assumed that an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and it is determined that there is a power-off recovery abnormality. In this case, step S2707 of program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, which will be described later, becomes "Yes", and the flow advances to step S2711 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of setting change start at power failure recovery failure. Also, since it is a power-off recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712 of FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ”) and the entire range outside the use area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are initialized.
Even when recovering from the unrecoverable error state, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and power failure recovery abnormality is determined.

It is also assumed that an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that power-off recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "Yes", step S2712 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S2713 to initialize the RWM 53 at the time of starting setting change in the normal recovery from power failure. the scope is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” are executed.

Therefore, when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the address "F210 ( H)” to “F291(H)” are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, the power is turned off when the role product ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the setting change state is entered. When it is determined that the power is restored normally, the management information display LED 74 displays from the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

It is also assumed that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "No", step S2710 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713. the scope is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” are executed.

In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. Therefore, for example, when the role ratio (total) data (ratio display number “5”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on. Display is started from a given instruction-containing accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”).

Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and it is determined that the recovery from the power failure is normal, an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed. , and the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if you do not have the setting key or do not switch to the setting change state, the same range as when the operation to switch to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal. , the RWM 53 can be initialized.

Also, at the end of the advantageous interval, a predetermined range (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 33) of the use area of the RWM 53 storing data relating to the advantageous interval is initialized. be.
Also, even if the advantageous section ends, the address "F292(H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. Therefore, for example, when the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the advantageous section ends and the data relating to the advantageous section is stored. Even if the predetermined range of the RWM 53 used area (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 33) is initialized, the display items displayed on the management information display LED 74 are , Accessory ratio (total) data is followed by Accessory condition ratio data (ratio display number “6”).

It is also assumed that the power is turned off and then turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. That is, it is assumed that the normal power supply is turned on/off. In this case, since the RWM 53 is not initialized, the data in the RWM 53 used area and data outside the used area at the time of power failure are maintained.
Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch are turned off. When both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, the power is turned on, and if it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal, the state at the time of power failure is restored. The object ratio (cumulative) data is displayed, and then the accessory state ratio data (ratio display number “6”), which is the display item next to the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

Also, assume that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, and it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred. In this case, the result is "Yes" in step S2708 of FIG. 41, and the process advances to step S2801 to execute unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) (unrecoverable error state), so initialization processing of the RWM 53 is not executed. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 43), and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ( step S1495 in FIG. 43).
For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch are turned off. When both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off and the power is turned on and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, interrupt processing is prohibited and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off. The management information display LED 74 remains off.

Incidentally, for example, in the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8". In this case, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off. "8888" is displayed in the

Further, for example, even if the processing shifts to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, the interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the output of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset button are turned off. Even if the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, the management information display LED 74 first displays the role ratio (cumulative) data, Next, the accessory state ratio data (ratio display number “6”), which is the display item next to the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 36A, in the third embodiment, the display substrate 75 is provided with a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79. FIG.
The credit number display LED 76 consists of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit), and the acquired number display LED 78 consists of digit 3 (upper digit) and digit 4 (lower digit). Also, digits 1-4 use a seven-segment display with no dot segments.
Digits 1 to 4 may be constructed using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As status display LEDs 79, a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, a throw-in display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f are provided. .
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 36, the advantageous section display LED 77 is configured using a segment P of digit 4 as shown in FIG.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 36, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50 and is composed of digits 5, as shown in FIG. Digit 5 also uses a seven-segment display with no dot segments.
Digit 5 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 36B, the management information display LED 74 includes digit 6 (identification segment upper digit), digit 7 (identification segment lower digit), digit 8 (ratio segment upper digit), and digit 9 (ratio segment lower digit). digits).
Digits 6-9 also use a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P).
In addition, segment P of digit 7 (identifying segment lower digit) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly distinguish between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating details of digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In a third embodiment, the digits 1-5 seven-segment display itself consists of segments AG and has no dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of the digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d, the segment P of the digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f, and the segment P of the digit 4. constitutes an advantageous section display LED 77 .

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) for outputting digit signals are provided, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) for outputting segment signals are provided. characterized by
Digits 1 to 9 are provided in the third embodiment.
A segment of digits 1 to 5 is called segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and a segment of digits 6 to 9 is called segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

In the third embodiment, the output port 3 is an output port for outputting digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals), and the output port 6 is for outputting digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the output port 4 is an output port for outputting segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment signals 1A to 1P), and the output port 7 is for outputting segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment signals). 2A to 2P signals).
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 4. FIG.
When the digits 6 to 9 are to be lit, the digit signal is output from the output port 6 and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7 .

Next, the external signal will be explained. The “external signal” is a signal output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer 200, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100 .
As shown in FIG. 38, in the third embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5 . Specifically, the D0 bit (external signal 1) of the output port 5 is assigned a "setting change signal", and the D1 bit (external signal 2) is assigned a "setting confirmation signal". Each signal shown in FIG. 38 is also assigned to the D2 to D5 bits.

The "setting changing signal" is an external signal indicating that the setting is being changed and that the setting has been changed. The signal during setting change is output continuously until the end of one game during the setting change and after the setting change (all reels 31 stop and the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 46). The setting change is performed. When the D0 bit of the output port 5 is "1", the setting changing signal is on (the setting is being changed or one game after the setting is changed). In addition, when the D0 bit is "0", the signal during setting change is off (not during setting change and not before the end of one game after setting change). indicate.

The "setting confirmation signal" is an external signal indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal is output during setting confirmation. When the D1 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting confirmation signal is on (setting is being confirmed), and when the D1 bit is "0", the setting confirmation signal is off. Indicates that there is (not checking the settings).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when the door switch 17 is turned on (when the opening of the front door 12 is detected), the fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is ON (the door switch 17 is ON and the front door 12 is open), and the D2 bit is "0". , it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is off (the door switch 17 is off and the front door 12 is closed).

“Fraud detection signal 2” is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud, like the fraud detection signal 1. FIG. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 2 is on (recoverable error state), and when the D3 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 2 is off. (not a recoverable error state).

Like the fraud detection signals 1 and 2, the "fraud detection signal 3" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (unrecoverable error state), and when the D4 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 3 is Indicates off (no unrecoverable error condition).

The "security signal" is an external signal indicating that any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is on. When any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is output, the security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is ON (any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is being output), When the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are output).

As described above, the setting changing signal is continuously output until the end of one game after the setting change. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting changing signal and the setting confirming signal are output. Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the setting change state is ended and medals (game medium, game value) can be betted. At this time, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets is "0", both the setting changing signal and the setting confirming signal are output.
Furthermore, when any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is output, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after setting change, the D0, D1 and D5 bits of the output port 5 are turned on ("1"). After that, if the setting confirmation state is terminated before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 and D5 bits of the output port 5 remain on (“1”) and the D1 bit is off (“0”). become. When the first game after the setting change is completed, the D0 bit and the D5 bit of the output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, lighting control of digits 1 to 9 will be described.
Digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) are controlled to be lit by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 50, which will be described later. Also, the LED display control processing (I_LED_OUT) is processing by the program (first program) of the used area.

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) is controlled by ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in FIG. 52, which will be described later. Also, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is processing by a program (second program) outside the use area.
In the third embodiment, the digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by the program in the usage area (first program) and the digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by the program outside the usage area (second program) Separate output ports for use.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, it has digits 1 to 9, the segment of digits 1 to 5 is segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segment of digits 6 to 9 is segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P). .
Segments 1A to 1G of digit 1 form the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 1 forms a game start display LED 79d.
The segments 1A to 1G of the digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit amount display LED 76, and the segment 1P of the digit 2 constitutes the insertion display LED 79e.

Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 constitute the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 3 constitutes a replay display LED 79f.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.
Also, the segments 1A to 1G of the digit 5 constitute a set value display LED73.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 6 constitute identification segment upper digits of management information display LED 74. FIG.

Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 7 constitute the identification segment lower digits of management information display LED 74, and segment 2P of digit 7 constitutes a digit division display LED.
Segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 constitute the ratio segment upper digits of management information display LED 74. FIG.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 constitute identification segment lower digits of management information display LED 74. FIG.

FIG. 40A is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the third embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6 in the third embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 4C is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment.
In this example, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051 (H)" in FIG. 33) is provided in the use area of the RWM 53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (in FIG. 35) is provided outside the use area of the RWM 53. The address "F297(H)") is provided.

The LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter for outputting a digit 1 signal to a digit 5 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
The LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting a digit 6 signal to a digit 9 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 4 interrupts per cycle.
Thus, in the third embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided independently.
Also, since one cycle of the LED display counters of the two is different, the lighting timing of digits 1 to 5 and the lighting timing of digits 6 to 9 are different.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted, and is stored at the address "F052(H)" of the use area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 33).
As shown in FIG. 40(C), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to the digit 1 signal at the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal at the D1 bit, . . . , the digit 5 signal at the D4 bit. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of output port 3 shown in FIG.
Also, as shown in FIG. 40(C), digits 1 to 4 can be illuminated (digit 5 is off) during normal operation, and digit 5 can be illuminated (digits 1 to 4 are off during setting change and setting confirmation). lights off). note that. "Normal" refers to game standby and game play.

Then, in the interrupt process, the value of the LED display counter 1 in the used area and the value of the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" is the digit to be lit in this interrupt process. Become.
For example, if the value of the LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal)", the AND operation of the two results in "00001000 (B)". (B)", and only the digit 4 signal becomes "1".
During setting change and setting confirmation, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4, The set value display LED 73 (digit 5) can be lit.

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be described.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered without turning on/off the power. For recoverable errors, for example,
“HP” error: Medal clogging (retention) error in hopper 35 “HE” error: Medal empty error in hopper 35 “H0” error: Discharge sensor 37 error in hopper 35 “CE” error: Medal retention error in medal selector "CP" error: Illegal medal passing error in the medal selector "CH" error: Error in the path sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: Error in the insertion sensor 44 located in the medal selector C1" error: medal insertion error "FE" error: sub-tank full "dE" error: front door 12 open
Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

In step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, which will be described later, the input port 51 is read, and the input signals of various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (insertion sensor 44, etc.) are read. After that, based on the read input signal, various data (level data, rising data, falling data) are generated and stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. After that, in step S463 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), an input error check process is executed, and when any recoverable error is detected by referring to the above various data, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is detected. is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address.

In addition, in the main process (M_MAIN) (Fig. 46), the error detection flag is checked before detecting the operation of the start switch 41 and after all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the progress of the game is stopped, and a recoverable error state is established.
If a recoverable error occurs during the period from when the start switch 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted until all the reels 31 are stopped, all the reels 31 are stopped. The progress of the game may be continued until all the reels 31 are stopped and before executing the medal payout process, and the progress of the game may be stopped and a recoverable error state may be established.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information of the recoverable error that has occurred is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . This error information display (error display) is performed in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.

Then, when a restorable error occurs, the manager (hall clerk) removes the cause of the restorable error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated, the restorable error state is canceled and the progress of the game is resumed. .
Thus, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated without turning on/off the power or operating the setting key switch 152. The recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be returned to a state in which progress can be made.

On the other hand, an "unrecoverable error" cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed. Fatal error. As an unrecoverable error, for example,
"E1" error: when recovery from power failure is not normal (when power failure recovery is abnormal) (when "Yes" in step S2712 in FIG. 41 described later)
"E5" error: When the stop symbol is not normal when the reel 31 is stopped (when a display error occurs)
"E6" error: when the set value is out of the normal range (when a set value error occurs) (when "No" in step S458 of FIG. 47)
"E7" error: when a random number error occurs (when "Yes" in step S460 of FIG. 47)
etc.
Unrecoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

If any unrecoverable error occurs, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . For example, when an "E1" error occurs, display an "E" on digit three and a "1" on digit four. The same is displayed for other unrecoverable errors.
In addition, it is determined that the recovery from power failure is not normal (power failure recovery error), and the "E1" error is determined by the processing of step S2715 in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. (processing by the first program)).
Furthermore, when the reel 31 is stopped, it is determined that the stop symbol is not normal (a display error has occurred), and it is determined as an "E5" error because of the processing in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Fig. 46). processing by the program (first program).

On the other hand, it is determined that the set value is out of the normal range (a set value error has occurred) and an "E6" error is determined by the processing of step S458 (out of use area) in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. (second program)).
Similarly, it is determined that the random number value is not normal (a random number error has occurred) and an "E7" error is determined by the processing of step S460 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. second program)).
When the program in the used area (first program) determines that there is an unrecoverable error, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program (second program) outside the use area, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, which will be described later, is executed.

Then, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off and the power switch 11 is turned off), and then the power supply is restarted under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned on ( The power is turned on, and the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, "Yes" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, when an unrecoverable error occurs, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48, which will be described later, is not executed, so step S2712 in FIG.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ), and the entire range outside the use area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are initialized. After that, the process advances to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG. 44. If the set value is set again here, the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248.
In this way, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power is turned off once, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on to cancel the unrecoverable error state and proceed with the game. can be restored to a state in which

Also, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 50, but when an unrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. Display control (I_LED_OUT) is also not executed. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area are maintained without being initialized. Data in the entire range outside are initialized.
Data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53 may be initialized when recovering from a recoverable error state.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
When the power is turned on (the power switch 11 is turned on, or the power supply is restarted), the program start processing in FIG. 41 is executed.
In FIG. 41, when the program is started in step S2701, in the next step S2702, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. .

Next, proceeding to step S2703, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing of the RWM 53. FIG.
Specifically, in step S2703, data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are Add data.
That is, the data of the addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are added.
When the result is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal, and when the result is not "0", the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is abnormal. is).

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of the address "F2A1 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "55 (H)". , the power-off processing completion flag is determined to be normal, and when it is not "55 (H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completion flag is not normal (abnormal).
Here, in this embodiment, during power-off processing, a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set to the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 49). . Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing completion flag set at the time of power-off processing is a normal value ("55 (H)").

In step S2703, the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area and the data outside the used area of the RWM 35 is "0"), and the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is normal. When it is the value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is stored at the address "F2A2 (H)" of the RWM 53 as the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, in step S2703, when at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is not normal (abnormal), the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is set to "00 (H)". )” in the RWM 53 at the address “F2A2(H)”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2704.

Proceeding to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2702. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2705.

Here, the program for program start processing is stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the ROM 54 . That is, the program for program start processing is the first program.
On the other hand, the program for the checksum calculation processing of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the use area of the ROM 54 . That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 41, in the program start processing which is the processing by the program in the usage area (first program), if the process proceeds to step S2703, the checksum calculation of RWM53 which is the processing by the program outside the usage area (second program) is performed. When the process is executed and the checksum calculation process is completed, the process returns to the program start process, which is the process by the program (first program) of the used area.
Also, when the process by the program in the used area (first program) shifts to the process by the program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is used by the RWM 53. After saving to the stack area of the area, the AF register is restored when the processing by the program outside the usage area (second program) is terminated and the processing by the program in the usage area (first program) is returned to.

Proceeding to step S2705, the main control board 50 acquires the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from the address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2706.

Proceeding to step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door switch signal is turned on. When it is determined that the door switch signal is ON (the front door 12 is open), the process proceeds to the next step S2707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed), the process proceeds to step S2715.

At step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the setting key switch signal is turned on. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2708.

Proceeding to step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, when the value of the A register (power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)", it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step S2709. . On the other hand, when the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. The specific contents of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets reset determination data. Specifically, "7" is stored in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2710.
Proceeding to step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. Then, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. The specific contents of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for abnormal recovery from power failure. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is abnormal (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00 (H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is included. The use area and the entire range outside the use area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") are set as the initialization range. Note that the initialization range is specified by the start address and the number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is similar to step S2708. When it is determined that there is no power failure recovery abnormality, data "7" for determining the setting change state is stored in the D register, the process proceeds to the next step S2713, and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery failure. If not, the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal recovery from power failure. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is normal (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55 (H)"), the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the use The addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). Therefore, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the RWM 53 used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are initialized. set as As described above, the initialization range is specified by the initial address and the number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2714.

At step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting can be changed. In the present embodiment, during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) including the rotation of the reel 31, the setting cannot be changed. , the setting change disabled flag is turned on. Then, in step S2714, it is determined whether or not the setting change is permitted by determining whether or not the setting change prohibition flag is ON. If it is determined that the setting cannot be changed (the setting cannot be changed), the process proceeds to the next step S2715, and if it is determined that the setting can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It should be noted that the setting change may be allowed at all times without setting the setting change prohibition period and therefore without setting the setting change prohibition flag.

Proceeding to step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is similar to step S2708. When it is determined that there is a power failure recovery error, the process proceeds to step S2801 for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). . The specific contents of the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) and the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 in FIG.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved during the power-off process is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S 2723 , the main control board 50 executes read processing of the input port 51 . As a result, each data of the input port 51 is updated to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completed flag. Then, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Note that in the present embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 47 is started at the timing before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248 after executing the process of step S2724.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
The program for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in the ROM 54, and the program for unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the ROM 54. That is, the program for unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Interrupt processing is prohibited in unrecoverable error processing.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (update of data of RWM 53 based on input signal from input port 51, transmission of control command to sub-control board 80) , control based on the signal output from the output port based on the data of the RWM 53, etc.), interrupt processing is prohibited in the non-recoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the first program. When the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, first, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in step S1490 to disable interrupts. prohibited.
On the other hand, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the second program. 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is not provided with processing to disable interrupts.

In FIG. 43, when proceeding to step S1491, the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data ("00001000(B)") for lighting digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") in the H register.
Next, proceeding to step S1492, the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is set to "1") ("00000100(B)") in the D register.

Furthermore, in this step S1492, the main control board 50 stores the segment data (“01111001B”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of the unrecoverable error in the E register.
Note that segment data for displaying the lower digits of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so segment data ("00000110B") for displaying "1" is stored in the L register. is stored.
In the following example, it is assumed that the unrecoverable error 1 this time is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are, at this point,
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
becomes.

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address of the output port to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and the number of output ports (8 pieces).
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the outputs of the output ports 0-7. Specifically, output ports 0 to 7 are turned off (“00000000 (B)”) one by one.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)", the address of output port 1 "00F2(H)" is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S1496, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the output ports have been turned off, that is, whether or not the outputs up to the output port 7 have been turned off. When it is determined that the processing has not ended, the process returns to step S1494, and when it is determined that the processing has ended, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the processing of steps S1494 to S1496 is repeated until the outputs of all output ports are turned off, and when it is determined that the outputs of all output ports have been turned off, the process advances to step S1497.

By turning off all the output ports in this way, all active signals output before execution of this process are turned off. As a result, all the LEDs including the digits 1 to 9 (the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74) are extinguished, thereby preventing burn-in of the LEDs.

If an unrecoverable error occurs while the excitation signal for the motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the unrecoverable error is cancelled. However, by turning off all the output ports, the excitation signal of the motor 32 is turned off, so that the seizure of the motor 32 can be prevented.
Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the blocker signal is being output, the blocker 45 will remain on (medals will be placed in the hopper) even though the medal detection process will not be executed unless the output port is turned off. 35) will continue, so the medals will be swallowed up. Swallowing can be prevented.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display errors in the upper digits. The output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and the output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, proceeding to step S1498, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. Here, how long to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but for example, it may be set to about "0.1 ms". Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. and advances to the next step S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off (“0”) the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4. FIG. This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, proceeding to step S1500, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing LED flickering. This process is for ensuring that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 are turned off (“0”).

Next, proceeding to step S1501, the main control board 50 switches between the upper digits and the lower digits.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. This will
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
E register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
L register value: segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
becomes.

Then, proceeding to step S1502, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display errors in the lower digits. As in step S1497, output port 3 outputs the D register value, and output port 4 outputs the E register value. As a result, "00001000 (B)" (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") is output from the output port 3 to light up the digit 4, and from the output port 4, a segment for displaying "1" is output. Data "00000110(B)" is output.

Next, proceeding to step S1503, the main control board 50 executes standby processing for flicker prevention. This process is the same as step S1498.
Next, proceeding to step S1504, the main control board 50 turns off (“0”) the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 as in step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes standby processing for flicker prevention. This process is similar to step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

As a result of the above processing, for example, when an "E1" error occurs, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
Note that the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR), but as described above, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited) in the event of an unrecoverable error. As shown, non-recoverable errors are indicated by arithmetic processing using registers and hardware configuration.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 in FIG.
The main control board 50 first initializes the designated address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, sets (designates) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733, and proceeds to the next step S2734. When proceeding, it is determined whether or not initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53 . When it is determined that the initialization has not been completed, the process returns to step S2732, and when it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2735. As a result, the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 is repeated until the initialization of all the initialization ranges of the RWM 53 is completed.

As described above, in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, the initialization range (starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range) of the RWM 53 is set.
In steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), the initialization range of the used area is initialized out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
The processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program of the used area (first program). Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range of the used area in the initialization range of the RWM 53 .

Then, when it is determined that the initialization has been completed in step S2734, the process proceeds to the next step S2735, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area. Let
Proceeding to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 initializes the initialization range outside the use area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. to run.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, initialization of the used area within the initialization range of RWM 53 is executed, but in step S2736, initialization of the area outside the used area within the initialization range of RWM 53 is executed. .
Note that the process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the use area. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the use area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 .
When the initialization of the initialization range outside the use area is completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, and the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register) in step S2735). ) is restored. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to reset. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result in step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "Yes". In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, when "Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 41, "7" in the D register is maintained, and when "No" in step S2710 of FIG. 41, the D register is cleared (stored "0"). . Then, in step S2738 of FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the D register is "7", and when the D register is "7", it is reset ("Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 41). and advances to step S2739. On the other hand, when the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not reset time ("No" in step S2710 in FIG. 41), skipping step S2739 and proceeding to step S2740.

Proceeding to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at reset. Specifically, "70 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011 (H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "70" can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2739, and the manager (hall clerk) is informed that it is time to reset. be able to.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether to reset or change settings. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2740. can be determined by

Note that in this embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 47 is started at the timing after executing the process of step S2740 and before proceeding to the process of step S2741. In other words, the process of initializing the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the process of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in FIG. 44) is finished before the interrupt process (I_INTR) starts. By configuring in this manner, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prevented from being executed while the RWM 53 is being initialized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) by interrupt processing (I_INTR) while the RWM 53 is being initialized.

Proceeding to the next step S2741, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is reset time. Specifically, it is similar to step S2738. When it is determined that it is not reset time, the process proceeds to step S2742, and when it is determined that it is reset time, step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743.
When proceeding to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this processing will be described later. When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) ends, the process proceeds to the next step S2743.

At step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the waiting time has elapsed. This waiting time is for waiting for transmission of the setting command. When it is determined that the waiting time has passed, the process proceeds to the next step S2744, where the main control board 50 sets the initialization waiting time, and in the next step S2745, waits for 2 bytes (wait process). . The processing of steps S2744 and S2745 is for waiting until the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is completed.

When the 2-byte time waiting process is completed, the main control board 50 advances to the next step S2746 to set the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2746. The value can be determined on the sub-control board 80 side.

Proceeding to the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) at the address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2747.
When the acquisition number data is cleared in step S2747, the process advances to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) in step S248 to end the process according to this flowchart.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is started, first, in step S2751, the main control board 50 acquires the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, Store in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2752, the main control board 50 generates set value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, first, the A register value is stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2753.
As described above, in this embodiment, setting values "1" to "6" are provided, and setting value data is managed as "0" to "5". When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as set value data. Therefore, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the set value data "N-1" is used as the set value display data.

Proceeding to step S2753, the main control board 50 saves the generated set value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of the RWM 53 at the address "F001(H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2754.
At step S2754, the main control board 50 executes an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. This is because by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once, it waits for the rise data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to turn off (“0”).

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned on (“1”). After that, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once, the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned off (“0”).
However, after the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned on (“1”), the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is looped multiple times before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed. Otherwise, the process of adding "1" to the set value data will be repeatedly executed.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processes of steps S2752 to S2758 are looped multiple times, and the process of adding "1" to the set value data is repeatedly executed. This prevents the product from being lost.
Then, after waiting until one interruption time elapses in step S2754, the process proceeds to the next step S2755.

When the level data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is "0" at the time of the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the current interrupt processing, , the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 becomes "1".
When the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising data of the signal becomes "0".

Similarly, when the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising data of the signal of becomes "0".
Also, when the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The falling edge data of the signal becomes "1".
Other switches such as the start switch 41 , the stop switch 42 , the setting key switch 152 are similar to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 .

In step S2755, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to start checking the settings. This process is a process for determining whether it is the time to confirm the settings or the time to change the settings. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the bet number is "0" before the start of the game, "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether or not the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to confirm the setting, and the process proceeds to step S2760. ), it is determined that it is not the time to confirm the settings (it is the time to change the settings), and the process advances to step S2756. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the set value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes set value data.
When the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) is started), the registers A to L are set to the initial values ("0").

Proceeding to step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rise data of the signal of the start switch 41 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. When the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2759. On the other hand, when the rise data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process proceeds to step S2757.

At step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. When the rise data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2758. On the other hand, when the rise data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 is not operated, the process returns to step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, "1" is added to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. If "Yes" in step S2757, that is, if it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, "1" is added to the set value data. Note that when the A register value becomes "6" due to the addition, the A register value is rewritten to "0". Then, the process returns to step S2752.

Also, when proceeding to step S2759, the main control board 50 saves the set value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address “F000(H)” of the RWM 53 . As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. The A register value remains the set value data even when the determination in step S2756 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S2759. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored in the RWM 53 at the address "F000(H)". Thereby, the set value data can be saved in the RWM 53 .

Proceeding to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the fall data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. Then, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the falling data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1", that is, until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. becomes "1", that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (sets to "0") the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of the address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Also, when the setting is changed, upon completion of the processing according to this flowchart, the processing proceeds to step S2743 in FIG.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be described.
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on (on), the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register and the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. Also, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended, and the state returns to the state in which medals can be betted.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on before detecting the operation of the start switch 41 . When the door switch 17 is ON (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0", if it is determined that the setting key switch 152 is ON, the setting change confirmation of FIG. 45 is performed. Proceed to processing (M_RANK_CTL). Also, steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a state where the bet number is "0" before the start of the game, "1" is set to be stored in the D register. ing. Then, when proceeding to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether or not the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start confirming the settings ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2760.

After that, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During this time, the current set value continues to be displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, and the main control board 50 clears (" 0”). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Further, when the processing according to this flowchart is completed at the time of setting confirmation, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) judges whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on (whether to shift to the setting confirmation state). Proceed to next processing.

Thus, in the third embodiment, the same module can execute the setting change process and the setting confirmation process. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created in the same module. Based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
It should be noted that it is also possible to determine whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state based on information stored in another register instead of the D register. may be used to determine whether the setting change state or the setting confirmation state should be set.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the third embodiment. The main processing is processing for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. A stack pointer is an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.). is the process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53 .

In the next step S272, game start set processing is performed. This process is a process of generating, updating, saving, etc. of the operating state flag.
In the next step S273, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are currently bet, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on.
In step S276, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medals have been cleaned, whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

In the next step S277, update processing of soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" each time) a processing random number for processing (computation processing) the random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the combination lottery means 61 . A soft random number is a 16-bit random number with a range from '0' to '65535(D)'. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before updating may be executed.

At the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, it is determined "No" in step S278.

In step S279, a process for accepting a start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change prohibition flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and setting the number of times of output for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. As a result, the acquisition number display LED 78 is caused to display "00" (or be extinguished).

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is met during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is performed based on the combination lottery result of the combination lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of times AT is added to the game may be determined. Therefore, when the AT game number is added and the addition amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (illustration is omitted in FIG. 46).
It should be noted that after the start switch reception (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but not limited to this, after the combination lottery process in step S282, after all reels 31 stop (step S290 and later) AT game number counter update may be performed.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, after all the reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process due to winning is completed (after step S300), the AT difference number counter update.

In step S282, the combination lottery means 61 executes the lottery for the combination at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number at the time of lottery is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process of determining whether or not the obtained random number value corresponds to any winning combination is performed using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section shift lottery process. In the present embodiment, an AT lottery is executed together with the advantageous section transition lottery.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284 to set the push order instruction number. This process generates a push order instruction number and displays the push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated in the game (the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78) during AT. processing.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed, and proceeds to the next step S286 if the minimum game time has passed.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time, and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)". If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum game time is "0", the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When proceeding to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

At step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start the reel 31 to rotate. Then, when the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, acceptance of operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31. is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, there is a case where the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
It should be noted that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be extinguished. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for extinguishing may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display determination of the pattern is performed. Here, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and when it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 normally does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, when a pattern (kicking pattern) which should not be displayed on the effective line is displayed as a result of the display determination of the pattern, it is determined to be abnormal, and unrecoverable error processing is executed.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout number is updated. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the number of payout data and the number of payout data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process advances to step S295 to perform an interrupt waiting process. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt by the processing of these steps S295 and S296.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. Next, the flow advances to step S298 to execute ratio setting processing. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and the interrupt is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio setting process is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited.

The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of ratio set processing is that the ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the usage area, and when the program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing. This is because if an interrupt process is entered in , the program in the used area and the program outside the used area will coexist, and the processing will become complicated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301 to perform a game end check process. This process is a process of clearing a condition device (winning combination) flag and the like. Then, in step S302, an output request is set at the end of the game, and a control command is set 1 in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment.
In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, step S452 is followed by step S2770, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Then, when it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, and the main control board 50 executes power shutdown processing (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, when it is determined that power failure has not occurred, step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.

Thus, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). For this reason, when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed due to interrupts being disabled, or when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed because a program (second program) is being executed outside the use area, the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN ) is also not executed. The specific contents of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process proceeds to step S454.

Also, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, step S455 is followed by step S2821, and the main control board 50 executes LED display control (I_LED_OUT). Thus, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in interrupt processing (I_INTR). The specific contents of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
When the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is finished, the process proceeds to step S2765, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's use area. Then, the process proceeds to step S2221, and the main control board 50 executes ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is processing for controlling the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the set value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5). ).
On the other hand, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the use area. The specific content of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. After completion of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY), the process proceeds to step S458.

At step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, the set value data (_NB_RANK) stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "5" ("5" is subtracted from the A register value), and it is determined whether or not the carry flag="1". When the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"), and when the carry flag = "1" determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. If it is determined that it is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and if it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of step S2811.

In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, when "No" in step S458 or "Yes" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2811, and the main control board 50 performs unrecoverable error process 2. Execute (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
Furthermore, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, when "No" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2766, and the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register ( flag register)). Then, the process proceeds to step S457.

Here, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, the processes of steps S2221, S458, S459, and S460 are executed by a program outside the usage area (second program).
Then, when the process by the program in the used area (first program) shifts to the process by the program outside the used area (second program), in step S2765 the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set to When saving to the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area, ending the processing by the program (second program) outside the usage area, and returning to the processing by the program (first program) in the usage area, the AF register is cleared in step S2766. bring back.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 in FIG.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53 .

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all the output ports 52. FIG. As a result, the output of all the output ports 52 is turned off. Stop driving it.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 saves the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the RWM 53's use area. Note that the stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG.

Proceeding to the next step S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's use area. Then, proceeding to step S2776, the main control board 50 executes RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET). The specific contents of the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2777, and the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2778.

The RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when the process by the program in the used area (first program) shifts to the process by the program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is changed in step S2775. When saving to the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area, ending the processing by the program (second program) outside the usage area, and returning to the processing by the program (first program) in the usage area, the AF register is cleared in step S2777. bring back.

Proceeding to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM53. Then, proceeding to the next step S2779, the main control board 50 is brought into a reset wait state (loop processing state). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in the work area outside the use area of the RWM 53 in step S2781. In the next step 2782, a stack pointer ("F400(H)") outside the use area is set, and when proceeding to the next step S2783, a plurality of registers are saved in the stack area outside the use area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in FIG. 35).
As described above, the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is processing by a program (second program) outside the usage area. The stack pointer used in (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program (first program) in the used area.
Also, in step S2782, the stack pointer (address "F400(H)") outside the use area is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved in the stack area outside the use area.

Proceeding to step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) to the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. FIG. Here, when power-off processing is executed, "55 (H)" is stored as a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
When the power is restored, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. Therefore, after executing the process of step S2724, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off process is not executed, the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, so the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (sets to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) of the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2786.

Proceeding to step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the start address ("F000 (H)") of the used area of the RWM 53 in an addressing register (eg, B register), and proceeding to the next step S2787. , the number of bytes (number of checksum calculations) of the area used by the RWM 53 is set in the register for the number of calculations (for example, the C register), and the process proceeds to the next step S2788. , the initial data (“00000000 (B)”) is set.

Then, proceeding to the next step S2789, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53. FIG.
In this embodiment, the use area of the RWM 53 is set in the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)". The processing of steps S2789 and S2790 is repeated until it is determined that the calculation processing has ended. As a result, the checksum of the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses “F000(H)” to “F1FF(H)”) is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the addressing register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2790, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether or not the result is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2791. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the addressing register (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2789.

Then, when the checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process advances to step S2791, and the main control board 50 stores the start address ("F210 (H )”) is set, and in the next step S2792, the number of bytes (the number of checksum calculations) outside the use area of the RWM 53 is set in the register for the number of calculations (C register).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2793, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the area outside the use area of the RWM 53. FIG.
In this embodiment, the area outside the use area of the RWM 53 is set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and in the next step S2794, the checksum is calculated up to the address "F3FF(H)" of the RWM 53. The processing of steps S2793 and S2794 is repeated until it is determined that the processing has ended. As a result, the checksum outside the use area of the RWM 53 (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the checksum calculation result of the used area of the RWM 53 is stored in the checksum calculation register (D register) at the time when the process proceeds to step S2793. Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the value of the addressing register (B register) is subtracted from the value of the checksum calculation register (D register). In the next step S2794, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether or not the result is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation processing outside the use area of the RWM 53 has ended, and the flow advances to step S2795. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the addressing register (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2793.

Thus, in this embodiment, the RWM checksum data (also called complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processing of steps S2785 to S2794.
This RWM checksum data (complement data) is, as described above, the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the address "F210(H)" outside the use area. ∼ "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") is a value that becomes "0" when added to the addition value of the data.

Then, when the checksum calculation processing outside the use area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. )do.
Proceeding to the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the register saved in step S2783, and restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781 in the next step S2797. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 38) are turned off. Output port 3 is an output port corresponding to digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal, and output port 4 is an output port corresponding to segment 1A to segment 1P signal. By outputting "00000000 (B)" to these output ports 3 and 4, the output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily disabled. As a result, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from appearing to light up at the same time (overlaid display) even for a moment (prevention of afterimage).

In the next step S2823, the used area LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (FIGS. 33 and 40A) is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 is a process of shifting the bit "1" to the right by one digit. This updated value is stored in the RWM 53 at address "F051(H)" (FIG. 33). Then, the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether or not the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". Then, when it is determined to be "00000000(B)", the process proceeds to step S2825. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "00000000(B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)" and stored in the address "F051 (H)" of the RWM 53 (FIG. 33). Then, the process proceeds to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 33) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 33) stored in the RWM 53 are obtained. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

The flow then advances to step S2827 to set the segment display confirmation of the digits to be displayed this time. In this process, an AND operation is performed on the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of the LED display counter 1) to create the data of the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, proceeding to step S2828, it is determined whether or not the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of the LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0". Here, when it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is obtained. When an error occurs, error display data is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Then, in step S2829, the error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. In this embodiment, an LED segment table 1 storing data for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display and an LED segment table 2 storing data for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display are provided. These are stored in the used area of the ROM 54 . A description of the specific configurations of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the top address of LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S2831, the set value display data (address "F001 (H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2832, it is determined whether or not there is a set value display request. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). When the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a set value display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no set value display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2833.

In step S2833, credit number data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, the upper digit offset is acquired. This process executes an operation of dividing the A register value (credit amount data acquired in step S2833) by "10 (decimal number)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder in the C register. It is a process to

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". When the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2836.

Proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit amount. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". When the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2842. On the other hand, when the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2837.

In step S2837, acquisition number data (address "F011(H)" in FIG. 33) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2840. On the other hand, when the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. When proceeding to step S2839, the HL register stores the head address of the LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display. display the corresponding alphabetic character. Therefore, in step S2839, the head address of the LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read, and the value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the head address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the head address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, the offset for the upper digits is obtained. At the time when the process proceeds to step S2840, the A register stores the acquisition number data acquired in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data acquired in step S2829. If an error does not occur, the acquired number data stored in the A register is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register. do. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the error display data stored in the B register is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S2841, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED78. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". When the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the obtained number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the obtained number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2842.

In step S2842, the offset for lower digits is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the C register in the A register. At the time the process proceeds to step S2842, the A register stores the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840, and the C register stores the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of division) is stored in the A register.

The flow then advances to step S2843 to acquire segment output data. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the head address of the LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830 or the head address of the LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) and the data stored in the A register ( The offset value corresponding to the display data) is added, and the data corresponding to the address after the addition is acquired from the LED segment table 1 or 2 of the ROM 54 and stored in the D register.

The flow then advances to step S2844 to determine whether or not there is a segment P display request.
Specifically, first, the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is “1” (lighting timing of digit 4), and the advantageous section display LED flag (address “F062 (H) of RWM 53 in FIG. 33) )”) is “1”. When the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P ("Yes"), and step Proceed to S2845.
On the other hand, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no segment P display request ("No"), and step S2845. and proceed to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", proceed to the following processing.
An AND operation is performed on the LED display counter 1 (E register value) and the status display LED lighting data (obtained from the address "F044 (H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG. 33), and it is determined whether or not the result of the AND operation is "0". . Then, when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), step S2845 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2846.

Proceeding to step S2845, segment P output data is set. Specifically, the segment output data (D register value) acquired in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the result of the OR operation is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit (the bit corresponding to segment P) of the segment output data becomes "1".

Then, proceeding to the next step S2846, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. Specifically, the data (LED display counter 1) stored in the E register is output from the output port 3 as a digit signal, and the data (segment output data) stored in the D register is output as a segment signal to the output port. Output from 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As described above, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the second program. No interrupt prohibition processing is provided after the start of error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Except for this point, the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is the same as the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG.
In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during interrupt processing (I_INTR). Also, during the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during the game), and in the recoverable error state, Since interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, so various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process is started, first, in step S2461, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer (SP register) to the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in FIG. 35). memorize to
As described above, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program outside the usage area (second program). 1 program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the used area (first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets a stack pointer outside the use area. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process of saving various registers to a stack area outside the used area.
Next, proceeding to step S2464, the main control board 50 executes flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is a process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, and is a process of updating the flashing request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is the process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later. This is the process of updating the
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 56, which will be described later, and is a process of actually displaying (lighting up or extinguishing) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, proceeding to step S2467, the main control board 50 restores the register. This process is a process of restoring various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2461, ie, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, the processing causes the stap pointer to indicate the address of the used area. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during the game), and return Since interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed even in the possible error state, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
For this reason, the ratio By the display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY), it is possible to sequentially display information types and various ratios related to game results on the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

Further, in this embodiment, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of ON/OFF of the door switch 17 (opening/closing of the front door 12). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed). It is possible.
Therefore, both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed. Thus, it is possible to sequentially display information types and various ratios related to game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

On the other hand, an unrecoverable error occurs, an unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed, and the game progresses). When it comes to a stopped state), the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited, so the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is not executed. Various ratios related to game results are no longer displayed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 described above or the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Outputs 0 to 7 are turned off (“00000000 (B)”).

As a result, in an unrecoverable error state, outputs from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are "00000000 (B)". Therefore, all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain extinguished until the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt process (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit is a mode specific to the unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
When the flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process is started, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and initial values in step S2481. This process stores "6(H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not to blink the 6 ratio segments.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The flashing/non-applicable item determination value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of the six items. For example, the instructed accessory ratio "70" means that the display is blinked when the instructed accessory ratio is "70" or more.
As shown in FIG. 54, the leading address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500 (H)". Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

"Non-applicable item" means that the function (performance) corresponding to the item is not provided. For example, in a gaming machine that does not have ``RB (first class special role)'', the continuous role ratio is not displayed.
In the third embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed. However, when there is a non-applicable item, the address of the ROM 54 corresponding to the non-applicable item in the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table contains "DE ( H)” is stored.

For example, in a gaming machine that does not have "RB (first class special accessory)", the addresses "2502 (H)" and "2504 (H)" are replaced with "60 (H)" in FIG. , "DE(H)".
In this way, even if the game machine is not equipped with "RB (first class special accessory)", it can be managed simply by correcting a part of the data of the flashing/non-applicable item judgment value table. A control process is provided to enable lighting control of information. Therefore, the control program can be easily used for other products.
Note that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the address ("F28D(H)" in FIG. 35) where the role product etc. state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S2484, the main control board 50 acquires a blinking or non-corresponding item determination value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the A register value.

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is a non-applicable item value. In this process, "DD(H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined to be a non-corresponding item value.
That is, when the item is a non-applicable item, "DE(H)" is stored in the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table as described above, so "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)". After that, if "DD(H)" is further subtracted, it becomes "0" and the zero flag="1".

When a predetermined value other than "DE(H)" is stored as the value corresponding to the non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value -1 - (predetermined value -1)" is calculated, and the result of the calculation is "0". When (zero flag=“1”), it is judged to be a non-corresponding item value.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the instructed accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (6000 times), and the continuous accessory ratio ( Cumulative total) and continuous role product ratio (6000 times) may be a value exceeding "60 (H)", and in the case of role product condition ratio, a value exceeding "50 (H)" may be used.
If it is determined that the item value is not a non-applicable item value, the process proceeds to the next step S2486.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires ratio data. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 saves the ratio data or non-applicable item values. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meanings.

If there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in which the ratio data is stored before the save process.
For example, if "RB (first class special bonus)" is not provided, continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289 (H)") and continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B(H)") stores "00(H)".

Although the details will be described later, when the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. At that time, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) data, when displaying the continuous role product ratio (6000 times), the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 is "00" is displayed. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register obtained in step S2485 ("DD(H)" in this embodiment) is stored as ratio data, so that "--" is displayed.
It should be noted that the program processing is incorporated so that this can also be used in common between gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs blinking determination. This process is a process of subtracting the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1".
Although the details will be described later, when the carry flag is set to "1", it means that the item is lit without blinking when the item is displayed, and when the carry flag is set to "0", It means that when the item is displayed, it lights up in a blinking manner.

Next, proceeding to step S2489, the main control board 50 generates a flashing request flag. This process performs arithmetic processing to rotate-shift the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the value of the carry flag is "CY" and the value of the C register is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Calculation is performed as follows.

For example, when the C register value is the initial value "00000000 (B)" as shown in step S2481 and the carry flag = "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
Calculation is performed as follows.
Therefore, the C register value is "00000001 (B)".
This C register value finally becomes the flashing request flag.
In other words, the process of step S2488 registers information for determining whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table. (storage area).

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first blink determination is "F28D(H)" (accessory item state ratio data) as described above. Here, when "1" is subtracted, the HL register value becomes "F28C(H)" (accessory ratio (accumulated) data), which is the second flashing determination target.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. For example, when "2500 (H)" was initially stored as the DE register value, it becomes "2501 (H)" by this processing.
Here, as shown in FIG. 54, the state ratio of the role, etc., the ratio of the role (cumulative), the ratio of the continuous role (cumulative), the ratio of the role (6000 times), the ratio of the continuous role (6000 times), Blinking/non-corresponding item determination values are stored in addresses "2500(H)" to "2505(H)" in order of character ratio.
As a result, a loop processing (step S2484 to S2492) allows the target address to be specified, thereby simplifying the processing.

Next, proceeding to step S2492, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) If the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the iteration has not ended.
Here, since the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions is "6". If it is determined that the repetition has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not been completed, the process returns to step S2484.
As described above, six items of flashing determination are performed.

When the flashing determination of the 6 items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2493, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the lower 2 bytes of the total number-of-games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the A register.
As described above, the total number-of-games counter consists of 3 bytes, "F26D(H)" is a storage area for storing the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
"F26E(H)" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and the value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2495, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2496.
At step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether or not 6000 games have passed. In this process, "6000 (D)" is subtracted from the HL register value (lower 2-byte data of the total number-of-games counter). As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not passed, and the process proceeds to step S2497.
On the other hand, when it is determined that 6000 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2496.

At step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the blink request flag data. This process is to set the D6 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the flashing request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, the process of setting the D6 bit to "1" is executed.

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the upper byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more). Here, a process of subtracting "3" from the A register value is performed. If there is no carry-down in this subtraction, the carry flag ≠ "1". Then, when the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number-of-games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more).

The reason for doing this is that the upper 1 byte is first compared with "3" in order to determine whether or not the number of games has reached 175,000. Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds "2" (the A register value is "3" or more). In general, it can be seen that the value of the total number-of-games counter exceeds "175000 (D)".
At step S2497, when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2", and the process proceeds to step S2500. It is determined that the upper 1 byte of the number-of-games counter does not exceed "2", and the process proceeds to step S2498.

At step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is "2". In this process, "2" is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is not "2". If it is determined that the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is not "2", the process proceeds to step S2501, and if it is determined that the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is "2", step S2499. proceed to

At step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether or not 175000 games have been played. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and as a result of the operation, when there is a carry flag, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 175000 games have not passed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not passed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

At step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the blinking request flag data. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1". The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit (175000 game blink flag) of the blink request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. Then, the process advances to step S2501.

At step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a flashing request flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "01111111 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before execution of the process of step S2501, "0" is stored in the blinking items (bits) of the data stored in the C register, as described above. For example, when 175000 games have been played, the D7 bit is "1" as described above. In other words, when 175000 games have not been played, it is "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bit of the C register value, a flashing request flag is generated so that the flashing item (bit) becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 saves the flashing request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing request flag ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 35).
As a result, the blinking item becomes "1" and the non-blinking item becomes "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0", and the flashing request flags for eight items including whether or not to flash are stored at the address "F291(H)" in FIG. remembered.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
When the ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) process is started, the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (“F294(H)” in FIG. 35) storing the display switching time in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between "0" and "2144 (D)" when the display switching time is expressed in decimal notation.

Therefore, if the processing is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time.
Also, when the flag is "0", the process is performed, and when "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Since interrupt processing is executed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" and the carry flag becomes "1" every approximately 4792 ms.
As a result, the content of the ratio display is switched about every five seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is to determine whether or not the carry flag=“1” in the process of step S2511. When the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
When it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513, and when it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blink switching time. In this process, "134 (D) (86 (H))" is stored at the address (blink switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (that is, "F296 (H)").
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has passed, the flashing switching time is saved. A time of "2.235×134=299.49 (ms)" is stored as the flashing switching time.

Next, proceeding to step S2514, the main control board 50 turns off the flashing switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing switching flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the flashing switching flag is "0", it indicates lighting, and when it is "1", it indicates lighting off.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the flashing switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, proceeding to step S2515, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35) corresponding to the ratio display number is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that circulates between "0" and "5" for the ratio display number. Therefore, if the processing is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number. Also, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag is set to "1".

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the ratio display number is not “0”. In other words, if the process of step S2515 is executed when the ratio display number is "5", the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and at this time it is determined that the ratio display number is "0". do.

In step S2516, when it is determined that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
At step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 35). By this processing, when "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number circulates from "1" to "6". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2512, it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, and when proceeding to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the flashing switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the flashing switching time address (“F296 (H)” in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between "0" and "134 (D)" when the flashing switching time is expressed in decimal notation.
Therefore, if the processing is performed when the flashing switching time is "0", "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the flashing switching time.
Also, when the value is "0", the process is performed, and when "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the flashing switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, proceeding to step S2519, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the blink switching time has elapsed. This judgment is made by judging whether or not the carry flag is "1", and when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is judged that the flashing switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the flashing switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2520, and if it is determined that the flashing switching time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

At step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the flashing switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing switching flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 35) in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the addition result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that circulates between "0" and "1" for the flashing switching flag. Therefore, if this process is performed when the flashing switching flag is "1", "0" is stored as the flashing switching flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is started, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 35) in step S1471. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and storing it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for any of the digits 6-9. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111 (B)" are ANDed. When the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the third embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111(B)" never becomes "0", so the result of step S1472 never becomes "No".

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 35) is acquired. This process acquires the ratio display number, stores it in the A register, and further stores the A register value in the E register.
Here, based on the ratio display number, the number of flashing bit inspections, which will be described later, is determined. For example:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Acquire the number of flashing bit inspections of the instructed accessory ratio.
Example 2)
The ratio display number is "2": The number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous role ratio (6000 times) is acquired.
Example 3)
The ratio display number is "5": Acquires the number of blinking bit inspections for the role product ratio (total cumulative total).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": Acquire the number of blinking bit inspections of the state ratio of accessories, etc.
Also, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blinking bit inspection frequency table is set. In this process, the HL register stores an address obtained by subtracting "1" from the leading address of the flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 57, a predetermined value is stored for each ratio (for example, the value corresponding to the instructed accessory ratio is "8(H)").
Its top address is "2510(H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The "blinking bit inspection count" is a value indicating how many bits ahead from the D0 bit in the blinking request flag of the address "F292(H)" to reach the bit to be inspected.
For example, in FIG. 57, "8 (H)" is stored in the instructed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (total), accessory ratio (total), and accessory state ratio. , is a value for determining whether or not the value of the eighth D7 bit counted from the D0-th bit in the flashing request flag is "1". The D7th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 175000 times, and when the D7th bit is "1", the instructed accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are indicated. (Total), Accessory ratio (Total), and Accessory state ratio identification segs are blinking targets.

Further, in FIG. 57, "7 (H)" is stored in the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times). This is a value for judging whether or not the value of the seventh D6 bit after counting is "1". The D6th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000 times. The identification seg with the character ratio (6000 times) is to be blinked.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment blinking bit check count. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F(H)+3(H)=2512(H) (=HL register value)
7 (H) (=B register value)
becomes.

In other words, "250F(H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292(H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit check table and store it at that address. It is possible to acquire the data that is stored.
In the above example, "7 (H)", which is the information for determining whether or not to blink the identification seg at the character ratio (6000 times) stored at the address "2512 (H)", is obtained. be done.

Next, proceeding to step S1476, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process is to store the start address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The head address is "2520(H)", and "251F(H)" obtained by subtracting "1" from this address is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires the identification segment offset value. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as the offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520 (H)" obtained by adding "1 (H)" to "251F (H)" is stored in the HL register and stored at the address. The received data "7A(H)" is stored in the A register. Further, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)" obtained by adding "2(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at the address is is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (request to display digit 6). Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (request to display digit 7). Here, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the ratio segment blinking bit inspection count. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the E register stores the ratio display number obtained in step S1475. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
The process then advances to step S1480. When the process proceeds to step S1480, there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no request to display the identification segment (when displaying the ratio segment). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained.
At this step S1480, the main control board 50 acquires the numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the instructed accessory ratio data is acquired.

Acquisition of specific ratio data is as follows.
(1) Store the value ("F287 (H)") obtained by subtracting "1" from the address ("F288 (H)" in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 where the instructed bonus ratio data is stored in the HL register. do.
(2) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
That is, with "F287(H)" as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored is calculated (specified), and the data stored at the RWM address is transferred to the register (storage area). can be obtained (stored) in

By this process, the A register stores the instructed role ratio data, continuous role ratio data (6000 times), role ratio data (6000 times), continuous role ratio data (cumulative total), and role ratio data (cumulative total). ), and an offset value for displaying the ratio of any of the state ratios of accessories, etc. is stored. This offset value (A register value) is used when acquiring ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, proceeding to step S1481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit) (request to display digit 9). This process is to determine whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1482.
When there is no ratio (1-digit) display request in step S1481, it means that there is a ratio (10-digit) display request.

Through the above processing, if there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. .
At step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the upper digit offset. This is because the upper digits of the identification seg or the ratio seg are lit when the process proceeds to step S1482. At this point, the A register stores the identified segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480). Here, the following processing is executed.

(1) Replace the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before replacement is "0011/1001(B)"("/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits are replaced. and becomes "1001/0011(B)".
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and "00001111(B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register. This process is a process of masking (setting to "0") the upper 4 bits since the lower 4 bits of the A register are used as an offset value.
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper digit offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower digit offset value. ing. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value for obtaining the segment data of the upper digits is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets the ratio display segment data table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The head address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. A description of the specific configuration of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, proceeding to step S1484, the main control board 50 acquires segment output data. In this process, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (head address of the ratio display segment data table), and the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition is stored in the E register. processing.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
when
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S1485, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when digits 6 to 9 are displayed, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a request to display a ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is to be displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digits), and the ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that the display of the segment P is not requested.

Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". determines that there is no display request for segment P. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "00000010 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471).
If it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S2534.

At step S1486, the main control board 50 sets the output data corresponding to the segment P. FIG. Since the segment P corresponds to the D7 bit of the 8-bit data, the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the operation result is stored in the E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires a flashing request flag. This process is a process of storing the data of the flashing request flag (address "F291(H)" in FIG. 35) in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2535, the main control board 50 performs a blinking bit test. This process is a process of shifting the A register to the right by "1" and storing the overflowed result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag is "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag is "1". Become.

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the inspection has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection is completed.
If it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537, and if it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
By the above processing, the value of the flashing request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times that it was first stored in the B register, and the result of the shift and overflow is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blink request flag is "10000000 (B)" (175000 times blink flag of D7th bit is ON) and the B register value is "8 (H)",
First time: "10000000 (B)"→"01000000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7 (H)
Second time: "01000000 (B)"→"00100000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
Third time: "00100000 (B)"→"00010000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
Fourth time: "00010000 (B)"→"00001000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (H)
Fifth time: "00001000 (B)"→"00000100 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (H)
Sixth time: "00000100 (B)"→"00000010 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
Seventh time: "00000010 (B)"→"00000001 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
Eighth time: "00000001 (B)"→"00000000 (B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0 (H)
becomes.

At step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the blinking request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has been completed. When it is determined that the flashing request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538, and when it is determined that the flashing request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

At step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the flashing switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the flashing switching flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 35) is stored in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the flashing switching flag is not on.
If it is determined that the flashing switching flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2539, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.
From steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the flashing request flag is off ("No" in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so even if the flashing switching flag is on, the light does not turn off.
b) Even if the flashing request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the flashing switching flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the flashing request flag is on (“Yes” at step S2537) and the flashing switching flag is on (“Yes” at step S2538), the process advances to step S2539 to turn off the light.

At step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended. Therefore, this process is a process of setting "0" to the E register. That is, when the blink request flag is on (“1”) and the blink switching flag is on (“1”, i.e., extinguished), the interrupt process extinguishes the display to be illuminated. In order to set the data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)", the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, the main control board 50 outputs the segment signal from the output port 7 and the digit signal from the output port 6 in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Swap the DE and HL register values.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. A segment signal is stored in the E register. and,
exchange the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register,
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are exchanged.
This will
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
A segment signal is stored in the L register.
(2) output the L register value to output port 7 and the H register value to output port 6;
This completes the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, the operation when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the third embodiment is operated will be described.
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, and a recoverable error state occurs (for example, medal selector error ("CE" error), etc.), the reset switch ( Assume that the RWM clear switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is canceled, the data in the use area and outside the use area of the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized, so the data regarding the advantageous section is also maintained without being initialized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also kept lit.
It should be noted that error-related data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53 may be initialized when recovering from a recoverable error state.

On the other hand, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. , and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated), the power is turned on.
In this case, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, at step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. "No", "Yes" in step S2710, and the process advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power is restored normally.

Also, since the setting change disabled flag is off because medals can be betted, the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the use area of the RWM 53 and address "F292(H)" outside the use area ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed. As a result, the data relating to the advantageous interval is initialized, and the advantageous interval display LED 77 is extinguished. However, since the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" is maintained without being initialized, the set value is not changed. Furthermore, since it is reset time, the result is "Yes" in step S2741 of FIG. 44, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, so that the setting change state is not entered either. After that, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and returns to the state where medals can be betted.

In this way, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state, It is possible to maintain the game in the advantageous section.
On the other hand, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off once, and then the reset switch 153 is turned on. When the power is turned on in , the recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be restarted from the normal section instead of the advantageous section.
As a result, it is possible for the administrator (hall clerk) to select whether to maintain the game in the advantageous section or restart the game from the normal section.

Also, for example, assume that the player stops playing the game during the game in the advantageous section (halfway through the game in the advantageous section). In such a case, if the next player starts the game in the middle of the game in the advantageous section, the player becomes too advantageous.
On the other hand, it is not preferable to change the settings during the operation of the hall, as it may arouse the gambling spirit of the players.
In addition, if the operation of the game machine is stopped by turning off the power supply of the game machine during the operation of the hall, the operation rate of the game machine will decrease, which is not preferable in terms of the management of the hall.
Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, the power is turned off once, and then the power is turned on while the reset switch 153 is turned on. As a result, the game can be resumed from the normal section without changing the settings.

Also, in a situation where medals can be betted, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). , is turned on.
In this case, it is possible to shift to a setting change state (setting change mode, during setting change), after which the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, medals can be betted. back to a normal situation.

Specifically, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, then the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off (not operated). Under these circumstances, when the power is turned on, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, since the power failure recovery is not abnormal, the result is "No" in step S2712, and the flow advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power failure recovery is normal. Furthermore, since it is possible to bet medals, the setting change disabled flag is off, so the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, since it is not reset time, the result is "No" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of FIG. Then, since it is not the time to start checking the setting, the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is repeated until "No" is obtained in step S2755 of the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) of FIG. 45 and "Yes" is obtained in step S2756. In other words, the setting change state is entered. Thereafter, when the start switch 41 is operated, "Yes" is determined in step S2756, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, "Yes" is determined in step S2760, and the setting change state ends. Then, through the processing of steps S2743 to S2747 of FIG. 44, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 46), returning to the state where medals can be betted.

Further, as described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including during rotation of the reel 31, During this period, the setting change is disabled, and the setting change disabled flag is turned on.
The power is turned off when the setting change disable flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. 41, the process does not go to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore does not go to the setting change state.

On the other hand, when medals can be betted, the setting change disabled flag is off, so the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch is turned on. When the (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off and the power is turned on, the result is "Yes" in step S2714 of FIG. can be moved to

Also, as described above, when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state when the power is restored normally, the flow advances to step S2713 in FIG. ” to “F1FF(H)” and addresses “F292(H)” to “F3FF(H)” outside the use area are set. Further, the initialization range of the use area of the RWM 53 includes credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" and bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)".

Therefore, when medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off. After that, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting change state is entered. is finished and medals can be betted, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits becomes "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is any one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. In such a situation, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be betted, the bet number is "0", and the credit number is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals are bet. When the situation becomes possible, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be bet, the bet amount is "0", and the credit amount is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned on and reset. When the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off and the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet , the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, then the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on (operated). , is turned on. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the initialization processing of the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and after executing the initialization processing, it becomes possible to bet medals without shifting to the setting change state.

Specifically, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned off under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on. When it is turned on, "No" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. The RWM 53 initialization range is set. Also, since the setting change disabled flag is off because medals can be betted, the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the use area of the RWM 53 and address "F292(H)" outside the use area ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed.
Also, since it is reset time, "Yes" is given in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processing of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and returns to the state in which medals can be betted.

Also, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, since the result in step S2714 of FIG. 41 is "No", the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 is not performed.

On the other hand, in a situation where medals can be betted, the setting change disabled flag is off. Under such a situation, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on under the condition that the RWM clear switch 153 is on, the result of step S2714 in FIG. Processing is performed.

Also, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, in step S2713 of FIG. 41, as the initialization range of the RWM 53, the used area addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the addresses outside the used area "F292(H)" to "F3FF (H)" is set. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range that is set when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state when power is restored normally.

That is, under the condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure), the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. When the power is turned on and when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 is in the same range. Initialization processing is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and therefore even if the setting key is not in possession, the same range as when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed is performed. , RWM 53 can be initialized.
Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed within the same scope as when shifting to the setting change state without shifting to the setting change state.

Therefore, when medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off. After that, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 is initialized. , when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is any one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then medals can be betted. When it becomes, the bet amount becomes "0" and the credit amount also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be betted, the bet number is "0", and the credit number is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then medals can be bet. When , the bet amount becomes "0" and the credit amount also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be bet, the bet amount is "0", and the credit amount is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and reset. Even when the power is turned on while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed. becomes "0", and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Suppose That is, it is assumed that the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to shift to the setting change state, and after that, the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to the state in which medals can be bet.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the setting key switch signal is on, and then in step S2710 it is determined whether or not the reset switch signal is on. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined whether or not the reset switch signal is on.
Therefore, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the result is "Yes" in step S2707, and the process does not proceed to step S2710. That is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the setting key switch 152 has priority. When the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44, "No" is obtained in step S2741, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, so that the setting change state can be entered.

It is also assumed that the setting value display LED 73 initially displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2") when the setting change state is entered. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "M-1", and the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001 (H)" is "M". is.
After that, it is assumed that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the set value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1", and the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001 (H)" is " N”.

Furthermore, it is assumed that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the set value display LED 73 is displaying the set value "N". In this case, since the start switch 41 is not operated, the set value data after change is not saved (stored) in the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, so the value of "F000 (H)" is "M -1" is maintained. Also, since the start switch 41 is not operated and the setting key switch 152 is not turned off, the power is turned off without ending the setting change state (while the setting change state remains).

After that, assume that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. In this case, the power is only turned on/off, and the data in the use area and outside the use area of the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized. return to state. Also, "M-1" is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, and "N" is stored in the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001 (H)". Therefore, when the setting change state is restored, the set value display LED 73 displays the set value "N".

On the other hand, it is assumed that the set value display LED 73 first displays the set value "M" (for example, "2") when the setting change state is entered. After that, it is assumed that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the set value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . Furthermore, it is assumed that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the set value display LED 73 is displaying the set value "N". Up to this point, the process is the same as the above case. Next, assume that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.

In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "No", and step S2710 is "Yes". the scope is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed. Therefore, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1".
Also, since it is reset time, "Yes" is given in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and a medal can be betted. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1", so the set value becomes "M".

Also assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore power-down processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. No data is saved.

Since the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the power is turned on, "No" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to step S2708. Further, since the power-off processing completed flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, the result is "Yes" in step S2708, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state and then turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, , it becomes an unrecoverable error state.

Although the power is turned on under the condition that the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 does not proceed to step S2710. ) is never executed, nor is the initialization process (M_INI_SET) executed.
Also, during execution of processing by the second program, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed and power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. When the power is turned on, the power-off processing completion flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved. ). That is, an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Also, while the non-recoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is being executed by the program (second program) outside the usage area, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on under the condition that the switch 153 is on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, the non-recoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program in the used area (first program).

Similarly, during execution of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) by the program in the usage area (first program), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch ) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, "No" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program (first program) of the used area.

Also, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state and then turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off.
In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and the process advances to step S2711 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of setting change start at power failure recovery failure. Also, since it is a power-off/recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732-S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. And the entire range outside the use area (addresses "F210 (H)" to "F3FF (H)" is initialized. Therefore, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "0", the set value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not reset time, "No" is obtained in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG.
In this setting change state, it is assumed that the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 . In this case, since interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
After that, assume that the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since it is not a power-off/recovery abnormality, step S2708 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 is "No". Also, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result is "Yes" in step S2710. Then, the flow advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power is restored normally.

Also, since the setting change disable flag is off, "Yes" is obtained in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Further, since it is reset time, "Yes" is obtained in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 44, and the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) of step S248, and a medal can be betted. At this time, since the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0" as described above, the setting value becomes "1".

Also, in this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. Furthermore, in step S2776 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 48, the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) of FIG. 49, the processing of steps S2785 to S2794 is executed to calculate the RWM checksum data (complement data), and the calculated RWM checksum data is transferred to the It is stored in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53 by processing.

As described above, this RWM checksum data consists of the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area of the RWM 53. H)” (excluding “F2A0(H)”) is a value that becomes “0” when added to the added value of the data.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and the recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR ) can be executed. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (the power is turned off) in a recoverable error state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
On the other hand, an unrecoverable error occurs, an unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed, and the game progresses). In the stopped state), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. Therefore, if an event occurs in which the power supply is interrupted (the power is turned off) in an unrecoverable error state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, by not executing the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN), when the power is turned on after that, the program start processing ( M_PRG_START), it can be determined in step S2708 that there is an abnormality in recovery from power failure, and the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the unrecoverable error state occurs again simply by turning on/off the power supply.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, the power must be turned off once and an operation (turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on) to shift to the setting change state must be performed. It is possible to make it impossible to return to a state in which medals can be betted (a state in which the game can proceed).

When an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. In step S2708, it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, so the main process (M_MAIN) (Fig. 46) is not performed. It cannot be returned to (a state in which the game can be progressed).

Also, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped), interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, but recovery is not possible. When a possible error occurs and it becomes an unrecoverable error state (the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and the progress of the game is stopped) , interrupt processing (I_INTR) is disabled.
Furthermore, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) for controlling the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) and lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are controlled. The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Therefore, in a recoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, so LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in the recoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by LED display control (I_LED_OUT), and management information is displayed by ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY). The LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) can sequentially display information types and various ratios related to game results.

On the other hand, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, so neither LED display control (I_LED_OUT) nor ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is executed.
Therefore, during the unrecoverable error state, the above-described unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Display error information.

Also, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. .
As a result, during an unrecoverable error state, outputs from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are "00000000 (B)". , all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain extinguished until the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt process (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit is a mode specific to the unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (digit 6-9 signal output port) and output port 7 (segment signal output port for digits 6-9) are turned off. By setting it to (“00000000(B)”), all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, the display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 in the unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8" during an unrecoverable error state. That is, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be set to "8888".
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a modification of the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG.
58, step numbers different from those in FIG. 51 are underlined, and steps identical to those in FIG. 51 are assigned the same step numbers.
Differences from FIG. 51 will be mainly described below.

In the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. 58, step S1505 is followed by step S1506. Output.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001 (B)" (data in which only digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").

Next, proceeding to step S1507, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. How long to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. For example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by the internal system clock. The process advances to step S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 (“00000000 (B)”). This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, proceeding to step S1509, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. This process is for ensuring that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in the digit 7 from the output ports 6 and 7. FIG.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000010 (B)" (data in which only digit 7 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").
Steps S1511 to S1513 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Proceeding to step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" as the digit 8 from the output ports 6 and 7. FIG.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000100 (B)" (data in which only digit 8 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").
Steps S1515-S1517 are the same as steps S1507-S1509.

Proceeding to step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in the digit 9 from the output ports 6 and 7. FIG.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data in which only digit 9 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1").
Steps S1519 to S1521 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509. After executing the process of step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

In this manner, digits 6 through 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8" during an unrecoverable error state.
The display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all being "8" is a feature specific to an unrecoverable error state. It is possible to notify that an error state has occurred.

The display of the management information display LED 74 may be "----" instead of "8888". That is, only segments G of digits 6 to 9 may be illuminated.
Also, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "...". That is, only segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be illuminated.
Furthermore, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be set to "8.8.8.8.". That is, as shown in FIG. 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be illuminated.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (digit 6-9 signal output port) and output port 7 (segment signal output port for digits 6-9) are turned off. By setting it to (“00000000(B)”), all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. may be maintained instead of In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 is as follows.

As described above, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, digit 9 "5", digit 8 "6", digit 7 "P." The "7" of the digit 6 are illuminated sequentially. Assume, for example, that digits 6 to 8 of the management information display LED 74 are extinguished and digit 9 is illuminated with "5", and an unrecoverable error state occurs. In this case, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digits 6 to 8 to turn off and digit 9 to light up and display "5" is output from output ports 6 and 7. do.

Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (digit 9 signal is "1" and others are "0"), and output port 7 outputs "01101101 (B)" (segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0" data), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is stopped, and then output from output ports 6 and 7 The signal (data) to be rewritten is not performed.
Therefore, the output of the signals (digit signal and segment signal) from the output ports 6 and 7 is maintained until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt process (I_INTR) is restarted. remains unlit, and digit 9 remains illuminated with "5".

Similarly, for example, assume that digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is illuminated with "7" and digits 7 to 9 are extinguished, and an unrecoverable error state occurs.
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted, the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digit 6 to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 to go out. Since the state of being output from the output ports 6 and 7 continues, the digit 6 is illuminated with "7" and the digits 7 to 9 remain extinguished.

Further, for example, assume that the non-recoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program under the condition that the digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit and the digits 7 to 9 are not lit. Assume that the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained without being turned off in the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program. In this case, as described above, the state in which the signal (digit signal and segment signal) causing the digit 6 to light up and the digits 7 to 9 to go out (the digit signal and the segment signal) continues to be output from the output ports 6 and 7. Digit 6 is illuminated with "7", and digits 7-9 remain unlit.

When the power is turned off in this state, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are extinguished. After that, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off, "Yes" is given in step S2708 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Processing is performed. In this case, the data in the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized, since the process does not proceed to the initialization process of step S2731. For this reason, data related to lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address “F292 (H)” to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of “F297 (H)” etc.) are also maintained without being initialized.

Here, it is assumed that interrupt processing (I_INTR) is made executable without being prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program. In this case, lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is performed by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in the interrupt processing (I_INTR). The ratio information immediately before the possible error process 2 is executed, that is, "7P.65" (instruction-containing accessory ratio, ratio display number "1") is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that "7P.65" was displayed, for example, for "2000 ms" in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program was executed. In this case, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the non-recoverable error process by the first program, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 show "7P.65" and "4791.84ms". - "2000ms" = displayed for "2791.84ms". After that, the display items after the ratio display number "2" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the unrecoverable error process by the first program, the display continues from the ratio information immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program is executed. is started (restarted).
On the other hand, if the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited in the non-recoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed either. to 9 remain unlit.

In addition, as described above, regarding the instructed accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory state ratio, when the total number of games played is less than “175000”, that Blinks the identification segment. With respect to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games played is less than "6000", the identification seg is blinked. In addition, when the displayed value of the instructed role product ratio, the role product ratio (accumulated), and the role product ratio (6000 times) is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. When the displayed value of the continuous role product ratio (accumulated) and the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is "60" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. When the displayed value of the state ratio of the role product is "50" or more, the ratio seg blinks. In addition, when the blinking display is performed, lighting and extinguishing are repeated every about 0.3 seconds.

Therefore, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all go out. For example, under the condition that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are all extinguished, that is, when the output from the output ports 6 and 7 is "00000000 (B)" (off), recovery is impossible. Assume that an error has occurred.
In this case, the outputs from the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained as "00000000 (B)" (off) until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. All digits 6 to 9 of the display LED 74 remain off.

The display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as described above is a display mode peculiar to the non-recoverable error state. It is possible to notify that a possible error state has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off on condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure). When the power is turned on (to shift to the setting change state), the setting key switch 152 is off, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. The initialization process of the RWM 53 was executed in the same range as when it was turned on.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. , the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
For example, when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, when the power is turned on, the RWM 53 is initialized in the same range as when the advantageous section ends. conversion processing may be performed.
Specifically, a predetermined range (for example, addresses “F061(H)” to “F068(H)” in FIG. 33) of the use area of the RWM 53 storing data relating to the advantageous section is initialized. Other ranges (for example, credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" in FIG. 33, bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at "F043(H)", etc.) can be maintained without being initialized. .
In any case, the initialization range when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on and the power is turned on is set to be narrower than the initialization range when shifting to the setting change state. is preferred.

(4) In the above embodiment, it is determined in step S458 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 whether or not the setting value is within the normal range. Go to 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, it may be determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range immediately after determining that the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46).

(5) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned off while staying in the setting change state and then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the setting change state is entered. The medal was moved to a situation where it was possible to bet without letting
However, this is not the only option. When this occurs, an unrecoverable error state may occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is provided, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when the termination condition of the setting change state is satisfied, Clear the configuration change status flag.
Then, when the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. It is determined whether or not the setting change status flag is on. When it is determined that the setting change state flag is ON, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 to set the unrecoverable error state.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being set even though the operation for finalizing the setting value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, any value from "0(D)" to "5(D)" is stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 as the set value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the set value data is managed with "0(D)" to "5(D)".
However, not limited to this, any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" may be stored as the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53. good. That is, the set value data may be managed as "1(D) to "6(D)".

Then, when shifting to the setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is cleared (to "0"), and an operation to fix the setting value (for example, by pressing the start switch 41) is performed. turn on) is performed, any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" is stored as the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53. good too.
In this case, when the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the setting value is out of the normal range ( It may be determined that a set value error has occurred), proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, and enter an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) are output from the output port 3, and segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segments 1A to 5) are output from the output port 3. 1P signal) is output from output port 4, digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 6, and segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals) are output from output port 6. Output from output port 7.
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal was output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal was output from the output port 4. FIG. When the digits 6 to 9 are lit, the digit signal is output from the output port 6 and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7 . That is, the output ports to be used are divided into digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by the program in the usage area (first program) and digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by the program outside the usage area (second program). rice field.

However, not limited to this, for example, digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by a program in the usage area (first program) and digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by a program outside the usage area (second program). , the output port may be shared.
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a modification of the output port in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 59, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from the output port 3. FIG. Digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 4. can do.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, by turning off the output of output port 4 (the output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) ("00000000 (B)"), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 can be left off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal is provided in the use area of the RWM 53, and outside the use area of the RWM 53, An LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is provided for outputting digit 6 to digit 9 signals. That is, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided independently. However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a modification of the LED display counter in the third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 60, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle is provided in the RWM 53 area. , and digit 6 to digit 9 signals may be output. That is, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be used in common.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 56, the value of the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is obtained and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not there is a ratio display request. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)" are ANDed, and when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and step S1475. , and when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

Here, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00001000 (B)", "00000100 (B)", "00000010 (B)", or "00000001 (B)", the AND operation result is "0". Therefore, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the result of the AND operation does not become "0". In this case, since the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained, the display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode during the previous interrupt processing. For example, when the digit 6 was lit and displayed as "7" during the previous interrupt processing, the digit 6 is lit and displayed as "7" also during the current interrupt processing.

If it is determined in step S1472 that there is no ratio display request, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off. ("00000000(B)"), and all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may be extinguished.

(9) For example, under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off under the condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure). Even if the initialization range of the RWM 53 is changed when the power is turned on and when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. good.
Specifically, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is, for example, the use area. addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are set. In this case, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210 (H)" to "F291 (H)" outside the use area are not initialized (cleared). maintain.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is, for example, the address "F000(H)". Including the set value data (_NB_RANK), the entire range of the used area (addresses "F000 (H)" to "F1FF (H)"), and the addresses outside the used area "F292 (H)" to "F3FF (H) ” is set. In this case, the addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the use area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). is initialized (cleared). In this case, the set value data (_NB_RANK) is "0", so the set value is "1". As a result, the set value can be changed to "1" simply by shifting to the setting change state.

Also, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 Even when the power is turned on under the condition that both are on, both can be allowed to transition to the setting change state.

(10) In the above embodiment, as the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal recovery from power failure, the addresses "F001 (H)" to "F1FF (H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292" outside the use area (H)” to “F3FF (H)” are set.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the range described above, and can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the slot machine 10 .

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied according to the contents of the action state flag (_FL_ACTION) at the address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, the address "F030 (H )” action status flag (_FL_ACTION) can be removed.
On the other hand, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030(H)" is "0" and 1BB is not in operation, the address "F030(H)" operation A status flag (_FL_ACTION) can be included.

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, interrupt processing may not be prohibited in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when "Yes" is determined in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. good.

Even during execution of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 can be executed, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 are executed. It may be possible.
As a result, even during execution of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) Control may be executable.

(12) In the above embodiment, the operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power is restored normally, the address of the RWM 53 is changed. "F292(H)" (ratio display number) is initialized. For this reason, for example, the power is turned off when the role product ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the setting change state is entered. When it is determined that the power is restored normally, the management information display LED 74 displays from the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the management information The display LED 74 first displays specific information different from the ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." The display may start from the ratio data (ratio display number “1”).
As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a fault in the segments and whether or not the signal lines of the segments are broken.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery failure, the management information display LED 74 first displays a ratio such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." Specific information different from the information may be displayed, and then the display may be started from the instructed accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of the various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is turned off. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on. In any case when the power is turned on in the state where the You can display specific information that is different from

After that, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) show the on/off status of various switches when the power is turned on, and whether it was determined that the power failure recovery was normal or that the power failure recovery was abnormal. Display information according to As a result, it is possible to check whether or not all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit when the power is turned on, so it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the segment or whether there is a disconnection in the signal line of the segment. be able to.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on. When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on, "8888" or "8. 8, 8, 8.”, etc., when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off. may not display the above specific information on the management information display LED 74 .

(14) In the above embodiment, the operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the RWM 53 Initialize the data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)", etc.) bottom.
However, not limited to this, when an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, data (for example, address " F292 (H)" ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) to "F297 (H)" LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2), etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the operation for shifting to the setting change state. is performed, and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before turning off the power, that is, the character ratio ( Cumulative) data is displayed.

It is also assumed that the role product ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) immediately before the power is turned off, for example, for “1000 ms”. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the role product ratio (cumulative) data as "4791.84 ms" - "1000 ms". ”=“3791.84 ms”. After that, the display items after the ratio display number "6" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off Display starts (resumes) from the continuation.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal, the management in the RWM 53 Data related to the lighting control of the information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of address "F297 (H)") is initialized. .
However, not limited to this, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the management information in the RWM 53 Data related to the lighting control of the display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of address "F297 (H)") is not initialized may be maintained at

For example, when the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number “2”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. , and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the continuous character ratio (6000 games) Data is displayed.

Also, it is assumed that the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number “2”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) immediately before the power is turned off, for example, for “3000 ms”. . In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data as "4791.84 ms"- "3000 ms" = "1791.84 ms" is displayed. After that, the display items after the ratio display number "3" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted. When the power is turned off, the display starts (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, the setting cannot be changed during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) including the rotation of the reel 31 (during the game). , and during this time, turned on the unchangeable flag.
However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the setting may be always changeable without providing a period during which the setting cannot be changed, and therefore without setting the setting change-disabled flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, it is determined in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 whether or not a power failure has occurred. I_POWER_DOWN), and when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred, the power failure processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the occurrence of power-off is detected without executing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 47, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. A separate interrupt process may be executed, and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed in this separate interrupt process.
In this case, when the occurrence of power failure is detected during the execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. After the end of the I_POWER_DOWN, another interrupt process is started, and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in this another interrupt process.

(18) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as game media, parrots that use game balls, sealed game machines (medal-less game machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical medals (as tangible objects), and casino machines. The present invention can be applied.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The fourth embodiment relates to interrupt processing and an interrupt disabled period. Note that "interrupt (processing)" is also referred to as "timer interrupt (processing)", but is simply referred to as "interrupt (processing)" in the following description.
Also, in the interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, an interrupt disabled period may be provided. As described in the third embodiment, interrupt processing includes a maskable interrupt (INT) that can be disabled and a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) that cannot be disabled. means a "maskable interrupt" in which an interrupt disabled period can be set. When referring to a "non-maskable interrupt", the term "interrupt" is not abbreviated and is referred to as a "non-maskable interrupt".
The "interrupt disabled period" is also called "interrupt disabled section" or "interrupt disabled state". Similarly, the "interrupt-enabled period" is also called an "interrupt-enabled section" or an "interrupt-enabled state."
In addition, in the specification and claims of the present application, "when doing" means "before doing ("before" includes "immediately before"), "at the same time as doing", " After ("after" includes "immediately after")" is used as a generic term for the meaning including both. Specifically, for example, "when starting interrupt processing" means "before starting interrupt processing (immediately before),""simultaneously with starting interrupt processing," and "after starting interrupt processing (immediately after)." It means to include.

The information processing executed in the gaming machine 10 includes main processing (FIG. 46) that is executed once for each game, and main processing that is interrupted during the execution of the main processing and that is executed after exiting the main processing. and an interrupt process (see FIG. 66 to be described later). Interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. In this embodiment, the main process is started after the initialization process (see FIG. 65). The concept of the main process may also include the process before the game is started, such as (FIG. 65).

FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit 500 and the like for executing interrupt processing. The timer circuit 500 is incorporated in the main chip (MPU (main CPU 55)) of the one-chip microprocessor.
The timer circuit 500 includes a PTC 8-bit counter (hereinafter simply referred to as "8-bit counter") 501, a PTC prescaler register (also referred to as "PTC prescaler setting register". Hereinafter simply referred to as "prescaler register") 502, and a PTC counter setting register. (also referred to as "PTC count value setting register"; hereinafter simply referred to as "counter setting register") 503;

The 8-bit counter 501 is an 8-bit (1 byte) counter for measuring the timing of interrupt processing. When the power is turned on (the power (switch) is turned on), the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0". The timing at which "0" is set to the 8-bit counter 501 is, for example, before the program starts or at the same time as the program starts in FIG. 63, which will be described later.

A prescaler register 502 is a built-in register that can set a set value for selecting a clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 . Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set how many frequencies of the system clock (SCK) are to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 (at a rate of once). For example, when the system clock is "16" MHZ and "143" is set in the prescaler register 502,
16 (MHZ)/143 = about "111.8881" KHZ
is the clock source for the 8-bit counter 501 .
A system clock (SCK) is a clock supplied to the main chip (MPU). It is configured to be able to execute various programs (instructions) based on the system clock.

A counter setting register 503 is a built-in register that can set the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 . Specifically, it is a built-in register that can set how many times the number of clocks from the prescaler register 502 is input to execute interrupt processing. For example, as described above, if the clock source of the 8-bit counter 501 is approximately "111.8881" KHZ, and the clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ is input "125" times, the 8-bit counter 501 will time out. It shall be.
in this case,
125/111.8881 (KHZ) = about "1.117" ms
Interrupt processing can be executed at the cycle of
After the value is set in the counter setting register 503, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated based on the clock from the prescaler register 502 (for example, "1" subtraction or "1" addition).
Note that the value of the prescaler register 502 may be stored before the program (instruction) that stores the value of the counter setting register 503 .

After power-on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0". When, for example, "125" is written to the counter setting register 503, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "0" to "125", and when it reaches "125", the update of the 8-bit counter 501 is started. . As noted above, "1" is subtracted approximately every "111.8881" KHZ. When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "1", it becomes "125" when updated.
Therefore,
"0" (when power is turned on)→"125"→"124"→...→"2"→"1"→"125"→"124"→...
and repeat.
In other words, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" when the power is turned on, otherwise it does not become "0" and circulates between "125" and "1".

Also, when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (immediately before the update or at the moment of the update), the 8-bit counter 501 times out.
The period for the value of the 8-bit counter 501 to change from "125" to "1" is approximately "1.117" ms, which is the cycle of interrupt processing (interrupt cycle; "Tc" in FIG. 71 to be described later). ).

Also, for example, when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is “n” (n=an arbitrary value from “1” to “125”), after the power is turned off, the power is turned on next. 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" as described above.
In this way, the 8-bit counter 501 cycles between '125' and '1' while the power is on, and never becomes '0' again. It becomes "0" only when the power is turned off and then turned on again.
On the other hand, even if the power is turned off when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is any value between "125" and "1", the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 will be becomes "0". In this way, the time from when the power is turned on until the 8-bit counter 501 times out for the first time can be kept constant, and compared to the case where the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is stored when the power is turned off. You can increase the amount of time before the first timeout by using

On the other hand, a timer storage area is provided in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . As a timer, for example,
A timer for measuring "4.1" seconds, which is the shortest time for one game,
a timer for determining errors;
Examples include timers used for outputting test signals. These timer values are backed up when the power is turned off, are maintained during the power off, and return to the values before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again.
In this way, the timer value provided in the RWM 53 is configured to be able to maintain the value before the power is turned off, while the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is always "0" when the power is turned on. "become.

In addition, even if the main processing or interrupt processing runs out of control or the processing takes an unexpected amount of time, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit The counter 501 can cycle between '125' and '1'.
Furthermore, even during interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can circulate between "125" and "1". can.
Furthermore, even during the interrupt disabled period, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and if the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can circulate between "125" and "1". can.

At least one interrupt disabled period is provided during the main process. For example, in FIG. 46, there is a period between step S296 and step S300. The prohibition of interrupt here is for prohibiting interrupt processing during the ratio setting processing of step S298.
The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing is that ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the usage area, and interrupt This is because when processing is entered, the program processing within the usage area and the program processing outside the usage area coexist (simultaneously in parallel), which complicates the processing.

Also, although not shown, other examples of disabling interrupts are as follows.
a) When sending a control command from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, when writing the control command to the control command buffer or when updating the write pointer of the control command, interrupt before and after these processes. If processing is prohibited,
b) When the blocker signal is turned on (medal acceptance permitted state) and the blocker state is turned on (the insertion display LED is lit), interrupt processing is prohibited before and after that,
c) When the blocker signal is turned off (medal acceptance refusal state) and the blocker state is turned off (the insertion display LED is turned off), interrupt processing is prohibited before and after that,
d) In the case of executing the process of setting the number of outputs of the medal bet signal, and prohibiting the interrupt process before and after the process,
e) In the case of executing the process of setting the number of outputs of the medal payout signal, the interrupt process is prohibited before and after the process.

The above a) is to prevent malfunction (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) due to execution of interrupt processing during write processing of the control command.
Also, in the above b) and c), when an interrupt process enters between the process of turning on or off the blocker signal and the process of turning on or off the blocker state, one is turned on and the other is turned off. This is to prevent an inconsistency in which, for example, although ON is output to the blocker, ON is not output to the ON display LED (extinguishing).
Furthermore, the above d) and e) are to prevent the medal bet signal or the medal payout signal from being updated due to the execution of interrupt processing during the medal bet signal or medal payout signal set processing.

An interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The interrupt flag 504 is set (turned on) when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (when the 8-bit counter 501 times out). The timing of canceling (turning off) the set interrupt flag 504 is arbitrary. For example, the timing for canceling (turning off) the interrupt flag 504 is
a) When executing interrupt processing b) Predetermined information (hereinafter simply "information ).

The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one of the internal registers of the MPU capable of storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set. Interrupt flag 504 is set when 8-bit counter 501 times out. When the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301. FIG.
In the following description, ``information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is stored'' will be simply referred to as ``when an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301''. Information indicating that the
Then, an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55 via the interrupt wait monitor register 301, so that interrupt processing can be executed. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared when the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request (executes interrupt processing).

Here, "the situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is
a) Circumstances where there is an interrupt request b) Circumstances where a predetermined flag relating to the interrupt request is on (“1”) c) A predetermined flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is on (“1”) It may also be referred to as a situation where
Similarly, "a situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301"
a) A situation in which there is no interrupt request b) A situation in which a predetermined flag related to an interrupt request is turned off (“0”) c) A predetermined flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is turned off (“0”) It may also be referred to as a situation where

When the 8-bit counter 501 times out again in a situation where information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the 8-bit counter 501 times out again. Although the interrupt request signal based on the interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is not saved again based on the interrupt request signal (in this case, the interrupt request signal ).

When the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt disabled period. A situation is maintained that stores information indicating that there has been an occurrence of Even in this state, the circulation of the 8-bit counter 501 continues without interruption. When about "1.117" ms has passed and the 8-bit counter 501 times out again, if the interrupt disabled period continues, it means that an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. It remains in the state where the information indicating is stored. Here, even if the processing for setting the interrupt flag 504 is executed regardless of whether or not the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. good. Alternatively, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, it is determined whether information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored, the processing for setting the interrupt flag 504 is not executed, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. If not, processing for setting the interrupt flag 504 may be executed.
In the following description, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set regardless of whether or not the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. will be described assuming that processing for setting is executed.

When the interrupt disabled period ends and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, interrupt processing is started and the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores the information. clear the information As a result, when interrupt processing is started, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.
Therefore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during the period in which the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the interrupt wait monitor will resume after the interrupt disabled period ends. The number of times interrupt processing is executed based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the register 301 is limited to "1".
It should be noted that the 8-bit counter 501 keeps circulating the values from "m" to "1" even during interrupt processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, an interrupt disable flag 302 is provided within the one-chip microprocessor. The interrupt disable flag 302 in the fourth embodiment corresponds to the IFF1 register.
The IFF1 register is a register for determining whether maskable interrupts are enabled or disabled. The IFF2 register is a register used for restoring the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt or for restoring by a RETEX instruction after execution of a CALLEX instruction.

When (maskable) interrupt processing is executed, both the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are set to "0" in order to change from the interrupt enabled state to the interrupt disabled state. When the IFF1 register is "0", it indicates that the interrupt is disabled. At the end of interrupt processing, in order to switch from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, an instruction (EI instruction) for enabling interrupts is executed immediately before the end of interrupt processing, and both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "1". to When the IFF1 register is "1", it indicates that the interrupt is enabled.

The interrupt disabled period is first set in the main process. For example, in FIG. 46, it is between step S296 and step S300.
Secondly, the interrupt disabled period is set during execution of interrupt processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 66, which will be described later, the IFF1 and IFF2 registers become "0" when interrupt processing is executed. This is because duplicate interrupts are prohibited in interrupt processing, as described above.

When the interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55 when the IFF1 register is "1" in a situation where information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, Also, the main CPU 55 accepts an interrupt request signal. In other words, interrupt processing is performed.
On the other hand, if the IFF1 register is "0" in a situation where information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, an interrupt request signal is output to the main CPU 55. At this time, the main CPU 55 does not accept the interrupt request signal. In other words, no interrupt processing is performed. In this case, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 keeps storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, and continues to output the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55 . Then, when the IFF1 register changes from "0" to "1" (when the interrupt permission period is reached), interrupt processing is executed based on the interrupt request signal.
When the interrupt processing is executed based on the interrupt request signal, the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. In other words, the output of the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55 is stopped.

Next, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 and IFF2 registers will be described using a simple program.
FIG. 62 shows an example of a program explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt enablement. In the figure, (A) and (B) show the main processing program, and (C) shows the interrupt processing program.
In FIG. 62A, the "DI" instruction is an instruction for disabling interrupts. An "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling interrupts.
"AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary programs (instructions).
When the "DI" instruction is executed, both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0" and interrupts are disabled.

After that, when "AAAA" and "BBBB" of the program are executed, and then the "EI" instruction is executed, both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "1" and the interrupt is enabled.
The program "CCCC" after the "EI" instruction includes, for example, the "RET" instruction. In this case, after execution of the "RET" instruction (ie, after execution of "CCCC"), the interrupt can be executed. At least immediately after the "RET" instruction, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated must be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. FIG.
As described above, even if the interrupt enable instruction "EI" is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example, for example "RET") is executed. The instructions after the enable instruction "EI" can be reliably executed.

In FIG. 62B, the "CALLEX" instruction disables interrupts regardless of whether interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time, and executes a call to a specified address. is an instruction to
The "RETEX" instruction sets the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX" instruction and returns ("RET") (returns to the state before "CALLEX"). It is an instruction that executes a return to (the program at the return address).

Here, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes "0" and the IFF2 register value does not change.
Also, when the "RETEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, and the value of the IFF2 register does not change.
Since the 'RETEX' instruction includes the 'RET' instruction, the interrupt process can be executed immediately after the 'RETEX' instruction.
For example, when the IFF1 register value is "1" and the IFF2 register value is "1" immediately before the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the "CALLEX" instruction causes the IFF1 register value to be "0" and the IFF2 register value to be "1". 1”. Also, the IFF1 register value becomes "1" and the IFF2 register value becomes "1" by the "RETEX" instruction. By having the IFF2 register in this way, it is possible to restore the IFF1 register values and the IFF2 register values before the "CALLEX" instruction is executed.

In FIG. 62(C), both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0" when interrupt processing (maskable interrupt (INT)) is executed. As a result, interrupts (multiple interrupts) are disabled. Therefore, the "DI" instruction is unnecessary when starting interrupt processing.
Also, when ending the interrupt process, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the end of the interrupt process, that is, immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to switch from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. Both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "1" by this "EI" instruction.

When the "RETI" instruction is subsequently executed, the value of the IFF1 register becomes the value of the IFF2 register, and the value of the IFF2 register does not change, similarly to the "RETEX" instruction.
From the above, the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are
At the start of interrupt processing: IFF1=0, IFF2=0
↓
"EI" instruction: IFF1=1, IFF2=1
↓
"RETI" command: IFF1=IFF2, IFF2=maintenance.
It is configured so that interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" instruction. As a result, redundant interrupt processing is prevented, for example, the interrupt processing is executed immediately after the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt processing is executed after the "RETI" instruction.

Data holding/clearing due to power on/off in the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), and the timer storage area of the RWM 53 are as follows.
As the timer storage area of the RWM 53, for example, there is a "timer storage area for measuring '4.1' seconds, which is the shortest time for one game". However, the timer storage area of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above "timer storage area for measuring the shortest time of one game, ie, 4.1 seconds", Predetermined timer storage areas capable of measuring various predetermined times, such as "standby timer storage area". Also, the predetermined timer storage area may be a 1-byte storage area or may be a multi-byte storage area.

a) When the power is turned on when the setting change condition is not satisfied and the setting change state is not entered Both the wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are cleared (to "0"). On the other hand, the predetermined timer storage area of RWM 53 is not cleared.
For example, assume that the power is turned off under the condition that the value stored in the predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "Y". In this case, when the setting change condition is not satisfied and the power is turned on without shifting to the setting change state, the value stored in the timer storage area is "X" and the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "X". is returned as "0".

b) When the power is turned on when the setting change condition is satisfied and the setting change state is entered. IFF2 register) as well as a predetermined timer storage area of the RWM 53 are cleared (to "0").
Therefore, the 8-bit counter 501, the interrupt flag 504, the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) determine whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (transition to the setting change state) when the power is turned on. is cleared (becomes "0") regardless of whether the
On the other hand, the predetermined timer storage area is not cleared (does not become "0") when the power supply is turned on and does not shift to the setting change state because the setting change condition is not satisfied. is cleared (becomes "0") when the power is turned on.

As described in the third embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion opening 151 and rotating the setting key clockwise by 90 degrees. When the power is turned on in this state, it is determined that the door switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2706) and the setting key switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2707) in FIG. 63, which will be described later. , and other predetermined conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to the initialization process of step S2863 (see FIG. 65 to be described later). Then, in step S2742 in FIG. 65, the process shifts to setting change confirmation processing (see FIG. 45, also referred to as setting change confirmation mode, setting change confirmation state, setting change confirmation (processing) in progress, etc.).
Satisfaction of the condition for shifting to the setting change confirmation process corresponds to the above-mentioned "at power-on when shifting to the setting change state due to the satisfaction of the setting change condition".

Also, the above is an example in which the gaming machine is the slot machine 10 . On the other hand, when the game machine is a pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), "satisfying the setting change condition" means that the door switch (frame open switch) signal is ON and the setting change key switch signal is ON. It is on and corresponds to the reset switch being on. In the pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), when it is determined that all of these three conditions are satisfied, the setting change condition is satisfied and the setting change state is entered.
In the pinball game machine (pachinko game machine), when the door switch (frame open switch) signal is on, the setting change key switch signal is on, and the reset switch is off, (setting (Although the change condition is not satisfied), the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and the setting confirmation state is entered.

As described above, when the power is turned off, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is not retained (when the power is restored, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0"). As a result, it is possible to keep the time from when the power is turned on until the first interrupt process starts. In addition, the update cycle of the 8-bit counter 501 ("8.9375" microseconds) is shorter than the update cycle of the timer value of the RWM 53 (interrupt processing cycle. "1.117" ms.). , the effect of clearing the 8-bit counter 501 is negligible for the gaming machine as a whole.
For this reason,
a) Hold the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off, and restart the counting of the 8-bit counter 501 from the value when the power is turned off when the power is turned on (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is backed up). and
b) A configuration in which the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when power is restored (this embodiment)
When compared with , even with the configuration of b) above, it is possible to return with an error within "1" interrupt. In the configuration b) above, means for backing up the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off is not required.

Next, the ON/OFF timing of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF register) will be described based on a flowchart.
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the third embodiment. In FIG. 63, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41, and the description thereof is omitted. Further, in FIG. 63, step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined.
When program start is executed in step S2701, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0" and the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are "0". Since the IFF1 register is "0", interrupts are disabled until the IFF1 register becomes "1".

Proceeding to step S2861, the counter setting register 503 is set to the initial value "m".
Here, in the fourth embodiment, as examples of setting the initial value "m" in the counter setting register 503, an example performed before execution of the RWM abnormality determination process and an example performed after the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process will be described. The "RWM abnormality determination process" here is a process for determining whether or not the data stored in the RWM 53 before power-off is normal, and corresponds to the processes in steps S2708, S2712, and S2715. . Step S2861 in FIG. 63 is an example of setting an initial value in the counter setting register 503 before RWM abnormality determination.
The initial value "m" is, for example, "125" as described above. When the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating the count value and continues to update the count value until the power is turned off.
As described above, when the power is turned on and the program is started, the interrupt is disabled at first, and when the initial value is set to the counter setting register 503 before the RWM abnormality determination, the counter setting register 503 is set to the initial value. Bit counter 501 begins to update.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) (step S2862 in FIG. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 42 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 64, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 42, and the description thereof is omitted. Further, in FIG. 64, step numbers different from those in FIG. 42 are underlined.
The power restoration process of FIG. 64 shows an example of setting the counter setting register 503 after the RWM abnormality determination.
In this example, after step S2724, the process advances to step S2871 to set the initial value "m" in the counter setting register 503. FIG.

When the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 in step S2861 of FIG. 63 (when the counter setting register 503 is set before RWM abnormality determination), the processing of step S2871 in FIG. 64 is not performed. On the other hand, when step S2861 in FIG. 63 is not performed (when the counter setting register 503 is set after the RWM abnormality is determined), if the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2863 in FIG. 63 is not performed, the step in FIG. In S2871, the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503.
After step S2871, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt processing immediately before power-off (FIG. 66, which will be described later). The power-off processing is executed in the interrupt processing (step S2771 in FIG. A processing return address is stored. Then, after the power recovery process of FIG. 64, the process proceeds to the return address of the interrupt process, and the continuation of the interrupt process is executed. At step S2892 of the interrupt process (FIG. 66), the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "1", and the interrupt is enabled.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating before the RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 can be updated earlier than when the 8-bit counter 501 is updated after the RWM abnormality is determined. can be timed out (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301). interrupt processing can be executed without delay.
On the other hand, if the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating after the RWM abnormality is determined, the IFF1 register may become "1" due to noise or the like before the RWM abnormality is determined, or when the power is turned on. Even if there is a problem that the IFF1 register becomes "1" (a problem that an unintended interrupt enabled state occurs), the 8-bit counter 501 has not timed out before the RWM abnormality is determined (an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt wait monitor register 301). (No information indicating that the signal has been generated is stored.) Therefore, interrupt processing is not executed before RWM abnormality determination. In other words, it is possible to prevent the RWM data from being changed from before the power is turned off due to interrupt processing before the RWM abnormality is determined. Thereby, an RWM abnormality can be accurately determined.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) (step S2863 in FIG. 63) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 44 in the third embodiment. In FIG. 65, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 44, and the description thereof is omitted. 65, step numbers different from those in FIG. 44 are underlined.
In FIG. 63, when "Yes" is determined in step S2712 or when "Yes" is determined in step S2714, the initialization process in FIG. 65 is performed.
In this initialization process, after the AF register is restored in step S2737, the counter setting register is set in step S2881. This processing is an example of executing the counter setting register setting after the RWM abnormality determination, and is an example of executing the counter setting register setting in the case of shifting to the initialization processing (without shifting to the power restoration processing).

Also, in step S2740, a setting command set process is executed. This process is a process of storing a control command in the control command buffer in order to transmit a control command for starting the setting change confirmation process (step S2742) to the sub-control board 80. FIG. As described above, interrupt processing is prohibited before the control command is written to the control command buffer or the write pointer of the control command is updated, and interrupt processing is permitted after completion of these processes.
Therefore, in step S2740,
(1) DI (IFF1=0, IFF2=0)
(2) Actual setting command set (processing for writing control commands to the control command buffer, processing for updating the write pointer of the control commands, etc.)
(3) EI (IFF1=1, IFF2=1)
are executed.
As described above, when proceeding from the program start (FIG. 63) to the initialization process (FIG. 65), the interrupt enabled state is set by the "EI" command in the setting command set in step S2740. In this way, the interrupt disabled state is changed to the interrupt enabled state by using the process of executing the interrupt disable instruction (DI) and the interrupt enable instruction (EI) before and after the process.

Note that the setting command set in step S2746 is a process of transmitting a command to end the setting change confirmation process to the sub-control board 80, and similarly to step S2740, the "DI" command and the "EI" command are sent at the beginning and end of the process, respectively. execute the command.

As described above, when a value is written to the counter setting register 503 after RWM abnormality determination, it is possible to prevent interrupt processing from being started due to a problem or the like while RWM abnormality determination is being performed. Note that when interrupt processing is started, RWM data may be updated.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the fourth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 47 of the third embodiment. In FIG. 66, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 47, and the description thereof is omitted. Further, step numbers in FIG. 66 that are different from those in FIG. 47 are underlined.
When interrupt processing is started, the IFF1 and IFF2 registers become "0". This results in an interrupt disabled state (duplicate interrupt disabled state).
In step S452 of FIG. 47, initial processing including duplicate interrupt inhibition is executed, but in the case of the fourth embodiment, register value save processing is executed in step S2891.

After restoring the register value in step S469, the "EI" instruction is executed in step S2892. As a result, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "1" and the interrupt is enabled.
Furthermore, in the last step S2893, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value by the "RETI" instruction corresponding to the return instruction. Also, the IFF2 register value is maintained.
As described above, the "EI" instruction in step S2892 causes the interrupt enabled state, but the configuration is such that interrupt processing can be executed after the next "RETI" instruction in step S2893.
After the "RETI" instruction is completed, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the main processing program (return address). On the other hand, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 after the "RETI" instruction is completed, the interrupt process is executed again.

Next, the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing will be explained using a time chart.
FIG. 67 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. FIG. 67 shows an example in which the main process does not have an interrupt disabled period.
In FIG. 67, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0" when the power is turned on, but the counter value "m" is set by the counter setting register set processing described above. The counter value "m" is "125" in the above example. Then, as in the above example, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is decremented by "1" at a clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ (every "8.9375" microseconds).

When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1", it returns to "m". When "1" is updated to "m"("T1" in the figure), the 8-bit counter 501 "timeouts", and when a timeout occurs, the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output, and an interrupt waits. Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the monitor register 301 . In the figure, the OFF state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that no information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal is stored, and the ON state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that the interrupt request signal has been generated. It indicates that information indicating that there has been is stored (the same applies to FIGS. 68 to 75 below).
When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set (interrupt permission state), interrupt processing is started.
It should be noted that even at the moment when the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, some processing (instruction) is being executed in the main processing, and the processing ( instruction) is completed, interrupt processing is started. In other words, the actual processing in the main processing and the interrupt processing do not run concurrently. In the example of FIG. 67, after information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", interrupt processing is started at timing "T2". there is

Also, when interrupt processing is started, an interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. This corresponds to "IFF1=0, IFF2=0" shown on the right side of step S2890 in FIG. Then, when the interrupt processing ends, the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled. This process corresponds to the process (IFF1=1, IFF2=1) related to step S2892 in FIG.
In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is set" means that at least IFF1 becomes "1" (IFF2 may be "0" or "1"). Point. Further, "the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled" or "the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set" means that at least IFF1 becomes "0" (IFF2 is "0"). "0" or "1").

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. FIG. 68 shows an example in which the main process has an interrupt disabled period.
In FIG. 68, the timing "T0", which is the start of the interrupt disabled period, corresponds to the "DI" or "CALLEX" instruction shown in FIG. Timing "T3", which is the end of the interrupt disabled period, corresponds to the "EI" instruction or "RETEX" instruction shown in FIG. Similarly, in FIG. 69 and after, the "DI" instruction or "CALLEX" instruction corresponds to the start of the interrupt disabled period, and the "EI" instruction or "RETEX" instruction corresponds to the end of the interrupt disabled period.
The example of FIG. 68 shows an example in which an interrupt disabled period is set in the main process at timing "T0" which is timing before "T1" at which the 8-bit counter 501 times out. In this case as well, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, as in the example of FIG. .
On the other hand, at timing "T1", it is still the interrupt disabled period and the interrupt disabled flag 302 is set, so the interrupt processing is not started. However, even after that, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 maintains the state in which the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal is stored.

After that, the interrupt disabled period ends at timing "T3". As a result, "the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set", so that the interrupt process can be executed. Become. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example in which interrupt processing is started at timing "T4".
If the timing "T3" corresponds to the "EI" instruction and the interrupt processing is started at the timing "T4" after the execution of one instruction (for example, the "RET" instruction), the timing "T3" and "T4" has a time lag of one instruction. On the other hand, if the "CALLEX" instruction is executed at the timing "T0" and the "RETEX" instruction is executed at the timing "T3", immediately after the execution of the "RETEX" instruction without further execution of one instruction. Therefore, no time lag occurs between the timings "T3" and "T4".
When starting interrupt processing, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. On the other hand, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set to prohibit duplicate interrupts.

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing an example (1) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in relation to the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing.
In this example, after the interrupt disabled period starts at timing "T0", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and an interrupt request signal is generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This is an example in which information indicating that is stored, and the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2". At timing "T2", the interrupt disabled period has not yet ended. Although the details will be described later, when the interrupt period (timeout period of the 8-bit counter 501) is "Tc" and the designed period of interrupt processing is "Tp", the designed maximum period of the interrupt disabled period is "Tc −Tp”. For this reason, normally, when an interrupt disabled section is started immediately after an interrupt process ends, the next interrupt cycle comes after the interrupt disabled period ends.

On the other hand, the main processing may run out of control, or the main processing executed during the interrupt disabled period may take longer than necessary, as shown in FIG. It is conceivable that more than one time-out may occur.
Even in such a case, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update the count value if the system clock is normal, and sets the interrupt flag 504 when timeout occurs. In the example of FIG. 69, the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1", the interrupt flag 504 is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. showing.
After that, even if the interrupt disabled period continues, if the 8-bit counter 501 is normal, the count value continues to be updated. If information indicating that a signal has been generated is already stored, that state is maintained.
Next, when the interrupt prohibition period ends (interrupt is allowed) at timing "T3", interrupt processing becomes executable. Then, at "T4", interrupt processing is started, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Until the 8-bit counter 501 next times out and the interrupt flag 504 is set, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred.

As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (twice or more) during the interrupt disabled period, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. It is done once. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (twice or more) during the interrupt disabled period, the times out are not counted. After the interrupt disabled period ends, the number of interrupts executed is one, based on the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 .
In other words, the interrupt processing is not repeated (continuously) executed “n” times (n≧2) based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out “n” times (n≧2).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being repeated a plurality of times in succession after the end of the interrupt disabled period, and the main processing being unable to be executed during that time.
Note that each time the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set, and the setting of the interrupt flag 504 is canceled at a predetermined timing thereafter.

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example (2) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in relation to the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing.
In FIG. 70, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", and based on this, interrupt processing is started at timing "A1". An example is shown in which interrupt processing is not completed before the next timeout of the 8-bit counter 501 (timing “T2”) due to an unexpected time being required or runaway in any of the processing.
This example shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 timed out twice (timings "T2" and "T3") during interrupt processing started at timing "A1". During interrupt processing, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing “T2”, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 . Furthermore, after that, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, remains stored.

After that, when the interrupt processing ends at the timing "A2", the information indicating that the interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at that point, so the next interrupt processing is immediately executed. do. In other words, the interrupt processing is continuously executed without executing the main processing. When executing the interrupt process, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared (timing "T4").
Next, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T5", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. FIG. On the other hand, the interrupt process started at timing "A2" ends before timing "T5". As a result, the next interrupt process is started based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T5".
As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing that is executed after the end of the relevant interrupt processing is executed when an interrupt request signal is generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. It is only once based on the fact that information indicating that there has been is stored. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing will not be executed continuously multiple times after the interrupt processing ends. Also, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out a plurality of times (twice or more) during the execution of interrupt processing, the times are not counted.

Next, the execution timing of interrupt processing will be described.
71 to 75 described below show interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 (however, in the example of FIG. 74, interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 3). They are all the same processing (interrupt processing shown in FIG. 66). Specifically, for example, in the example of FIG. 71, after interrupt processing 1 (interrupt processing shown in FIG. 66) is started, interrupt processing 2 (the same processing as interrupt processing 1) is started after “Tc” has elapsed. means that
FIG. 71 is a time chart showing an interrupt cycle and the like when there is no interrupt disabled period in the main process.
As described above, the interrupt cycle "Tc" of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "16" MHZ, the value of the prescaler register 502 to "143", and the value of the counter setting register 503 to "125". It is the period from when the value is "125" to "125" next, and corresponds to about "1.117" ms.

As shown in FIG. 71, when there is no interrupt disabled period during the period in which the interrupt process is executed four times, the interrupt process is executed for each interrupt cycle "Tc". The example of FIG. 71 shows an example in which interrupt processing is started at timings of "A1", "A2", "A3", and "A4". The time "Tp" required for one interrupt process varies depending on the content of the interrupt process, but the design value of the interrupt process time "Tp" is at least a time shorter than the interrupt cycle "Tc"(Tp<Tc). is.
Also, as in the above example, during the period of interrupt processing, an interrupt disabled state is set and the interrupt disabled flag 302 is set.

As is clear from FIG. 71, no matter what the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is, execution of interrupt processing does not return the value of the 8-bit counter 501 to "m". The value continues to be updated at regular time intervals.
Also, in FIG. 71, the period (time) of each interrupt process is illustrated as if it were constant (Tp), but in reality the period of interrupt process is not necessarily constant. For example, the current interrupt processing may take longer than the previous interrupt processing.

FIG. 72 shows an example in which an interrupt disabled period in main processing is set between interrupt processing 1 and interrupt processing 2 . Interrupt processing 1 starts at timing "A1", and after interrupt processing 1 ends at timing "A1'", an interrupt disabled period for main processing starts at timing "T1", and the interrupt disabled period ends at timing "T2". is finished (interrupt enabled state). Here, the timing "T2" is before the start timing "A2" of the next interrupt process 2. As is clear from FIG. 72, "Td<Tc-Tp", where "Td" is the interrupt disabled period. In this way, when the interrupt disabled period is within the interval between the end of interrupt processing and the next interrupt processing, the timing of interrupt processing is restricted by the interrupt disabled period even if the interrupt disabled period is set. never Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72, even if the interrupt disabled period is set after the end of the interrupt process 1 and before the start of the interrupt process 2, after the start of the interrupt process 1, the interrupt period "Tc" arrives. Process 2 can begin.
In particular, when the interrupt disabled period "Td" that satisfies "Td<Tc-Tp" is the designed maximum period of the interrupt disabled period, the interrupt processing ends, the main processing returns, and the interrupt is disabled immediately in the main processing. When the period is set, it can be set so that the start timing of the next interrupt processing comes after the end of the interrupt disabled period.

FIG. 73 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is the interrupt disabled period.
In this example, after the end of interrupt process 1, the interrupt prohibition period of the main process is set at timing "T1" before timing "A2" for the next interrupt process arrives. Note that the timing "A2" is after the interruption cycle "Tc" has elapsed from the start timing "A1" of the first interruption process.
The interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set during the interrupt prohibition period. Therefore, when timing "A2" arrives, interrupt processing cannot be started because the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set. In the figure, the chain double-dashed line indicates the interrupt process when it is assumed that the interrupt process 2 is started at timing "A2" (it is not actually started).
On the other hand, immediately before the timing "A2" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, so the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

After that, when the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2", the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is unset. Further, the information indicating that the interrupt request signal was generated in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at the timing "T2" remains stored. As a result, at timing "T2", the interrupt is enabled, and the second interrupt process 2 is started. FIG. 73 shows an example in which interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A5". When the interrupt process 2 is executed, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Also, when the interrupt process 2 is executed, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

Next, at the timing "A5'" at which the interrupt process 2 ends, the timing "A3" at which the third interrupt process 3 is started has not yet arrived. Therefore, the interrupt process 3 can be started when the timing "A3" arrives.
From the above, the interrupt process 2 cannot be executed at the timing "A2", but the interrupt process 2 can be executed at the subsequent timing "A5", and the interrupt process 3 can be executed at the timing "A3". The number of times is the same as when there is no interrupt disabled period.

Since the interrupt period "Tc" is kept constant regardless of whether or not there is an interrupt disabled period, the interrupt period "Tc" can be maintained. Furthermore, even if interrupt processing cannot be performed due to the interrupt disabled period, updating of the 8-bit counter 501 is not affected.
If the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated when the interrupt disabled period ends, the interrupt process is executed without waiting for the next interrupt cycle. However, the update of the 8-bit counter 501 is not affected.

FIG. 74 is a time chart showing an example (example 2) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is the interrupt disabled period.
In this example, after the interrupt process 1 ends, the interrupt disabled period of the main process starts at the timing "T1" before the timing "A2" of the next interrupt process 2 arrives. As a result, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.
Therefore, at timing "A2", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is also set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed. .

Even when the interrupt period "Tc" has passed from the timing "A2" and the timing "A3" has come, the interrupt disabled period is still continuing. Therefore, at timing "A3", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is still stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is also set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed. . Although the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "A3", there is no change in the state in which the information indicating the occurrence of the interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. FIG.
After timing "A3", when the interrupt prohibition period ends at timing "T2", the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 . After that, the interrupt process 2 is started at the timing "A6". When the interrupt process 2 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

In this example, the timing "A6'" at which the interrupt process 2 ends is earlier than the timing "A4", that is, the timing "3×Tc" after the timing "A1". Therefore, after interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. be. As a result, the interrupt process 3 is started at the subsequent timing "A4". When the interrupt process 3 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

As described above, when "Tc" elapses from timing "A1" (timing "A2"), and when "Tc" elapses (timing "A3") from that time point, interrupt processing cannot be executed, but interrupt processing is prohibited. Immediately after the period ends at timing "T2", interrupt processing 2 is executed. Since there is no interrupt disabled period, the interrupt process 3 can be executed at the timing "A4" at which the interrupt process 4 should be executed. As a result, the interrupt processing can be executed three times between the timing "A1" and the timing "A4", which is one less than the number of interrupt processing (four times) when there is no interrupt disabled period.
Furthermore, at the timing "A4", the interrupt period "Tc" from the timing "A1" is not collapsed. Furthermore, the update status of the 8-bit counter 501 is also constant.

FIG. 75 is a time chart showing an example (example 3) in which the timing at which interrupt processing is scheduled to be executed is the interrupt disabled period.
In this example, after the end of interrupt processing 1, the interrupt disabled period starts at timing "T1" before the next interrupt processing timing "A2" arrives, and the interrupt disabled period ends at timing "T2". be. In other words, the timing "A2" at which the interrupt process 2 should be executed arrives during the interrupt disabled period. At timing "A2", interrupt processing cannot be executed because the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.
However, since the 8-bit counter 501 times out immediately before timing "A2" arrives, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "A2".
Next, when timing "T2" comes and the interrupt prohibition period ends, the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is unset. At this time, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 . Therefore, the interrupt process 2 is started at the subsequent timing "A7".

On the other hand, during the execution of interrupt process 2, timing "T3" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. FIG. However, since the interrupt process 2 is being executed at this time, duplicate interrupts cannot be made. In other words, the interrupt process 3 cannot be executed at the timing "A3" which is the timing at which the interrupt process 3 should be executed.
When the interrupt process 2 ends at timing "A8", the setting of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled. At this time, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 . Therefore, the interrupt process 3 is immediately started at the timing "A8". In other words, the program (instruction) in the main process is not executed between the interrupt process 2 and the interrupt process 3, and the interrupt process 3 is started immediately after the interrupt process 2 ends. It is
However, when the interrupt process 2 ends, the IFF1 register is set to "1" by the "EI" instruction in step S2892 in FIG. 66, so that the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is unset. Next, when the "RETI" instruction is executed in step S2893, the interrupt processing in step S2890 is started again. be. Therefore, the set state of the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is canceled for a moment between the interrupt process 2 and the interrupt process 3. FIG.
When the interrupt process 3 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.
At the end of the interrupt process 3, the timing "A4" (when "3×Tc" has elapsed from the timing "A1"), which is the start timing of the interrupt process 4, has not yet arrived.

After the interrupt process 3 ends, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 . Since the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is not set at this time, interrupt processing can be executed. Therefore, interrupt processing 4 is started at timing "A4". When the interrupt process 4 is started, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.
In this way, when "3×Tc" elapses from timing "A1", interrupt processing can be started four times, and interrupt processing is executed the same number of times as when there is no interrupt disabled period for main processing. can do.

As described above, when the timing to start interrupt processing is during the interrupt disabled period, the next interrupt processing is started immediately after the interrupt disabled period ends. Furthermore, when an interrupt cycle arrives during execution of the next interrupt process, the next interrupt process is started immediately after the end of the next interrupt process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to quickly return to the situation in which interrupt processing is started when the original interrupt period arrives, while minimizing the reduction in the number of interrupts.

Although the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the fourth embodiment, when the system clock is "16" MHZ, the prescaler register 502 is set to "143" and the counter setting register 503 is set to "143" in order to set the interrupt cycle to about "1" ms. was set to "125". Therefore, the set value of the prescaler register 502 and the counter setting register 503 fluctuate depending on how long the interrupt period is set, and are not limited to the above values. The system clock is not limited to "16" MHZ, but can be set to various values such as "12" MHZ, "24" MHZ, and the like.
For example, if the value of the counter setting register 503 is "250" under the above conditions, the interrupt period is
250/(16/143)=2.234 (ms)
can be
In this case, even if the value of the counter setting register 503 is "250", the value can be within 1 byte.
On the other hand, the counter setting register 503 may be a 2-byte storage area instead of a 1-byte storage area. If the counter setting register 503 is a 2-byte storage area, the 8-bit counter 501 may be replaced with a 16-bit counter 501 .

(2) In FIGS. 63, 64, and 65, the counter setting register setting process is performed before and after the RWM abnormality determination. 64 and FIG. 65 are not limited. The setting process of the counter setting register may be executed by the timing at which the interrupt process is to be started.

(3) Initialization process (FIG. 65) The process of setting the IFF1 register to "1" (processing to enable interrupts) at the time of transition uses the setting command set in step S2740, but is not limited to this. For example, the "EI" instruction may be executed after step S2747. In this way, as in steps S2740 and S2746, even if each process during the initialization process consists only of processes that do not have the "DI" and "EI" instructions, the interrupt enabled state can be established. becomes possible.
(4) The fourth embodiment can be applied not only to slot machines, but also to pinball game machines (pachinko game machines), sparrow ball game machines, casino machines, and the like.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to error history display.
FIG. 76 is a time chart showing the relationship (example 1) between the rotation of the reel 31 and error detection (occurrence) and notification. It should be noted that "while the reels are rotating" in this embodiment means that at least one reel 31 is rotating. Further, "stopping the reels" indicates that all the reels 31 have stopped.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error occurs, it is assumed that the error is detected with almost no time lag. In other words, in this embodiment, "when an error occurs" and "when an error is detected" are assumed to be substantially the same.

Furthermore, the "error" in this embodiment corresponds to the "recoverable error" in the above-described other embodiments.
FIG. 76 shows an example in which an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating. Types of errors in this case include, for example, selector-related errors (passage sensor 46 error due to medal retention, insertion sensor 44 error, etc.), hopper error (payout sensor 37 error due to abnormal payout, etc.), and the like. .

Note that while the reel 31 is rotating, medals are not accepted, and even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, they are returned by the blocker 45.例文帳に追加However, if a fraudulent act is performed while the reels 31 are rotating, there is a possibility that a selector error will be detected. Also, while the reel 31 is rotating, the hopper 35 is not driven, so medals are not paid out.
As described above, an error may be detected while the reel 31 is rotating.

When the main control board 50 detects an error (time t0), it turns on the corresponding bit (the bit corresponding to the detected error) of the abnormal input flag provided in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . Also, the main control board 50 transmits the detection of an error (error command) to the sub control board 80, but the transmission timing in this embodiment is at the time of error notification ("t1" in FIG. 76). . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an error command may be transmitted when an error is detected, as indicated by the chain double-dashed line in FIG.
The main control board 50 determines whether or not an error has been detected in the interrupt processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the abnormal input flag bit is on. This determination is executed at step S463 (input error check process) in the interrupt process shown in FIG. 47, for example.

When transmitting an error command to the sub-control board 80, for example, in the interrupt processing of FIG. 47, the control command transmission processing of step S464 is performed.
If an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 immediately upon detection of an error, it may be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after the abnormal input flag bit is turned on. Alternatively, if an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 after all reels 31 have stopped (at the timing of notifying the error), the command is sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after all reels 31 have stopped. do it.

When all the reels 31 are stopped and an error command is received, the sub-control board 80 notifies the error using the performance lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. When the error command is transmitted at the timing of time t1 in FIG. 76, the sub-control board 80 notifies the error after all the reels 31 have stopped. In other words, no error is reported while the reel 31 is rotating.
If an error occurs on the side of the main control board 50 as well when all the reels 31 are stopped, the error is notified. For example, the acquisition number display LED 78 may display "En"("n" is an integer and its value indicates the type of error).

When the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 153 (see the third embodiment, not shown in FIG. 1) is operated, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 terminate the error notification. In other words, when the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated, the state before error detection is restored on condition that no error is detected. Therefore, even if the cause of the error is removed, the state before the error detection is not restored unless the reset switch 153 is operated. When the reset switch 153 is operated and no error is detected, the abnormal input flag bit stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is turned off.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 stores an error history (data) in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and displays the error history upon request. Note that the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased when the power is turned on or off or when the setting is changed. Unless a serious error (unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM of the sub-control board 80, the error history is not erased.

77A and 77B are diagrams showing examples of image display of the error history including the progress of FIG.
In the fifth embodiment, power off, power on, door open, and door close are not errors themselves, but are displayed together with the error history.
Further, when the state is changed to the setting confirmation state or the setting change state, the error history screen is not displayed, and the setting change history screen (not shown) separate from the error history screen is displayed.
Furthermore, although the history of detected errors is displayed, recovery from errors is not displayed on the error history screen. However, it is not limited to this, and error recovery may also be displayed on the error history screen.

The error history can be displayed, for example, in the setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation process in this embodiment is the same as the setting change confirmation process shown in FIG. 45 (third embodiment). Specifically, as described in the third embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a state where the number of bets is "0" during game standby (before the game starts), D The register is set to store "1". Then, in step S2755 in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 stores the D register value in the A register and determines whether or not the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", the main control board 50 determines that it is time to confirm the settings, and proceeds to step S2760. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described in the third embodiment, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the set value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes set value data.

In this manner, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a situation where the number of bets during game standby is "0", the setting confirmation state is entered. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 and the menu screen for the administrator of the gaming machine 10 is displayed on the image display device 23 . In this menu, an item of "error history" is provided, and when "error history" is selected with the four-way controller and a decision operation is performed (in this case, the push button is turned on), the display shown in FIG. 77 is displayed. error history screen is displayed.

For example, in FIG. 77A, “January 29, 2021, 13:27:45”, which is the time of the ◯× error of error number “003”, corresponds to time t1 in FIG. In other words, for example, if an error is reported at time t1 after 3 minutes have passed since the error was detected (time t0 in the figure), the actual An error was detected in
However, as described above, by displaying the start date and time of the error notification as the time of the error, even if the error is detected during rotation of the reel 31 and it takes time from the time of detection of the error to the time of notification, Since there is no deviation between the timing when the error is reported and the displayed error time, the administrator may be made aware that there is a problem with the gaming machine 10, or the possibility of fraud being committed. It can be made not to recognize that there is.
As described above, when displaying the time of recovery from an error in the error history, "Ox error recovery" is displayed together with the time between the error numbers "001" and "002" in the figure. .

In FIG. 77A, the date and time when the sub-control board 80 started the error notification is displayed as the error time. The sub-control board 80 associates and stores the error content and time. Information about the time is acquired using, for example, an RTC (real time clock) function provided in the sub-control board 80 .
On the other hand, FIG. 77B is an example of displaying the elapsed date and time from the current time as the time. Thus, the actual time may be displayed as shown in FIG. 77(A), or the elapsed time and date from the current time may be displayed as shown in FIG. 77(B).
Further, although "time" is displayed in the example of FIG. 77, it may be displayed as "notification time", "occurrence time", or "detection time".
However, even when the "occurrence time" and "detection time" are displayed, the actual error occurrence time and detection time are not displayed, and the actual error notification is started.

In the example of FIG. 76, when an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the detected error cannot be reported immediately because the reel 31 is rotating, so the error is reported after the reel 31 stops. The reason why an error is not reported during the rotation of the reels 31 when an error is detected during the rotation of the reels 31 is that priority is given to progressing the game (stopping the rotating reels 31) over error reporting. be.
On the other hand, when an error is detected while the reels 31 are not rotating (for example, during game standby after all the reels 31 have stopped), an error command is immediately sent to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 An error is reported (corresponding to the first error in FIG. 82, which will be described later). Therefore, in this case, the time displayed in the error history coincides with the time when the error was detected.

Example 2 of FIG. 78 is a time chart showing a case where the setting is changed after an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating.
Here, in the above-described third embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a setting change prohibition flag. When the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start rotating), the setting change disable flag is turned on, and when all the reels 31 stop, the setting change disable flag is turned off. In this case, when the setting change disable flag is ON, the setting change state cannot be entered. When the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating, it is memorized that the setting change disable flag is on. is turned on), it does not transition to the setting change state.
On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the setting change prohibition flag in the third embodiment is not provided. Therefore, when the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting change state.

When an error is detected during rotation of the reel 31, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit of the abnormal input flag provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50, as described above.
Further, when the power is turned off while the reel 31 is rotating, the power supply to the motor 32 for driving the reel 31 is cut off, so that the reel 31 stops rotating thereafter. Next, when the front door is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, as shown in FIGS. 45).

Here, when the initialization processing (FIG. 44) is executed, the abnormal input flag in the storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is also initialized ("RWM clear when setting is changed" in FIG. 78). . Therefore, when the game machine 10 starts up via the setting change state, the error data detected before the setting change process is erased. Therefore, when the game machine 10 starts up via the setting change state, the error detected before shifting to the setting change state (error based on the data stored in the abnormal input flag) is not reported.

As described above, as in Example 2 of FIG. 78, after an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, if the setting change state is passed through, the error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating and before shifting to the setting change state. Since the error detection data is erased by the RWM clear processing in the setting change state, the error will not be notified after the setting change processing state ends.
In addition, in this example 2, by going through the setting change state, the data of the error detected before shifting to the setting change state is erased. No error command is sent to 80 either. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the first interrupt processing is after step S2740 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the initialization process has already been executed in step S2732, the error command stored before the power-off is erased when the first interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the error command will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even if the process shifts to the interrupt process (FIG. 47) and the control command transmission process of step S464 in FIG.
Therefore, it is stored as an error history in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 and is not displayed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing the error history screen of FIG. 78 (Example 2). In FIG. 79, the power off of error number "004" corresponds to time t3 in FIG. Also, the power-on of the error number "003" corresponds to time t4 in FIG.
In this example, after the power is turned off, the door is opened, and after the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the power is turned on. Therefore, door opening is detected at the same time when the power is turned on. Then, setting change processing is performed between error numbers "001" and "002", and then the door is closed. As described above, the setting change process is not displayed on the error history screen.

As described above, since the error data detected before shifting to the setting change state (before the power is turned off) is erased, the error is not notified even after the setting change state ends, and is also displayed in the error history. not.
Therefore, errors that have not been notified are not displayed as an error history, so that consistency between notified errors and errors displayed as history can be achieved, and misunderstanding by the administrator can be prevented. In other words, an unreported error is never displayed as an error history.

FIG. 80 is a time chart showing a case (example 3) where multiple errors are detected during the setting confirmation state.
In FIG. 80, the transition from the game standby state to the setting confirmation state is the same as described above.
In this example, it is assumed that first the first error is detected and then the second error is detected during the setting confirmation state. Similar to the above, the first error and the second error include selector errors (errors related to the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44) and hopper errors (errors related to the dispensing sensor 37).
When the first error and the second error are respectively detected during the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 stores information about the type of the detected error in the storage area of the RWM 53 in the same manner as described above at the time the error is detected. memorize
In the setting confirmation state, similarly to when the reel 31 is rotating, even if an error is detected, the error is not notified, and the error is notified after the setting confirmation state ends. This is because the control processing of the setting confirmation state has priority over the notification of the error.

After ending the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 first transmits an error command based on the detection of the second error to the sub control board 80 (time t5 in the figure). The sub-control board 80 notifies of the second error based on the reception of the error command. In other words, when errors are detected in the order of the first error and then the second error in the setting confirmation state, the errors are reported in the order of the second error and the first error after the setting confirmation state is completed (the errors are detected in the order of the detected errors). and vice versa). When the sub-control board 80 receives a second error command from the main control board 50, it associates it with the notification start date and time and stores the details of the second error as an error history in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83.
The notification of the second error by the sub-control board 80 continues until the cause of the second error is eliminated, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the second error has been eliminated, it issues a command to that effect. It is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it terminates the notification of the second error.

Further, when the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 next transmits an error command based on the detection of the first error to the sub control board 80 (time t6 in the drawing). The sub-control board 80 notifies the first error based on the reception of the error command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the first error command from the main control board 50, it associates it with the notification start date and time and stores the content of the first error as an error history in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83.
The notification of the first error continues until the cause of the first error is removed, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the first error has been removed, it sends a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. do. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it ends the notification of the first error.
As in Example 1 of FIG. 76, the first error command is sent to the sub-control board 80 when the first error is detected (two-dot chain line in the figure), and the second error command is sent when the second error is detected. may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (two-dot chain line in the figure).

Here, in Example 3 of FIG. 80, it is assumed that the priority of notification of the first error and the second error is the same (the priority of notification is not superior or inferior).
On the other hand, there are cases where priority is set for error reporting. For example, if the notification priority of the first error is higher than the notification priority of the second error, the notification of the first error is performed first after the setting confirmation state is completed, and if the cause of the first error is removed. A second error will be reported.
Also, in this case, the first error is displayed first, and then the second error is displayed in the error history according to the error notification order.

81 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 3 of FIG. 80. FIG. In this example, after the door of error number "004" is opened, the setting confirmation state is entered, and at the end of this setting confirmation state, the second error of error number "003" is detected. Note that the "setting confirmation state" may or may not be displayed in the error history.
After removing the cause of the second error, the first error is notified. In the error history, the first error is displayed as error number "002" (time t6 in FIG. 80). In this way, since the error history is also in the order of the second error and the first error, it matches the reported error order. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the error notification order and the history display order, thereby avoiding misunderstandings by the administrator.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of errors occur under conditions in which error notification is not possible, when the condition becomes available for error notification, errors detected later are sequentially notified. It is designed to

FIG. 82 is a time chart showing a case (example 4) in which the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated (before the game starts)). be.
Since the reels 31 are not rotating or the settings are being confirmed during game standby, when an error is detected, the detected error can be notified immediately.
First, when the main control board 50 detects the first error during game standby, it transmits a first error command to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command for the first error, it starts reporting the first error (time t7 in the figure). The received first error information is stored in the error history in association with the notification start time information.
After detecting the first error, if the second error is detected before the cause of the first error is removed (during the notification of the first error), the main control board 50, as will be described later, Similarly, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the timing when the notification of the second error becomes possible (time t8 in the drawing). However, it is not limited to this, and a second error command may be sent to the sub-control board 80 when the second error is detected (two-dot chain line in the figure).

When the cause of the first error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the cause of the first error has been removed, it ends the notification of the first error.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects that the cause of the first error has been eliminated, it transmits a second error command to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the second error command, it starts reporting the second error (time t8 in the figure). The received second error information is stored in the error history in association with the notification start time information.
When the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 transmits information to that effect to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the cause of the second error has been removed, it ends the notification of the second error.
As described above, when errors are detected in the order of the first error and the second error during game standby, unlike during the setting confirmation state, the first error and the second error are reported in the order. This is because there is no need to suspend notification of the first error when the first error is detected, and notification of the first error can be started immediately.

83 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 4 of FIG. 82. FIG. In this example 4, when the first error is notified, the history of the first error is displayed in the error number "004". The time of the first error with error number "004" corresponds to time t7 in FIG. Further, when the cause of the first error is removed, the second error is reported next, and the second error is displayed with the error number "002". The time of the second error with error number "002" corresponds to time t8 in FIG.
Therefore, the notification order of the first error and the second error matches the error history order.

Further, although not exemplified in this embodiment, when errors are continuously detected, the following processing is performed.
For example, when a medal retention error of the selector (an error of the insertion sensor 44) is detected during game standby, a medal retention error command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. FIG. As a result, the sub-control board 80 notifies the medal retention error.
Next, it is assumed that the medal retention error occurs again as a result of inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 47 before the administrator operates the reset switch 153 after removing the medal retention error. In this case, the main control board 50 does not retransmit the medal retention error command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the manager removes the medal retention error again and operates the reset switch 153, it is determined whether or not the cause of the error has been removed. It is sent to the substrate 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the information, it ends the notification of the medal retention error.

In this way, for example, even if the main control board 50 detects two medal retention errors, the medal retention error command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 before the reset switch 153 is operated. only once. Therefore, the error history by the sub-control board 80 displays one medal retention error.
Although the medal retention error has been exemplified above, it is not limited to the medal retention error, and applies to other errors that are recovered by operating the reset switch 153 after removing the cause of the error.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to the structures of the main control board 50 , the socket (also referred to as “chip socket”) 56 and the main chip 55 .
In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described later, "mounting" means mounting various electronic components (CPU, ROM, RAM, resistors, connectors, 7 It refers to functioning (operating) as an electronic circuit by soldering a segment display, etc.) or attaching it to a socket.
Further, the "main chip 55" in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 32 (third embodiment), includes a main CPU 55 and an internal memory, and further includes a ROM 54 and an RWM 53 in this internal memory. shall refer to a chip microprocessor.

FIG. 84 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50, the socket 56, and the main chip 55 not attached to the socket 56 in the sixth embodiment.
The socket 56 is mounted with the main chip 55 and is for electrically connecting the main chip 55 and the main control board 50 . The socket 56 is mounted at a predetermined position on the main control board 50 . Although the details will be described later, the socket 56 is made of a transparent resin material (as long as the hollow portion 56a inside can be visually observed, and may be translucent). A top surface of the socket 56 is formed with a pin insertion opening 56c into which the pin 55a (terminal) of the main chip 55 is inserted.
84, the resistor 50a is also shown on the main control board 50 so that the height of the resistor 50a and the height of the notch 56e of the socket 56 can be compared. Details of this point will be described later.

FIG. 85 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing in more detail the main chip 55 mounted in the socket 56. FIG. 86 is an arrow view (front view) seen from the Z1 direction in FIG. 85. FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 87 is an arrow view (side view) seen from the Z2 direction in FIG.
Here, in FIG. 85, the "upper side of the drawing" and the "lower side of the drawing" are defined as shown.
The pins 55a of the main chip 55 consist of "71" in this example. Here, "pin 55a(1)" refers to the first pin 55a, "pin 55a(2)" refers to the second pin 55a, ..., "pin 55a(71)" refers to The 71st pin 55a shall be pointed out.

A substantially circular recess 55b is provided at substantially the center of the upper and lower edges of the main chip 55 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure).
Among the 71 pins 55a, the lower edge in the longitudinal direction of the main chip 55 is located at the first pin 55a(1) to the 35th pin 55a(35) except for the portion where the recess 55b is formed. ) are provided. Similarly, the upper edge in the longitudinal direction of the main chip 55 is provided with the 36th pin 55a (36) to the 71st pin 55a (71) except for the portion where the recessed portion 55b is formed. .
Also, among the 1st to 71st pins 55a, the 17th (pin 55a (17)), the 35th (pin 55a (35)), the 54th (pin 55a (54)), and the 71st (pin 55a ( 71)) serves as a GND (ground) line. Pins other than these four are signal lines.

Here, the 35th pin 55 a ( 35 ) is positioned at the right end of the lower edge of the main chip 55 , and the 71st pin 55 a ( 71 ) is positioned at the left end of the upper edge of the main chip 55 . The 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), which are the GND lines, are located adjacent to the recess 55b.
When the worker grips the main chip 55, first, he/she presses and holds the vicinity of the 35th pin 55a (35) and the 71st pin 55a (71). By having a corner), it is possible to have the vicinity of the GND line, so that the number of signal lines touched by the operator's finger can be reduced accordingly.

Secondly, it is possible to hold the main chip 55 so as to grip the vicinity of the depressions 55b on the lower and upper edges of the main chip 55. FIG. Having the recessed portion 55b makes it easier to hold the main chip 55.例文帳に追加Furthermore, when the recessed portion 55b is gripped, by pressing and holding the vicinity of the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), it is possible to have the vicinity of the GND line in the same manner as described above. Therefore, the number of signal lines touched by the operator's finger can be reduced accordingly.

A two-dimensional code 55e is printed on the upper surface of the main chip 55 in the left area. A model number sticker 55f displaying the model number of the gaming machine 10 is attached to the right area. The area where the two-dimensional code 55e is printed and the area where the model number sticker 55f is attached are flat surfaces (surfaces without steps). In particular, displaying the two-dimensional code 55e on a flat surface makes it easier to read the two-dimensional code. Further, by providing the model number sticker 55f on a flat surface, it becomes easier to read the information displayed on the model number sticker 55f. Furthermore, by attaching the model number seal 55f to a flat surface, it becomes difficult to peel off.
Further, a substantially semicircular stepped portion 55 c is formed on the left edge of the main chip 55 . This stepped portion 55c and stepped portions 55d and 55i described below are all recessed from the surface.
The stepped portion 55c is recessed in a substantially semicircular region.
A stepped portion 55d is formed near the stepped portion 55c and closer to the pin 55a(1). The stepped portion 55d has a substantially circular region that is recessed, and a number “1” is displayed within the substantially circular region. The portion with the number "1" may be recessed further than the substantially circular region, or conversely, may be formed to be more convex than the substantially circular region (provided that it is located above the surface of the main chip 55). do not protrude upwards). Also, although the number "1" is shown in this example, other numbers, symbols, and the like may be used.

On the upper surface of the main chip 55, between the two-dimensional code 55e and the model number sticker 55f, a product name 55g (bold line characters in the figure) and a company name 55h (dotted line characters in the figure) are displayed. The product name 55g is printed. Further, the company name 55h has a step portion 55i.
FIG. 88A is an enlarged view of the product name 55g and company name 55h. In addition, (B) of the same figure is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Z3-Z3 in (A).
As shown in FIG. 88, a region corresponding to the line thickness of the company name 55h is recessed from the surface to form a stepped portion 55i.
FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the stepped portion 55c (semicircular portion), the stepped portion 55d (the circular portion with the numeral "1" displayed therein), and the stepped portion 55i.
When the depth of the stepped portion 55c is D1, the depth of the stepped portion 55d is D2, and the depth of the stepped portion 55i is D3, the magnitude relationship is "D1>D2>D3". By making the depths of the three stepped portions 55c, 55d, and 55i different in this manner, counterfeiting is made difficult.
Furthermore, since the depths of the plurality of stepped portions 55c, 55d, and 55i are different, the operator can grasp the mounting orientation by touching the top surface of the main chip 55. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88A, at least part of the product name 55g is arranged so as to overlap with the company name 55h. In this example, the product names "B" and "C" overlap the company name "A", the product names "D", "E" and "F" overlap the company name "B", and the product name ""G" overlaps with the "C" of the company name.
In other words, the letters "BCDEFG" in the product name "ABCDEFG" are arranged so as to overlap the step portion 55i. By displaying the product name 55g in this way, counterfeiting is made difficult.
For example, after printing the product name 55g, if it is attempted to form the company name 55h with the stepped portion 55i, the part of the product name 55g overlapping the stepped portion 55i may be erased.
On the other hand, if the product name 55g is printed after forming the company name 55h having the stepped portion 55i, the product name 55g overlapping the stepped portion 55i may not be printed clearly.

Furthermore, hidden characters 55j are displayed in the characters of the product name 55g. The size of each character of the hidden characters 55j is equal to or less than the line thickness of the characters of the product name 55g.
As shown in FIG. 88(A), the character "A" of the hidden character 55j is displayed within the line of the character "C" of the product name 55g. Similarly, the letter "B" of the hidden letter 55j is displayed within the line of the letter "D" of the product name 55g, and the letter "C" of the hidden letter 55j is displayed within the line of the letter "E" of the product name 55g. ing.
Further, among the characters "A", "B", and "C" of the hidden characters 55j, the characters "A" and "C" of the hidden characters 55j are arranged so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the company name 55h.
Therefore, the letter "C" of the product name 55g and the letter "A" of the hidden letter 55j are displayed so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the letter "A" of the company name 55h.
Similarly, the character "E" of the product name 55g and the character "C" of the hidden character 55j are displayed so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the character "B" of the company name 55h.
This configuration makes counterfeiting more difficult. Also, by confirming the presence or absence of the hidden characters 55j, it is possible to determine whether or not it is forged.

The main body of socket 56 is made of, for example, a transparent resin material as described above. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87, socket pins 56d (terminals) are provided inside the socket 56 at positions corresponding to the pins 55a of the main chip 55 to be mounted. 87 shows only the 35th socket pin 56d (35) and the 36th socket pin 56d (36), and the illustration of the socket pin 56d is omitted in FIG. It has socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) that are connected to pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of the chip 55, respectively.
By soldering the socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 to the main control board 50, the socket pins 56d and the main control board 50 are electrically connected, and the socket 56 is connected to the main control board 50. is implemented in
When the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of the main chip 55 and the socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 are electrically connected. Connected. Thereby, the main chip 55 and the main control board 50 are electrically connected. After the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the main chip 55 is coupled so that it cannot be easily pulled out of the socket 56. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 85, on the surface of the main control board 50, mark numbers 50b and marks 50c are printed around the area where the sockets 56 are mounted.
The marker number 50b includes a marker number 50b (1) displaying the number "1", a marker number 50b (35) displaying the number "35", a marker number 50b (36) displaying the number "36", and a number " It has four of the landmark numerals 50b (71) displaying "71".
These four marker numerals 50b(1), 50b(35), 50b(36), and 50b(71) are associated with pins 55a(1) and 55a(35) of the main chip 55, respectively. ), pin 55a (36), and pin 55a (71) correspond to each other. Specifically, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, the pin 55a(1) is positioned near the index number 50b(1) and the pin 55a (35) is located near the marker number 50b (35), the pin 55a (36) is located near the marker number 50b (36), and the pin 55a (71) is located near the marker number 50b (71). It is located.

Furthermore, on the surface of the main control board 50, there are six marks 50c(5), 50c(10), and 50c(15) between the mark number 50b(1) and the mark number 50b(35). , a mark 50c (20), a mark 50c (25), and a mark 50c (30) are printed. These marks 50c are printed with dots.
In FIG. 85, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, a mark 50c (5) is positioned substantially directly below the pin 55a (5) of the main chip 55. is located, the mark 50c (10) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a (10), the mark 50c (15) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a (15), and the mark is approximately directly below the pin 55a (20). 50c (20) is positioned, the mark 50c (25) is positioned substantially directly below the pin 55a (25), and the mark 50c (30) is positioned substantially directly below the pin 55a (30).

On the other hand, on the surface of the main control board 50, between the mark number 50b (36) and the mark number 50b (71), there are seven marks 50c (40), 50c (45), 50c (50), A mark 50c (55), a mark 50c (60), a mark 50c (65), and a mark 50c (70) are printed. These marks 50c are printed with dots in the same manner as the marks 50c described above.
85, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed from above the main chip 55 vertically downward, the main control board 50 is positioned substantially directly above the pins 55a (40) of the main chip 55. The mark 50c (40) is positioned, the mark 50c (45) is positioned substantially directly above the pin 55a (45) of the main chip 55, and the mark 50c (50) is positioned substantially directly above the pin 55a (50). The mark 50c (55) is positioned substantially directly above the pin 55a (55), the mark 50c (60) is positioned substantially directly above the pin 55a (60), and the mark 50c (60) is positioned substantially directly above the pin 55a (65). The mark 50c (65) is positioned, and the mark 50c (70) is positioned substantially directly above the pin 55a (70).

With the above configuration, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed from directly above, the pin numbers of the main chip 55 can be easily known. For example, in FIG. 85, the pin 55a (36) of the main chip 55 positioned substantially directly below the index number 50b (36) can be easily known to be the "36"th pin. Also, for example, the pin 55a (17) (GND) is easily the "17"th pin 55a by the mark number 50b (1), the mark 50c (5), the mark 50c (10), and the mark 50c (15). I understand.

In FIG. 85, a stepped portion 56b (56b(1) and 56b(71)) is formed on the left end portion of the surface (top surface) of the socket 56 . The step portion 56b(1) has a substantially rectangular area recessed from the surface, and the number "1" is displayed within the substantially rectangular area. Although the amount of depression of the stepped portion 56b is arbitrary, for example, it may be approximately the same as the amount of depression of the stepped portion 55c of the main chip 55. FIG.
Also, the number "1" of the stepped portion 56b(1) is displayed in a direction rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees in FIG. Therefore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 and the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 are are shifted by 90 degrees. By doing so, when the main chip 55 and the socket 56 are viewed in the direction of the drawing shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 is in the correct direction.
Therefore, when the main control board 50 is attached to the game machine 10 in the orientation shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 can be seen in the correct orientation. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in an orientation rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the orientation of the drawing shown in FIG. The "1" can be viewed in the correct orientation. Therefore, even if the main control board 50 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in any of the above orientations, the numbers on either the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 or the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 can be viewed in the correct orientation. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the pin number when mounting the main chip 55 to the socket 56 .

The orientation of the main chip 55 can also be confirmed by looking at the position of the stepped portion 55c. That is, in the main chip 55, the side having the step portion 55c is the pin number "1" and "71" sides.
When the main chip 55 is viewed from above, only the lower left corner of the main chip 55 in FIG. 85 is chamfered. The chamfered corner side has the pin number "1". Therefore, the position of the pin number "1" can be easily confirmed only by confirming the chamfered corner.

Furthermore, the stepped portion 56b (71) has a substantially rectangular area recessed from the surface, and the number "71" is displayed within the substantially rectangular area. Similarly to the number "1" of the step portion 56b(1), the number "71" of the step portion 56b(71) is also rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees in FIG.
When the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the first pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is positioned near the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56, and the 71 The second pin 55 a ( 71 ) (GND) is positioned near the stepped portion 56 b ( 71 ) of the socket 56 .

The stepped portion 56b(1) and the stepped portion 56b(71) of the socket 56 are also provided with depressions in which numerals are displayed, thereby making the socket 56 difficult to forge.
Also, the number of pins 55a of the main chip 55 is "71", that is, an odd number, and in FIG. 85, the number is "35" on the lower side and "36" on the upper side. Since the socket 56 side is also shaped so that these pins 55a can be inserted, the main chip 55 cannot be mounted in the opposite direction (insert the side having 36 pins 55a downward in the figure). As a result, erroneous mounting can be prevented. When the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 and the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 are , the main chip 55 can be attached to the socket 56 in the correct orientation.

Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number "1" of the step portion 56b(1) makes it easy to identify the pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 as the "1"th pin 55a. can be verified. Similarly, it can be easily confirmed that the pin 55a (71) (GND) of the main chip 55 is the "71"th pin 55a from the number "71" of the step portion 56b (71).

As shown in FIG. 86, two notches 56e (height H1) are formed in the bottom portion of the socket 56 in the longitudinal direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, a notch portion 56f (height H2) is formed in the bottom portion of the socket 56 in the lateral direction. With these notches 56e and 56f, it is possible to visually confirm that no unauthorized parts are attached to the bottom surface of the socket 56. FIG. As described above, since the main body of the socket 56 is made of a transparent or translucent resin material, it is possible to visually confirm that there are no unauthorized parts inside (the hollow portion 56a). With 56e and 56f, it is possible to visually confirm that there is no illegal component on the contact surface between the socket 56 and the main control board 50. FIG.
Here, as shown in FIG. 87, a socket pin 56d is provided inside the socket 56. As shown in FIG. Therefore, if the height H1 of the notch 56e is excessively high in the longitudinal direction of the socket 56 (the side on which the socket pins 56d are aligned), it becomes possible to insert a wire or the like through the notch 56e. There is a risk that it will be

However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, the height H1 of the notch 56e is lower than the height H3 of the resistor 50a mounted on the main control board 50 (H1<H3). Specifically, the height H1 of the notch 56e is, for example, less than "1" millimeter, and the height H3 of the resistor 50a is, for example, about "1" to "3" millimeters. It should be noted that the height H3 of the resistor 50a is assumed to be the lowest resistor among the plurality of types of resistors mounted on the main control board 50. FIG.
As described above, it is difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire through the notch 56e of the socket 56. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is difficult to access the socket pin 56d through the notch 56e, so that it is possible to suppress cheating.

<Seventh embodiment>
The seventh embodiment relates to the positional relationship between the board and the electronic component.
In the seventh embodiment, the "board" includes the above-described main control board 50 and sub-control board 80, other control boards connected to the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80, relay boards, and the like. be done.
In addition, "electronic parts" include (cable) connectors, 7-segment displays, and the like. When the electronic component is a 7-segment display, for example, a set value display LED 73 (1 digit), a credit number display LED 76 (2 digits), an acquired number display LED 78 (2 digits), and a management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 (4 digits) (see FIGS. 1 and 36).
Further, in the present embodiment, the "front surface" of the substrate refers to the surface on which predetermined electronic components are mounted (so-called "component surface"), and the "back surface" refers to the surface opposite to the surface on which predetermined electronic components are mounted. side surface (so-called “solder surface”).

In the seventh embodiment, by providing a predetermined amount of gap between the substrate and the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component (the surface facing the substrate), it is possible to prevent unauthorized components from being placed between the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component and the substrate. It is possible to visually confirm whether or not any of the parts is attached. Under the condition that the board is attached to the game machine 10, depending on the position where the board is attached, the gap may not be easily visually confirmed depending on the attachment position.
However, when assembling the game machine 10 or during maintenance after installation of the game machine 10, the operator can easily visually confirm the gap.
Furthermore, as will be described later, by illuminating the gap with an LED, it is possible to check the gap even in a dim environment after the substrate is installed in the housing of the gaming machine 10 .

90A and 90B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 1) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) shows a plan view and (B) shows a front view.
The “predetermined electronic component” in Example 1 corresponds to the connector 57 .
FIG. 91(A) is a view viewed from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90(A), omitting the illustration of the substrate. Also, FIG. 90(B) is a view viewed from the Z5 direction (bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90(B), omitting illustration of the substrate.
In the example of FIG. 90, a connector 57 is mounted on the board. The connector 57 corresponds to a cable connector for connecting with another board (for example, the main control board 50) with a cable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a plurality of legs 57a are formed on the bottom side of the connector 57. As shown in FIG. As a result, the entire area of the bottom surface of the connector 57 does not come into contact with the board, and only the foot 57a of the connector comes into contact with the board. A gap is formed. In other words, the connector 57 is arranged so as to float from the substrate surface by the height of the leg portion 57a.
With such a configuration, the gap between the connector 57 and the board can be visually confirmed, and it can be confirmed whether an illegal component or the like is attached.

The lead wires 57b of the connector 57 are arranged in two rows as shown in FIG. 91(B), and are arranged so as to avoid the legs 57a. As a result, when viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 90B or viewed from the back as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to correctly judge whether an illegal component or the like is attached to the gap between the board and the connector 57 .
As shown in FIG. 91(A), the lead wire 57b is visible when viewed from behind the connector 57, but when viewed from directly above the connector 57, as shown in FIG. 90(A). The lead wire 57b is configured so as not to be seen.
For example, if this board is installed inside the game machine 10 (for example, inside the housing, behind the front door, etc.), it is installed in a form that looks like FIG. 90(A) when the front door is opened. If this is done, the lead wire 57b of the connector 57 cannot be seen from that position, so security can be enhanced.

92A and 92B are diagrams showing the positional relationship (example 2) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) shows a plan view and (B) shows a side view (enlarged view). .
The substrate of Example 2 corresponds to the display substrate 75 shown in FIG. 36 (third embodiment). Also, the “predetermined electronic component” corresponds to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 .
To explain the overview of the display board 75 again, as shown in FIG. 1, the display board 75 is a board that is electrically connected to the main control board 50, so it is preferable that anti-tampering measures are taken.

As shown in FIG. 92, on the display substrate 75, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted. Each of these consists of two (upper and lower digits) 7-segment displays juxtaposed.
In addition, on the display substrate 75, six status display LEDs 79 are mounted below the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 in FIG. 92(A). These are independent LEDs one by one.

As shown in FIG. 92(B), the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 have legs (legs 78a in the case of the acquired number display LED 78) on the bottom surface in the same manner as the connector 57 shown in FIG. and the height of the leg portion 78a is formed to be "H4". Thus, when the acquisition number display LED 78 is mounted on the display substrate 75 , a gap “H 4 ” is formed between the bottom surface of the acquisition number display LED 78 and the display substrate 75 . This point also applies to the credit number display ED76.

In addition, when the state display LED 79 (although the game start display LED 79d is shown in FIG. 92(B), it applies to all the state display LEDs 79) is mounted on the display board 75, the state display is performed in the same manner as the connector 57. The lead wires of the LEDs 79 are soldered to the display board 75, but the gap "H5" between the bottom surface of the status display LEDs 79 and the display board 75 at that time is almost "0" or very small. be. Therefore, the gap "H4" between the bottom surface of the credit display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display substrate 75 is larger than the gap "H5" between the bottom surface of the status display LED 79 and the display substrate 75 (H5 <H4). With this configuration, it is possible to illuminate the gap "H4" between the display substrate 75 and the bottom surface of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 when the status display LED 79 is lit.

In particular, the status display LED 79 is positioned so close to the credit amount display LED 76 and the earned amount display LED 78 that the light from the status display LED 79 reaches the bottoms of the credit amount display LED 76 and the earned amount display LED 78 . As a result, it is possible to visually confirm the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 using the light when the status display LED 79 is lit.
For example, when medals are betted, at least one of the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, and 3-bet display LED 79c lights up. can be visually confirmed.

In addition, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off while medals are betted, when the power is turned on again, the bet number data before the power is turned off is read, and the gaming machine 10 is started up. Sometimes, at least one of the 1-bet indication LED 79a, 2-bet indication LED 79b, or 3-bet indication LED 79c lights up again. Therefore, it is possible to turn on the LEDs by a simple operation of turning on the power, and visually confirm the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 .
The above is not limited to the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the same applies to other LEDs. For example, after the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the replay display LED 79f remains illuminated unless the next game is started. At startup, the replay display LED 79f lights up again. Therefore, it is possible to visually confirm the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 by using the light when the replay display LED 79f is lit.
The display board 75 is attached to the rear side of the front door of the gaming machine 10, and the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 are arranged so as to be visible from the control panel 12c.
Under the condition that the display board 75 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in this way, even if the status display LED 79 is turned on, it may not be easy to visually confirm the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78. There is Therefore, under the condition that the display board 75 is electrically connected to the game machine 10 (under the condition that the display board 75 is connected by a harness), the display board 75 is removed from the front door, and the operator removes the display board 75. is held in hand and the status display LED 79 is turned on, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 can be easily confirmed visually.

93A and 93B are diagrams showing the positional relationship (example 3) between the substrate and the predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, (A) showing the surface (mounting surface of the predetermined electronic component) view, and (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view.
The board of Example 3 corresponds to the main control board 50 . Also, the “predetermined electronic component” corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 . The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is the same as that shown in FIG. 1 (first embodiment) and FIG. 36(B) (third embodiment).

First, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of FIG. 93 is composed of four independent 7-segment displays (digits in FIG. 36(B)) arranged side by side. . Also, each 7-segment display has a DP (decimal point) (segment P in FIG. 37) as in the example of FIG. 36(B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9B, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 has legs (not shown in FIG. 93) on the bottom surface, as in the other examples of the seventh embodiment. is provided, a gap is provided between the bottom surface of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 and the surface of the main control board 50 . By configuring in this manner, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not illegal parts are attached to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 .

Furthermore, on the back side of the main control board 50, the area where the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is mounted on the front side has substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. A boundary line 50d is printed. If the color of main control board 50 is green, for example, boundary line 50d is displayed in white, for example, to make it easier to see. Furthermore, a DP mark 50e is also printed at a position corresponding to the DP of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 on the front side. The DP mark 50e is displayed, for example, in white like the boundary line 50d.

With this configuration, it can be confirmed whether or not the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached to the correct position on the main control board 50 . Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correctly attached to the front surface position corresponding to the boundary line 50d on the back surface side of the main control board 50 . Also, if the outer dimensions of the boundary line 50d are substantially the same as the outer shape of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, a different 7-segment display (for example, a 7-segment display with a different number of digits) is not attached. You can check whether
Furthermore, by confirming the positions of the four DP marks 50e on the back surface of the main control board 50 and the positions of the DPs of each 7-segment display of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, the management information display LED ( It is possible to check whether the role ratio monitor) 74 is mounted in the correct direction.

94A and 94B are diagrams showing a modification of Example 3 of FIG. 93, and similarly to FIG. 93, FIG. , (C) shows a back view.
The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of FIG. 94 is different from the example of FIG. 93 in that a 4-digit 7-segment display is integrally formed (each digit cannot be separated). . In other words, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is a single part.
In such a case, as for the boundary line 50d on the back surface of the main control board 50, only the outline is printed (displayed), and the boundary line for each digit is not printed. Therefore, the number of parts can be easily confirmed by whether it is printed like the boundary line 50d in FIG. 93(B) or printed like the boundary line 50d in FIG. 94(B).

On the other hand, as many DP marks 50e as the number of DPs provided on the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 are printed at positions corresponding to the positions of the DPs. This makes it possible to confirm whether the 4-digit management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correctly attached and whether the orientation of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correct.

Although the fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
A. Fifth Embodiment (1) The number of error histories to be stored and displayed is arbitrary depending on the storage capacity of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 . For example, the error history may be stored without being erased until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 storing the error history is reached, and all of the stored error history may be displayed. Then, when the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 for storing the error history is reached, the error history data is erased sequentially from the oldest one.
Further, for example, error history data after a predetermined number of days (for example, half a year, one year, etc.) have passed from the current time may be deleted from the error history data. Alternatively, the error history data is stored until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 for storing the error history is reached (it is preferable that the error history can be checked in some way). As for the display of the history, for example, it is possible to display only those within one month before the current time.

(2) Although not exemplified in the above embodiment, when an error occurs during rotation of the reel 31, the power is turned off before the reel 31 stops, and then the power is turned on (in the setting change state, When not migrating), it is processed as follows.
When the power is turned off after an error is detected, the error data is stored in the abnormal input flag as described above.
After the power is turned on, if the system starts up without transitioning to the setting change state, the process proceeds to step S2721 (power return process) in the process of FIG. 41 (program start). After step S2724 in FIG. 42 (power recovery process), an interrupt process occurs, and the error command stored before the power is turned off is sent to the sub-control board 80. FIG. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it starts reporting the error. Then, the time of the error history for the error is the time when notification of the error was started.

(3) The error contents and times shown on the error history screen are examples, and are not limited to these. For example, door open and door close need not be displayed in the error history. Also, power on/off may not be displayed in the error history. On the other hand, when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, any display along with the time may be displayed on the error history screen so that the fact can be understood.
Furthermore, the time may be any of those that display the date and time, those that display the month and day and time, those that display the year, month, day and time.

(4) The error history screen can be displayed in the setting confirmation state, but this is not limiting. It may be possible to display it (the setting key may not be required to display the error history screen).
Alternatively, conversely, the error history screen may not be displayed until the setting change state is entered.
(5) Under the condition that an error is being reported, the error reporting may be ended even if the reset switch 153 is not operated when the cause of the error is removed. Alternatively, even if the cause of the error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated under the condition that the error is reported, the error is continued to be reported until a predetermined time elapses from that point, The error notification may be terminated after the predetermined time has elapsed.

B. Sixth Embodiment (1) A socket 56 is provided with two stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71), and characters "1" and "71" are displayed, respectively. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to align with the numeral "1" of the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 even if only the stepped portion 56b(1) is provided.
(2) In addition to the four mark numbers 50b, 13 marks 50c are displayed on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the mark numbers 50b may be displayed. Further, the landmark numeral 50b may be only the landmark numeral 50b(1) or only the landmark numerals 50b(1) and 50b(71). It is possible to align with the number "1" of the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 only with the mark number 50b(1).

(3) In the above embodiment, the main chip 55 is provided with the depression 55b, the model number sticker 55f is attached, and the two-dimensional code 55e, product name 55g, company name 55h, and hidden characters 55j are displayed (printed). , does not necessarily mean that these are essential requirements of the main chip 55 .
(4) In the above embodiment, the number of pins of the main chip 55 is "71", but the number is not limited to this, and may be an even number (for example, "72"). Further, when the odd number is used, the number is not limited to "71", but may be, for example, "75" (32+33). The number of pins of the main chip 55 is determined by the required number of signal lines and GND (ground).

(5) The notches 56e and 56f of the socket 56 are not necessarily essential. However, it is preferable to provide at least one notch 56e or 56f on the bottom of the socket 56 so that the space between the bottom of the socket 56 and the main control board 50 can be visually checked. Further, even when the cutouts 56e and 56f are provided, it is not essential to have the height described above.
(6) Socket 56 can also be formed from an opaque material. However, it is preferable from the viewpoint of fraud prevention that the inside is made of a transparent or translucent material that allows visual inspection.
(7) The stepped portion 55i of the company name 55h is not necessarily an essential requirement. Even if the company name 55h is provided, it may be a character that does not have a stepped portion. Furthermore, the depths (D1, D2, and D3 in FIG. 89) of the stepped portions 55c, 55d, and 55i may be partially the same (for example, D1=D2 and D1≠D3), or may be all They may be the same (D1=D2=D3).

(8) The orientation of the characters of the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the character "1" of the stepped portion 55d and the characters of the mark numeral 50b. Not limited. The orientation of the characters on the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be the same as the orientation of the character "1" on the stepped portion 55d and the characters of the mark numeral 50b.
Alternatively, the orientation of the characters on the stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees in FIG. may be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees in FIG.
(9) In the main chip 55, the pin numbers of the GND (ground) lines are 17, 35, 54, and 71, but are not limited to these. For example, Nos. 1, 35, 36, and 71 may be GND (ground) lines. Alternatively, the 17th, 18th, 53rd and 54th pins (all pins adjacent to the recess 55b) may be GND (ground) lines.

C. Seventh Embodiment (1) The shape of the leg portion (for securing a gap with the board) provided on the bottom portion of the predetermined electronic component may be any shape. For example, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the legs 57a of the connector 57 are formed in a line shape. may This applies not only to the connector 57 but also to the 7-segment display (FIGS. 92, 93 and 94).
(2) As shown in FIG. 92(B), "H5" was exemplified as the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the substrate. The gap between the bottom surface of and the substrate is approximately "0".

(3) In the examples of FIGS. 93 and 94, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 was exemplified, but not limited to this, the display board 75 shown in FIG. It is possible. For example, if the credit number display LED 76 is composed of two 7-segment displays arranged side by side, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the two 7-segment displays arranged side by side is displayed on the back surface of the display substrate 75. , and two DP marks 50e are displayed.
In addition, when the credit number display LED 76 is an integrated 7-segment display device in which the upper digits and lower digits are connected, a boundary line 50d indicating its outline is displayed on the back surface of the display substrate 75, and two A DP mark 50e is displayed. This also applies to the acquisition number display LED 78 .
Furthermore, the set value display LED 73 consisting of, for example, one digit can also be configured in the same manner. In this case, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the outline of the set value display LED 73 is displayed on the back surface of the board (the main control board 50 or the board on which the set value display LED 73 is mounted), and one DP mark 50e is displayed. be done. Incidentally, when the set value display LED 73 does not have DP, only the boundary line 50d is displayed on the back surface of the substrate.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to timer interrupt processing and vector addresses (also called "interrupt vector addresses").
In the eighth embodiment, terms are used as follows.
(1) "Timer interrupt processing" in the eighth embodiment is the same as "interrupt processing (I_INTR)" in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 66). In the following description of the eighth embodiment, "timer interrupt processing" may be simply abbreviated as "interrupt processing" as necessary.
(2) "Address value" means the numerical value of the address in the built-in memory. For example, in FIG. 96, which will be described later, the "vector address value" is "0004H". In this specification, the term "address" and the term "address" are used interchangeably as necessary.

(3) "Address data value" refers to the data value stored at the address. For example, the above-mentioned "vector address" actually consists of 2-byte addresses "0004H" and "0005H". A data value (a 2-byte (16-bit) value) stored in
(4) Add "H" to the address value. "H" indicates "hexa" in hexadecimal. Also, "B" is attached to the bit value stored in the address. "B" indicates a binary "bit".
When indicating a 2-byte bit value (16-bit value), a "/" is added between the upper byte (8-bit) value and the lower byte (8-bit) value. For example, "00000000/00000100B".

(5) On the other hand, a register does not have an address, and the "value (of) a register" refers to the data value stored in the register.
(6) In this embodiment, the storage areas in the built-in memory are called "program area", "data area", "register area", "program management area", "work area", and "stack area". . However, these are not limited to this and may be called "program area", "data area", "register area", "program management area", "work area", and "stack area", respectively.
The "program area" is also called "program code area" or "program code area."

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") in the eighth embodiment. This one-chip microprocessor is mounted on the main control board 50 in FIG.
95, the chip includes a main CPU 55 (same as in FIG. 1) and a built-in memory. Various hardware other than these two pieces of hardware is provided in the chip, but the description and illustration thereof are omitted.
The built-in memory includes a built-in ROM 54 having an address range of "0000H" to "3FFFH" (16384 bytes) and a built-in RWM 53 having an address range of "F000H" to "F3FFH" (1024 bytes).
The built-in ROM 54 is the same as "ROM 54" in FIG. 1, and the built-in RWM 53 is the same as "RWM 53" in FIG.

Further, the built-in memory includes a function setting register area and a function control register area as built-in memory register areas.
The function setting register area is a register storage area for operation settings including interrupt processing (for example, initial settings for interrupt processing, etc.). Registers (including counters) stored in the function setting register area specifically include, for example, a prescaler register 502 and a counter setting register 503 in FIG. 61 (fourth embodiment). Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 95, registers for setting the maximum value of random numbers are also provided in the function setting register area.
As in the fourth embodiment, the prescaler register 502 is a register capable of setting a set value for selecting the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 .
A counter setting register 503 is a built-in register that can set the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 .

The function control register area is a storage area for registers that manage monitoring and control, for example, a storage area for registers that monitor interrupt processing and store random numbers. For example, in FIG. 61 (fourth embodiment), an interrupt wait monitor register 301, an 8-bit counter 501, and an interrupt flag 504 are provided in the function control register area.
As in the fourth embodiment, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is a register for storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set.
The 8-bit counter 501 is an 8-bit (1-byte) counter value storage area for measuring the timing of interrupt processing.
An interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The built-in memory register area is not limited to the function setting register area and the function control register area shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the main CPU 55 has a CPU register area. This CPU register area is a register area different from the built-in memory register area provided in the built-in memory.
A, B, C, D, E, F, H, and L registers, which are general-purpose registers, are provided in the CPU register area. Note that the F register is a flag register.
The Q register is a register that stores the upper address "F0H" of the work area (see FIG. 97) in the use area of the built-in RWM 53 and is used for instructions. Then, it is used in an instruction to read data whose upper address is "F0H" in the storage area of the built-in RWM 53. FIG.
Furthermore, the I register is a register called an interrupt page address register, which is a register for determining the upper byte value of the vector address, as will be described later in detail.

The interrupt disable flag (IFF1, IFF2) 302 is the same as shown in FIG. 61 (fourth embodiment). The IFF1 register is a register for determining whether maskable interrupts are enabled or disabled. The IFF2 register is a register used for restoring the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt or for restoring by a RETEX instruction after execution of a CALLEX instruction.
In addition to the above registers, various registers such as a Q register and a U register are provided, but illustration and description thereof are omitted in the eighth embodiment.

Also, the registers, counters, and flags shown in FIG. 95 are examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, although the 8-bit counter 501 is provided in the function control register area, it is not limited to this, and can be provided in the CPU register area within the main CPU 55 or can be configured by a circuit. The interrupt flag 504 may also have a function of storing ON/OFF, and may be provided in, for example, the CPU register area instead of the function control register area, or may be configured by a circuit. In addition, the prescaler register 502, the counter setting register 503, and the interrupt wait monitor register 301 can be similarly provided in the CPU register area or another area in the built-in memory, or can be configured by a circuit.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM 54 in FIG.
The area of the built-in ROM 54 is provided with a used area and a non-used area.
The "usage area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
In addition, the "area outside the use area" is a storage area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. This is a storage area in which programs, anti-fraud programs, etc. are stored.
A program area and a data area are provided in the used area and the non-used area in the built-in ROM 54, respectively.
The “program area” is also called a “control area” and is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
A "data area" is a storage area in which information other than a program is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when the program is executed is stored.

Here, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 96, the "use area" may be referred to as the "first area". Also, the "outside use area" may be referred to as a "second area".
The program area of the used area may also be referred to as a "first program area" or a "first control area". Also, the data area of the used area may be referred to as a "first data area".
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the used area may be referred to as "first program".
Similarly, the program area of the area outside the use area may be called a "second program area" or a "second control area". Also, the data area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second data area".
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second program".

As shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, there is an unused area (address "11FFH") between the program area and the data area of the used area. It may be arranged so as to be continuous with the data area.
In addition, although there is an unused area (addresses "1DF7H" to "1FFFH") between the used area and the area outside the used area, the unused area is eliminated, and the used area and the area outside the used area are continuous. may be placed.
Furthermore, as for the area outside the used area, the program area and the data area are arranged continuously. You may have
It should be noted that the used area and the non-used area may be defined so as to refer only to the program area and the data area and exclude the unused area. On the other hand, when there is an unused area between the program area and the data area like the used area in FIG. 96, the unused area including the unused area may be called a used area (or an area outside the used area).

The built-in ROM 54 is provided with a storage area for storing the company name, date, model name (of the gaming machine 10), etc., and a program management area, in addition to the above-described used area, non-used area area, and unused area. there is
In the above, the vector address (0004H) described in detail below is provided in the program area of the used area in this embodiment.
A program code area start/end address (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and an interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) are provided in the program management area.
The program management area has program code area setting addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and an interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), which will be described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map within the built-in RWM 53 in FIG.
Similar to the area of the internal ROM 54, the area of the internal RWM 53 is divided into a use area (may be referred to as a "first area") and an area outside the use area (may be referred to as a "second area"). is provided. The concepts of these "use area" and "outside use area" are the same as in the case of the built-in ROM 54. FIG.
Further, the used area and the non-used area in the built-in RWM 53 respectively have a working area, an unused area, and a stack area.
The work area (also referred to as "first work area") and the stack area (also referred to as "first stack area") in the use area are programs stored in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54 (for progress of the game). Related programs) are used (updated, referenced) during execution.

Similarly, the work area (also referred to as a "second work area") and stack area in the area outside the use area is also referred to as a "second stack area". ) is used (updated, (referenced) storage area.
Note that the "stack area" is a storage area in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).

Next, the interrupt initialization address will be explained.
First, the "vector address" is an address that stores the start address (head address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) to be executed when a factor for timer interrupt processing occurs. In other words, the vector address does not store the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) itself, but is an address that stores the location (starting address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR).
The "interrupt initialization address" is an address that stores data that enables the value of the vector address to be specified. In particular, in this embodiment, the vector address cannot be specified only by the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address, and the vector address value is specified based on the value of the I register and the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address. make it possible.

FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining interrupt initialization addresses. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing the details of the data value of the interrupt initialization address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt priority order and the interrupt priority order setting value.
As described with reference to FIG. 96, the interrupt initial setting address is provided in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, and the address is "3FDAH" (1 byte) in this embodiment. However, this is an example and is not limited to this.
After the game machine 10 is powered on, the data value stored at this interrupt initialization address is read and used to determine the vector address.

In FIG. 98A, the upper 4 bits (A7 bit to A4 bit) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address take a predetermined value as the vector address setting value, and in this embodiment, "0000B". It's becoming This vector address setting value constitutes part of the vector address value, as will be described later.
Although the vector address setting value is set to "0H (0000B)" in this embodiment, it is not limited to this, and various settings such as "8H (1000H)" and "FH (1111B)" are possible. .
Also, in the data value of the interrupt initialization address, the A3 bit and A2 bit are fixed values, and are set to "00B" in this embodiment. Although the details will be described later, this 2-bit value, which is a fixed value, is configured to be checked (in the security mode) when the gaming machine 10 is started, and when the 2-bit value is not "00B" , is configured to be an error.
Also, this fixed value is not limited to "00B", but can be set to various values such as "11B".
Furthermore, the A1 and A0 bits, which are the lower two bits of the data value of the interrupt initialization address, are the interrupt priority setting values.
Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98B, four types of "00B", "01B", "10B", and "11B" are provided as interrupt priority setting values. .

FIG. 98(B) shows the relationship between interrupt priority setting values and interrupt factors.
In this embodiment, there are five types of interrupt factors, "IR0" to "IR5", and the smaller the number at the end, the higher the priority of the interrupt factor. In other words, the "IR0" interrupt factor has the highest interrupt priority, and the "IR5" interrupt factor has the lowest interrupt priority.
The types of interrupts are "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". Here, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used for timer interrupt processing, and particularly "PTC2" corresponds to timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, "01B" is used as the interrupt priority setting value. As a result, the interrupt priorities are "PTC0", "PTC1", "PTC2", "XINT", "RX0", and "RX1" in descending order of priority.
Further, when "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, the A1 bit and A0 bit of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are "01B".
As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the interrupt initialization address is "3FDAH" and the data value of the interrupt initialization address is "00000001B".

FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining vector address values and data values stored at the vector addresses.
FIG. 99A shows vector address values.
In this embodiment, the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54 and is 2 bytes.
As for the vector address value, as shown in FIG. 99A, the upper 1-byte value is the I register value, and the lower 1-byte value consists of the vector address set value and the automatically assigned value.

Here, the I register value in this embodiment is "00H". As shown in FIG. 95, the I register is provided in the CPU register area, and is set to "00H" after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In other words, immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, each register value provided in the CPU register area is cleared. Thereafter, unless a value other than "00H" is stored in the I register, the I register value remains "00H".
In the present embodiment, no value is set in the I register after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, the I register value remains "00H".
Therefore, the upper 1-byte value of the vector address is "00H".

Next, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A7 to A4 bit values correspond to the A7 to A4 bit values (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH). As shown in FIG. 98A, in the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, the A7-A4 bit value is "0000B", so this value becomes the A7-A4 bit value of the lower byte of the vector address as it is.

Also, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A3-A0 bit values are automatically assigned values.
FIG. 99B is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt factors and automatically assigned values. As shown in FIG. 98B, in this embodiment, "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, and the priority of the interrupt factor of PTC2, which is the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) of this embodiment, is "IR2 ”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99B, the automatically assigned value for the interrupt factor "IR2" and the interrupt "PTC2 (I_INTR)" is "0100B" (04H). This "0100B" is the A3-A0 bit value of the vector address value.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the value of the vector address is
"00000000/00000100B" = "0004H"
becomes.
As a result, in FIG. 96, "0004H" becomes the vector address in the storage area of the built-in ROM 54 starting from "0000H".
Since the value of the vector address is 2 bytes as described above, the vector addresses are actually "0004H" and "0005H".

FIG. 99C shows an example of data values of vector addresses. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored from "1134H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54. FIG. In other words, the start address of the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is "1134H".
Therefore, the data value of the vector address (0004H) becomes "1134H".
When "1134H" is stored in a 2-byte vector address, the lower byte value "34H" is stored in the first "0004H" and "11H" is stored in the next "0005H".
This will
0004H: 34H (00110100B)
0005H: 11H (00010001B)
is stored.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the main CPU 55 is activated, it is possible to recognize where the vector address is based on the data value and I address value of the interrupt initialization address.
Specifically, first, since the upper 4-bit value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) is "0000B", the upper 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is "0000B".
In addition, since the value of the interrupt priority setting value, which is the value of the lower 2 bits of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH), is "01B", the lower byte of the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2) A 4-byte value is assigned to '0100B' by the interrupt controller.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes "00H", so the value of the upper byte of the vector address becomes "00000000B".
As described above, the main CPU 55 determines that the vector address (the address where the start address of "I_INTR" is stored) corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2, corresponding to timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment) is set to "0004H".
Therefore, from the data value stored in the vector address, it is possible to recognize at which address the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored (starting address of the timer interrupt processing program).

Note that the process of setting "00H" to the I register is not executed after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the CPU register area on the main CPU 55 side in FIG. 95 is initialized, so that the I register value becomes "00H" similarly to the other register values.
Also, when the register is initialized after the power is turned on, "F0H" is stored in the Q register. When "F0H" is stored in the Q register, when specifying the higher address "F0H" in the storage area of the built-in RWM 53, the Q register is specified.
Further, in this embodiment, when timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) of PTC 2 is entered, the program (that is, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR)) is called. In other words, the program code for timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the process from power-on to transition to user mode in this embodiment.
First, before the power is turned on (when the power is off), "XSRST" is "L (low)". Here, "XSRST" indicates the operation status of the main CPU 55, and when the main CPU 55 is in a situation where it should not operate (stopped), "XSRST=L" (when the main CPU 55 is stopped). ).
When the power is turned on under this condition, the system reset is released, and when the power supply becomes stable, the main CPU 55 changes from "L (low)" to "H (high)" in terms of the circuit. .

A register in the CPU register area is then initialized to determine if there is a PROM mode request. Here, "PROM mode" means a mode in which data is written in ROM (ROM is burned). When it is determined that there is a request to shift to the PROM mode, it shifts to the PROM mode, and when it is determined that there is no request to shift to the PROM mode, it shifts to the security mode. Game machines installed in the market are configured to determine that there is no request to shift to the PROM mode after the system reset is released.
In the security mode, a security check is performed, and when the security check is determined to be OK, the process shifts to the user mode, and when the security check is determined to be NG, the execution (processing) is stopped.
As a security check in the security mode, the program code area setting address of the program management area, the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), etc. are read. Then, the presence or absence of a setting error in the program management area and self-diagnosis are executed. Also, in this security mode, the data value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) is read to recognize the vector address value.

Here, the data of the interrupt initial setting address is read, and if the value of the fixed value (A3 and A2 bits) in FIG.
If it is determined that the security check is OK in the security mode, then the user mode is entered.
This user mode corresponds to program processing that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the internal ROM 54 used area.
In addition, in FIG. 100, "travel outside designated area" will be described later.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a program example starting from "0000H" in the program area of the internal ROM 54. As shown in FIG.
Here, in this embodiment, special call instructions and normal call instructions are provided as the call instructions by the main CPU 5 .
The special call instruction is called the "RST instruction" and the normal call instruction is called the "CALLF instruction".
The RST instruction is an instruction that can be represented as a 1-byte (4-cycle) program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 2-byte (4-cycle) program. Therefore, since the number of bytes for describing the RST instruction is smaller than the number of bytes for describing the CALLF instruction, the use of the RST instruction can reduce the program capacity rather than the use of the CALLF instruction. Therefore, the RST instruction is used to call programs that are frequently called.

Here, the "highly called program" includes, for example, a program that is called many times (multiple times) in one game.
However, "frequently called programs" include, for example, programs that are called at least once in one game, and programs that are likely to be called during a game, although they are not necessarily called at least once in one game. be done.

Also, in this embodiment, addresses that can be called using the RST instruction are limited to predetermined addresses.
Specifically, the "predetermined address" is
0008H
0010H
0018H
0020H
0028H
0030H
0038H
0040H
It consists of eight
It should be noted that these eight addresses are merely examples, and various values (addresses) and number of "predetermined addresses" can be set according to the specifications of the chip.

By storing programs that can be called by the RST instruction at the above eight addresses, the program capacity can be reduced.
On the other hand, as described above, the program area of the used area starts from "0000H", and the power-on program is stored from "0000H". The power-on program corresponds to, for example, "program start processing (M_PRG_START)" shown in FIG. 41 (third embodiment).

Also, as described above, the vector address is "0004H".
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 101,
0000H: Power-on program (start program)
:
0004H: vector address :
0008H: Program 1 called by RST instruction
:
0010H: Program 2 called by RST instruction
:
0018H: Program 3 called by RST instruction
:
0020H: Program 4 called by RST instruction
:
0028H: Program 5 called by RST instruction
:
0030H: Program 6 called by RST instruction
:
0038H: Program 7 called by RST instruction
:
0040H: Program 8 called by RST instruction
:
This is the arrangement of data (including instructions and programs).

Also, a jump instruction requires a capacity of 3 bytes in this embodiment. Therefore, a jump instruction is stored in "0001H" to "0003H", and "0050H", for example, is designated as the jump destination address. After "0050H", the program following "0000H" is stored.
Here, a program including the jump instruction may be referred to as a power-on program, or a program not including the jump instruction may be referred to as a power-on program.
As a result, the power-on program can be started at "0000H", jumped to "0050H" by the next jump instruction of "0001H", and the continuation of the power-on program can be executed from "0050H".
With this setting, the vector address can be placed at "0004H" while starting the power-on program from "0000H". Furthermore, the RST instruction can be placed at "0008H", "0010H", etc., while starting the power-on program at "0000H".

Incidentally, in the continuation of the power-on program, for example, it is determined whether or not to shift to the setting change mode.
Here, since the voltage is unstable when the power is turned on, the jump instruction may not be executed normally. If the jump instruction is not executed normally, it may take a long time to enter the setting change mode or the setting change mode may not be entered. For this reason, if an operation (for example, a predetermined operation of a setting key) to switch to the setting change mode is performed and the power is turned on, if the switch to the setting change mode is not made within the standard time (T), , it can be determined that the program containing the jump instruction was not successfully executed. When the administrator determines that the setting change mode will not be entered by the time (T) as a guideline, the power of the game machine 10 is turned on again. When the power is turned on again, the program starts from the address "0000H" through the security mode again.
Also, it is preferable that the jump command of the power-on program is executed from "0000H" to "0007H". This is to enable use of "0008H" as the RST instruction.

Also, if program 1 called by the RST instruction is stored in "0008H", the program 1 is allocated with a capacity of 8 bytes from "0008H" to "000FH" or a program that can be stored within 8 bytes.
Similarly, when storing the program 2 called by the RST instruction in "0010H", the program 2 is allocated with a capacity of 8 bytes from "0010H" to "0017H", or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less.

Here, if the program 2 consists of 4 bytes of "0010H" to "0013H", the addresses of "0014H" to "0017H" may be used in any way.
For example, firstly, addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be set as an unused area ("00000000B" is stored).
Secondly, other programs that can be stored within 4 bytes may be stored in "0014H" to "0017H".
Furthermore, thirdly, a program following the power-on program starting from "0000H" is stored in "0014H", and a jump instruction (an address where the program following "0014H" is stored is stored in "0015H" to "0017H"). ) may be stored.

The above is the same for "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H" and "0040H".
For example, when storing program 4 called by the RST instruction in "0020H", if the program 4 has a capacity of 14 bytes from "0020H" to "002DH", the program that calls "0028H" by the RST instruction 5 may be omitted. However, if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it after "0040H" where there is no limit to the program capacity. With this configuration, eight programs can be stored as programs that can be called by the RST instruction.
In addition, when the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, the method of arranging the program is not limited to storing it after "0040H". Then, a jump instruction is stored in "0025H" to "0027H", and the jump instruction jumps to "0040H" and beyond. By doing so, a program that can be called by the RST instruction can be stored in "0028H". By adopting such a method, even if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, eight programs called by the RST instruction can be provided.
In the example of FIG. 101, an instruction to jump to "0050H" is stored in "0001H", and a program subsequent to "0000H" is stored after "0050H".

Although the vector address is set to "0004H" in this embodiment, it is not limited to this.
Here, the upper byte of the value of the vector address is the value of the I register. Then, as in the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the I register is initialized as a register of the main CPU 55 without executing the process of setting a specific value to the I register, and remains at "00H". The upper byte value of the address is "00H". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when executing processing for setting a specific value in the I register after initializing the I register after power-on, the upper byte value of the vector address can be set to the specific value. .
However, as shown in FIG. 96, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register is in the range of "00H" to "11H".
As will be described later, vector addresses are not limited to being provided in the program area of the used area, but can also be provided in the data area of the used area, the program area of the non-used area, and the data area of the non-used area. be.

However, if a process for setting a specific value in the I register is to be executed after initializing the I register after power-on, that much program capacity is required. For example, if the specific value is "02H", it is necessary to provide "LD I, 02H" (an instruction (program) to load "02H" into the I register) after initializing the I register after power-on. If the program requires a capacity of, for example, 2 bytes, that much program storage area is consumed.
On the other hand, when the initialized value "00H" is used as the I register value as in the present embodiment, there is no need to set a specific value in the I register. can save money. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced by setting the upper byte value of the vector address to "00H".

Furthermore, when the I register value is "00H", the value of the vector address is not limited to "0004H". Specifically, the value of the vector address is, for example, "00FEH" and "00FFH" or less, and addresses other than addresses to be called by the RST instruction ("0008H", "0010H", etc. described above). If there is, it can be set arbitrarily. For example, it can be set to "00F4H". If the lower 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is "0100B (4H)", the automatically assigned value of this embodiment shown in FIG. 99B can be used as it is.
When the upper 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is set to "FH" (1111B) as described above, the data value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) in FIG. (Vector address set value) becomes "1111B".

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example when the vector address value is "00F4H". In this case, since "0004H" is not a vector address, the power-on program can be stored in "0000H" to "0004H".
Also, if the program capacity of the jump instruction requires 3 bytes, the jump instruction is arranged in the 3-byte storage area of "0005H" to "0007H", and called by the RST instruction in "0008H" as in FIG. Program 1 can be stored.

Next, a program called by the RST command, that is, a program called a plurality of times in one game will be described.
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by the RST instruction, (A), (B), and (C) showing examples 1, 2, and 3, respectively.
Example 1 of FIG. 103(A) is a flow chart showing control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process corresponds to, for example, the process of step S303 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), and is a process for setting command data to be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. FIG.
Furthermore, although not shown, in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), the operation state (whether or not the BB operation pattern is displayed, whether or not the replay operation pattern is displayed, etc.) in the game start set process in step S272 is set, and control command set 1 is executed.
Similarly, although not shown, in the start switch acceptance process at step S279 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment), an output request at the start of reel rotation is set, and control command set 1 is executed.

In FIG. 103(A), first, in step S151, the main control board 50 executes interrupt prohibition processing. In the next step S152, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed. Then, in step S503, the interrupt processing prohibited in step S151 is canceled (that is, the interrupt is permitted). Interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2 by the above processing.
Although detailed processing of the control command set 2 is omitted, this processing is processing for writing control commands. In addition, since interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of control command set 2, malfunction due to execution of interrupt processing during control command write processing can be prevented.

Example 2 of FIG. 103(B) is a flow chart showing the interrupt waiting process (R_INTR_WAIT). This process corresponds to, for example, the process of step S2754 in FIG. 45 (third embodiment) or step S295 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment).
First, in step S161, the main control board 50 acquires an interrupt counter value. This process is a process of storing the interrupt counter value in the A register. A 16-bit (2-byte counter) interrupt counter value is stored at a predetermined address in the working area of the use area of the built-in RWM 53. In step S161, the value stored in the lower 8-bit address is is stored in the A register.
In the next step S162, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the lower 8-bit value of the interrupt counter value has changed. Specifically, the value of the lower 8 bits is subtracted from the value of the A register, and if the result of the operation is not "0" (when the zero flag is "0"), "Yes" is determined. When it is determined that the value has changed, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated, and when it is determined that the value has not changed, the processing of step S162 is continued.

Example 3 of FIG. 103(C) is a flowchart showing the countdown (R_CNT_DOWN). This process includes, for example, the process of subtracting the advantageous zone clear counter in step S301 (game end check process) of FIG. 46 (third embodiment), and the timer value It is used for the process of updating the , or the process of updating the number of AT games during the AT game (not shown).
In this process, the counter value is decremented by "1" in step S171, and the process of this flowchart ends.
Note that the three processes shown in FIG. 103 are examples of processes that are called multiple times in one game, and are not limited to these three processes, and many more processes are possible. Then, a program that has a program capacity that can be stored in the above-mentioned address and that is called many times in one game is set for the process of calling with the RST command.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing program code area designation addresses and their data values. It should be noted that although it is hereinafter referred to as a "program code area designation address", it may also be referred to as a "program code area setting address".
As shown in FIG. 96, in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, addresses "3FD3H" to "3FD8H" are set as program code area designation addresses.
The main CPU 55 determines that the program code stored within the address range designated in the program code area is normal when executed, and determines that the program code stored outside the address range designated in the program code area is normal. If the program code is executed, it is judged to be abnormal (travel outside the specified area). When the main CPU 55 determines that there is an abnormality (running outside the designated area), the main CPU 55 generates a reset.
In other words, a reset is generated when a program code (instruction) stored outside the specified area is called (instruction fetched).

This is done for the following reasons.
The first reason is that the illegal program code is stored in an area other than the original program area, and the illegal program code is jumped from the original program area to the illegal program code by, for example, a jump instruction, and the illegal program code is executed. Because there is
The second reason is that a runaway may occur when the voltage is unstable immediately after the power is turned on, or a runaway may occur due to heat, and instructions may fly to areas other than the program area. Specifically, for example, when there is an instruction to jump from an A address to a B address, if the instruction is not executed correctly, instructions stored after the B address may not be executed within the design time. In such a case, the power is once turned off and then turned on again (rebooted).

FIG. 100 also shows the processing when traveling outside the designated area.
As shown in FIG. 100, when running outside the specified area is detected during execution of the user mode, a reset is generated. In this case, the main CPU 55 initializes the registers, goes through the security mode, and executes the user mode again (executes the program from address "0000H").
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when travel outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, after initializing the register, the operation may be executed from the user mode without going through the security mode.
In the example of FIG. 100, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request is determined after the registers are initialized. You may make it not judge the presence or absence of.
However, when running outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, the initialization of the register is always executed.

FIG. 104A is a diagram showing addresses for designating the end address of the program code area 1. FIG. "Program code area 1" corresponds to the program area of the used area in FIG. A "program code area 2" to be described later corresponds to the program area outside the use area in FIG.
Here, as shown in FIG. 96, the address range of the program area of the used area is "0000H" to "11FEH". For this reason, in this embodiment, the start address "0000H" is not defined, and only the end address "11FEH" is defined. This eliminates the need for a storage area (2 bytes) for determining the start address "0000H".
If only the end address is defined and the start address is not defined, the main CPU 55 inevitably recognizes the range from the start address to the end address of the built-in memory as the program code area 1 . Since the program code area 1 (the program area of the used area) actually starts from "0000H", there is no problem even if the main CPU 55 recognizes it as described above.

The end address of program code area 1 is stored at addresses "3FD3H" and "3FD4H" (2-byte area) of the program management area. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104A, the lower byte is stored at address "3FD3H" and the upper byte is stored at address "3FD4H".
Therefore, "FEH" (11111110B) is stored at address "3FD3H", and "11H" (00010001B) is stored at address "3FD4H".

FIG. 104B is a diagram showing addresses for designating the start address of the program code area 2. As shown in FIG.
The addresses for designating the start address of the program code area 2 are set to "3FD5H" and "3FD6H". As shown in FIG. 96, the address range of the program area of the non-used area is "2000H" to "245DH". Therefore, the start address of the program code area 2 is "2000H".
Therefore, "00H" (000000000B) is stored at address "3FD5H", and "20H" (00100000B) is stored at address "3FD6H".

FIG. 104(C) is a diagram showing an address for designating the end address of the program code area 2. As shown in FIG. Addresses for designating the end address of the program code area 2 are set to "3FD7H" and "3FD8H".
"5DH" (01011101B) is stored at address "3FD7H", and "24H" (00100100B) is stored at address "3FD8H".

As described above, under the condition that the end address of the program code area 1 and the start and end addresses of the program code area 2 are stored in the program management area, the main CPU 55 determines that the program code within these designated address ranges is If it is executed, it is determined to be normal, but if the program code outside the specified address range is executed, it is determined to be abnormal.

It is also possible not to specify the program code area. In this case, "0000H" is stored in all of the program code area 1 end address, the program code area 2 start address, and the program code area 2 end address.
Further, for example, if only the address of the program code area 1 is specified and the address of the program code area 2 is not specified, the end address of the program code area 1 is set to "11FEH" as shown in FIG. The address and end address should be "0000H".

Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Although the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area, it is also possible to provide the vector address in the data area of the use area, for example. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "12H", after the power is turned on, "12H" is stored in the I register.
Also, a vector address may be provided in the program area outside the use area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "20H", after the power is turned on, "20H" is stored in the I register.
Furthermore, a vector address may be provided in the data area outside the use area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "24H", after the power is turned on, "24H" is stored in the I register.
When vector addresses are provided in the data area of the used area, when vector addresses are provided in the program area of the non-used area, and when vector addresses are provided in the data area of the non-used area, vector Simply reading the data value stored in the address results in running outside the designated area, and no reset is applied.

(2) The data value stored in the vector address, that is, the start address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored can be set arbitrarily. Although "1134H" is used in the example of FIG. 99(c), it is not limited to this. Also, the top address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored may be after the vector address or before the vector address.
(3) In the above embodiment, two address ranges are defined as the program code executable range (runnable area) as shown in FIG. may
In determining the executable range of the program code in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54, only the end address is defined in the above embodiment, and the start address is not defined. Both can be specified.

(4) In the above embodiment, the addresses storing the programs called by the RST instruction are "0008H", "0010H", "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H" are provided, but the addresses are not limited to these eight addresses. However, it is preferable to set the upper byte of the address storing the program called by the RST instruction to "00H".
By doing so, by providing a module that is called multiple times in one game near the top address (0000H), in the development stage, the module is designed first, and the other modules are designed later ( consideration).

(5) The relationship between the address storing the program called by the RST instruction and the vector address is as follows.
First, as shown in FIG. 101, vector addresses may be placed before all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Second, as shown in FIG. 102, vector addresses may be placed after all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Third, between one address (eg, "0020H") storing the program called by the RST instruction and another address (eg, "0028H") storing the program called by the RST instruction (eg, "0026H" and "0027H").

In this case, if the vector address is arranged within the program area (within the range of "0000H" to "00FFH") of the used area, it is not necessary to set the upper byte value of the vector address in the I register after power is turned on. In other words, the program capacity can be reduced by setting the I register value to "00H".
Also, as shown in FIG. 99(B), the A3-A0 bit value in the lower 1 byte of the vector address value is "0100B" in this example. Therefore, at this time, the vector address value becomes "00000000/####0100B"("#" is an arbitrary value of "0" or "1").
Here, the above "####B" (vector address set value) is "0000B" in the example of FIG. 99(A). However, it is not limited to this, and "####B" may be replaced with "1000B (8H)" or "1111B (FH)", for example.
When "####B" is set to "1000B (8H)", the vector address value is "00000000/10000100B", and when "####B" is set to "1111B (FH)", the vector address value is The address value is "00000000/11110100B".

(6) The upper byte value of the vector address value is the I register value and is set to "00H". However, the value of the high-order byte of the vector address may be set to a value other than "00H", for example, "02H", although this is not limited to this, although it partially overlaps with what has been described above. In this case, after the game machine 10 is powered on, the I register is initialized, and then the process of storing "02H" in the I register is executed.
In particular, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register, that is, the upper byte value of the vector address may be in the range of "00H" to "11H".

However, since the I register is initialized (to "00H") each time the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, a process of storing, for example, "02H" in the I register is executed again after the initialization. . As described above, for example, the program code "LD I, 02H" is provided, and the process of storing "02H" in the I register is executed.
On the other hand, if the value of the upper byte of the vector address is set to "00H" as in this embodiment, the value of the I register becomes "00H". After that, the process of storing the specific value in the I register becomes unnecessary. In other words, there is no need to provide the program code "LD I, 00H". Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced accordingly.

(7) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate. is.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to a gaming machine having biased combinations with different winning combinations (expected number of medals to be won) depending on the operation mode (press order and/or operation timing) of the stop switch 42 .
A "biased combination" has a different winning combination depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, and has a unilaterally advantageous pressing order and other pressing order (unilaterally unfavorable pressing order). However, in a game in which a biased role is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a one-sidedly advantageous pressing order, the stop switch 42 in the game is compared with the case where the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than that. This is a combination in which the expected value of the number of medals obtained (expected value without considering the expected value related to AT) is high.
The order of pressing the stop switch 42 includes normal pressing (left first stop) and irregular pressing (middle first stop or right first stop). “Normal” corresponds to irregular pressing.

A biased combination is composed of a plurality of types of minor combinations, and winning a biased combination corresponds to multiple winnings of these plurality of types of minor combinations. When a biased combination is won (when a plurality of kinds of minor combinations are won in duplicate), when the stop switch 42 is operated in a one-sidedly advantageous pressing order, the highest payout is achieved by the number-of-pieces priority control (see the first embodiment). A large number of small wins (hereinafter referred to as "high eyes") can be won. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than the one-sidedly advantageous pressing order when winning a biased combination, the number priority control (see the first embodiment) is performed to select a small combination other than the minor combination with the highest payout number. A role (hereinafter referred to as “low-rank”) can be won. Incidentally, when the sheet number priority control is executed, generally, a prize is awarded with a higher number "PB=1".
On the other hand, when the number priority control is executed,
a) When the low eye wins with "PB = 1",
b) There is a case where the lowest prize is "PB≠1" or no small winning combination is won (a winning combination is lost).

Furthermore, in the "biased role", the order of pressing the correct answer is not evenly assigned to the order of pressing the six options, and when the winning role of the biased role is won, operating the stop switch 42 by the above-mentioned irregular pressing is advantageous on the one hand. is configured to For this reason, when a biased combination is won, there is a one-sidedly advantageous pushing order (irregular pushing) and a pushing order other than that (one-sidedly disadvantageous pushing order (normal pushing)). In addition, "biased" indicates that the advantageous pushing order is biased toward irregular pushing.
Specifically, in a game in which a biased role is won, the rate of winning a higher prize when the stop switch 42 is operated by normal pressing is defined as "R1 (%)", and the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. When the percentage of high eyes winning is "R2 (%)",
"R1<R2"
is configured to be
Especially in the ninth embodiment, "R1=0 (%)" is set.

FIG. 105(a) is a diagram showing the type of combination, winning probability, number of payouts for each pressing order of the stop switch 42, etc. in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows. As in the first embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated, a combination lottery is performed by the combination lottery means 61, and the combination shown in FIG. 105 is won with the winning probability shown in the figure. In addition, in FIG. 105, the special combination (bonus combination) is omitted.
In FIG. 105, the biased combination corresponds to biased Bell 1 to biased Bell 4, rare combination A, and rare combination B. FIG.
Here, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a so-called pushing order bell
Role number "1": Small role A1 condition device (left middle right correct bell 1)
Role number "2": Small role A2 condition device (left middle right correct bell 2)
Role number "3": Small role B1 condition device (right and middle correct bell 1)
Role number "4": Small role B2 condition device (right and middle correct bell 2)
Role number “5”: Small role C1 condition device (middle left and right correct bell 1)
Role number "6": Small role C2 condition device (middle left and right correct bell 2)
Role number "7": Small role D1 condition device (middle right left correct bell 1)
Role number "8": Small role D2 condition device (middle right left correct bell 2)
Role number "9": Small role E1 condition device (right left middle correct bell 1)
Role number "10": Small role E2 condition device (right left middle correct bell 2)
Role number "11": Small role F1 condition device (right middle left correct bell 1)
Role number "12": Small role F2 condition device (right middle left correct bell 2)
was established.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probabilities of the combination number 1 to combination number 12 are all set to be the same (set number "2500").
As a result, regardless of the order in which the player completes the game during the game, there is no advantage/disadvantage in the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained based on the winning of the combination numbers '1' to '12'.
In other words, the expected value of the number of medals obtained according to the order of pressing the bell is the same between when the game is completed by normal pressing and when the game is completed by irregular pressing.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, there is no case where the normal pressing is the correct pressing order (the case where a high score is won), and the correct pressing order is limited to irregular pressings.
In other words, when a biased role is won, the order of correct pressing is limited to irregular pressing. When winning the biased role, the prize is not awarded.

The hands that make up the biased bell 1 to biased bell 4 are all a 1-card hand, a 2-card hand, and a 7-card hand. When any one of the biased bells is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order of the irregular pushes, the high-order bell with 7 bells wins with "PB=1" by the number priority control. . On the other hand, when one of the biased bells is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the incorrect answer, the one-piece or two-piece combination of the low bell is performed by the number-priority control. Win with "PB = 1". Also, when any one of the biased bells is won, if the bells are pressed irregularly but in the order of pressing the wrong answers, the number-priority control wins the one-piece combination of the low bell with "PB=1".
That is, in this example, when the winning of the biased bell is won, the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order, and the winning does not occur.

More specifically, for example, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of middle left and right, a 7-card combination is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pushing the wrong answer, middle right left, right left middle, or right middle left, it is configured such that "PB=1" wins a one-piece combination. ing.
On the other hand, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by forward pressing (left-center-right or left-right-center), which is the order of pressing the incorrect answer, "PB=1" results in a one-piece or two-piece combination. Win a prize. It depends on the operation timing of the stop switch 42 which of the 1-card hand and the 2-card hand is won. This is also the case when biased Bell 2 to biased Bell 4 are won.

Similarly, when the biased bell 2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of middle right left, "PB = 1" will win a 7-piece combination, and the middle left right, right left middle, or right middle left incorrect answer will be won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in order, "PB=1" wins a one-card role.
In addition, when the biased bell 3 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of right, left, middle correct pressing, "PB = 1" will win a 7-piece combination, and the incorrect pressing order of middle left, right, middle right, or right, middle left. When the stop switch 42 is operated with "PB=1", a winning combination of one card is won.
Furthermore, when the biased bell 4 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order of pressing right, middle, left, "PB = 1" will win a 7-card combination, and pressing the wrong answer, middle left, right, middle right, left, or right, left, middle. When the stop switch 42 is operated in order, "PB=1" wins a one-card role.

Every game, biased bells 1 to 4 are elected with a probability of "4/5" in total. Here, assuming that when the bell is won with a biased bell, the probability of winning is 50% when the 1-symbol combination wins, and the probability of winning the 2-symbol combination is 50%. , the expected number of medals won based on the biased bell is
4/5 x 1/2 x 1 + 4/5 x 1/2 x 2 = 1.2 (sheets)
becomes.
On the other hand, when every game is consumed by irregular pressing, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained based on the biased bell is
4/5 x 1/4 x 7 + 4/5 x 3/4 x 1 = 2.0 (sheets)
becomes.

Also, the rare hand A and the rare hand B are types of biased hands. Both the rare combination A and the rare combination B are combinations including a 1-card combination and a 12-card combination.
As shown in FIG. 105, when the rare hand A or rare hand B is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by forward pressing, the pressing order is incorrect. eye) wins.
On the other hand, when the rare combination A or the rare combination B is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing, the pressing order is correct, and "PB=1" wins a 12-card combination (high grade).
Since the winning probability of the total of rare hand A and rare hand B is "1/125", in the case of forward pressing, the expected number of medals to be obtained based on rare hand A and rare hand B is
1/125 x 1 = 0.008 (sheets)
becomes.
On the other hand, in the case of irregular pushing, the expected number of medals to be obtained based on rare hand A and rare hand B is
1/125 x 12 = 0.096 (sheets)
becomes.
As described above, in the game when a biased combination is won, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained in the game is one-sidedly advantageous for irregular pressings and one-sidedly disadvantageous for regular pressings (FIG. 105(b)).

Common bells, watermelons, and replays are provided as roles other than biased roles.
The common bell does not have the concept of correct pressing order/incorrect pressing order, and no matter in which order the stop switch 42 is operated, a winning combination of 6 is awarded (PB=1).
Watermelon is a small combination that can be won regardless of the order in which the watermelon is pressed when it is won, but it is a combination that can be missed. Therefore, in FIG. 105, "5 cards (when winning)" or "0 cards (when missing)" are displayed. However, depending on the pattern arrangement and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, there may be a difference in the ease of winning, but the explanation of this point is omitted.
The common bell has a winning probability of "1/88" when the payout number is 6.
In addition, the probability of winning the watermelon is "1/200" when the number of payouts is 5 (in the case of no loss). For watermelons, if 50% wins and 50% dropouts, the expected number of medals for the combined total of common bells and watermelons is
6 x 1/88 + 5 x 1/200 x 1/2 ≈ 0.081 (sheets)
is.

From the above, the expected number of medals obtained based on all hands when completing the game by pressing forward is
1.2 + 0.008 + 0.081 = 1.289 (sheets)
becomes.
On the other hand, the expected number of medals obtained based on all hands when the game is digested by irregular pushing is
2.0 + 0.096 + 0.081 = 2.177 (sheets)
becomes.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained is larger in irregular presses than in regular presses.
Further, in the ninth embodiment, the number of bets (also referred to as "prescribed number") is "3 (sheets)". Therefore, the expected number of medals to be obtained per game does not become positive even if the game is completed by irregular pushing every game.

On the other hand, the ninth embodiment has a normal section (unadvantageous section) and an advantageous section, like the other embodiments described above. Furthermore, the advantageous section has a non-AT and an AT. Non-AT has non-CZ and CZ (state where AT winning expectation is higher than non-CZ).
In the normal section, the AT lottery (in the following description of the ninth embodiment, the AT lottery including the CZ lottery will be referred to as the AT lottery) is not executed. On the other hand, during the advantageous section and non-AT, AT lottery is executed. The AT lottery can be executed when the rare combination A and the rare combination B (hereinafter, the rare combination A and the rare combination B are simply referred to as "rare combination") are won.
Note that the AT lottery may also be executed when the common bell or watermelon is won, but in the ninth embodiment, the AT lottery can be executed only when the rare combination is won for the sake of simplicity of explanation.

In addition, let "P1" be the AT winning expectation (also referred to as "winning probability", "winning ratio", "winning expected value", etc.) when the stop switch 42 is operated by forward pressing when winning a rare role. , When the winning expectation of the AT when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing when winning the rare hand is "P2",
P1 > P2
is configured to Therefore, since it is not known when a rare role will be won during the game, it is advantageous for the player to complete the game by always pressing forward in order to increase the expectation of winning the AT in the advantageous section and non-AT. (FIG. 105(b)).
Note that the winning expectation "P2" of the AT may be a value exceeding "0" or may be "0". In the ninth embodiment, "P2=0".

Since the AT lottery is performed on the basis that the start switch 41 is operated and a rare combination is won (step S283 in FIG. 115 to be described later), the stop switch 42 is not yet operated at the timing when the AT lottery is executed. do not have.
Therefore, for example, the AT lottery at the time of winning the rare role is performed at the timing of winning the rare role (at the time of operation of the start switch 41), and if the AT is won and the game is an irregular push this time, the game is played this time. (At the end of the current game or at the start of the next game), the winning of the AT concerned is invalidated (the winning of the AT is discarded).

As described above, if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing when winning a biased combination, the expected number of medals to be obtained in the game becomes higher than when the stop switch 42 is operated by regular pressing.
However, as described above, in the advantageous section and non-AT, when the biased hand is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by normal pressing, the right of AT may be granted, but the stop switch 42 may be given by irregular pressing. When manipulated, it does not grant AT rights.
For this reason, the total ball payout performance (the entire game) including the ball payout in the AT is higher in the regular push than in the irregular push (FIG. 105(b)).
For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, the pressing order of normal pressing (left first stop) is referred to as "recommended pressing order", and the pressing order of irregular pressing (middle first stop or right first stop) is referred to as "non-recommended "Push order" (Fig. 105(b)).
“Recommended” means that if the game is executed in that order in the advantageous section and non-AT, the total expected number of medals (the entire game) will be higher than in other orders.

However, forward pressing is only a "recommendation" and not an "instruction" or the like. In other words, irregular pushing is "not recommended" and not "prohibited" or the like.
In the ninth embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order in an advantageous section and non-AT, a recommended image (which may also be referred to as a "predetermined image" or "specific image") is displayed.
Here, the "recommended image" is an image that informs the player that the forward pressing is the recommended pressing order, in other words, that the forward pressing is the pressing order that is advantageous to the player. Note that the display of the recommended image is a display that notifies the player of the recommended pressing order, and is different from a warning display. When the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing, there is no penalty or disadvantages for the player in the next game and subsequent games. However, in the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated by normal pressing and in the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing, the AT winning expectation in the game differs as described above.
Therefore, the display of the recommended image is intended to inform the player that the expected number of medals to be obtained in total (the entire game) will decrease if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. Here, "total (entire game) expected number of medals to be obtained is reduced" means, for example, that the degree of expectation for winning an AT is lowered, or that the expected value for the number of medals to be obtained during an AT when the AT is won is reduced. , the ceiling number of games until winning AT is increased.
In addition, the "recommended image" is, for example, "Left press (forward press) is recommended", "Left press (forward press) is advantageous", "Left press (forward press) is easier to win AT" and other images. However, as the recommended image, there are various images other than the above.

A recommended image is not displayed in a game in which the stop switch 42 is pressed forward. On the other hand, in the game in which the stop switch 42 is irregularly pressed in the advantageous section and non-AT, the recommended image is displayed at the time of the first stop. Further, even when the recommended image is displayed, the display is ended at least when the next game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated). However, it is also possible to end the display of the recommended image when the current game is completely stopped or at the timing of the betting operation for the next game. In this case, it is preferable to execute processing for matching the internal control state and the effect image at the timing when the recommended image display ends. By configuring in this way, the period during which the recommended images are displayed is shortened. It is possible to prevent the later operation from deteriorating due to knowing that it is.
Also, a sound for notifying the recommended pressing order may be output together with the recommended image or instead of the recommended image. Appropriate and inappropriate examples of the notification of the recommended pressing order including the display of the recommended image will be given below.
(1) Examples of inappropriate notification of recommended pressing order a) Displaying "prohibition of irregular pressing" is inappropriate as notification of recommended pressing order. This is because the word "prohibited" corresponds to a warning expression. In the gaming machine 10, it is possible to inform the player of the recommended pressing order of the stop switches 42, but since the player decides how to press the stop switches 42, a specific pressing order is required. Forbidding it is inappropriate.

b) Displaying "DANGER" is inappropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because, like the above "prohibited", it falls under the expression of a warning.
c) Displaying a black and yellow striped pattern, displaying a prohibition mark (indicating a red straight line slanting downward to the right in a red circle), displaying an "X", etc. It is inappropriate as a notification of This is because these images are recognized as warnings, dangers, prohibitions, etc., according to social conventions.
d) The output of a sound similar to a buzzer or alarm is inappropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because it is recognized as a warning sound or a prohibited sound in socially accepted terms. However, it is of course possible to output a sound such as a buzzer or an alarm when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10 such as a medal selector error or a hopper error.

(2) Appropriate examples for notification of recommended pressing order a) Displaying "Left pressing (forward pressing) is recommended" as described above is optimal for the player (maximizing profit for the player). Since the game method (push order) is notified, it is suitable for notification of the recommended push order.
b) Outputting a stop sound of the reels 31 that is different from that at normal time is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. If the sound is of a level that is generally used as an effect of the game machine 10, it does not correspond to the warning sound.
c) Turning off the backlight of the reel 31 after the full stop is appropriate as notification of the recommended pushing order. This is because, like the above, it is generally used as an effect of the game machine 10 .

d) Darkening the liquid crystal screen is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is for the same reason as c) above. The timing of the darkening may be at the time of the first stop, at the time of the second stop, at the time of the complete stop, or after the complete stop.
e) Not outputting the stop sound of the reels 31 is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is for the same reason as c) above. Note that it is possible to output no stop sound only at the first stop, not output stop sounds at the first and second stops, or not output all stop sounds. In addition, not outputting the winning sound of the winning combination is also appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order.

f) When a continuous effect over multiple games is output, it is appropriate to interrupt the progress of the continuous effect when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is for the same reason as c) above.
g) In the case where the number of remaining games is displayed in the indication, not displaying the remaining number of games by subtraction is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. It should be noted that when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order during the precursor, the subtraction processing of the number of remaining games during the precursor is not executed in terms of internal control. This is because even if it is done in this way, it is merely announcing the fact and does not correspond to a warning or the like.

h) Displaying an image and/or outputting a voice saying "Pressing irregularly" is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because, as with g) above, this is merely an announcement of the fact and does not correspond to a warning or the like.
i) It is appropriate to display an image stating "Forward pressing increases the AT performance and lowers the base. Irregular pressing decreases the AT performance and increases the base." This is for the same reason as g) above.
j) Display related to the number of games after satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, moving to an advantageous section or starting a new cycle related to a lottery such as AT) (for example, after moving to an advantageous section When the number of games played or the number of games remaining until the end of the cycle related to the lottery such as AT), a predetermined game (for example, one game in the advantageous section, one cycle related to the lottery such as AT) It is appropriate to notify the recommended pressing order not to display the addition or subtraction of the display related to the number of games based on the operation in the non-recommended pressing order in the game).
In addition, after shifting to the advantageous section, even if the specified number of games or the specified number of cycles are completed, if the game state is not controlled to an advantageous game state such as AT, the game state is forcibly controlled to an advantageous game state such as AT. A relief function (also referred to as a "ceiling") is known.
When the operation is performed in the non-recommended pressing order in the predetermined game, the internal control does not execute the addition processing (in the case of the increment counter) or the subtraction processing (in the case of the decrement counter) of the number of games related to the relief function. , the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. The reason is the same as g) above.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pushing (forward pushing) in the advantageous section and during non-AT. In the figure, the time series is in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d).
In this example, it is assumed that the current stage is displayed on the image display device 23 during the advantageous section and non-AT. The stage has a normal stage and a high probability stage, and is set so that the AT winning expectation is higher in the high probability stage than in the normal stage. In addition, when the player wins the rare role under the condition that the stage is normal, a lottery will be executed to determine whether the stage will be promoted from the normal stage with a high degree of certainty. The following example shows an example when the stage is promoted from normal to high probability.
In (a) of the drawing, a pre-game-start effect is displayed on the image display device 23 before the game starts. Also, the stage at this point is normal.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated as shown in (b) in the figure and a rare combination is won, the stage promotion suggesting effect is started.

Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the recommended pressing order is determined at this point, so the recommended image is not displayed and the left (first) switch is pressed. As a production when the stop switch 42 is operated, a stage promotion suggesting production develops. Note that this example shows an example in which the stage promotion suggesting effect develops when the stop switch 42 is first operated, but when the game starts (while all reels 31 are rotating) and when the left stop switch 42 is operated (when the left reel 31 is stopped) ) does not have to change the performance.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, an effect to the effect that the stage promotion is successful is output as an effect after all the reels 31 are stopped. Then, the stage is switched from the usual one to high accuracy.
As described above, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the recommended image is not displayed.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order (irregular pressing) in the example of FIG. In this example, by winning the rare role, the player wins the lottery where the stage is highly likely to be promoted from normal, but the winning is invalidated due to the non-recommended pushing order, and the stage is not highly likely to be promoted. . In the figure, the time series is in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(e)→(f) (the same applies to FIGS. 108 to 111 below).
In FIG. 107, (a) and (b) are both the same as FIG. 106 (a) and (b). Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop is the non-recommended push order, the main control board 50 transmits the command to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 determines that the first stop is the non-recommended push order based on the received command, the sub-control board 80 displays the recommended image. This recommended image is an image that covers substantially the entire image display area of the image display device 23, and the stage promotion suggesting effect up to that point is hidden by the recommended image and becomes invisible.

Note that the sound output from the speaker 22 after the recommended image is displayed may be the sound corresponding to the effect image up to that point (that is, the same sound as in FIG. 106), or the sound corresponding to the effect image up to that point. may be interrupted to output audio for the recommended image. As the sound for the recommended image, for example, a sound such as "It is recommended to press the button to the left" may be output once or repeatedly multiple times. Also, while outputting the sound corresponding to the effect image up to that point, the sound corresponding to the recommended image such as "recommend pushing to the left" may be superimposed on the sound and output.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, even if all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Also, as shown in (e) in the figure, the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet operation is performed. Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated as shown in (f) in the figure, the display of the recommended image ends at that timing, and the image before the display of the recommended image is restored.
Note that the example of FIG. 107 is an example in which the start switch 41 is operated within 3 seconds from the time of complete stop of (d) in the figure. This is because, as will be described later, when the recommended image is displayed, the demonstration display is executed after 3 seconds have passed since the stoppage. This point applies to FIGS. 109 and 111 as well.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pushing (forward pushing) in the advantageous section and during non-AT.
In this example, character images are displayed on the image display device 23 (corresponding to characters A, B, and C in (a) in the figure), and if a rare role is won, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not to obtain a new character. to run. Then, when the number of characters reaches a predetermined number (for example, "5"), the game is shifted to CZ or the AT lottery is preferentially treated. The following example shows an example of acquiring a new character D by winning a rare role.
(a) in the figure shows the situation before the start of the game. In this situation, a pre-game effect is output, and characters A, B, and C are displayed as images.
Next, it is assumed that the process proceeds to (b) in the figure, the start switch 41 is played, and the rare combination is won. As a result, the character acquisition effect is started.

Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop operation is performed in the recommended pressing order, the recommended pressing order is confirmed at this point. Character acquisition production develops as a production of. Although this example shows an example in which the character acquisition effect develops when the stop switch 42 is first operated, it is of course possible that the effect does not change between when the game is started and when the game is first stopped.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect after the stop of all the reels 31 is the effect of newly acquiring the character D (acquisition success effect). is output. Then, in addition to the characters A, B, and C up to now, the newly obtained character D is displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in (e) in the drawing, when a bet operation is performed, the game transitions to the pre-game-start effect. Next, the process proceeds to (f) in the figure, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the game start effect of the game is output.
Thus, no recommended image is displayed when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order. Also, the newly acquired character D is displayed as it is in the next game.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order (irregular pressing) in the example of FIG. In this example, as in Example 1 above, a winning lottery for a character is won by winning a rare combination, but the winning is invalidated due to the non-recommended pressing order, and the number of characters does not increase.
In FIG. 109, (a) and (b) are both the same as FIG. 108 (a) and (b). Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed, and the effect up to that point is hidden.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, even if all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Also, as shown in (e) in the figure, the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet operation is performed. Further, when the start switch 41 is operated as shown in (f) in the figure, the display of the recommended image ends at that timing, and the image before winning the rare combination (the image in which the character is not acquired) returns.

110 and 111 are diagrams for explaining the state of the (image) layer when the recommended image is displayed. FIG. 111 is a diagram following FIG. 110 .
The examples in FIGS. 110 and 111 correspond to example 1 in FIG.
Note that in FIGS. 110 and 111, both the front layer and the rear layer are not limited to one layer, but actually consist of a plurality of layers.
In this example, the recommended image is output by the front layer, and the normal effect image is output by the back layer.

In the figure, the front layer is transparent before the game starts in (a) and when the start switch is operated in (b). Therefore, the player can see only the effect image of the rear layer.
Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop being the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed using the front layer. Also, the recommended image for the front layer makes the rear layer invisible to the player. Further, as shown in (c) in the figure, even when the recommended image is displayed on the front layer, the effect on the back layer is output (displayed) as it is without being stopped. The image of the back layer in FIG. 106(c) corresponds to the effect image in FIG. 106(c).

Next, the recommended image of the front layer is maintained as it is even at the time of (d) full stop in FIG. 111 . In addition, in the rear layer at this time, the effect of the recommended pressing order progresses, and the stage advancement success effect and the state in which the stage has shifted with high certainty are output. This image corresponds to FIG. 106(d). However, since the back layer cannot be seen by the player while the recommended image is being displayed, the player cannot see the stage advancement success effect.
Next, proceeding to (e) in the drawing, even if a betting operation is performed, the display of the recommended image is maintained. Also, the back layer at this time advances to the effect image at the time of the bet operation. Also, at this point, the high probability state after the stage promotion is displayed.

Next, proceed to (f) in the figure, and when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), at this point the internal control state (the normal stage is maintained because it was operated in the non-recommended pushing order) and the effect image is executed. This returns the stage to normal. Also, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends and the front layer becomes transparent. As a result, the player can see the image display contents of the rear layer at this time.
If the image display is controlled as described above, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image can be displayed on the front layer without stopping the image display in the recommended pressing order. , can simplify program processing. In addition, during the period when the internal control state and the effect image do not match, the recommended image is displayed on the front layer, and the effect image on the back layer is not visible to the player. There is no misidentification by the person.
Instead of returning the image when the start switch 41 is operated, the image may be returned when the bet operation is performed (timing shown in FIG. 111(e)). Specifically, at the time of the bet operation, the internal control state (that the normal stage is maintained because the operation was performed in the non-recommended pressing order) and the effect image are matched at this point. This returns the stage to normal. On the other hand, when a bet operation is made, the display of the recommended image on the front layer ends, so the player can see the image display content on the back layer at this point.
Further, in the above example, the front layer is provided in advance, and the front layer is transparent during the period when the recommended image is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the front layer is not provided during the period when the recommended image is not displayed, and the front layer is arranged only during the period when the recommended image is displayed.

Next, the relationship between the recommended image, the game state, the game section, and the number of bets will be described.
1. Relationship Between Recommended Image and Game State In the ninth embodiment, a lottery for a special combination (bonus combination) is performed in the non-special game state. When the special combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a special game (becomes a special game state).
In the ninth embodiment, as special roles, 1BB-A and 1BB-B are provided as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 5).
During 1BB-A operation and 1BB-B operation, RB is continuously operated (Fig. 9). During the RB continuous operation, as shown in FIG. 8, every game wins the winning number "17", and the winning ALL condition device is activated. In a game in which the winning ALL condition device is activated, regardless of the order of pressing the stop switch 42 (there is no advantage/disadvantage depending on the order of pressing the stop switch 42), a combination of 10 cards (small combination 01 to small combination 06; see FIG. 4). The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the wins.
Also, during 1BB-A operation and 1BB-B operation, AT lottery is controlled so as not to be executed.
As described above, there is no recommended pressing order in games during 1BB-A operation and 1BB-B operation. Therefore, in the game during 1BB-A operation and 1BB-B operation, the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. In the game during 1BB-A operation and 1BB-B operation, the player can finish the game in any pressing order. In addition, the game during 1BB-A operation and 1BB-B operation (during RB continuous operation) is constructed so that the expected number of medals to be obtained is the same regardless of the pressing order.

Also, during AT, the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. During the AT, as a general rule, when a biased combination is won, the correct pressing order is reported, and the player follows the correct pressing order, so irregular pressing is performed in the game. Of course, the recommended image is not displayed in this case.
Also, during the AT, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing in a game other than the game in which the biased role is won, for example, in the game when the role is not won, the recommended image is not displayed.

2. Relationship Between Recommended Image and Game Section The ninth embodiment has a non-advantageous section (normal section) and an advantageous section, as in the other embodiments described above.
Then, the AT lottery can be executed in the advantageous section, but the AT lottery is not executed in the non-advantageous section. Therefore, in the non-advantageous section, there is no recommended pushing order that is advantageous in the AT lottery. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing during the non-advantageous section, the recommended image is not displayed.
For this reason, when the recommended image is not displayed even if the irregular push is performed in the normal state (special game state or non-AT state), the player is informed that the game is in a non-advantageous section and that the AT lottery is executed. It is possible to suggest that it will not be done.
Although detailed description is omitted in the ninth embodiment, during the non-advantageous section (normal section), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed, and for example, when the result of the internal lottery is not won, It is set to win the lottery to move to the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, even if the difference number exceeds 2400 in the advantageous section and the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is usually one to several games. Therefore, even if the player knows that it is a non-advantageous section (confirms that the advantageous section display LED 78 is turned off) and presses irregularly, the expected value for increasing medals is small and can be ignored. degree.
Contrary to the above, the recommended image may be displayed when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing even in an unadvantageous section. With this configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section based on whether or not the recommended image is displayed at the time of irregular pressing. Furthermore, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit even in an advantageous section, or if a lamp (section indicator) indicating an advantageous section is not provided, the effect can be further exhibited. .

3. Relationship between recommended image and number of bets (specified number) In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 4 and 5), the game is played with either the number of bets “2” or the number of bets “3”. is executable.
The number of bets "3" is the number of bets advantageous to the player. In other words, the number of bets “3” is the recommended number of bets.
Let "P1" be the AT winning expectation (winning ratio, winning probability) when the game is played with the number of bets "3", and let "P2" be the expectation of AT winning when the game is played with the number of bets "2". when
P1 > P2
is.
In particular, P1>P2×1.5
is.
Therefore, even if the game is completed with the bet number of "2", the AT win expectation will not be more advantageous than when the game is completed with the bet number of "3".
Particularly, in the ninth embodiment, when a game is played with the number of bets "2", the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the result of the internal lottery (in the program processing, the AT lottery process is skipped). there is That is, "P2=0".

Furthermore, the winning probability of each role when the game is played with the number of bets “2” is less than “2/3” compared to the probability of winning each role when the game is played with the number of bets “3”. set. As a result, even if the game is completed with the number of bets "2", the expected number of medals to be obtained will not exceed the number of bets.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 when the number of bets is "2". Even if the switch 42 is operated, the recommended image is not displayed. This is because if the recommended image is displayed without executing the AT lottery, the player may be confused. In addition, when the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing in spite of the advantageous section and non-AT, the player is notified that the number of bets in the game is "2". can make you aware.

Next, demonstration image display (hereinafter simply referred to as “demonstration display”) will be described.
After the complete stop (after the payout process is completed if there is a payout process for medals), the display of the image display device 23 is turned off when the operation to advance the game (bet operation) is not performed even after a predetermined time has passed. There is a case where the performance display at the end of the game shifts to the demonstration display (an example of not shifting to the demonstration display will be described later). The demonstration display is, for example, a promotional video displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10, or the like.
In the ninth embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, after the reel 31 is completely stopped, the transition to the demonstration display is performed. The times are set differently.
Specifically, the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, and at a certain timing (at the start of payout, at the end of payout, after the reel 31 is completely stopped, or for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the stoppage of the reel 31). After the lapse of time) until the transition to the demonstration display is defined as "t1", the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pushing, and the reel 31 is completely stopped or at a certain timing after the complete stop until the transition to the demonstration display. When the time of is "t2",
t1 < t2
is set to

That is, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, transition to the demonstration display occurs earlier than when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order.
The purpose of this setting is to shift from the display of the recommended image to the demonstration display as early as possible so that the operation of the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order can be made as unnoticeable as possible. When a player selects a gaming machine on which to play a game, if a recommended image is displayed, it can be seen that the stop switch 42 has been operated in the non-recommended pressing order, so some kind of penalty has occurred. This is because there is a risk that the player may mistakenly think that the game machine is being used, and avoid playing games on the game machine.
In addition, as described above, in the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, even if the AT lottery target role is won, the AT will not be won (or even if the AT is won, it will be invalid). ), and no penalty will occur in the next game or later after the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended push order. However, on the 5th machine (conventional game machine), if an irregular push was performed, the penalty (for the specified game, AT lottery, etc.) would continue even after the next game, so it is the same as the 5th machine. It is not desirable for the display of the recommended image to continue for longer than necessary, because there is a risk of confusion as to whether a penalty has occurred.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of depressing and the display shifts to the demonstration display, the demonstration display is canceled by the bet operation (medal insertion operation), and the display returns to the normal display (game standby effect display).
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order to shift to the demonstration display, the demonstration display is not canceled by the bet operation (medal insertion operation), and the demonstration display continues. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is started, the display returns to the normal display (game standby effect display).
After the recommended image is displayed, when the time "t2" elapses after the stoppage and the display shifts to the demo display, the demo display layer is placed before the layer that displays the recommended image. . As a result, during the demonstration display, the display of the recommended image is invisible to the player.
Then, even if a betting operation is performed, the display of the recommended image and the demonstration display are maintained. Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, both the display of the recommended image and the demonstration display are erased, and the normal display layer located further behind the display of the recommended image is displayed.
Note that the examples of FIGS. 107, 109, and 111 show examples in which the display of the recommended image returns to the normal display without transitioning to the demonstration display. In other words, this is an example in which the start switch 41 is operated before the time "t2" has elapsed after a complete stop.

Next, transition to demonstration display will be described using a time chart.
FIG. 112 shows an image display, push button lamp state, and menu (screen) display when a bet operation and a start switch (abbreviated as “start” in FIGS. 112 to 114) are operated after the demo display. is a time chart showing a replay non-winning time. In the figure, (a) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the recommended pressing order, and (b) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order.

Although not shown in FIG. 1 , push buttons are connected to the sub-control board 80 . A push button is also called a production button, a chance button, an operation button, an enter button, a sub button, a menu button, or the like.
In addition, a lamp (push button lamp) is provided inside the push button, and is lit when the push button is enabled, and is extinguished when the push button is disabled. there is Thus, the player can determine whether or not the push button is valid by checking whether the push button lamp is illuminated.
The first use of the push button is to display an effect prompting the operation of the push button, and to develop the effect when the operation of the push button is detected.
A second method is to display a menu by performing an operation during game standby. In the menu, for example, issuance of a so-called two-dimensional code for My Slot, game flow, payout table, etc. can be displayed. When the push button lamp is on, the menu can be displayed, and when the push button lamp is off, the menu cannot be displayed.

In FIG. 112(a), it is assumed that the normal effect is displayed at the time of the first bet operation.
Also, during a predetermined period during which the demonstration display during the normal effect is not executed (for example, from the bet operation until 5 seconds have elapsed after the game has completely stopped), it is not possible to shift to the menu. Therefore, the push button lamp is off.
The above state is maintained until five seconds elapse after the game is started (start switch 41 is operated), all stop switches 42 are operated, and all reels 31 are stopped. Note that "5 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as "3 seconds" and "10 seconds" are possible.

Also, although only "Normal effect" is displayed from the start of the game to the end of the game, the content of the effect naturally changes as the game progresses.
When 5 seconds have passed after a complete stop, the push button lamp lights up. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the menu can be displayed (shift to the menu is possible). When the push button is operated while the push button lamp is lit, the menu can be displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the push button is not operated (the menu is not displayed).

Further, when it is determined that 60 seconds have elapsed after the reels 31 have completely stopped, the image display is switched from the normal effect display to the demonstration display. Note that this "60 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as "20 seconds" and "30 seconds" are possible. Generally, however, the demonstration display is after the push button lamp is lit.
Here, in FIG. 112(a), the demonstration display is executed on condition that no bet is made. Therefore, it is assumed that no prizes have been replayed (no automatic bets have been made) and no medals have been inserted in the game.
When a bet operation is performed (or medals are inserted) while the demonstration display is being performed, the demonstration display is ended and the normal presentation is started. In addition, with the transition to the normal effect, the menu display is disabled and the push button lamp is also turned off.

FIG. 112(b) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order, unlike FIG. 112(a).
In FIG. 112(b), when, for example, the middle stop switch 42 is operated as the first stop and the non-recommended pressing order is reached, the image display is switched from the normal effect display to the recommended image display at that time. As described above, the recommended image display layer is arranged before the normal effect display layer.
Then, when 3 seconds have passed since the complete stop, the recommended image display is switched to the demonstration display. Note that "3 seconds" is an example, and "5 seconds" or the like may be used. As described above, in the case of the recommended pressing order, the display is switched to the demonstration display 60 seconds after the full stop, but in the non-recommended pressing order, the display is switched to the demonstration display 3 seconds after the full stop. As a result, it is possible to switch to the demo display at an early stage after the full stop in the non-recommended pressing order. There is a high possibility that it is already displayed as a demo. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the stop switch 42 was operated in the non-recommended pressing order in the last game of the previous player.

Also, during the recommended pressing order, the demonstration display was changed to the normal effect display by the bet operation. On the other hand, in the non-recommended pressing order, even if a bet operation (a medal insertion operation) is performed, the demonstration display does not transition to the normal effect display (and the recommended image display, which is a layer behind the demonstration display). Therefore, for example, after finishing a game in which the non-recommended pressing order is performed, even if another player inserts medals into this game table, the normal effect display (and the recommended image display, which is a layer behind the demo display) is displayed. does not migrate.
Then, when the bet operation is performed and the start switch 41 is operated (when the game is started), the demonstration display (and the recommended image display, which is the layer behind it) ends, and the normal effect state is displayed. transition to

Furthermore, when a small winning combination is won, the winning number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 (FIG. 1). The display of the acquired number is cleared, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the payout process, or at the start of the demonstration display (after 60 seconds have passed since the game was completely stopped). However, for example, when the biased bell is won, the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, and the 7-card hand is won, the winning number display LED 78 displays "07". Similarly, when the rare combination is won, the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, and the 12-card combination is won, "12" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. - 特許庁

However, when the player ends the game with the game winning 7 or 12, the next player is displayed as "07" or "12" on the winning number display LED 78 of the gaming machine. may be discovered. As a result, there is a risk that the next player will avoid playing games on that gaming machine.
Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the 7-card hand or the 12-card hand is won, and the winning number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order. It is preferable to clear the winning number displayed on the winning number display LED 78 earlier than the time. For example, in FIG. 112(b), the display of the acquired number display LED 78 may be cleared at the timing of shifting to the demonstration display 3 seconds after the full stop.
It should be noted that when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of depression, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 may be cleared after a predetermined time has passed after the full stop. Alternatively, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be maintained until the betting operation of the next game, and the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be cleared by the betting operation.

FIG. 113 is a time chart showing image display, push button lamp states, and menu display when a replay win (during automatic betting) is shown. In the figure, (a) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the recommended pressing order, and (b) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order.
In FIG. 113(a), if an automatic bet is made based on the win in the replay after the stoppage, the post-betting state is the same as in FIG. 112(a). Even if 60 seconds elapse later, the demo display is not executed. As a result, the push button lamp will not light and the menu cannot be displayed.
On the other hand, in FIG. 113(b), when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order in the first stop, the recommended image is displayed at that point in the same manner as in FIG. 112(b).
Furthermore, when 3 seconds have passed after the complete stop, the recommended image display is shifted to the demonstration display. Therefore, in this respect, the winning replay is different from the recommended pressing order in which the demo display is not performed.
This demonstration display is continued while automatic betting is being performed, and when the start switch 41 is operated (game is started), the demonstration display is shifted to the normal effect display.

FIG. 114 is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamps, and the menu display when a bet operation is performed (including medal insertion operation) within 3 seconds after a complete stop, and a start operation is performed 60 seconds after the complete stop. is. In the figure, (a) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the recommended pressing order, and (b) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order.
In FIG. 114(a), if a bet operation is performed before 3 seconds have elapsed after the stoppage, the post-bet state is the same as in FIG. 112(a). Even if 60 seconds elapse later, the display does not shift to the demonstration display. As a result, the push button lamp will not light and the menu cannot be displayed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 114(b), when the first stop is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed at that point in the same manner as in FIG. 112(b).
Furthermore, even if a betting operation is performed within 3 seconds after the stoppage, the recommended image display is maintained. Next, when 3 seconds have passed after the complete stop, the recommended image display is shifted to the demonstration display. That is, even if a betting operation is performed, the recommended image display is limited to 3 seconds after the complete stop, and when 3 seconds have passed since the complete stop, the recommended image display is switched to the demonstration display. .
As described above, in the recommended pressing order, either the demo display is displayed when 60 seconds have passed since the vehicle stopped completely (Fig. 112(a)), or the normal display is displayed even after 60 seconds have passed since the vehicle has completely stopped. Either the effect display is maintained (Fig. 113(a) or Fig. 114(a)).
On the other hand, in the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed at the first stop, and when 3 seconds have passed after the full stop, the demo display is displayed.

As described above, FIGS. 112(b), 113(b), and 114(b) are all limited to advantageous sections and non-AT. During the game state, the recommended image is not displayed even if the button is pressed irregularly. For this reason, when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing during the non-advantageous section (normal section), during the AT, or during the special game state, FIGS. Same as a).
Also, as shown in FIG. 112(a), when the recommended pressing order is used (when replay is not won), the demo display is performed after 60 seconds have passed after the complete stop. In some cases, the demo may not be displayed even if the Therefore, the example of FIG. 112(a) does not necessarily mean that the demonstration display is always performed after 60 seconds have passed since the complete stop.
Furthermore, even in a situation where the demonstration is not displayed (a situation in which the menu is not displayed) when the operation is performed in the recommended pressing order, such as during the above-mentioned continuous effect or CZ, if the operation is performed in the non-recommended pressing order. displays a demo after 3 seconds have elapsed after the vehicle stops completely.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 112(b), 113(b), and 114(b), in the present embodiment, the demonstration display and recommended image display are terminated by the start operation, and the normal effect display is restored. This is because the effect display contents are switched at the time of the start operation (a new effect command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80). On the other hand, in the case where the effect display content is switched by the bet operation, the bet operation may return to the normal effect display. In this case, an effect command is newly transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 at the time of the bet operation.
In any of the above cases, the demonstration display and the recommended image display are terminated when or after the effect display content matches the internal control state, and the effect display content visible to the player and the internal control state do not match. prevent it from occurring.

Next, transmission of the pressing order instruction number and transmission of the effect group number will be described.
As in the first embodiment, the pushing order instruction number corresponds to the correct pushing order (the pushing order for winning the high-ranking role) when winning a role having an advantageous pushing order (in the ninth embodiment, a biased role). is the number to As in the first embodiment, a combination lottery is performed by the combination lottery means 61, and when a biased combination is won, the pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 (FIG. 1) selects a pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning biased combination. select.
When the pressing order of the biased combination is six, the pressing order instruction number is, for example, similar to the third embodiment.
Left middle right correct answer: Push order instruction number "A1"
Right and left middle correct answer: Push order instruction number "A2"
Middle left and right correct answer: Push order instruction number "A3"
Middle right left correct answer: Push order instruction number "A4"
Right, left, middle correct answer: Push order instruction number "A5"
Right middle left correct answer: Push order instruction number "A6"
and
However, in the ninth embodiment, the order of pressing the correct answer when winning a biased bell is the irregular pressing (four choices).
Middle left and right correct answer: Push order instruction number "A1"
Middle right left correct answer: Push order instruction number "A2"
Right, left, middle correct answer: Push order instruction number "A3"
Right middle left correct answer: Push order instruction number "A4"
may be
Also, when a rare combination is won, an arbitrary number may be selected from the pushing order instruction numbers "A1" to "A4". Alternatively, a pressing order instruction number may be provided to indicate an irregular pressing when a rare combination is won.

As in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number and displays the push order instruction number on the acquisition number display LED 78 (instruction monitor) when a biased role is won during AT (instruction game). Display the push order instruction information corresponding to the order instruction number. For example, when the pressing order instruction number is "A1", "=1" may be displayed as the pressing order instruction information as in the third embodiment.
Furthermore, when displaying the pressing order instruction information, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number, it becomes possible to output information regarding the correct pressing order. In other words, the command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number transmitted by the main control board 50 is a command capable of specifying the correct pressing order. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct key pressing order on the image display device 23 .
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 can transmit the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section and AT. Therefore, even if a pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in an advantageous section and other than during AT, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . It should be noted that it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number except in the advantageous section and during the AT.

On the other hand, the effect group number is a number corresponding to the winning number, as in the first embodiment, and is information for enabling the sub-control board 80 to output the effect corresponding to the winning combination.
A performance group number is selected not only for a game winning a role but also for a game not winning a role.
Further, the effect group number selected in a game in which a winning combination having an advantageous pressing order is won is information indicating that a winning combination having an advantageous pressing order has been won. It is configured so that the order cannot be specified.
The effect group number selection means 64 (FIG. 1) selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning combination and enables transmission to the sub-control board 80 . When receiving the effect group number, the sub-control board 80 can output the effect related to the winning combination based on the information.

Here, the main control board 50 sends the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 as follows.
a) Example 1
In the game other than the game in which the biased role is won, the performance group number is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, in the game in which the biased hand is won, the effect group number is not selected and not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.例文帳に追加However, in a game in which a biased combination is won, the effect group number may be selected but not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
b) Example 2
A performance group number is selected and transmitted to a sub-control board 80 regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery (including a game winning a biased winning combination).

The main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number corresponding to the winning combination to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the winning combination. However, since the sub-control board 80 can receive the effect group number, it is possible to output the effect corresponding to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. Further, when the sub-control board 80 is designed not to receive the performance group number when winning the biased role, it can be assumed that the game has won the biased role unless the performance group number is received. It is possible to substantially discriminate the game played.
The main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 when the biased combination is won during the AT, even if the specifications do not transmit the performance group number when the biased combination is won. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can output an effect related to the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

In the first embodiment, even when winning the push-order bell (corresponding to the biased role in the ninth embodiment), the effect group number is uniformly transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
However, there is a suspicion that transmitting the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 at the time of winning the biased hand may constitute an instruction. This is because the transmission of the performance group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role can be interpreted as the transmission of the instruction information, since the game when the biased role is won has a unilaterally advantageous pushing order. Furthermore, when it is interpreted that the instruction information is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, the instruction monitor must be displayed, and the medals obtained in the game must be indicated. This is because it is necessary to add to the character ratio (see the first embodiment).
Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, the above example 1 is adopted, and the effect group number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when the biased combination is won. However, as described above, since the performance group number is not transmitted only when the biased combination is won, the sub-control board 80 can guess that the biased combination has been won in the game in which the performance group number is not received.
Here, in the example of FIG. 105, the combined win probability of the biased combination with the number of bets "3" is "101/125", which exceeds "1/2" (half of all games). By increasing the winning probability of the biased hand in this way, the number of games that do not require transmission of the effect group number increases, so the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced.
On the other hand, by increasing the winning probability of the sum of the biased hands, it is possible to lower the base at the normal time and improve the performance of AT's payout, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Depending on the winning probability of the biased role and the expected value of the number of medals to be won, when transmitting the performance group number when the biased role is won, the order of pressing (also called "stop order") is indicated (lights up the instruction monitor). , There was an idea that it should be included in the instructed role ratio.
However, at the present time, even if the effect group number is sent when a biased role is won, it is possible not to instruct the pushing order (not to light the instruction monitor) and not to include it in the instruction-inclusive role ratio. It is considered that there is a case where the following three conditions are satisfied.
1) Under the condition that the pressing position is random (no "eye pressing"), the expected value (bet number, basically "3").
2) Do not suggest the pressing order or pressing position by directing or the like. For example, an effect using a color that is displayed only in a game in which the player wins the biased role suggests the pressing order, and thus such an effect may not be possible.
3) Under the condition that the player must always play a high score (a method that always wins a low score, such as a one-card role, even if the correct answer is given in order), the same performance group including biased roles. All the expected values for each pressing order when winning a small winning combination to which a number is assigned are equal to or less than a specified number.
By configuring to satisfy the above 1) to 3), even if the production group number is illegally acquired when winning a biased role, the expected number of medals to be obtained when irregular pressing will be less than the specified number. It is possible to prevent the act of increasing the number of medals. Here, "when winning a small winning combination" means "when winning any of the small winning combinations included in the small winning combination".

The above point will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 105(a).
First, in the following description,
The pressing order of "left center right" is set to "pressing order 1",
The pressing order of "right and left center" is set to "press order 2",
The pressing order of "middle left and right" is set to "push order 3",
The pressing order of "middle right left" is set to "pressing order 4",
The pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle" is set to "Pressing order 5",
The pressing order of "right-center-left" is assumed to be "pressing order 6".
(see FIG. 105(a)).
again,
Let "E1" be the expected number of medals to be won in push order 1 based on all roles,
Let "E2" be the expected number of medals to be obtained in push order 2 based on all roles,
Let "E3" be the expected number of medals to be obtained for push order 3 based on all roles,
Let "E4" be the expected number of medals to be obtained for push order 4 based on all roles,
Let "E5" be the expected number of medals to be obtained for push order 5 based on all roles,
Let "E6" be the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained for the pushing order of 6 based on all the roles.
At this time,
E1 = Σ {(number of coins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 1) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E2 = Σ {(Number of wins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of pressing 2) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E3 = Σ {(number of coins obtained when each winning combination is pressed in the order of 3) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E4 = Σ {(Number of wins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 4) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E5 = Σ {(Number of wins when each winning combination is operated in the order of 5) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E6 = Σ {(number of coins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 6) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
is.
and,
E1 ≤ specified number E2 ≤ specified number E3 ≤ specified number E4 ≤ specified number E5 ≤ specified number E6 ≤ specified number It is the condition 1) above.

The expected number of medals obtained based on all roles when the stop switch 42 is operated in a predetermined pressing order is the medal based on all roles when the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order different from the predetermined pressing order. When there are more than "0.1" sheets or more than the expected value of the obtained number, the predetermined pressing order is a one-sidedly advantageous pressing order, and the specific pressing order is a one-sidedly unfavorable pressing order. I have an idea to
Then, when the expected number of medals to be obtained based on all the combinations differs for each pushing order, each pushing order is classified into either a unilaterally advantageous pushing order or a unilaterally disadvantageous pushing order.
In the ninth embodiment, as described above, the expected number of medals to be obtained (“E1” and “E2”) based on all hands when the game is completed by forward pressing (“Pressing order 1” and “Pressing order 2”) ) is "1.289" medals, and the expected number of medals to be obtained based on all hands ("E3" to "E6 ”) is “2.177” sheets,
2.177-1.289=0.888>0.1
Therefore, "push order 1" and "push order 2" are unilaterally disadvantageous push orders, and "push order 3" to "push order 6" are unilaterally advantageous push orders.

Here, in an actual gaming machine, for example, when "push order 3" is compared with "push order 4" to "push order 6" (push orders that are unilaterally advantageous), medals are obtained based on all roles. There are specifications in which the expected number of sheets is strictly different.
Specifically, for example, when the operation is performed in "push order 3", the pattern related to the special role (bonus role) can be drawn, but in "push order 4" to "push order 6", the pattern related to the special role can be drawn. With specifications that do not draw in, if you operate with "push order 3", a special role may be won and the number of payouts may be "0", while with "push order 4" to "push order 6" When operated, there is a case where the special winning combination does not win and a duplicate winning small winning combination (for example, a single winning combination) wins, and the number of payouts becomes "1".
In such a case, strictly speaking, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained based on all hands differs between "push order 3" and "push order 4" to "push order 6". Therefore, when the error of this expected value is "0.01" or less, it is regarded as the same "unilaterally advantageous pushing order".
That is, in this example, when the error between "E3" and "E4" to "E6" is "0.01" or less, "press order 3" and "press order 4" to "press order 6" There is no relationship of advantage or disadvantage between

here,
E1=E2=A
E3=B
E4=E5=E6=C
As
BA≧0.1
CA≧0.1
0 < CB ≤ 0.01
, compared to "push order 1" and "push order 2", "push order 3" and "push order 4" to "push order 6" are uniformly "unilaterally advantageous push order". be considered to be Here, the case where the expected value of the number of medals obtained based on all roles differs between pushing orders that are unilaterally advantageous has been explained as an example. The same is true when the expected values are different. In this case, if the error in the expected number of medals to be obtained based on all hands in the unilaterally unfavorable pushing order is "0.01" or less, they are uniformly in the "unilaterally unfavorable pushing order". assume there is.
Strictly speaking, the expected value for the number of medals to be obtained based on all hands may differ even if the pushing orders are unilaterally advantageous (disadvantageous) as described above. , is determined not by "expected value of normal push and expected value of irregular push ≤ prescribed number" but by "expected number of medals obtained for each pushing order based on all hands ≤ prescribed number".
For the same reason, when judging whether or not the above condition 3) is satisfied, the expected number of medals to be obtained for each pressing order when winning a small combination group to which the same production group number is assigned is calculated. calculate.

In order to determine whether or not the above condition 3) is satisfied, when calculating the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained for each push order, in order to always hit a high number, for example, biased bell 1 to biased bell 4 It should be noted that when a game is played in the "push order 1" or "push order 2" at the time of winning, a double-card combination is always obtained.

<Example where it is necessary to instruct the pushing order and include it in the instruction-included accessory ratio>
A minor role group A composed of a biased Bell 1 to a biased Bell 4 and a minor role group B composed of a rare role A and a rare role B as a minor role group to which the same performance group number including a biased role is assigned. Suppose there is
Here, the ratio of the set numbers of the minor wins in the minor win group A is
Biased Bell 1: Biased Bell 2: Biased Bell 3: Biased Bell 4
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5
= 1:1:1:1
Since
Probability of winning biased Bell 1 when winning small win group A = Probability of winning biased Bell 2 when winning minor win group A = Biased Bell 3 when winning minor win group A = Probability of winning biased bell 4 when winning small win group A = 1/4
becomes.

Therefore, assuming that the expected number of medals to be won in the push order 1 to push order 6 when winning the small win group A is E1(A) to E6(A), respectively,
E1(A)=2×1/4×4=2
E2(A) = 2 x 1/4 x 4 = 2
E3(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E4(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E5(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E6(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
Since all of E1(A) to E6(A) are equal to or less than the specified number (here, "3"), the above condition 3) is satisfied.
On the other hand, the ratio of the number of small wins in the minor win group B is
Rare role A: Rare role B
= 1/250: 1/250
= 1:1
Since
Probability of winning rare role A when winning minor role group B = Probability of winning rare role B when winning minor role group B = 1/2
becomes.

Let E1(B) to E6(B) be the expected number of medals to be won in push order 1 to push order 6 when winning small win group B, respectively.
E1(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E2(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E3(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E4(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E5(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E6(B)=12×1/2×2=12
As a result, E3(B) to E6(B) are larger than the specified number (here, "3").
Therefore, in this example, when transmitting the effect group numbers of the small winning combination group A and the small winning combination group B, when winning the small winning combination group A, the pressing order is not instructed, and the instructed accessory ratio is not included. However, when winning the small winning combination B, it is necessary to instruct the pushing order and include it in the designated winning combination ratio.

<Example of not specifying the order of pushing and not including it in the ratio of accessories including instructions>
This point will be explained with another example.
In FIG. 105(a), a small combination group C ( Suppose there is a biased role group). The ratio of the set numbers of the minor wins of this minor win group C is
Biased bell 1: Biased bell 2: Biased bell 3: Biased bell 4: Rare role A: Rare role B
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/250: 1/250
= 50:50:50:50:1:1
becomes.
This will
Probability of winning biased bell 1 when winning small win group C = Probability of winning biased bell 2 when winning minor win group C = Biased bell 3 when winning minor win group C = Probability of winning biased bell 4 when winning small win group C = 50/202
becomes,
Probability of winning rare role A when winning minor role group C = Probability of winning rare role B when winning minor role group C = 1/202
becomes.

Therefore, assuming that the expected number of medals to be won in the push order 1 to push order 6 when winning the small win group C is E1(C) to E6(C), respectively,
E1(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≈1.990
E2(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≈1.990
E3(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≈2.594
E4(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≈2.594
E5(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≈2.594
E6(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≈2.594
Therefore, the expected number of medals to be won when winning the small win group C is less than or equal to the specified number ("3" in this case) for all pressing orders, and the above condition 3) is satisfied, so in addition to this If the above conditions 1) and 2) are satisfied, even if the performance group number of the minor role group C is transmitted, the pushing order is not instructed, and it is included in the instructed role ratio. may be omitted.
In this way, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained when winning a small combination group to which the same production group number including a biased combination is assigned is equal to or less than the prescribed number for all the pressing orders. ) is the condition.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the ninth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 46 of the third embodiment. In FIG. 115, step numbers of different processes are underlined with respect to FIG.
In the main process of FIG. 115, after the role lottery process is executed in step S282, the pressing order instruction number is set in step S181 based on the result of this lottery, and the effect group number is set in the next step S182. be done. Others are the same as the processing in FIG.
Although the effect group number setting process is not shown in FIG. 46, this is merely an omission of the effect group number setting process, and does not mean that it is not provided.
Further, in step S283, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed during a non-advantageous zone, and an AT lottery is executed during an advantageous zone and non-AT. Furthermore, during the AT, an AT addition lottery and an AT continuation lottery are executed. However, when the number of bets in the current game is "2", the lottery is not executed.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the pressing order instruction number setting process in step S181 in FIG.
In FIG. 116, in step S191, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is in the advantageous section. Here, for example, in FIG. 33, the value of the advantageous section type flag at address "F061(H)" is determined. When it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S192, and when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous section, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In the next step S192, the condition device number (small combination and replay condition device number) of the game this time is acquired. When the combination lottery process is executed in step S282 of FIG. 115, a condition device number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, so that information is acquired.

Then, in the next step S193, it is determined whether or not a biased combination is won in the game this time. This processing is performed by determining whether or not the conditional device number obtained in step S192 is a conditional device number corresponding to the biased combination. When it is determined that the biased combination is won, the process proceeds to step S194, and when it is determined that the biased combination is not won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S194, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the current game is a game in which the pushing order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor. When it is determined that the game is for displaying the pressing order instruction information, the process proceeds to step S195, and when it is determined that the game is not for displaying the pressing order instruction information, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S195, a pressing order instruction number is obtained. This process is a process of identifying the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the conditional device number obtained in step S192, based on the conditional device number. Next, the process advances to step S196 to save the obtained push order instruction number in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 .
In the next step S197, the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data of the RWM 53. FIG. This storage area corresponds to, for example, address "F011(H)" in FIG. 33 (third embodiment). When the push order instruction number is stored in the obtained number data, in the LED display control (step S2821, FIG. 50) of subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the push order instruction number corresponding to the pushed order instruction number stored in the obtained number data is displayed. Order information is displayed.
Then, in step S198, an output request for the push order instruction number is set, and in the next step S199, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
As described above, the pushing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a game in which a biased combination is won and the pushing order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing effect group number setting processing in step S182 in FIG. Note that this example is an example in which the effect group number is not selected and not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a game in which a biased combination is won.
In FIG. 117, in step S201, the condition device number of the current game is obtained. This process is similar to that of step S192 in FIG. 116 described above. In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not a biased combination has been won in the game this time. This process is the same as the process of step S193 in FIG. 116 described above. Then, when it is determined that the winning of the biased hand is determined, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the winning of the biased hand is not determined, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, the main control board 50 acquires the effect group number corresponding to the conditional device number of the current game based on the conditional device number acquired in step S201. Next, in step S204, the obtained effect group number is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM53.
Then, in step S205, an effect group number output request is set, and in the next step S206, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, in this example, the effect group number is neither saved nor transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when a biased combination is won. On the other hand, in cases other than winning of a biased role (that is, including the case of non-winning of a role), the effect group number is saved and transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Also, the flow in FIG. 117 is executed regardless of whether it is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section.
In this example, since the process of saving the effect group number is not executed when the biased combination is won, it is not necessary to provide the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased combination. Alternatively, an effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role is prepared, and when the biased role is won, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, but the effect group is stored in the sub-control board 80. - 特許庁You may choose not to send your number.
However, as described above, when the expected number of medals to be obtained per game is equal to or less than the prescribed number "3", the interpretation is adopted that even if the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, it does not correspond to the instruction. If so, it is possible to select the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased hand and transmit it to the sub-control board 80 when the biased hand is won. In this case, the process of step S202 becomes unnecessary.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the relationship between the biased hand that is the winning hand and the instruction monitor and image display in the ninth embodiment.
When a biased hand is won during a non-advantageous section, the instruction monitor is not displayed. In particular, the instruction monitor is not displayed even when a rare combination is won. This is because the AT lottery is not executed even if a rare combination is won in the non-advantageous section. Further, since the instruction monitor is not displayed, the image display regarding the pressing order is not performed either.
On the other hand, in the advantageous section, the indication monitor display and the like differ depending on whether the vehicle is non-AT or AT.
Even if a biased bell is won during an advantageous section and non-AT, the indication monitor is off. Also, the image display regarding the pressing order is not performed.
On the other hand, in a game in which a biased bell is won during an advantageous section and AT, the instruction monitor is turned on to display pushing order instruction information corresponding to the biased bell that has been won. Further, the image display device 23 displays the order of pressing the correct answer.

Also, when a rare combination is won during an advantageous section and non-AT, an instruction monitor is turned on to display pushing order instruction information corresponding to forward pushing. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image of "1--" indicating the left first stop as the correct pressing order. Here, when the rare combination is won, the expected number of medals to be obtained in the game is higher when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing than when the stop switch 42 is pressed normally. However, since forward pressing is more advantageous in terms of the total ball output (FIG. 105(b)), forward pressing corresponding to the advantageous pressing order is reported even for non-AT players.
Also, when winning a rare combination during an advantageous section and AT, an instruction monitor is turned on, and pushing order instruction information corresponding to irregular pushing is displayed. Since the AT lottery is not performed during the AT, an irregular push with a high expected number of medals to be obtained in the game is displayed. Further, the image display device 23 displays images of irregular presses as the order of correct presses. Therefore, when a rare combination is won in an advantageous section, the indication monitor is displayed for both non-AT and AT, and the correct pressing order is displayed on the image display device 23, but the displayed pressing order is different. .

Therefore, in step S194 of FIG. 116, it is judged as "No" when the biased bell is won during the non-AT, but is judged as "Yes" when the rare combination is won during the non-AT. It should be noted that when winning a biased bell or rare combination during AT, it is judged as "Yes".
Furthermore, when a rare combination is won, it is determined "Yes" in step S194, and the process proceeds to step S195, if it is not AT, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the forward pushing is acquired, and if it is AT, A pressing order instruction number corresponding to irregular pressing is obtained.

Next, temporary storage processing in the ninth embodiment will be described. Two types of methods (temporary storage processing 1 and temporary storage processing 2) will be described below. In addition, during non-CZ and during CZ (gaming state in which AT winning expectation is higher than non-CZ) described below, both are advantageous sections.
1. First method (temporary storage process 1)
In the ninth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, when the start switch 41 is operated, the combination lottery process (step S282) is performed. The lottery for AT shall include the lottery for CZ. And the lottery for AT is not limited to one, and usually a plurality of kinds of lotteries are executed.
The AT lottery may be referred to as "instruction lottery", "ball output performance lottery", or the like.

In the ninth embodiment, as a lottery for AT in non-CZ,
1) AT lottery 2) CZ lottery 3) Stage lottery shall be executed. It should be noted that CZ and AT winning expectations are different for each stage (winning probability is low probability, high probability, etc.).
Also, as a lottery for AT in CZ,
4) AT lottery 5) CZ counter 1 lottery 6) CZ counter 2 lottery shall be executed.
In the ninth embodiment, points are given to the player during the CZ, and the AT lottery is preferentially treated or the AT is determined according to the accumulated points. The lottery for the CZ counter 1 is a lottery for the number of points to be given during the CZ.
Further, in the ninth embodiment, the initial number of games of CZ is set to a predetermined value, and a lottery of CZ counter 2 is performed as a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games of CZ to CZ.

In the ninth embodiment, after executing the lottery for AT as described above, the lottery result is temporarily stored, and when the conditions for permanent storage are satisfied, the temporarily stored information is permanently stored.
As temporary storage means, a temporary storage area 1, a temporary storage area 2, and a temporary storage area 3 are provided in the storage area of the RWM 53. FIG.
Then, when the lotteries 1) to 3) described above are executed during the non-CZ, the lottery results are stored in the temporary storage area 1, the temporary storage area 2, and the temporary storage area 3, respectively.
On the other hand, when the lotteries 4) to 6) described above are executed during CZ, the lottery results are stored in the temporary storage area 1, the temporary storage area 2, and the temporary storage area 3, respectively.
In other words, different lottery results are stored in the temporary storage area 1, the temporary storage area 2, and the temporary storage area 3 depending on whether it is in non-CZ or in CZ.

The main control board 50 also transmits the information stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives such information, it can output an effect corresponding to the information.
Here, the sub-control board 80 cannot determine which information is the information stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 only by receiving the information.
On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 can determine whether the current game state is non-CZ or CZ based on other commands transmitted from the main control board 50 .
Therefore, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the received information is the AT lottery result during non-CZ, the CZ lottery, based on whether or not the CZ is in progress and the information stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3. As a result, whether it is a stage lottery result, or whether it is an AT lottery result, a CZ counter 1 lottery result, or a CZ counter 2 lottery result in CZ is determined, and a performance corresponding to each lottery result can be output.

Also, as the main storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50,
1) Main storage area for storing AT lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 1")
2) Main storage area for storing CZ lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 2")
3) Main storage area for storing stage lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 3")
4) Main storage area for storing lottery results of CZ counter 1 (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 4")
5) Main storage area for storing lottery results of CZ counter 2 (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 5")
are provided respectively.
In the ninth embodiment, when the biased combination is won, the above lotteries 1) to 3) or 4) to 6) are executed, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pressing, the lottery result is reflected, When the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pushing order, the lottery result is cleared (discarded) (not reflected).

119 and 120 are flowcharts showing the temporary storage process 1 described above. FIG. 120 is a flowchart following FIG. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 119 and 120, it is assumed that the section is an advantageous section and non-AT (a state in which an AT is drawn).
In FIG. 119, at step S312, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S313. Incidentally, when it is determined in step S312 that the start switch 41 has been operated, a winning lottery is executed, but the process is omitted in this flowchart.
In the next step S313, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is in CZ. When it is determined that it is not in CZ, the process proceeds to step S314, and when it is determined that it is in CZ, the process proceeds to step S320.
In the example shown in FIG. 33, an AT flag is provided, but in addition to this AT flag, a CZ flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 for determining whether or not the current gaming state is CZ. (not shown in FIG. 33). Then, based on the value of this CZ flag, it is determined whether or not the current game is in CZ.

In step S314, the main control board 50 draws lots to decide whether or not to execute AT. Then, in step S315, the result of the lottery in step S314 is stored in the temporary storage area 1 (temporary storage).
In the next step S316, the main control board 50 draws lots to decide whether or not to execute CZ. Then, in step S317, the result of the lottery in step S316 is stored in the temporary storage area 2 (temporary storage).
In the next step S318, the main control board 50 executes a stage lottery. Here, in the ninth embodiment, in the advantageous section and non-AT, there are multiple stages with different winning expectations for CZ and AT, and a lottery is performed to determine which stage to stay based on the role lottery result. . For example, there are a stage with a low AT winning expectation, a high AT winning expectation, a high CZ winning expectation, and the like.
Next, proceeding to step S319, the lottery result of step S318 is stored in the temporary storage area 3 (temporary storage). Then, the process proceeds to step S326.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S313 that CZ is in progress and the process proceeds to step S320, the main control board 50 executes an AT lottery. This lottery is the same as the lottery in step S314. Then, in step S321, the lottery result of step S320 is stored in the temporary storage area 1 (temporary storage). This process is also the same as step S315.

In the next step S322, the main control board 50 executes the CZ counter 1 lottery. Next, proceeding to step S323, the lottery result of step S322 is stored in the temporary storage area 2 (temporary storage).
In the next step S324, the main control board 50 executes the CZ counter 2 lottery. Next, proceeding to step S325, the lottery result of step S324 is stored in the temporary storage area 3 (temporary storage). Then, the process proceeds to step S326.

At step S 326 , the main control board 50 transmits the information of the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80 . This process is a process of executing the above-described control command set 1 and the like.
As described above, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for AT is executed, stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3, and the result of the lottery is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, so that the sub-control board 80 receives this information. , it is possible to output the effect at the start of the game (before the stop switch 42 is operated).
Next, proceeding to step S327, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the first (first) stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S328. In step S328, the push order information is updated.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, pressing order information is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 . The pressing order information is 1-byte data consisting of "aabbcc00(B)".
"aa": value of the first (first operated) stop switch 42 "bb": value of the second (second operated) stop switch 42 "cc": third (third operated) ) is the value of the stop switch 42.
moreover,
Value corresponding to left stop switch 42: 01 (B)
Value corresponding to middle stop switch 42: 10 (B)
Value corresponding to right stop switch 42: 11 (B)
and
Therefore, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of left, middle, right, the pressing order information is
01000000 (B): Left first stop ↓
01100000 (B): Middle second stop ↓
01101100 (B): When the right third stop is updated in this order.
Therefore, in step S228, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the pressing order information is updated to "01000000 (B)". Alternatively, for example, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the push order information is updated to "10000000 (B)".

Next, proceeding to step S329, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated in the recommended pressing order (forward pressing). This judgment is made based on the above-described push order information. Here, "01000000 (B)" is provided as definition data for determining whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated in the recommended pressing order (forward pressing). This definition data has the same value as the pressing order information when the left stop switch 42 is first operated.
Then, the value of the definition data is subtracted from the value of the pushing order information updated in step S328, and it is determined whether or not the result is "0". If the subtraction result becomes "0", it is determined that the left stop switch 42 has been operated first.
In addition to the subtraction, it may be determined whether or not the pushing order information updated in step S328 and the definition data have the same value. ), and if the result of the calculation is "0", it can be determined that both have the same value.

for example,
Push order information: 01000000 (B) (left stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
, "00000000 (B)" is obtained by "XORing" both. Since the calculation result is “0”, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is the left stop switch 42 .
on the other hand,
Push order information: 10000000 (B) (the middle stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
, then "11000000 (B)" is obtained by "XORing" both. Since the calculation result is not “0”, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is not the left stop switch 42 .

When it is determined in step S329 that it is the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S331 of FIG. 120, and when it is determined that it is not the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S330.
In step S330, the main control board 50 transmits the first stop information to the sub control board 80, and proceeds to the next step S331. The information to be transmitted here is information corresponding to the operation in the non-recommended pressing order. On the other hand, the main control board 50 does not transmit the first stop information to the sub control board 80 when operated in the recommended pressing order. When receiving the first stop information, the sub-control board 80 can determine that the operation has been performed in the non-recommended pressing order, and therefore controls to display the recommended image.

At step S331, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S332.
In step S332, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information. For example, when the first stop switch 42 is on the left, the pressing order information is "01000000 (B)". update to.
On the other hand, for example, when the first stop switch 42 is in the middle position, the pressing order information is "10000000 (B)". )”.

Next, proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S334.
In step S334, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information. For example, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of left, center, right, the push order information is updated from "01100000(B)" to "01101100(B)".
On the other hand, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of middle, right, left, for example, the push order information is updated from "10110000(B)" to "10110100(B)".

Next, proceeding to step S335, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased combination has been won in the game this time. As described in the first embodiment, when a lottery for a winning combination is performed, the lottery result is stored in the "small winning combination and replay condition device number" provided in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, so this data is read. , it is determined whether or not one of the biased roles has been won.
When it is determined in step S335 that the biased hand has been won, the process proceeds to step S336, and when it is determined that the biased role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S345.

At step S336, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel identification flag. Here, the "first stop reel specific flag" is a flag for determining which reel 31 the first stop reel 31 (synonymous with the first stop switch 42) is. This is a flag for determining whether or not 42 has been operated. Since only the information of the first stop switch 42 is stored in the pressing order information updated at the time of step S328, it is immediately possible to determine which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 (that is, the first reel 31). can be judged. On the other hand, since the pushing order information updated at the time of step S334 includes the information of the three stop switches 42, it is not possible to determine which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 without calculating. Can not. Therefore, a first stop reel identification flag for determining which reel 31 the first stop reel 31 is is generated.

In order to generate the first stop reel specific flag, the values of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 may be masked with respect to the pushing order information updated at step S334.
For example, if the masking data is "11000000(B)", and the pressing order information "aabbcc00(B)" and the masking data "11000000(B)" are ANDed, the first stop reel identification flag "aa000000" is obtained. (B)” is generated.
In the next step S337, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pressing order of the current game is the recommended pressing order. This determination is the same as step S329. The first stop reel identification flag "aa000000(B)" generated in step S336 and the definition data "01000000(B)" are subjected to "XOR" operation, and if the operation result is "0", it is judged to be the recommended pressing order. If the calculation result is not "0", it is determined that the pushing order is not recommended.

When it is determined in step S337 that the recommended pressing order is followed, the process proceeds to step S338, and when it is determined that the recommended pressing order is not followed, the process proceeds to step S345.
At step S338, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the current game is in CZ, and when it determines that it is not in CZ, it proceeds to step S339, and when it determines that it is in CZ, it proceeds to step S342. .
In step S339, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 (main storage).
In the next step S340, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 2 (main storage).
In the next step S341, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 3 (main storage).
Then, the process proceeds to step S345.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S338 that CZ is in progress and the process proceeds to step S342, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 (main storage).
In the next step S343, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 4 (main storage).
In the next step S344, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 5 (main storage).
Then, the process proceeds to step S345.

In step S 345 , the main control board 50 transmits the information stored in main storage areas 1 to 3 or main storage areas 1 , 4 and 5 to the sub control board 80 . As a result, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the updated information in this storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. On the other hand, when the biased hand is won and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended order of pressing, the information in the main storage area is not updated, so the same information as the information transmitted in the previous game is sub-set. It is sent to the control board 80 .

Further, the sub-control board 80 judges whether or not the transmitted information of the main storage areas 1 to 3 or the main storage areas 1, 4, and 5 and whether or not the CZ is in progress. It determines what the information is, and controls the output of the presentation based on the result.
Next, proceeding to step S346, the main control board 50 clears the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 (to "0"). In the next step S347, the main control board 50 clears the push order information (sets it to "0"). Furthermore, in the next step S348, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel identification flag (sets it to "0"). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing another example of temporary storage processing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 121, step numbers that differ from the processing in FIG. 120 are underlined.
Although not shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, whether or not it is the recommended pressing order is performed a plurality of times (for example, about five times) after the process of step S337. Then, if the "XOR" operation of the first stop reel specifying flag and the definition data is performed each time as shown in step S337, the program capacity increases. Therefore, after performing the determination process of step S337, when it is the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S351 to store "0" as the irregular game determination data, and when it is not the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S352 and stores it as the irregular game determination data. "1" is memorized. Then, whether or not it is the recommended pressing order after step S337 is determined by determining whether or not the irregular game determination data is "0". For example, when "1" is subtracted from the irregular game judgment data, and the zero flag becomes "1", it can be judged that the irregular game judgment data (before subtraction) is "1" (not the recommended pushing order). becomes.
As a result, it is possible to simplify and speed up the process of judging whether or not it is the recommended pressing order.
Also, at the end of this process, a process of clearing (setting to "0") the irregular game determination data is executed in step S353.

2. Second method (temporary storage process 2)
In this example, it is assumed that three types of count values A, B, and C are selected as a lottery for AT during an advantageous section and non-AT period. Then, the lottery result of each count value is added to the count value for each game and the previous game.
For example, the count values A, B, and C up to the previous game are
Count value A=X
Count value B=Y
Count value C=Z
and
The lottery results of the count values A, B, and C in this game are
count value A=a
count value B=b
count value C=c
, when the count values A, B, and C in this game are updated,
Count value A=X+a
count value B=Y+b
count value C=Z+c
becomes.

Then, for example, when the count value A reaches the first value, the AT lottery is executed, when the count value B reaches the second value, it is decided to execute the AT, or when the count value C reaches When it reaches the third value, it shifts to CZ.
In addition, the reflection of the lottery result of the count value (addition of each count value) in the game this time is limited to when the biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order. In other cases, the lottery result of the count value in the game this time is not reflected.
Furthermore, unlike the first method, in the second method, the temporary storage area and the main storage area correspond one-to-one. therefore,
Temporary storage area 1 and main storage area 1 for storing count value A
Temporary storage area 2 and main storage area 2 for storing count value B
Temporary storage area 3 and main storage area 3 for storing count value C
Prepare.
Here, the above three types of temporary storage areas and main storage areas are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. area is provided. So in practice,
Temporary storage area 4 and main storage area 4 for storing count value D
Temporary storage area 5 and main storage area 5 for storing count value E
:
Prepare.

122 and 123 are flowcharts showing the second temporary storage process described above. FIG. 123 is a flowchart following FIG.
In FIG. 122, at step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S363. Incidentally, when the start switch 41 is operated, the combination lottery process is executed.
In step S 363 , the main control board 50 copies the value (count value A) of the main storage area 1 to the temporary storage area 1 . In the next step S364, the main control board 50 copies the value of the main storage area 2 (count value B) to the temporary storage area 2. FIG. Furthermore, in the next step S365, the main control board 50 copies the value (count value C) of the main storage area 3 to the temporary storage area 3. FIG.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the value of the temporary storage area "N" (N=1, 2, 3) and the value of the main storage area "N" are the same.

At the next step S366, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value A. FIG. The lottery for the count value A, the lottery for the count value B and the lottery for the count value C, which will be described later, are executed based on the combination lottery results.
In the next step S367, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value A to the temporary storage area 1. FIG. For example, when the lottery result of count value A is "a" and the value of temporary storage area 1 is "X", the value of temporary storage area 1 is updated to "X+a".
In the next step S368, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value B. FIG. Next, proceeding to step S369, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value B to the temporary storage area 2. FIG.
In the next step S370, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value C. FIG. Next, proceeding to step S371, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value C to the temporary storage area 3.

Next, proceeding to step S 372 , the main control board 50 transmits the information of the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80 . This process is a process of executing the above-described control command set 1 and the like.
As described above, when the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery results of the count values A to C are transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Based on this information, the sub-control board 80, when the game starts (when the stop switch 42 is It is possible to output the effect before being operated).
Next, proceeding to step S373, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the first (first) stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S374. In step S374, similarly to the temporary storage process 1, the pressing order information ("aa000000 (B)") corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is stored.

Next, proceeding to step S375 in FIG. 123, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switches 42 have been operated in the recommended pressing order (whether or not the left stop switch 42 has been operated first). This process is determined based on the above-mentioned push order information. In this process, similarly to the temporary storage process 1, the value of the definition data is subtracted from the value of the push order information, and it is determined whether or not the result is "0".
When it is determined in step S375 that the recommended pressing order is followed, the process proceeds to step S377, and when it is determined that the recommended pressing order is not followed, the process proceeds to step S376.
In step S376, the main control board 50 transmits the first stop information to the sub control board 80, and proceeds to step S377. The information to be transmitted here is information corresponding to the operation in the non-recommended pressing order. When receiving the first stop information, the sub-control board 80 can determine that the operation has been performed in the non-recommended pressing order, and therefore controls to display the recommended image.

At step S377, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S378.
In step S378, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42. FIG.
Next, proceeding to step S379, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S380.
In step S380, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch .
Next, proceeding to step S381, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased combination has been won in the game this time. In the same manner as described above, based on the "minor combination and replay condition device number" stored in the RWM 53, it is determined whether or not any biased combination has been won.
When it is determined in step S381 that the biased hand has been won, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the biased role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S387.

At step S382, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel specific flag. As in the temporary storage process 1, the generation of the first stop reel identification flag is performed by ANDing the pushing order information updated at the time of step S380 and the masking data to generate the first stop reel identification flag " aa000000(B)”.
In the next step S383, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pushing order of the current game is the recommended pushing order. "XOR" operation is performed on the first stop reel specific flag "aa000000 (B)" and the definition data "01000000 (B)". If it is not "0", it is determined that the pushing order is not recommended.
When it is determined that the order of pressing is the recommended order, the process proceeds to step S384, and when it is determined that the order of pressing is not the recommended order, the process proceeds to step S387.
In step S<b>384 , the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 .
In the next step S385, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 2. FIG.
In the next step S<b>386 , the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 3 .
Then, the process proceeds to step S387.

At step S 387 , the main control board 50 transmits the values stored in main storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80 . Thus, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the updated value stored in this storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. On the other hand, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended order of pushing, the information stored in the main storage area is not updated, so the main storage area transmitted in the previous game is not updated. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
Next, proceeding to step S388, the main control board 50 clears the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 (to "0"). In the next step S389, the main control board 50 clears the push order information (sets it to "0"). Furthermore, in the next step S390, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel identification flag (sets it to "0"). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

According to the temporary storage process 1 and the temporary storage process 2 described above, the lottery result when the start switch 41 is operated can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 before it is determined whether or not it is the recommended pressing order. On the side of 80, it becomes possible to execute an effect at the start of the game based on these lottery results.
However, it is necessary to provide a storage area for temporary storage.
Also, after the stoppage, it is necessary to determine whether or not a biased combination has been won, and whether or not it is in the recommended pushing order.
Furthermore, in the method of temporary storage processing 1, the storage area for temporary storage is shared, so the storage area for temporary storage can be minimized. However, on the sub-control board 80 side, it is not possible to determine what the information is just by transmitting the information stored in the temporary storage area, so a process for determining what the information is is required.
Further, in the method of the temporary storage process 1, once stored in the temporary storage area, other lottery results cannot be stored in the temporary storage area in the game.
On the other hand, in the method of the temporary storage process 2, the information to be stored can be stored in one-to-one correspondence between the temporary storage and the permanent storage. However, it is necessary to provide as many temporary storage areas and permanent storage areas as the number to be stored.

In the example of FIG. 123, similarly to FIG. 121, when it is determined in step S383 that it is the recommended pressing order (similar to step S351 in FIG. 121), the irregular game determination data is set to "0". , when it is determined that it is not the recommended pressing order (similar to step S352 in FIG. 121), the irregular game determination data may be set to "1".
In this case, after step S390, the irregular game determination data is cleared (similarly to step S353 in FIG. 121).

Although the ninth embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the non-recommended pressing order (one-sidedly advantageous pressing order) is set to the middle first stop or the right first stop, which are irregular pressings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the middle first stop or only the right first stop may be used. Furthermore, as the non-recommended pushing order (one-sidedly advantageous pushing order), it is possible to set only the left first stop or a pushing order including the left first stop. For example, middle first stop is the recommended push order, and left first stop and right first stop are the non-recommended push order.
Further, the recommended pressing order is not limited to specifying only the first stop. In this case, it is preferable that the recommended image is displayed at the second stop (right) when the operation is made to "center left and right".

(2) In the above embodiment, a recommended image can be displayed in order to inform the player that the push order is not the recommended push order (non-recommended push order). However, the display method for informing the player that the pushing order is not the recommended one is not limited to displaying the recommended image. For example, instead of displaying a new recommended image, the effect image may be changed until then. For example, by darkening the screen (reducing the visibility of the image), the player may be notified that the pressing order for the current game is not the recommended pressing order.
In addition, in the case where the player is notified that it is not the recommended push order by turning the screen dark, if there is a discrepancy between the display content and the internal state, the visibility of the display content may be greatly reduced. Although there is no problem, it is preferable to make the displayed content completely invisible.
In addition, it is also possible to indicate that the recommended pressing order is not the same by making the lighting and blinking patterns of the effect lamps 21 provided in the gaming machine (slot machine 10) unique.
Furthermore, the sound output from the speaker 22 may be used to notify that the recommended pressing order is not followed.

(3) Various settings can be made for the display area of the recommended image. For example, the first method is to display the recommended image so as to cover the entire image display area of the image display device 23 .
Secondly, the recommended image is displayed in a part of the image display area of the image display device 23 .
However, when displaying the recommended image, if there is a discrepancy between the display content and the internal state, it is preferable to display the recommended image so that the display content (the part including the discrepancy display) is hidden. .

(4) In the ninth embodiment, the pressing order of the stop switches 42 is determined at the time of the first stop, and the recommended pressing order is determined when the pressing is normal. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not it is the recommended pressing order based on the stop result. In this case, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is not determined.
In addition, when judging whether or not the recommended pushing order is based on the stop roll, the stopping roll differs between the recommended pushing order and the non-recommended pushing order even if the winning combination is the same (same winning flag). The reel 31 is controlled to be stopped as described above.
However, when judging the recommended pushing order based on the stop result, it is difficult to make that judgment unless all the reels 31 are stopped. Therefore, the recommended image is displayed when it is determined that the stop roll is based on the non-recommended pressing order, by looking at the stop roll during the full stop.
Therefore, when the recommended image is displayed at the first stop time, it is preferable to determine whether or not the stop switch 42 is pressed according to the recommended pressing order based on the pressing order.

(5) The biased bell shown in FIG. 105 is actually a small combination with four options for pressing order. However, it is also possible to further increase the number of choices according to the pressing order and color.
For example, by setting the pressing order to 4 options as described above and further setting the symbol colors of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 to 2 options (the correct symbol color is highlighted), the correct symbol color is selected. 4 options. As a result, the biased bell has "four selections of pressing order x four choices of color = 16 choices in total" (hereinafter referred to as "16-selection biased bell").
In this case, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, when the bell is pressed in the forward direction, the one-card hand is awarded with "PB=1". On the other hand, when a 16-choice biased bell is won, if the order of pressing is correct and the color is correct, a combination of 15 cards can be won with "PB=1".

Furthermore, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, in the case of an irregular push and other than the correct order of pushing and the correct color, it is possible to configure such that one piece wins or loses (0 pieces). mentioned.
Then, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, if an irregular press is made arbitrarily, 15 prizes will be won with a probability of "1/16", and 1 prize will be won with a probability of "7.5/16". When configured to drop (0) with a probability of "7.5/16", the base can be lowered further than when the biased bell shown in FIG. 105 is adopted, and medals are paid out during AT number can be increased.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, a rare combination having a unilaterally advantageous pressing order is provided, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order when the rare combination is won, an AT lottery is executed. However, this is not the only option, and the rare role may be played in any order, like the watermelon.
Also, when the biased bell is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the AT lottery is executed (or the AT lottery is given preferential treatment), and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the AT. The lottery may not be executed (or the AT lottery may be treated coldly).
(7) In the case of the advantageous section and non-AT, when operating in the recommended pressing order, the number of ceiling games and the number of periodic games (described later) are updated every game, but when operating in the non-recommended pressing order, For example, the number of ceiling games and the number of periodic games are not updated regardless of the winning combination.
Here, the "periodic number of games" means, for example, an AT lottery for each predetermined number of games played (for example, "100").
Incidentally, in the game in which the winning order is not required, the number of ceiling games and the number of periodic games may or may not be updated.

(8) In the case of the advantageous section and non-AT, when the operation is performed in the non-recommended pressing order in the game in which the pressing order does not matter, the recommended image is displayed. Here, when an AT lottery etc. is executed in a game in which the pushing order does not matter, if the operation is performed in a non-recommended pushing order, whether the AT lottery etc. is executed or not (the lottery result of the AT lottery etc. when disabled).
Since the expected value does not change depending on the pressing order, the AT lottery or the like can be executed in the game in which the pressing order does not matter even if the operation is performed in the non-recommended pressing order. It is possible. As a result, even if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order in a game in which the pressing order is won, the result of the AT lottery or the like is reflected in the effect image after the display of the recommended image ends. Therefore, the player will not be discouraged. At the same time, by displaying the recommended image, it is possible to inform the player of the recommended pressing order in the advantageous section and non-AT.
On the other hand, when the operation is performed in the non-recommended pushing order in the game in which the pushing order is won, the display of the recommended image ends when the AT lottery etc. is not executed (the lottery result of the AT lottery etc. is invalidated). Since the results of the AT lottery etc. are not reflected later, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the disadvantage of operating in the non-recommended pressing order, and to call attention to the player. Become.

(9) In the ninth embodiment (including modifications), the slot machine 10 was taken as an example of a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to casino machines and sealed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), for example. can.
(10) The first to ninth embodiments (including modifications) are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination with other embodiments as appropriate.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment includes a medal selector 110 for selecting the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47, a chute member 120 for guiding the medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, It relates to a slot machine 10 having a return member 130 for guiding a medal M whose insertion is not permitted by a medal selector 110 to a medal receiving tray 19.例文帳に追加

The tenth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 124 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment.
125, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, a setting change (reset) switch 153, a push button 86, and a cross key 87 are added to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 124, the slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front and a front door 12 attached to cover the opening of the cabinet 13 .
The cabinet 13 is configured in a box shape with an open front by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a top plate 13c, a right side plate and a left side plate (not shown).
Furthermore, the front door 12 is attached to the cabinet 13 so as to cover the front opening of the cabinet 13 .

The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are confirmed, when an error occurs, when medals are supplied, and the like.
Specifically, the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 are attached via hinges (not shown).
A locking device (not shown) is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player).

Furthermore, a door key insertion opening (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the locking device. The door key insertion opening is a portion into which a door key for operating the locking device is inserted.
With the front door 12 closed and locked, inserting the door key into the door key insertion slot and turning the door key clockwise in this state unlocks the door. Then, when the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates around the hinge and the front door 12 is opened.

A door switch 17 (FIG. 125) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 . The door switch 17 is turned off when the front door 12 is closed, and is turned on when the front door 12 is opened.
Furthermore, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 125).
When the door switch 17 is off, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed, and when the door switch 17 is on, the front door 12 is open. It is configured to determine

A display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12 . The display window 18 is configured to be positioned in front of the pattern display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. Through the display window 18, the three reels 31 included in the pattern display device 14 can be viewed.
In addition, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, an adjustment switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are provided below the display window 18 on the front surface of the front door 12 (the surface facing the player). there is The medal slot 47 is a part into which the player inserts the medals M when betting or crediting the medals M. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, a medal payout port 16 and a medal tray 19 for receiving the medals M discharged from the medal payout port 16 are provided at the lower front portion of the front door 12 . The medal payout port 16 is an opening through which the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 and the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 pass.
A medal selector for selecting the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 is provided on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite to the side facing the player) at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. 110 is provided.

Specifically, a selector base 113 (FIG. 126) is fixed at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the rear surface of the front door 12, and the medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113. .
The selector base 113 is for detachably holding the medal selector 110, and is formed by bending sheet metal. is fixed with The medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113 .

Furthermore, at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110 on the rear surface of the front door 12, a chute member 120 for guiding the medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35 is provided.
Furthermore, at a position corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16 on the back side of the front door 12, the medals M prohibited to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and the medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 are provided. A return member 130 for guiding the medal M to the medal receiving tray 19 is provided.

In addition, a medal payout device 15 is arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). The medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing the medals M, a hopper motor 36 (FIG. 125) driven when dispensing the medals M stored in the hopper 35, and the medals dispensed from the hopper 35. A payout sensor 37 (FIG. 125) for detecting M is provided.

The hopper 35 is for storing the medals M. Further, the upper part of the hopper 35 is provided with a storage receiving port 35a, which is an opening for receiving the medals M guided by the chute member 120. As shown in FIG. The storage receiving port 35a opens downward from the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121).
As described in the first embodiment, the payout sensor 37 is composed of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b (FIG. 125) arranged at a predetermined interval.
When the medal M is paid out, a predetermined moving member (not shown) is moved by the medal M, and the movement of the predetermined moving member turns on/off the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b.

125, the hopper motor 36 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52, and the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. It is electrically connected to the control board 50 .
Then, the main control board 50 drives the hopper motor 36 when the medals M are to be paid out from the medal payout device 15 .
Further, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medals M have been paid out normally, based on whether or not the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

In FIG. 124, a power supply unit (not shown) is arranged below the inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The power supply unit includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80, etc., a power switch 11 (Fig. 125) that is operated when turning on/off the power, and a setting changer. A setting key switch 152 (FIG. 125) that is operated when shifting to a state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 (FIG. 125) that is operated when changing a setting value and canceling an error. and

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when turning on/off the power.
Turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning on the power", "turning on the power", or "resuming the supply of power".
Also, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is operated when transitioning to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed.
When the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion opening 151 (Fig. 125) and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on. A switch 152 is configured to be turned off.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves both as the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 .
Also, the setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the setting value in the setting change state.
Furthermore, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to cancel the error notification after removing the cause of the error.
In this manner, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as the setting change switch 153 in the setting change state, and functions as the reset switch 153 in error notification.

Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153", "setting change switch 153", or "reset switch 153".
In addition, regarding various switches such as the setting change (reset) switch 153, turning on is referred to as "operating", turning on is referred to as "operating", and turning off is referred to as "operating". This is sometimes referred to as "non-manipulated".
Although the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are used in common in the tenth embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

125, a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. As shown in FIG.
When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on, the setting change state is entered, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. It is

Further, when the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 mounted on the main control board 50 . Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value is changed ("1" is added) each time the setting change switch 153 is operated. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state is terminated and the set value display LED 73 is extinguished. After the start switch 41 is operated, even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value cannot be changed.

Also, the set value is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Each time the setting change switch 153 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is changed and the changed setting value is stored (overwritten) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
In the setting change state, merely by operating the setting change switch 153, the changed setting value is not stored (overwritten) in the predetermined address of the RWM 53, and the setting value is determined by operating the start switch 41. At this time, The fixed setting value may be stored (overwritten) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Further, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 although the setting value cannot be changed. When the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is terminated and the setting value display LED 73 is extinguished.

Next, referring to FIGS. 126 to 134, the medal selector 110, chute member 120 and return member 130 will be described in more detail.
126 is a diagram showing the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130, and is a diagram for explaining the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. FIG.
FIG. 127 is obtained by adding a hopper 35 to FIG. 126, and is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the hopper 35. FIG.

FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the thickness of the medal M. FIG.
FIG. 129 is a diagram explaining the relationship between the dimensions of each part of the chute member 120 and the diameter and radius of the medal M. FIG.
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between one medal M that has entered the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and another medal M heading from the medal selector 110 to the chute member 120. FIG.

FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the width of the medal guide passage 121 of the chute member 120 and the dimensions of each part of the screw 127 that fixes the chute member 120. FIG.
FIG. 132 illustrates an example in which neither the return acceptance opening 131 nor the upper edge 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. FIG.

FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining an example in which a closing member 140 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and a part of the return acceptance opening 131 is blocked by this closing member 140. is.
FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example in which part of the return acceptance opening 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 126, the medal selector 110 has a medal passage 111 through which medals inserted from the medal slot 47 pass. The medal passage 111 is formed in a substantially L shape, and in FIG. 126, a vertical portion 111a extending substantially vertically downward from the left side of the upper surface of the medal selector 110, and a gently slanted downward right direction from the lower end of the vertical portion 111a. and an inclined portion 111b that inclines to reach the lower right side surface of the medal selector 110. As shown in FIG. An entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the medal selector 110, and an exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided on the lower right side of the medal selector 110.

When the medal selector 110 is attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is positioned vertically below the medal slot 47. As shown in FIG. The medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is configured to be sent to the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 126, a blocker 45 for permitting/not permitting insertion of medals M is provided at an intermediate position of the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111. , an insertion sensor 44 capable of detecting medals M passing through the medal passage 111 is provided on the downstream side of the blocker 45 .

The blocker 45 permits/denies the insertion of medals M, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52 (FIG. 125).
During the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the winning combination ends, the payout of the medals M corresponding to the winning combination is completed), the main control board 50 controls the number of medals M. Control blocker 45 to disallow entry.

In addition, when the prescribed number of medals M have already been betted and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, it is not possible to bet or credit any more medals M. Control blocker 45 to disallow entry.
On the other hand, when the game is not played (after the payout of the medals M is completed and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started), the number of bets on the medals M has not reached the specified number, or the number of credits has reached the upper limit. When not reached, the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 so as to permit the medal M to be inserted.

When the insertion of medals M is not permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to remove the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 and drop it downward. . Also, the medals M dropped downward from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 are guided by the return member 130, discharged from the medal payout port 16, and stored in the medal tray 19.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the insertion of the medals M is permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to guide the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. . Also, the medal M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b (both collectively referred to as the "insertion sensor 44" hereinafter), and exits the medal passage 111. 111 d, guided by chute member 120 and stored in hopper 35 .

The insertion sensor 44 is for detecting the medal M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, and as shown in FIG. and an input sensor 44b. The input sensor 44a is arranged on the upstream side, and the input sensor 44b is arranged on the downstream side. The input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 125).

The medal M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 is first detected by the upstream insertion sensor 44a and then detected by the downstream insertion sensor 44b.
Specifically, when the medal M is guided to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, first, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side detects the medal M (turns from off to on).
Further, when the medal M flows down the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44b on the downstream side next detects the medal M (turns from off to on).

Further, when the medal M flows down the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side stops detecting the medal M (turns off from on).
Further, when the medal M flows down the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44b on the downstream side stops detecting the medal M (turns off from on).
Then, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the medal M has normally passed through the medal passage 111 based on whether or not the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range. do.

The chute member 120 guides the medal M that has been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and is discharged from the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 to the hopper 35 arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13. It is provided at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110 on the rear surface of the door 12 .

Also, the chute member 120 has a medal guiding passage 121 for guiding the medal M from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.
The medal guide passage 121 is gently inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.

126, the medal M is permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110, passes through the medal passage 111, and is ejected from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111. FIG. Here, the medal selector 110 is attached to the rear surface of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the exit 111d is located near the rear surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, the hopper 35 is positioned closer to the center inside the cabinet 13 as shown in FIG. In other words, the hopper 35 is located on the front side with respect to the exit 111d in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 126 . Therefore, there is a certain distance between the outlet 111d and the hopper 35 . Therefore, the medal guide passage 121 is curved in an arc shape toward the hopper 35 side in order to guide the medals M ejected from the outlet 111d toward the hopper 35 side.

As shown in FIG. 126, the chute member 120 includes a bottom surface portion 122 forming the bottom surface of the medal guide passage 121, an inner wall portion 123 forming the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121, and an arc-shaped and an outer wall portion 124 forming an outer side surface of the medal guide passage 121 . The upper portion of the medal guide passage 121 is open.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the chute member 120 is positioned at a position corresponding to the middle of the medal guide passage 121 on the bottom surface portion 122 so that the hopper 35 (downstream) side is higher than the medal selector 110 (upstream) side. It has a stepped portion 125 with a low height.

As described above, the medal guide passage 121 is formed in an arcuately curved shape. Therefore, the medal M moves on the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 from the upstream side toward the downstream side, and contacts the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 in the middle of the medal guide passage 121. , its speed slows down.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 129, a stepped portion 125 whose height is lower on the downstream side than on the upstream side is provided at a position corresponding to the middle of the medal guide passage 121 on the bottom portion 122 . Then, the medal M moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121 is dropped at the stepped portion 125 . Thereby, the medal M decelerated by contacting the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 can be accelerated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, a fixing portion 126 is provided in the vicinity of the end portion on the medal selector 110 side of the outer wall portion 124 of the chute member 120 . The fixing portion 126 is for fixing the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12 and protrudes upward from the upper end of the outer wall portion 124 . Further, the fixed portion 126 is provided with a screw hole (not shown) penetrating from the front side to the back side thereof. Furthermore, a screw hole passing through the fixing portion 126 is provided above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124 .

The chute member 120 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by screws 127 passed through the screw holes of the fixing portion 126 . Further, when the chute member 120 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 , the screw 127 is positioned above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 128, the thickness of the medal M is assumed to be "T".
Also, as shown in FIG. 129, the diameter of the medal M is "D" and the radius of the medal M is "R". Further, the height of the step portion 125 is "H1", the height of the inner wall portion 123 is "H2", and the height of the outer wall portion 124 is "H3".
Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the width of the medal guiding passage 121 (the distance between the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124) is defined as "L1", the total length of the screw 127 is defined as "L2", and the diameter of the screw head is defined as Let it be "L3".

The width “L1” of the medal guide passage 121, the thickness “T” of the medal M, and the diameter “D” of the medal M are configured to satisfy “L1>T” and “L1<D”. there is That is, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is wider (larger) than the thickness "T" of the medal M and narrower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
As a result, the medal M is moved on the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 in a raised state.

Further, the height “H2” of the inner wall portion 123, the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124, and the diameter “D” of the medal M are set so as to satisfy “H2<D” and “H3<D”. It is configured. That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 is lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M, and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 is also lower than the diameter "D" of the medal M ( small).
As a result, the medal M moves on the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 while the upper portion of the medal M protrudes above the upper ends of the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 .

Furthermore, with respect to the height "H1" of the stepped portion 125, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the radius "R" of the medal M, "H1<H2" , and satisfy “H1<H3” and “H1<R”. That is, the height "H1" of the stepped portion 125 is lower (smaller) than the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the height "H1" of the medal M. Lower (smaller) than the radius "R".
As a result, when the medal M falls on the stepped portion 125, it is prevented from jumping out of the medal guide passage 121 by overcoming the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124.例文帳に追加

The height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 may be configured to satisfy "H2=H3" or "H2<H3". , or may be configured to satisfy "H2>H3".
That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 may be equal to the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, or may be higher (larger) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124. , may be lower (smaller) than the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124 .

Further, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the total length "L2" of the screw 127, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head are configured to satisfy "L1<L2" and "L1<L3". . That is, the total length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head is thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121.
As a result, even if the screw 127 is removed from the rear surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 can be prevented from entering the medal guide passage 121, so that the passage of the medals M can be prevented. .
Moreover, it is configured to satisfy “L2>L3”. That is, the overall length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the diameter "L3" of the screw head. As a result, chute member 120 can be firmly fixed to the rear surface of front door 12 with screw 127 .

A locking portion (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of chute member 120 . This locking portion is for locking the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12 . Then, the chute member 120 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126 while the sheet member 120 is locked to the rear surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion. Therefore, even if the screw 127 is removed, the chute member 120 does not separate from the rear surface of the front door 12 and fall.

In addition, the medal slot 47 has a medal placing portion (not shown) on which a plurality of medals M can be placed in an aligned state. In the tenth embodiment, the medal placing portion can place ten medals M in a row. Then, a plurality of medals M placed on the medal placement portion in an aligned state can be continuously inserted from the medal insertion port 47 .

Further, when the thickness of the medal M is "T", the width of the medal guiding passage 121 is "L1", and the number of medals M that can be placed on the medal placing portion is "M", "L1< (M÷2)×T” is satisfied. That is, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is narrower than the thickness "(M/2)×T" of the medals M that are half the number of medals that can be placed on the medal placement portion of the medal slot 47. (small).

The return member 130 guides the medals M disallowed to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and the medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15 to the medal receiving tray 19. It is provided at a position corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16 on the back side.
When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, a medal return passage 132 and a medal payout passage 134 are formed between the back surface of the front door 12 and the return member 130, as shown in FIG. be done.

The medal return path 132 is a path for guiding the medals M whose insertion is prohibited by the medal selector 110 to the medal payout port 16 .
Furthermore, the medal payout passage 134 is a passage for guiding the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16 .
Note that the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout passage 134 join in the middle to form one passage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, a return receiving opening 131 is provided on the upper portion of the return member 130 . The return acceptance port 131 is an opening for receiving medals M that have been disallowed to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and dropped out of the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45, and are the entrance of the medal return passage 132. It is an opening that becomes, and is configured to be positioned vertically below the blocker 45 of the medal selector 110 .
The medal selector 110 disapproves the insertion of the medal M, and the medal M that falls out of the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 passes through the return acceptance opening 131, is guided by the medal return passage 132, and is guided by the medal return passage 132. It passes through the payout port 16 and is stored in the medal receiving tray 19. - 特許庁

In addition, a payout receiving port 133 is provided below the center of the return member 130 and on the right side in FIG. 126 . The payout acceptance port 133 is an opening for receiving the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15, and is an opening serving as an entrance to the medal payout passage 134, and the medal payout is performed with the front door 12 closed. It is configured to be positioned in front of the device 15 .
After passing through a payout receiving port 133, the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 are guided by a medal payout passage 134, pass through a medal payout port 16, and are stored in a medal tray 19.例文帳に追加

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral edge portion of the return acceptance opening 131 in the upper portion of the return member 130 is referred to as "upper edge portion 135". That is, the upper edge portion 135 is a portion corresponding to the peripheral edge of the return acceptance opening 131 . When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 126, a gap 112 is provided between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. As shown in FIG. An upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 . Accordingly, the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 128, the thickness of the medal M is "T", the interval of the gap 112 is "W", and the width of the upper edge portion 135 is "B".
The thickness “T” of the medal M and the interval “W” of the gap 112 are configured to satisfy “W>T”. That is, the interval "W" of the gap 112 is greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 130, the medal M can be inserted into the gap 112. As shown in FIG.
More specifically, it is configured to satisfy “W≈2×T”. That is, the interval "W" of the gap 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, “two” medals M can be inserted into the clearance 112 .

In the tenth embodiment, a selector base 113 (FIG. 126) is fixed at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the rear surface of the front door 12, and the medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113. It is
126, between the right side of the medal selector 110 (the side where the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) and the upstream end of the chute member 120, the right side of the selector base 113 section is placed. The gap 112 is provided between the right side of the selector base 113 and the upstream end of the chute member 120 .

The selector base 113 is formed by bending sheet metal, and the thickness of the sheet metal forming the selector base 113 is 0.8 mm to 1.0 mm.
Furthermore, the thickness "T" of the medal M is set to "1.6" mm, and the interval "W" of the gap 12 is set to "3.2" mm.
Therefore, the distance from the right side of the medal selector 110 (the side where the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) to the upstream end of the chute member 120 is 4.0 mm to 4.2 mm. ” mm.

Further, an upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, and the thickness "T" of the medal M, the interval "W" of the gap 112, and the width "B" of the upper edge portion 135 are: It is configured to satisfy “B>T” and “B>W”. That is, the width “B” of the upper edge 135 is greater than the thickness “T” of the medal M and greater than the spacing “W” of the gap 112 . Additionally, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal. Therefore, the medal M inserted in the gap 112 can be placed on the upper edge portion 135 .

For example, a hall clerk may insert a medal M into the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 during maintenance of the medal selector 110 . At this time, since the medal M is placed on the upper edge portion 135 , the medal M can be held in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 .
However, there is a case where the hall clerk forgets that the medal M is left in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and closes the front door 12 . In this case, the medal M falls from the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed.

At this time, the upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, and the return acceptance opening 131 is not arranged, so that the medal M falling from the gap 112 does not fall into the return acceptance opening 131. . Therefore, the medal M falling from the gap 112 does not reach the medal tray 19 through the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout port 16.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from giving the player the medals M put in the gap 112 for the maintenance of the medal selector 110.例文帳に追加

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the gap 112 is arranged above the storage receiving port 35a of the hopper 35. As shown in FIG. That is, the storage receiving port 35 a of the hopper 35 opens at a position lower than the gap 112 . As a result, the medals M falling from the gap 112 when the front door 12 is closed can be dropped into the storage receiving opening 35a and stored in the hopper 35.例文帳に追加

Further, as described above, since the interval "W" of the gap 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "one" medal M is inserted into the gap 112, , and the medal M, there is no possibility that "one" medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.例文帳に追加
Then, when the front door 12 is closed with the "1" medal M in the gap 112, the "1" medal M falls from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time and enters the storage receiving port 35a. It drops and is stored in the hopper 35 .

Furthermore, if the interval "W" of the gap 112 is slightly wider (larger) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "2" medals M are inserted into the gap 112, this "2" There is no possibility that the medals M cannot be taken out from the clearance 112.例文帳に追加
When the front door 12 is closed with the "2" medals M in the gap 112, the same operation is performed when the front door 12 is closed with the "1" medal M in the gap 112. , it falls from the gap 112 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed, falls into the storage receiving port 35a, and is stored in the hopper 35. - 特許庁

Conversely, when the interval “W” of the gap 112 is slightly narrower (smaller) than twice the thickness “T” of the medal M, “two” medals M are pushed into the gap 112 . In this case, the "2" medals M that have been pushed in cannot be taken out from the gap 112. - 特許庁
However, if the front door 12 is closed while the "2" medals M are pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may remain in the gap 112 in some cases.

Here, as shown in FIG. 130, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 is inserted into the gap 112 so as to block the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. stay in. Therefore, when one medal M remains in the gap 112, another medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. It hits one medal M in the gap 112 and stops.

Further, when another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 hits the one medal M in the gap 112, the upper end of the one medal M in the gap 112 is positioned at the center of the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111. located higher. Therefore, another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 does not climb over one medal M in the gap 112.例文帳に追加
Therefore, when one medal M enters the clearance 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. - 特許庁

In addition, although it is not possible to directly detect that the medal M remains in the gap 112, as described above, when one medal M remains in the gap 112, it is inserted from the medal slot 47. Another medal M hits one medal M in the gap 112 and stops. At this time, another medal M stays near the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, so that the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on.

Further, when the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error in which the medals M are clogged (stagnation) in the medal selector 110 is detected, and notifies that effect. Thereby, it is possible to indirectly detect that the medal M remains in the gap 112 . Error detection and notification will be described later.

Further, when the chute member 120 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 , the return receiving opening 131 is not arranged vertically below the screw 127 .
Therefore, even if the screw 127 is removed from the rear surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 does not drop into the return receiving opening 131. - 特許庁Therefore, the loosened screw 127 does not reach the medal tray 19 through the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout port 16. - 特許庁

Further, as shown in FIG. 125, the medal selector 110 is provided with a passage sensor 46. As shown in FIG. The path sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining whether or not there is an error that the medals M are jammed (accumulated), or whether there is an act of cheating. Although not shown in FIG. 126, the passage sensor 46 is provided on the vertical portion 111a of the medal passage 111. As shown in FIG. That is, the passage sensor 46 is provided upstream of the blocker 45 in the token passage 111 .

Therefore, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the path sensor 46 first. Further, the path sensor 46 detects medals inserted from the medal slot 47 regardless of whether the blocker 45 permits (on state) or prohibits (off state) the insertion of medals M. M can be detected.

In addition, although not shown in FIGS. 124 to 134, the shoot member 120 has a shoot sensor in the middle of the medal guide passage 121. As shown in FIG. The shoot sensor, like the path sensor 46, is a sensor provided for determining whether or not there is an error in which the medals M are jammed (accumulated), or whether there is a hoax. Since the chute member 120 guides the medals M permitted to be thrown by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, the chute sensor is provided downstream of the throw-in sensor 44a and the throw-in sensor 44b.

Also, the passage sensor 46 and the shoot sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .
Both the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor may be provided, either one of them may be provided, or neither of them may be provided.

Next, error detection, error notification, and cancellation of error notification in the tenth embodiment will be described.
For example, when the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 generates an error in which medals M are clogged (stayed) in the medal selector 110 (hereinafter referred to as "selector retention error"). ) is detected, and a notification indicating a selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as "selector retention notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a selector retention error (for example, “CE”) on the acquired number display LED 78 as the selector retention notification.

Further, when detecting a selector retention error, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as a “selector retention command”) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like perform selector stay notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice saying “Please call a staff member” from the speaker 22 and displays the words “selector error” on the image display device 23 as the selector stay notification.

Further, for example, when the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b are not turned on in this order (the medal M does not pass normally), the main control board 50 generates an error that the medal M does not pass normally (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "selector passage error") is detected, and notification indicating the selector passage error (hereinafter referred to as "selector passage error notification") is performed.

As described above, when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is guided to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, first, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on, and then the insertion sensor 44b is turned on. It goes from off to on, then the on sensor 44a goes from on to off, and finally the on sensor 44b goes from on to off.
When the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b are turned on/off in the above order, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b are turned on/off in the above order. If it is not turned off, it is determined that a selector passage error has been detected.

Further, when the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits of the medal M.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it displays a code indicating the selector passage error (for example, "CP") on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector passage error notification.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the selector passing error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passing error command") to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passage error command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like execute the selector passage error notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 and displays the characters "Selector error" on the image display device 23 as the selector passing error notification. .

Note that it may be determined that a selector passing error (or a selector backflow error) has been detected when the closing sensor 44b is turned on from off while the closing sensor 44a is in the off state.
Also, the closing sensor 44b is turned on from off, then the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, then the closing sensor 44b is turned off from on, and finally the closing sensor 44a is turned off from on. It may be determined that a selector passage error (or a selector backflow error) is detected when the condition becomes true.

Further, when the path sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time after detecting the medal M, and when the medal M is no longer detected after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M passes normally. judge that it did.
On the other hand, when the path sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal M was detected, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Further, when the path sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

Further, when the shot sensor continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time after detecting the medal M, and when the medal M is no longer detected after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M passes normally. judge that it did.
On the other hand, when the shoot sensor continues to detect medals M even after a predetermined time has passed since the detection of medals M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Further, when the shoot sensor stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

The main control board 50 also has an input monitoring counter (not shown).
When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is permitted), the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by "1" when the medal M normally passes through the path sensor 46, and the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. and a counter that is decremented by "1" when it normally passes through the input sensor 44b. For this reason, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" during normal operation.
When the blocker 45 is in an OFF state (a state in which passage of the medal M is not permitted), the insertion monitoring counter does not add "1" even if the medal M passes the passage sensor 46. FIG.
Further, the insertion monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from an off state (a state in which passage of medals M is not permitted) to an on state (a state in which passage of medals M is permitted).

The main control board 50 adds "1" to the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M normally passes through the path sensor 46 when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, and the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b. is passed normally, the input monitor counter is decremented by "1".
When the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the path sensor 46 does not detect the passage of the medals M, and only the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detect the passage of the medals M, the insertion monitoring counter is set to " −1”, and the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected.

Also, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the path sensor 46 detects the passage of the medal M, but the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M. is detected, the input monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected.

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by "1" when the medal M normally passes the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b, and the medal M passes the shoot sensor normally. It may be a counter that is decremented by "1" from time to time.
That is, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M normally passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the insertion monitoring counter, and the medal M shoots. When passing through the sensor normally, the input monitoring counter may be decremented by "1".

Then, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detected the passage of the medal M, but the shoot sensor did not detect the passage of the medal M, and then the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b. detects the passage of medals M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 may determine that an insertion monitoring error has been detected.
In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, when only the shoot sensor detects the passage of the medal M without the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detecting the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter is set to "-". 1”, and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.

The normal value of the input monitoring counter is not limited to "0" to "1". That is, the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has occurred not only when the input monitoring counter has become "2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a loading monitoring error has been detected when the loading monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "3" or more or a predetermined value of "-2" or less. .

Further, when the input signal from the path sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b are used to add/subtract the input monitoring counter, the main control board 50 switches the blocker 45 from the off state to the on state. Clear the input monitor counter when
However, the main control board 50 changes the blocker 45 from the OFF state to the ON state when adding/subtracting the input monitoring counter with the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the shoot sensor. When doing so, the input monitoring counter may or may not be cleared.
In other words, when the input signal from the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b and the input signal from the shoot sensor are added/subtracted, the input monitoring counter is set to: It may be cleared or may not be cleared.

Alternatively, a throwing monitoring counter for the path sensor 46 and a throwing monitoring counter for the chute sensor may be provided separately.
That is, as the input monitoring counters, a first input monitoring counter and a second input monitoring counter can be provided.
The first input monitoring counter is a counter that adds/subtracts the input signal from the path sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Furthermore, the second input monitoring counter is a counter that adds/subtracts the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the shoot sensor.

That is, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M passes through the path sensor 46 normally, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the first insertion monitoring counter, and the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. And when it passes through the insertion sensor 44b normally, the first insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Then, the main control board 50 detects a loading monitoring error when the first loading monitoring counter is not a normal value (for example, when it becomes a predetermined value less than "-1" or a predetermined value greater than "2"). judge that it did.

Further, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M normally passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the second insertion monitoring counter, passes the chute sensor normally, the second injection monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Then, the main control board 50 detects a loading monitoring error when the second loading monitoring counter is no longer normal (for example, when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less or a predetermined value of "2" or more). judge that it did.

Further, for example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 generates an error that the medals M are not stored in the hopper 35. (hereinafter referred to as "hopper empty error") is detected, and notification indicating the hopper empty error (hereinafter referred to as "hopper empty notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a hopper empty error (for example, "HE") on the obtained number display LED 78 (FIG. 125) as the hopper empty notification.

Further, when detecting a hopper empty error, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating hopper empty (hereinafter referred to as an “empty command”) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like perform hopper empty notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice saying “Please call the staff” from the speaker 22 and displays the characters “Hopper empty” on the image display device 23 as the hopper empty notification.

Further, for example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b remain on, the main control board 50 detects an error that the medals M are jammed in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as "hopper jam error"). It is determined that the hopper jam error has occurred, and a notification indicating a hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as "hopper jam notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a hopper jam error (for example, "HP") on the obtained number display LED 78 as the hopper jam notification.

Further, when detecting a hopper jam error, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating a hopper jam (hereinafter referred to as “hopper jam command”) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, the hopper jam notification is performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 and displays the characters "Hopper Jam" on the image display device 23 as the hopper jam notification.

When detecting the various errors described above, the main control board 50 stops the progress of the game until the various error reports are released.
Further, when the above-described various error factors are eliminated, the main control board 50 no longer detects various errors, but once various error notifications are executed, the corresponding error factors are eliminated thereafter (error is not detected), and continues until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). Then, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 release various error reports.

For example, when the selector retention error occurs, the factor of the selector retention error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M that are stuck (stayed) in the medal selector 110 . After that, by operating the reset switch 153, the selector retention notification can be canceled.
When the selector passage error occurs, the cause of the selector passage error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M in the medal selector 110, as in the case of the selector retention error. Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the notification of the selector passage error can be canceled.

Further, when the hopper empty error occurs, the front door 12 is opened and the hopper 35 is replenished with medals M, thereby eliminating the cause of the hopper empty error. Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the hopper empty notification can be canceled.
After replenishing the hopper 35 with medals M, the hopper empty notification can be canceled by turning the door key counterclockwise by about 45 degrees to turn on the release switch.

Furthermore, when a hopper jam error occurs, the cause of the hopper jam error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M jammed in the hopper 35.例文帳に追加Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the hopper jam notification can be canceled.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened (hereinafter referred to as "door opening") by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 notifies that the front door 12 is open (hereinafter referred to as "door opening"). , called “door open notification”). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, “dE”) indicating the opening of the front door 12 on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door opening notification.
Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 issues a command indicating opening of the front door 12 (hereinafter referred to as "door opening command"). It is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door opening command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like perform door opening notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, the sound "the door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the characters "door open" on the image display device 23 as the door open notification.

A release switch (not shown) for releasing the door open notification is provided near the locking device on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player). When the door key is inserted into the door key insertion opening and turned counterclockwise by about 45 degrees in this state, the release switch is turned on from off. That is, when the door key is turned about 45 degrees in the direction opposite to that for unlocking the front door 12, the release switch is turned on from off.
As described above, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot and the door key is turned clockwise by 90 degrees in this state, the door is unlocked. Then, when the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates about the hinge and the front door 12 is opened.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off. Continue until the switch turns from off to on.
While the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. In this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) by about 45 degrees. , when the release switch is turned on from off, the door opening notification is released.

Thus, the operation of turning the door key in the direction opposite to the direction of unlocking the front door 12 is the operation for canceling the door open notification.
Further, when the door opening notification is canceled, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78 .
Further, when the release switch is turned on from off, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a command indicating the release of the door open notification (hereinafter referred to as "notification cancellation command").
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command, it terminates the door opening notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 135 to 145, operation modes at the time of error detection, error notification, and error cancellation in the tenth embodiment will be described.
FIGS. 135 to 142 are time charts showing operation modes during error detection and error cancellation in the tenth embodiment.
FIG. 135 is a time chart showing how the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector retention error and when the release switch is operated after the front door 12 is closed.

In FIG. 135, when a selector retention error occurs at the timing of "X11", the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. Also, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 execute selector retention notification.
Specifically, at the timing of "X11" in FIG. 135, when the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 turns the selector It is determined that a retention error has been detected. Then, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector stay notification, and outputs a "selector stay error" to the image display device 23. Display characters.

After that, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X12" in FIG. 135, the main control board 50 determines that the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) has been detected.
Specifically, at timing "X12" in FIG. 135, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 (door opening). judge that it did. However, even if the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification, and continues the selector stay notification.

Further, when detecting that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door open command indicating opening of the front door 12 to the sub control board 80 .
However, the sub-control board 80 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification and continues the selector stay notification even if the door open command is received.

After that, at the timing of "X13" in FIG. 135, when the medals M jammed in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 are removed, that is, when the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. is no longer detected. However, once the selector retention notification is executed, it is not canceled only by removing the cause of the selector retention error (the selector retention error is no longer detected), and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). continue until

After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X14" in FIG. 135, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at timing "X14" in FIG. 135, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on even if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the selector retention notification. When the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification, this time the acquisition number display LED 78 executes the door opening notification. Specifically, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 (door open).
Further, when the selector stay notification is released, the sub-control board 80 executes the door open notification by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "the door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the characters "the door is open" on the image display device 23 as the door open notification.

After that, when the front door 12 is closed at the timing of "X15" in FIG. 135, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects the opening of the front door 12 . However, once the door open notification is executed, it is not canceled only by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, and continues until the cancellation switch is operated (turned on).

135, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number before displaying the error code on the acquired number display LED 78 , and transmits to the sub control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification.
Then, when receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door opening notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

FIG. 136 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error.
In FIG. 136, when the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M at the timing of "X21" and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and also transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 .
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as the selector stay notification, and displays the characters "selector stay error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

136, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open.
However, even if the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification, and continues the selector stay notification.
When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door open command indicating that the front door 12 is opened to the sub control board 80 .
However, the sub-control board 80 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification and continues the selector stay notification even if the door open command is received.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M, and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, that is, the cause of the selector retention error is removed. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a state where it has not been done, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
However, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", but after that, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".

Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in FIG. Release the notification, and control to execute the door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector stay notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating the selector retention error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing of "X23" in FIG. , and thereafter, at the timing of "X24", control is performed to switch the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "dE" to "CE". Further, the main control board 50 transmits a selector stay command to the sub control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG.

Also, when receiving an error cancellation command at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 136, when the selector stay command is received, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stay notification again.

136, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X23" in FIG. to switch the display from "selector retention error" to "door open". After that, at the timing of "X24", the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Control to switch to "selector retention error".

Various errors such as selector retention error, selector passing error, hopper empty error, and hopper jam error are managed (detected, notified, and canceled) by the main control board 50. Door opening is managed by the main control board 50. , and the sub-control board 80 manages (detects, notifies, cancels).
Further, the door open notification may be canceled (finished) under the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening, or when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off (from off to on or from off to on). It is canceled (finished) under the condition that the

Furthermore, regarding the door open notification, code display such as "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, voice output such as "door is open" from the speaker 22, and "door open" to the image display device 23 , and outputting audio such as "the door is open" from the speaker 22 and displaying characters such as "the door is open" on the image display device 23. a case where only voice output such as "the door is open" from the speaker 22 is executed;

Furthermore, in FIG. 136, after temporarily canceling the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing of "X24", depending on the contents of the processing executed, When the time required to reach "X24" is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms), which cannot be recognized by human perception, and when it is relatively long (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds), which is recognizable by human perception. have
Therefore, depending on the combination of the various cases described above, during the period from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" in FIG. Various modes of operation are possible.

That is, in FIG. 136, the door open notification is executed during the period from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" until the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". There are cases where the open notification is not executed.
Also, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", the door When the execution of the door open notification can be recognized visually and audibly by humans, and when the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized visually or audibly by humans, or even if it can be recognized, it will be momentary. have

Furthermore, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is not executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", When it is possible to visually and audibly recognize that the selector retention notification has been canceled and then re-executed, and when the selector retention notification has been canceled and then re-executed can be visually and audibly recognized by humans. There are times when it is impossible or even if it can be recognized, it is only for a moment.

For example, the door opening is managed by the main control board 50, and the operation of the release switch with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off is set as a condition for releasing (ending) the door open notification. As an open notification, code display such as "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, voice output such as "door is open" from the speaker 22, and character display such as "door open" on the image display device 23. There are three cases to run.

In this case, in FIG. 136, the door open notification can be executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24".
In addition, in FIG. 136, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" to re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing of "X24" is recognizable by human perception. In the case of a relatively long time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds), when the door opening notification is executed between "X23" and "X24", the door opening notification can be recognized visually and audibly by humans. .

On the other hand, in FIG. 136, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" to re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing of "X24" is to the extent that human perception cannot perceive it. is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms), even if the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X23", it is difficult for human beings to perceive this door open notification visually or audibly. be.
However, even if the time required from "X23" to "X24" is so short that it cannot be recognized by human perception, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and the timing of "X24" is canceled. Re-execution of selector stay notification in , may be recognizable by human auditory sense.

That is, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call the staff" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted in the middle, and the selector stay notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". When doing so, the voice of "Please call the staff" is output from the beginning. For this reason, it sounds like, for example, "Please call the attendant, please call the attendant."
When an alarm sound such as "boo" or "beep" is output from the speaker 22 as the selector retention notification, it is not possible for the human sense of hearing to recognize that the selector retention notification has been canceled and then re-executed. Or, even if you can recognize it, it will only be for a moment.

Further, for example, the door opening is managed by the sub-control board 80, and the fact that a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening is set as a cancellation (end) condition for the door opening notification, and the door opening notification is: There are two cases of executing voice output such as "the door is open" from the speaker 22 and character display such as "the door is open" on the image display device 23. FIG.
In this case, if the selector retention notification is to be canceled and re-executed before the predetermined time elapses after the detection of the door opening, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. , the door open notification can be executed until the selector stay notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".

On the other hand, since the door open notification is not executed after the predetermined time has passed since the detection of the door opening, when the selector retention notification is once canceled and executed again after the predetermined time has passed since the detection of the door opening, In FIG. 136, the door open notification is not performed during the period from when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" until the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24".

Also, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is not executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", " There is a time when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) to the extent that it can be recognized by human perception.
In this case, between "X23" and "X24", the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the acquisition number before "CE" is displayed, and the speaker 22 outputs the voice "Please call the staff". Then, the image display device 23 displays a screen (for example, a game screen or a game standby screen) before displaying the characters "selector error". These displays between "X23" and "X24" can be recognized visually and audibly by humans. Therefore, it is possible for a person to visually and audibly recognize that the selector stay notification is once canceled and then re-executed.

Also, in FIG. 136, when the door open notification is not executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", " The time required from "X23" to "X24" is sometimes extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) to the extent that it cannot be recognized by human perception.
In this case, it is difficult for humans to visually and audibly recognize the display on the acquired number display LED 78 and the image display device 23 and the sound from the speaker 22 between "X23" and "X24". .

However, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is interrupted, and the selector stay notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". When outputting the voice "Please call the staff" from the beginning, for example, it sounds like "Please call the staff... please call the staff", so the selector stay notification is canceled once. Re-execution later can be recognized by human hearing.

Also, in FIG. 136, the following patterns (1) to (6) are conceivable as patterns of processing executed between "X23" and "X24".
(1) In the same interrupt process (Fig. 47), the pattern of temporarily canceling the selector retention notification and then re-executing the selector retention notification (2) In one interrupt process, once canceling the selector retention notification, then Pattern for re-executing selector retention notification in interrupt processing

(3) When the selector retention notification is once canceled in one interrupt process, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector retention notification is canceled once and then the selector retention notification is restarted. A pattern in which interrupt processing is required multiple times before execution, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. In the case of re-executing the notification, a pattern in which interrupt processing is required multiple times from the temporary release of the selector retention notification to the re-execution of the selector retention notification, during which the door open notification is performed.

(5) When the selector retention notification is once canceled in one interrupt process, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector retention notification is canceled once and then the selector retention notification is restarted. A pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses before execution, and the door open notification is not executed during this period. In the interrupt process, when the selector retention notification is executed again, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds) is required between once canceling the selector retention notification and re-executing the selector retention notification. Pattern that requires progress and executes door open notification during that time

First, the pattern (1) in which the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again in the same interrupt processing will be described.
In this case, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the read processing (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 controls various switches (reset switch 153, etc.) and various sensors (throw-in sensor 44a and throw-in sensor 44b). etc.). Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on. If so, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
After that, when proceeding to error processing (not shown) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag and executes selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", but the door opening notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Further, the cancellation of the selector retention notification and the second selector retention notification are executed by the same interrupt processing. Furthermore, interrupt processing is performed every 2.235ms. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector retention notification to the execution of the selector retention notification again is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Therefore, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". It is difficult for humans to visually and audibly recognize the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 and the image display device 23 and the sound from the speaker 22 .

However, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is interrupted, and the selector stay notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". When outputting the voice "Please call the staff" from the beginning, for example, it sounds like "Please call the staff... please call the staff", so the selector stay notification is canceled once. Re-execution later can be recognized by human hearing.

Next, a pattern will be described in which the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled in the above (2) one interrupt process, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the next interrupt process.
In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, as in the pattern (1) above, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and inputs When it is determined that the sensor 44a and the closing sensor 44b remain ON, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 is ON in the main process (FIG. 46) at a timing before the process (step S278), or when all the reels 31 Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after the determination processing (step S289) as to whether or not the motor has stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case as well, the selector stay notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door opening notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
However, unlike the pattern (1) above, in the first interrupt processing, the notification of selector retention is canceled, and in the main processing executed after that, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. be done. Then, selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector retention notification to the execution of the selector retention notification again is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms). Become.

Also in this case, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. It is difficult for humans to visually and audibly perceive the display on the obtained number display LED 78 and the image display device 23 and the sound from the speaker 22 during this period.

However, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is interrupted, and the selector stay notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". When outputting the voice "Please call the staff" from the beginning, for example, it sounds like "Please call the staff... please call the staff", so the selector stay notification is canceled once. Re-execution later can be recognized by human hearing.

Next, in the above (3) one interrupt process, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern will be described in which interrupt processing is required a plurality of times until the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 is ON in the main process (FIG. 46) at a timing before the process (step S278), or when all the reels 31 Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after the determination processing (step S289) as to whether or not the motor has stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention error state by referring to the error flag storage area.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after releasing the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 displays "CE Display the number of acquisitions before displaying ".
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

After that, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on. When it is determined that the state remains as it is, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case as well, the selector stay notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door opening notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Also, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once released, and in the main processing executed after that, the selector retention error state is once released. After that, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the acquired number before "CE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, the selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. After that, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, the selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector retention notification to the execution of the selector retention notification again is the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4= 8.94 ms).
Therefore, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". It is difficult for humans to visually and audibly recognize the display on the number display LED 78 and the image display device 23 and the sound from the speaker 22 .

However, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is interrupted, and the selector stay notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". When outputting the voice "Please call the staff" from the beginning, for example, it sounds like "Please call the staff... please call the staff", so the selector stay notification is canceled once. Re-execution later can be recognized by human hearing.

Next, in the above (4) one interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern will be described in which interrupt processing is required a plurality of times until the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, unlike the pattern (1) above, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the door switch 17 is turned on, it is determined that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and an error flag indicating door opening is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, opens the door, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is opened in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as the door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the door opening command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

After that, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on. When it is determined that the state remains as it is, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the door open notification is cancelled, and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed again.
In addition, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the release of the selector retention notification and the detection of the door opening are executed, and in the main processing executed thereafter, the game progresses with the door open. error handling is performed. After that, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, the release of the door open notification and the detection of the selector retention error are executed. Further, in the main process executed after that, an error process for stopping the progress of the game is executed as a selector retention error state. After that, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, the selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector retention notification to the execution of the selector retention notification again is the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4= 8.94 ms).
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Even if you can, it's only for a moment. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is cancelled, and the selector stay notification is executed again.

Next, in the above (5) one interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern will be described in which a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses before the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
After that, unlike the pattern (1) above, when proceeding to the timer setting process (not shown) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 measures the elapsed time after the selector retention notification is cancelled. set a timer to

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention error state by referring to the error flag storage area.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after releasing the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 displays "CE Display the number of acquisitions before displaying ".
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects that a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed after releasing the selector retention notification. or not.
When it is determined that the predetermined time has passed since the selector retention notification was released, and it is determined in the input error check process (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are still on, The main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", but the door opening notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the selector retention notification is canceled is set. In the main processing executed after that, the selector retention error state is temporarily released. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the acquired number before displaying "CE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When it is determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the release of the selector retention notification in the subsequent interrupt processing, a selector retention error is detected. In the main process executed after that, an error process for stopping the progress of the game is executed as a selector retention error state. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector stay notification is executed and the selector stay command is sent to the sub-control board 80 .

For this reason, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) from once canceling the selector retention notification to executing the selector retention notification again.
Also, in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 does not display an image until the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". The screen (for example, game screen or game standby screen) before displaying the characters of "selector error" is displayed on the device 23 without displaying the characters of "selector error".

Therefore, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification was canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification was once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification was re-executed at the timing of "X24." can be recognized by human sight and hearing.
It should be noted that the condition is not that a predetermined period of time elapses between once canceling the selector retention notification and re-executing the selector retention notification. The condition may be that it is turned off from on.
In this case as well, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24." This can be made recognizable by human vision and hearing.

In addition, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the above (5) one interrupt processing, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is executed. The following example is conceivable as a pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses before the notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

First, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the read process (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 reads the input signals of various switches and various sensors. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention error state by referring to the error flag storage area.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after releasing the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 displays "CE Display the number of acquisitions before displaying ".
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when it is determined in the input error check processing (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. Then, an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after setting the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, when proceeding to the timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 sets the selector retention error state to Sets a timer to measure elapsed time.
In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector retention error state. to judge whether

Then, when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since the selector retention error state, the main control board 50 proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), and the main control board 50 outputs a code "CE" indicating a selector retention error as a selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", but the door opening notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".

Also, in one interrupt process, the notification of selector retention is temporarily released, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector retention error state is once released. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the acquired number before displaying "CE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When a selector retention error is detected in the interrupt processing to be executed thereafter, in the main processing to be executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state, and in the interrupt processing to be executed thereafter, selector retention Sets a timer that measures the elapsed time since the error state. Then, when it is determined in the subsequent interrupt processing that a predetermined time has passed since the selector stay error state, the selector stay notification is executed and the selector stay command is sent to the sub-control board 80 .

For this reason, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) from once canceling the selector retention notification to executing the selector retention notification again.
Also, in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" until the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". , the screen (for example, game screen or game standby screen) before displaying the characters of "selector error" is displayed without displaying the characters of "selector error".

Furthermore, in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 outputs " The voice "Please call the staff" is not output, and the voice before the voice "Please call the staff" is output.
Therefore, in FIG. 136, the fact that the selector retention notification is canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24" is It is recognizable by human sight and hearing.

Finally, in the above (6) one interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses before the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time will be described.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, unlike the pattern (1) above, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the door switch 17 is turned on, it is determined that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and an error flag indicating door opening is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
Thereafter, in interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects opening of the front door 12 and stores an error flag indicating door opening. Sets a timer to measure elapsed time.

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, opens the door, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is opened in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as the door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the door opening command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and stores an error flag indicating the opening of the door. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has passed.
Then, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the front door 12 was detected and the error flag indicating door opening was stored, the input error check process (step S463) performs the closing sensor 44a and closing sensor 44a. 44b remains on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. FIG.

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed again.
In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, the door opening is detected, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after the door opening is detected. In the main process executed after that, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as the door is opened. In the interrupt processing executed after that, the door opening notification is executed, and the door opening command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Furthermore, when it is determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the detection of the door opening in the subsequent interrupt processing, the door opening notification is canceled and the selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, an error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector stay notification is executed and the selector stay command is sent to the sub-control board 80 .

For this reason, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) from once canceling the selector retention notification to executing the selector retention notification again.
Also, in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 does not display an image until the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". The characters "door open" are displayed on the device 23 without displaying the characters "selector error".

Therefore, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification was canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification was once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification was re-executed at the timing of "X24." , and that the door opening notification has been executed can be recognized visually and audibly by humans.
It should be noted that the condition is not that a predetermined period of time elapses between once canceling the selector retention notification and re-executing the selector retention notification. The condition may be that it is turned off from on.
In this case as well, in FIG. 136, the selector retention notification is canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24." It is possible to visually and audibly recognize that the door has been opened and that the door opening notification has been executed.

In addition, it detects the opening of the front door 12, measures the elapsed time after storing an error flag indicating door opening, and until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses, the door opening notification is continued. During this period, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the door opening notification can be prevented from being released. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify that the front door 12 is opened.

The same applies when an error such as a selector retention error is detected. That is, an error such as a selector retention error is detected, and the elapsed time after an error flag indicating the error is stored is measured. During this period, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the error notification such as the selector retention notification can be prevented from being canceled. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify that an error such as a selector retention error has been detected.

Here, in FIG. 136, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. When the hopper jam error occurs, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

For example, in FIG. 136, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven at the timing of "X21", the main control board 50 reports a hopper empty error. is detected.
When the main control board 50 detects the hopper empty error, the main control board 50 displays "HE" indicating the hopper empty error on the acquired number display LED 78 as the hopper empty notification, and sends an empty command indicating the hopper empty error to the sub control board 80. Send to

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as the hopper empty notification, and displays the characters "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23. .
After that, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X22" in FIG. 136 and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.

However, during execution of the hopper empty notification, the main control board 50 continues the hopper empty notification without executing the door open notification even if door opening is detected.
Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub-control board 80 when the door opening is detected.
However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, the sub-control board 80 continues the hopper empty notification without executing the door open notification even if the door open command is received.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the reset switch 153 is operated ( ON), the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the hopper empty notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, in FIG. 136, although the hopper empty notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the hopper empty notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of “X23” in FIG. Release the notification, and control to execute the door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 136, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper empty notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the obtained number display LED 78 from "HE" indicating the hopper empty error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing of "X23" in FIG. , and thereafter, at the timing of "X24", control is performed to switch the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "dE" to "HE". Further, the main control board 50 transmits an empty command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG.

Also, when receiving an error cancellation command at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper empty notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. After that, when the empty command is received at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the hopper empty notification again.

136, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X23" in FIG. display is switched from "Hopper empty" to "Door open". After that, at the timing of "X24", the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Control to switch to "hopper empty".

If the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has passed despite the hopper motor 36 being driven, the main control board 50 It is determined that a hopper empty error has been detected, and "HE" indicating a hopper empty error is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification. After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated even when the hopper 35 is not replenished with medals M (the cause of the hopper empty error is removed), the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification, The hopper motor 36 is driven again. However, since the hopper 35 is not replenished with medals M, the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has passed since the hopper motor 36 was driven again. Therefore, the main control board 50 executes the hopper empty notification again. Therefore, it takes about 3 to 5 seconds from when the hopper empty notification is released to when it is re-executed.

Further, when the closing sensor 44a and the closing sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and acquires "CE" indicating a selector retention error as a selector retention notification. It is displayed on the number display LED 78 . After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated even when the medal selector 110 is still filled with medals M (the cause of the selector retention error is not removed), the main control board 50 notifies the selector retention. is canceled once. However, since the medal selector 110 is still filled with medals M, the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, so the main control board 50 executes the selector retention notification again. At this time, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification to re-executing it is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms×2=4.47 ms).

In this way, the time required from once canceling the hopper empty notification to re-executing it is about 3 to 5 seconds, whereas the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification to re-executing it. is about the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms×2=4.47 ms).
Therefore, the time required to re-execute the hopper empty notification once canceled is longer than the time required to re-execute the selector retention notification once released.

Further, for example, at the timing of "X21" in FIG. 136, when the closing sensor 44b is turned on from off and then when the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, the main control board 50 generates a selector passing error. is detected.
When detecting a selector passing error, the main control board 50 displays "CP" indicating a selector passing error on the obtained number display LED 78 as a selector passing error notification, and sub-controls a selector passing error command indicating a selector passing error. Send to board 80 .

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passage error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice message "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector passage error notification, and displays the characters "selector error" on the image display device 23. display.
After that, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X22" in FIG. 136 and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.
However, the main control board 50 continues the selector passage error notification without executing the door opening notification even if the door opening is detected while the selector passage error notification is being performed.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub-control board 80 when the door opening is detected.
However, even if the door opening command is received, the sub-control board 80 does not execute the door opening notification and continues the selector passage error notification during execution of the selector passage error notification.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a state where the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on), the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector passing error notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
Here, although the notification of the selector passage error is canceled, since the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected this time, and states "X24 ”, the selector stay notification is executed.

Specifically, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the condition in which the factor of the selector passage error is not removed (the closing sensor 44b is turned on from off, then the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off). Therefore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the closing sensor 44a and the closing sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification and notifies the door opening. to run.
Since the closing sensor 44a and the closing sensor 44b remain on after that, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected this time, and at the timing of "X24" in FIG. The door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "CP" indicating the selector passage error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing of "X23" in FIG. to control.
After that, the main control board 50 switches the display of the obtained number display LED 78 from "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open to "CE" indicating a selector retention error at the timing of "X24" in FIG. to control.
Further, the main control board 50 transmits a selector stay command to the sub control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG.

Also, when receiving the error cancellation command at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector passage error notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time.
After that, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 136, when the selector stay command is received, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stay notification this time.

136, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X23" in FIG. to switch the display from "selector error" to "door open".
After that, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "door is open" to "please call the staff" at the timing of "X24" in FIG. to switch the display from "door open" to "selector error".

In this way, when a selector passage error is detected, a selector passage error notification is executed. After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector passage error has not been removed, the selector passage error is canceled, This time, there is a case where selector retention error is detected and selector retention notification is executed.
As described above, when a selector retention error is detected, the selector retention notification is executed. After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is temporarily issued. After canceling, there is also a case where the selector retention notification is executed again.
That is, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same error notification is executed before and after the reset switch 153 is operated, and different error notification is performed before and after the reset switch 153 is operated. and when it is executed.

In FIG. 136, the selector passage error notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", but there is a case where the door opening notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, at the timing of "X24", there is a case where the selector stay notification is executed this time.
For example, in the same interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when reading the input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 47), input error check (step S463 in FIG. 47), and error processing (not shown) are executed. , the door open notification is not executed.

Specifically, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the read processing (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 controls various switches (reset switch 153, etc.) and various sensors (throw-in sensor 44a and throw-in sensor 44a). sensor 44b, etc.) is read. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on. If so, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
After that, when proceeding to error processing (not shown) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag and executes selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, the selector passage error notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door opening notification, at the timing of "X24", the selector retention notification is executed this time.
Also, the cancellation of the selector passage error notification and the selector retention notification are executed by the same interrupt processing. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is less than the time (2.235 ms) for one interrupt.

Also, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), reading of the input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 47) and input error check (step S463 in FIG. 47) are executed, and then in the main processing (FIG. 46) executed, Door open notification is not executed even when error processing (not shown) is executed.

Specifically, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the read process (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 reads the input signals of various switches and various sensors. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on. If so, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case as well, the selector stay notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, but the door opening notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door opening notification, at the timing of "X24", the selector retention notification is executed this time.
Also, in one interrupt process, the selector passage error notification is canceled, in the main process executed after that, the progress of the game is stopped as a selector retention error state, and in the interrupt process executed after that, the selector retention notification is issued this time. to run. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms×2=4.47 ms). .

Also, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door opening notification is executed. Even if it is a moment, it has a case. Then, at the timing of "X24", there is a case where the door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed this time.
A plurality of times of interrupt processing may be required from the execution of reading of the input port 51 and input error check in the interrupt processing to the execution of error processing in the main processing. In such a case, the door opening notification is executed, but the execution of the door opening notification cannot be recognized visually or audibly by human beings, or even if it can be recognized, it is only for a moment.

Specifically, in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the read process (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 reads the input signals of various switches and various sensors. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), when proceeding to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and when it determines that the door switch 17 is on. determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the opening of the door in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, opens the door, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the door is opened in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as the door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the door opening command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

After that, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the next interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on. When it is determined that the state remains as it is, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the door open notification is cancelled, and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

After that, in the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as the selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector passage error notification is cancelled, and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled, and the selector stay notification is executed this time.
In addition, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, cancellation of the selector passage error notification and detection of the door opening are executed. Error handling is performed to stop progress. After that, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, the release of the door open notification and the detection of the selector retention error are executed. Further, in the main process executed after that, an error process for stopping the progress of the game is executed as a selector retention error state. After that, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, the selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4=8 .94 ms). In the meantime, the door opening notification is executed.
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 136, the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door opening notification is executed. It's just a moment. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled, and the selector stay notification is executed this time.

Further, the sub-control board 80 stores an error history in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and can display the stored error history when requested to display the error history.
In the tenth embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation state.
Specifically, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the game is on standby (before the game is started), and the number of bets is "0", the setting confirmation state is entered.

Further, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting values are displayed on the setting value display LED 73 and the menu screen for the administrator is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Furthermore, the menu screen for the administrator has an item of "error history".
Then, while the menu screen for the administrator is being displayed, the cross key (FIG. 125) is operated to select the item "error history", and in this state the push button 86 is operated (turned on) to turn on the image display device. 23, an error history screen is displayed.

In addition, on the error history screen, an error code indicating the type of error (for example, "CE", "CP", "dE", etc.) and an error notification time (for example, "September 17, 2021 15:35:25 seconds” etc.) is displayed.
Here, for example, at timing "X21" in FIG. Assume that the door open notification is canceled at the timing and the selector stay notification is executed again.
In this case, for example
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 be.

Also, for example, in FIG. 136, at the timing of "X21", the selector retention notification is executed, and at the timing of "X23", the selector retention notification is canceled once, but the door open notification is not executed, and then the door is opened. Assume that the selector stay notification is performed again at the timing of "X24" without the release notification being performed.
In this case, for example
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45.

Further, for example, in FIG. 136, at the timing of "X21", selector retention notification is executed, and at the timing of "X23", medals M are stuck in the medal selector 110 (the factor of the selector retention error is removed). not yet), and the reset switch 153 is continuously operated a plurality of times (for example, "3" times). In this case, the cancellation and re-execution of the selector retention notification may be repeated a plurality of times (for example, "three" times).
Also in this case, for example
“CE” occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 “CE” canceled September 17, 2021 15:35:25 “CE” occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 “CE” Canceled September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" canceled September 17, 2021 15:35:25 can do.

Note that even if the reset switch 153 is operated multiple times in succession and the selector retention notification is canceled and re-executed multiple times in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, these histories will be deleted. Instead of storing and displaying, the history may be stored and displayed only when the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is canceled in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.

Also, for example, in FIG. 136, at the timing of "X21", the selector passage error notification is executed, and at the timing of "X23", the selector passage error notification is temporarily canceled, the door open notification is executed, and "X24" is executed. It is assumed that the door open notification is canceled at the timing of , and the selector stay notification is executed this time.
In this case, for example
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 be.

Also, for example, in FIG. 136, at the timing of "X21", the selector passage error notification is executed, and at the timing of "X23", the selector passage error notification is temporarily canceled, but the door open notification is not executed. , the door open notification is not executed, and the selector stay notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
In this case, for example
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45

The push button 86 is also referred to as a sub-button 86, a performance button 86, a performance switch 86, etc., and is operated when progressing (developing) the performance.
The cross key 87 is also called a selection switch 87 or the like, and is operated to move the cursor position on a menu screen or the like.
The push button 86 and cross key 87 are electrically connected to the sub control means 80 via the input port 81 .
Also, the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning on/off the power or setting change processing. Unless a serious error (unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, the error history is not erased.

Thus, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be executed, and in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification, that is, the reset switch When the operation of 153 is performed, after canceling the predetermined error notification once, the predetermined error notification can be executed again.
As a result, it is possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

FIG. 137 shows when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector retention error, and when the release switch is pressed while the front door 12 is open. It is a time chart which shows the operation|movement mode when operating.
In FIG. 137, when the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M at the timing of "X31", and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 .
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as the selector stay notification, and displays the characters "selector stay error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

After that, at the timing of "X32" in FIG. 137, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects door opening.
However, the main control board 50 continues the selector stay notification without executing the door open notification even if the door opening is detected while the selector stay notification is being executed.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub-control board 80 when the door opening is detected.
However, even if the door open command is received, the sub-control board 80 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification, and continues the selector stay notification.

After that, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 137, the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M, and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, that is, the cause of the selector retention error is removed. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a state where it has not been done, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
However, in FIG. 137, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X33", but after that, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X34".

Specifically, at timing "X33" in FIG. Release the notification, and control to execute the door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector stay notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 at the timing of "X33" in FIG. , and thereafter, at the timing of "X34", the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is controlled to switch from "dE" to "CE". Further, the main control board 50 transmits the selector stay command to the sub control board 80 at the timing of "X34" in FIG.

In addition, when receiving the error cancellation command at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. After that, when the selector stay command is received at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stay notification again.

137, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X33" in FIG. to switch the display from "selector retention error" to "door open". After that, at the timing of "X34", the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Control to switch to "selector retention error".

After that, at the timing of "X35" in FIG. 137, when the medals M jammed in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 are removed, that is, when the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. is no longer detected. However, simply removing the cause of the selector retention error (stopping the detection of the selector retention error) does not cancel the selector retention notification.

After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at timing "X36" in FIG. 137, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is cancelled. , the main control board 50 executes the door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to switch from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open.

Also, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector retention notification, and then executes the door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the voice output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open", and also changes the display on the image display device 23 from "Selector retention error" to " Control to switch to "door open".

After that, at the timing of "X37" in FIG. 137, with the front door 12 left open, that is, with the door switch 17 left on, the door key is turned counterclockwise, and the release switch is turned on. is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door opening notification without releasing it.

Further, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is turned on), the main control board 50 issues a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door opening notification. is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is turned on), the sub-control board 80 continues without canceling the door open notification. and run.

Here, in FIG. 137, the operations when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error and when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error have been described, taking the selector retention error as an example. However, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, or when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error, also in the case of a selector passing error, a hopper empty error, or a hopper jam error. behaves in the same way as the selector stuck error.

For example, at timing "X31" in FIG. 137, when the payout sensor 37a remains off and the payout sensor 37b remains on, the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error. to decide.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, the main control board 50 displays "HP" indicating a hopper jam error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a hopper jam notification, and issues a hopper jam command indicating a hopper jam error to the sub control board. 80.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the sound "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam notification, and displays the characters "hopper jam error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

After that, at the timing of "X32" in FIG. 137, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects door opening.
However, during execution of the hopper jam notification, the main control board 50 continues the hopper jam notification without executing the door opening notification even if door opening is detected.
Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub-control board 80 when the door opening is detected.
However, while the hopper jam notification is being performed, the sub-control board 80 continues the hopper jam notification without executing the door open notification even if the door opening command is received.

After that, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 137, the reset switch 153 is operated (turned ON ), the main control board 50 controls to release the hopper jam notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, in FIG. 137, although the hopper jam notification is once canceled at the timing of "X33", the hopper jam notification is executed again at the timing of "X34".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X33" in FIG. The notification is canceled, and this time, control is performed so that the door opening notification is executed. After that, at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper jam notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the obtained number display LED 78 from "HP" indicating the hopper jam error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing of "X33" in FIG. , and thereafter, at the timing of "X34", control is performed to switch the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "dE" to "HP". Further, the main control board 50 transmits a hopper jam command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X34" in FIG.

Also, when receiving an error cancellation command at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper jam notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. After that, when the hopper jam command is received at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper jam notification again.

137, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X33" in FIG. display is switched from "hopper jam error" to "door open". After that, at the timing of "X34", the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Control to switch to "hopper jam error".

After that, when the medals M stuck in the hopper 35 are removed at the timing of "X35" in FIG. 137, that is, when the cause of the hopper jam error is removed, the main control board 50 stops detecting the hopper jam error. . However, simply removing the cause of the hopper jam error (disabling detection of the hopper jam error) does not cancel the hopper jam notification.

After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 137, the main control board 50 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 137, even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the hopper jam notification is cancelled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. , the main control board 50 controls to execute the door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the obtained number display LED 78 to switch from "HP" indicating a hopper jam error to "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open.

Further, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 137, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper jam notification, and then controls to execute the door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open", and also changes the display on the image display device 23 from "Hopper jam error" to " Control to switch to "door open".

After that, at the timing of "X37" in FIG. 137, with the front door 12 left open, that is, with the door switch 17 left on, the door key is turned counterclockwise, and the release switch is turned on. is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door opening notification without releasing it.

Further, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is turned on), the main control board 50 issues a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door opening notification. is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is turned on), the sub-control board 80 continues without canceling the door open notification. and run.

Thus, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be executed, and in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification, that is, the reset switch When the operation of 153 is performed, after canceling the predetermined error notification once, the predetermined error notification can be executed again.
As a result, it is possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

Further, when the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) is detected, the door opening notification can be executed, and with the front door 12 opened, the release switch for canceling the door opening notification is operated (turned on). ), the execution can be continued without canceling the door open notification.
As a result, even though the front door 12 remains open, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity without giving any notification.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on to execute the door opening notification. It may be configured to execute opening notification.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12, and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may detect that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17 and the front door 12 can be opened, the front door 12 is opened. The door open notification may be performed even when the door is closed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, the door key is turned counterclockwise to operate (turn on) the release switch, the main control board 50 is configured to release the door open notification. be able to.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17 and the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the front door 12 is closed, a door open command indicating opening of the front door 12 may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
Then, the sub-control board 80 may be configured to execute the door open notification by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc., when the door open command is received, even if the front door 12 is closed. .

That is, when it is detected that the front door 12 is opened or can be opened, the door open notification can be executed, and when the front door 12 is opened or can be opened, the door open notification is generated. It may be configured such that even if an operation for releasing (operation of the release switch) is performed, the door open notification can be continuously executed without being released.
As a result, even though the front door 12 is open or can be opened, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity without giving any notification.

FIG. 138 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and the selector retention notification can be executed again after the selector retention notification is canceled once. and the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. .

In FIG. 138, selector retention detection ON/OFF, door open detection ON/OFF, selector retention notification ON/OFF, door opening notification ON/OFF, reset switch 153 ON/OFF, and release switch ON/OFF. About OFF, it is the same as that of FIG.
Also, the timings of "X41", "X42", "X43" and "X44" in FIG. 138 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. .

In FIG. 138, at timing "X43", when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. After that, at the timing of "X44", the main control board 50 controls to perform the selector retention notification again.
Then, the time from "X43" to "X44" is the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification becomes executable again.

Also, in FIG. 138, assuming that the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 at the timing just before "X43" and the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a at the timing "X43", then, At the timing of "X45", the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.
The time from "X43" to "X45" is the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. .

Further, ``when the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a'' means that the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and passes through the blocker 45. is permitted to pass through, the entry sensor 44a is approached, and the entry sensor 44a turns on from off.
Furthermore, "when the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b" means that the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and passes through the blocker. 45, passes through the input sensor 44a, passes through the input sensor 44b, and is the moment when the input sensor 44b is turned off.

Here, when the medal M drops from the medal slot 47 at an initial speed of "0", passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b in this order, shall be detected by these. It is also assumed that the blocker 45 permits the medal M to pass.
That is, the medal M is released from the hand at the position of the medal insertion slot 47 without gaining momentum, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, and passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor. 44b in order, and at this time, detection is made by the introduction sensor 44a and the introduction sensor 44b.

The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T2". That is, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the time from when the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. It is configured to be shorter than the time "T2" until it is no longer detected by 44b.

For example, it is assumed that the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) and a medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in order to confirm whether or not the selector retention error has been cancelled. At the timing of "X43" in FIG. 138, it is assumed that the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a at the same time when the selector retention notification is released. At this time, if the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X44" in FIG. The inserted medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

Therefore, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 does not normally pass through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b. It is possible to prevent the processing of adding "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits.
In FIG. 138, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 139 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error. It shows the relationship between the time "T1" until the digit 5 is lit and the time "T3" from when the digit 5 is lit until when the digit 1 is lit.

The tenth embodiment also has digits 1 to 5 as in the third embodiment.
Digit 1 corresponds to the upper digits of the credit amount (stored amount) display LED 76 , and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digits of the credit amount display LED 76 . Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78 , and digit 4 corresponds to the lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78 . Furthermore, digit 5 corresponds to set value display LED 73 .

Also, the address "F051(H)" shown in FIG. 33 of the third embodiment is a 1-byte storage area in which the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated for each interrupt.
Each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned to the D0 bit for the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit for the digit 2 signal, the D2 bit for the digit 3 signal, the D3 bit for the digit 4 signal, and the D4 bit for the digit 5 signal. . In one interrupt process, dynamic lighting control of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

The LED display counter 1 takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 1 updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 by right-shifting it by one digit for each interrupt. In the next interrupt when the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by right-shifting by one digit. Initialize the counter 1 and set the value of the LED display counter 1 to "00010000 (B)". As a result, one cycle of the LED display counter 1 is five interrupts.

From the above, the value of the LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the tenth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit with five interrupts forming one cycle.
Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) can be lit (digit 1 to digit 4 are extinguished).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00001000 (B)." 3 and digit 5 are extinguished).

At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100 (B)". At this time, the digit 3 signal is output, and the digit 3 (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1, digit 2, and digits 4 and 5 are extinguished).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010 (B)". At this time, the digit 2 signal is output, and the digit 2 (lower digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 1 and digit 3 to digit 5 are extinguished).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)". At this time, the digit 1 signal is output, and the digit 1 (upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 2 to digit 5 is turned off).

139, ON/OFF of selector retention detection, ON/OFF of door open detection, ON/OFF of selector retention notification, ON/OFF of door opening notification, ON/OFF of reset switch 153, and ON/OFF of release switch. About OFF, it is the same as that of FIG.
Also, the timings of "X51", "X52", "X53" and "X54" in FIG. 139 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. .

In FIG. 139, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X53" while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention notification. After that, at the timing of "X54", the main control board 50 executes the selector retention notification again.
Then, the time from "X53" to "X54" is the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification becomes executable again.

Also, in FIG. 139, assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at timing "X53", then digit 1 (higher digit of credit number display LED 76) lights up at timing "X55". .
The time from "X53" to "X55" is the time "T3" from lighting digit 5 (set value display LED 73) to lighting digit 1 (upper digit of credit number display LED 76).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, dynamic lighting control is executed to sequentially light digits 5 to 1 for each interrupt. Also, there are 4 interrupts from when the digit 5 is lit until when the digit 1 is lit. Thus, time "T3" is the time of 4 interrupts (2.235ms x 4 = 8.94ms).
The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T3". That is, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the time from when digit 5 (set value display LED 73) is turned on to when digit 1 (higher order of credit number display LED 76) is turned on. digit) is set to be shorter than the time "T3".

Here, at the timing of "X53" in FIG. 139, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 notifies the selector retention. Once released, it is controlled to execute the door opening notification. At this time, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 (door open). After that, at the timing of "X54", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again. At this time, the main control board 50 controls to switch the display of the obtained number display LED 78 from "dE" to "CE". Assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at timing "X53", then digit 1 (higher digit of credit number display LED 76) lights up at timing "X55". That is, between "X53" and "X55", digit 5 to digit 1 light up once.

Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from "CE" to "dE" at the timing of "X53", and then the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from "dE" to "CE" at the timing of "X54". However, between "X53" and "X54", "dE" lights up only once or "dE" does not light up in the acquired number display LED 78 once. Therefore, since it is difficult for the human eye to confirm that "dE" is lit in the acquired number display LED 78, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.
In FIG. 139, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 140 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and the selector retention notification can be executed again after the selector retention notification is canceled once. The relationship between the time "T1" until the power supply is cut off and the design value "T4" of the period from the time when the event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected is shown.

In FIG. 140, selector retention detection ON/OFF, door open detection ON/OFF, selector retention notification ON/OFF, door opening notification ON/OFF, reset switch 153 ON/OFF, and release switch ON/OFF. About OFF, it is the same as that of FIG.
Also, the timings of "X61", "X62", "X63" and "X64" in FIG. 140 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. .

In FIG. 140, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X63" while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. After that, at the timing of "X64", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again.
The time from 'X63' to 'X64' is the time 'T1' from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification becomes executable again.

Also, in FIG. 140, assuming that an event (power cutoff) occurs at the timing of "X63", the power supply is cut off at the timing of "X65". It is detected, and power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X66".
Then, the time from "X63" to "X65" is the design value of the period from the time when the power supply cutoff event (power cutoff) occurs to the time when the power supply cutoff event is detected. It is "T4".
Also, the time from "X65" to "X66" is the time "T5" from when an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted is detected until the power shutdown process is executed.

Also, in FIG. 140, when an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power to the slot machine 10 is interrupted (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, the breaker voltage drop, power outage, etc.).
In FIG. 140, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0". Also, the voltage level (power interruption detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the supply of power is interrupted is assumed to be "V1". The slot machine 10 operates normally when the power supply voltage is at the voltage level "V0". In addition, when the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1", it becomes possible to detect that the power supply is interrupted.

FIG. 140 shows an example in which an event (power cutoff) occurs in which the supply of power is cut off at the timing of "X63". When a power failure occurs at the timing of "X63", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at the timing of "X65". Also, the time from "X63" to "X65" is "T4". That is, when power failure occurs, the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at time "T4".

In addition, the period from the occurrence of an event (power interruption) in which the supply of power is interrupted until the detection of the event in which the supply of power is interrupted is 20 interrupt times (2.235 ms x 20 = 44 .7 ms) or longer.
Note that the period from the occurrence of an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted until the detection of the event in which the supply of power is interrupted is not limited to the 20 interrupt time, and the voltage monitoring device ( It can be appropriately set according to the performance of the power interruption detection circuit) and the main CPU 55 .

A voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) is provided on the main control board 50 . When the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power-off detection level "V1", a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and power-off is detected by detecting whether or not the signal has been input. detect.

Further, when the power supply voltage further drops from the power-off detection level "V1" and becomes less than the driving limit voltage level of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off processing when the power supply voltage becomes less than the drive limit voltage level, when the power-off occurs at the timing of "X63", the power supply will be cut off by the timing of "X66". It is set so that disconnection processing can be terminated.

The detection of power failure is executed in the interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms. However, when it is detected that the power supply voltage is below the power failure detection level "V1" for two consecutive interrupts, the next interrupt processing is executed. Execute power off processing with . Therefore, in FIG. 140, the timing of "X65" is the timing at which it is detected that the power supply voltage is equal to or lower than the power interruption detection level "V1" two times in a row by interrupt processing. Then, the main control board 50 executes the power-off process in the next interrupt process (the timing of "X66" in FIG. 140).

The main control board 50 backs up data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 in power-off processing. After that, when the power supply is restarted (the power is turned on, the power is turned on, and the power is restored from the power interruption), the main control means 50 executes the power restoration process, and the backed-up data is transferred to the RWM 53. Restore to a predetermined storage area. As a result, when the power is recovered from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure detection can be restored.

Also, in FIG. 140, the timing (“X63” timing) at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, and the selector Timing (timing of "X64") to execute stay notification.
Further, in FIG. 140, the timing at which an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted and the timing at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed are shown. are matching.

The tenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T4". In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the time when the power supply is cut off from the time when the power supply is interrupted (power cutoff). It is configured to be shorter than the design value "T4" of the period until the time when an event to be interrupted is detected.

In FIG. 140, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X63" in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. control to execute the door open notification. It is also assumed that an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is cut off occurs substantially simultaneously with the operation (turning on) of the reset switch 153 . In this case, at the timing of "X64" in FIG. X66", the power-off process is executed.

For this reason, in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, when an event in which the supply of power is cut off (power off) occurs substantially simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153, the power off is detected. before the power-off process is executed, the selector retention notification is executed again. Therefore, in the power-off process, the data indicating that the selector retention notification is being executed can be backed up, so that the selector retention notification is executed when the power supply is resumed (recovered from the power-off). be able to.
In FIG. 140, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 143 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the power supply is interrupted while the door open notification is being given, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, and then the power supply is resumed. is.
In FIG. 143, when the power supply is interrupted means, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, and the like.

In FIG. 143, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X91", the main control board 50 determines that door opening has been detected.
Specifically, at timing "X91" in FIG. 143, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 determines that door opening has been detected. Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is opened, the main control board 50 performs door opening notification. Specifically, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door opening notification.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80 when the door opening is detected. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it executes the door open notification. Specifically, as the door open notification, the speaker 22 outputs a voice saying "the door is open", and the image display device 23 displays the characters "door open".

After that, at the timing of "X92" in FIG. , the door open notification is also stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off processing. As a result, the data in the predetermined storage areas of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are backed up.
After that, at the timing of "X93" in FIG. 143, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.

After that, when the power supply is restarted at the timing of "X94" in FIG. 143, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively execute power-off recovery processing. As a result, the data backed up during the power-off process is restored to the predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the state is restored to the state at the time when the power failure was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively perform door opening notification.

After that, at the timing of "X95" in FIG. 143, when the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control The board 50 cancels the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number before displaying "dE" on the acquired number display LED 78, and transmits to the sub-control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command, it cancels the door opening notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on to execute the door opening notification. It may be configured to execute opening notification.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may detect that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door open notification may be performed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while the power is supplied, the door opening notification can be executed. Further, when the power supply is interrupted during execution of the door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification is issued. be executable.

Here, the front door 12 is opened by a fraudulent act, the power supply is cut off by a fraudulent act while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off. may attempt to conceal wrongdoing. Even in such a case, when the supply of power is resumed, the above-described configuration makes it possible to notify that the door is open even if the front door 12 is closed, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as those described above. can do.

Fig. 144 shows a state in which the power supply is interrupted while the door is being opened, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted. ) is a time chart showing an operation mode when the supply of power is restarted.
In FIG. 144 as well, similarly to FIG. 143, when the power supply is interrupted, it means, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, and the like.

In FIG. 144, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X101", the main control board 50 determines that door opening has been detected. Then, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door opening notification.
Further, when detecting that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs the sound of "the door is open" from the speaker 22 as the door open notification, and displays the characters "door open" on the image display device 23. do.

After that, when the power supply is interrupted at the timing of "X102" in FIG. 144, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 stop operating, so the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively execute power-off processing and back up data in predetermined storage areas.
After that, at the timing of "X103" in FIG. 144, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.

After that, at the timing of "X104" in FIG. 144, the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to unlocking the front door 12). This state continues until the timing of "X105" in FIG.
After that, at timing "X105" in FIG. 144, the power supply is resumed while the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, since the door key is turned counterclockwise, the release switch is turned on when the power supply is resumed. Therefore, the main control board 50 does not issue the door open notification. In addition, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command and does not execute the door open notification.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, instead of executing the door opening notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 has become openable. , the door opening notification may be executed.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion opening of the front door 12, and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect this. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door opening notification may be performed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while the power is supplied, the door opening notification can be executed. Also, when the power supply is interrupted while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, the door key is turned counterclockwise (unlocked). When the power supply is restarted in the state where the switch is operated), it is possible to prevent the door open notification from being executed.

When the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off while the door open notification is being executed, and the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) in this state, the door is unlocked. Although the switch is turned on and the door open notification is canceled, for example, it may be configured as follows.

During execution of the door open notification, the front door 12 is closed to turn off the door switch 17, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) to turn off the release switch. Then, the door open notification may be canceled by returning the door key to its original position and turning the release switch from ON to OFF.
In this case, the operation of turning the door key in the direction opposite to that for unlocking the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position is the operation for canceling the door open notification.

FIG. 145 shows that the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) to turn the release switch from OFF to ON, and then the door key is returned to its original position to turn the release switch from ON to ON. 4 is a time chart showing an operation mode in a case where the door open notification is canceled when the switch is turned off;

In FIG. 145, similarly to FIG. 144, the power supply is interrupted during the door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, and then the door key is turned to the left. The power supply is restarted (with the release switch operated).
Also in FIG. 145, similarly to FIGS. 143 and 144, when the power supply is interrupted, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc. means

In FIG. 145, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X111", the main control board 50 determines that the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) has been detected. Then, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 as door opening notification.
Further, when detecting that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs the voice "door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the characters "door open" on the image display device 23. do.

After that, when the power supply is interrupted at the timing of "X112" in FIG. 145, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 do not operate, so the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively execute power-off processing and back up data in predetermined storage areas.

After that, at the timing of "X113" in FIG. 145, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.
After that, at the timing of "X114" in FIG. 145, the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to unlocking the front door 12). This state continues until the timing of "X116" in FIG.

Thereafter, at the timing of "X115" in FIG. 145, the power supply is resumed while the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off recovery processing. As a result, the data backed up during the power-off process is restored to the predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the state is restored to the state at the time when the power failure was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively perform door opening notification.

Also, since the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when the front door 12 is unlocked), the release switch is turned on when the power supply is resumed, but the release switch is turned on. Since the door open notification is not canceled only by doing so, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each continue without canceling the door open notification.

After that, when the door key is returned to the original position at the timing of "X116" in FIG. 145 and the release switch is turned off from on, the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number before displaying "dE" on the acquired number display LED 78, and transmits to the sub-control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification.
Then, when receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door opening notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, instead of executing the door opening notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 has become openable. , the door opening notification may be executed.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12, and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect this. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door opening notification may be performed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while the power is supplied, the door opening notification can be executed. Also, when the power supply is interrupted during execution of the door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the front door 12 is locked). When the power supply is restarted while the door is turned in the direction opposite to the direction when the door is released, the door open notification can be executed. After that, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned off from on, the door open notification is released.

As a result, the front door 12 can be opened by a fraudulent act, the power supply can be cut off by a fraudulent act while the door opening notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 can be closed while the power supply is cut off. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to hide a fraudulent act, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed even if the front door is closed, so the fraudulent act as described above can be prevented. can.

Although the tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the tenth embodiment, the door switch 17 is turned off when the front door 12 is closed, and is turned on when the front door 12 is opened. is not limited to
For example, when the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned on, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned off. Opening may be detected.

(2) In the tenth embodiment, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, the notification indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open notification) is executed. Not exclusively.
For example, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion opening of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state, the door is unlocked. At this time, the door switch 17 detects the unlocking. can be

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17, the door open notification is performed even if the front door 12 is closed. may
Further, the main control board 50 can display, for example, "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door opening notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17, the front door 12 is opened even if the front door 12 is closed. (door open command) may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, the door open notification may be performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 even if the front door 12 is closed.
In addition, the sub-control board 80 can output, for example, a voice saying "the door is open" from the speaker 22 or display the characters "door open" on the image display device 23 as door opening notification. .

(3) In the tenth embodiment, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 indicate that the front door 12 is open. Although the notification (door open notification) was performed, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 executes the door open notification, but the sub control board 80 does not execute the door open notification. good.

Further, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification, and only the sub control board 80 executes the door open notification. may
In this case, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification, but does not execute the door open notification. ) may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door opening command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like can perform door opening notification.

(4) Although the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 in the tenth embodiment, it may be electrically connected to the sub control board 80 without being limited to this.
When the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like can notify the door opening.

Also, in the slot machine 10 , commands are transmitted in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, when the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the main control board 50. It cannot be detected, and the door open command cannot be received from the sub-control board 80 either. Therefore, even if the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 does not execute the door opening notification, and does not stop the progress of the game as the door is opened. In other words, even when the front door 12 is open, the main control board 50 allows the game to progress.

(5) In the tenth embodiment, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. ) to turn the release switch from OFF to ON to release the door open notification, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, during execution of the door open notification, close the front door 12 to turn off the door switch 17, turn the door key counterclockwise (opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) in this state, and turn the release switch. is turned on from off, the door key is returned to its original position, and the release switch is turned off from on to cancel the door open notification.

In this case, simply by turning the door key counterclockwise (opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) to turn the release switch from off to on, the door open notification continues without being canceled.
Then, the operation of turning the door key in the direction opposite to that for unlocking the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position is the operation for canceling the door open notification.

(6) In the tenth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 so that the return acceptance port 131 is not arranged. Configured, but not limited to.
For example, as shown in FIG. 132, by arranging the return acceptance opening 131 and the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 on the left side of the gap 112 vertically below the gap 112, the return acceptance opening 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112. It may be configured not to. In this case, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is also not arranged vertically below the gap 112 .

Further, even if the upper edge portion 135 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, when the interval "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, "1" "1" medal M can be kept in the gap 112 by pushing the medal M into the gap 112. - 特許庁In this case, the “one” inserted medal M will not be unable to be taken out from the gap 112 .

Then, when the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "1" medal M may pop out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, the "one" medal M jumping out of the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving port 131, and the storage receiving port 35a. It can be made to fall inside and be stored in the hopper 35 .

Further, even if the upper edge portion 135 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, when the interval "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, " By pushing "2" medals M into the gap 112, "2" medals can be made to stay in the gap 112.例文帳に追加In this case, the “2” medals M that have been pushed in cannot be taken out from the gap 112 .

Further, when the front door 12 is closed while "2" medals M are pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may pop out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. Then, similarly to when the front door 12 is closed with the "1" medal M pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M jumping out of the gap 112 do not fall into the return acceptance opening 131. Instead, it can drop into the storage receiving port 35 a and be stored in the hopper 35 .

(7) In the tenth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not restrictive.
For example, as shown in FIG. 133, a closing member 140 may be provided vertically below the gap 112 to block the portion of the return acceptance opening 131 corresponding to the vertically below the gap 112 . That is, the closing member 140 may close the portion of the return receiving opening 131 corresponding to the vertically lower part of the gap 112 . Also, the closing member 140 can be configured to be substantially horizontal.

In this case, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on the covering member 140. - 特許庁When the front door 12 is closed with the medal M in the gap 112, the medal M drops from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since the part of the return acceptance opening 131 corresponding to the vertically lower part of the gap 112 is blocked by the closing member 140, the medal M falling from the gap 112 does not fall into the return acceptance opening 131. It can drop into the storage receiving port 35 a and be stored in the hopper 35 .

(8) In the tenth embodiment, the return acceptance opening 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not the only option. A portion of return receptacle 131 may be positioned vertically below gap 112 as shown.
Further, even if a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, when the gap 112 has an interval "W" that is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, "1" By pushing one medal M into the gap 112, "one" medal M can be kept in the gap 112. - 特許庁In this case, the “one” inserted medal M will not be unable to be taken out from the gap 112 .

Then, when the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "1" medal M may pop out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 , the “one” medal M jumping out of the gap 112 falls into the return acceptance port 131 and the medal return path 132 . , and through the medal payout port 16 to be guided to the medal receiving tray 19. - 特許庁

Further, even if a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, when the gap "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, By pushing "2" medals M into the gap 112, "2" medals can be made to stay in the gap 112. - 特許庁In this case, the “2” medals M that have been pushed in cannot be taken out from the gap 112 .

Further, when the front door 12 is closed while "2" medals M are pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may pop out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. Then, in the same manner as when the front door 12 is closed with the "1" medal M pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M jumping out of the gap 112 fall into the return acceptance opening 131, It can be guided to the medal tray 19 through the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout port 16. - 特許庁

(9) In the tenth embodiment, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the length "L2" of the screw 127, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 are "L1<L2" and "L1<L3". configured to satisfy That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is made longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 is also made thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121. ), but not limited to this.

For example, it may be configured to satisfy “L1<L2” and “L1>L3”. That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121, but the width "L3" of the screw 127 is thinner (smaller) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121. ).
As a result, when the screw 127 is removed from the rear surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 can enter the medal guide passage 121, so that the removed screw 127 can be prevented from being lost. .

As described above, the chute member 120 is provided at a predetermined position with a locking portion for locking the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12 . Then, the chute member 120 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126 while the sheet member 120 is locked to the rear surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion. Therefore, even if the screw 127 is removed, the chute member 120 does not separate from the rear surface of the front door 12 and fall.

(10) In the tenth embodiment, when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120, but this is not the only option. Alternatively, even when one medal M enters the gap 112, another medal M may pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.例文帳に追加
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M inserted in the gap 112, even if one medal M remains in the gap 112, other medals M are directed from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. Since it does not interfere with the passage of the game, it is possible not to interfere with the progress of the game.

(11) In the tenth embodiment, five digits (display units) of digit 1 to digit 5 are provided, and dynamic lighting control is executed to sequentially light digits 5 to 1 with 5 interrupts as one cycle.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, four digits digit 1 to digit 4 may be provided, and digits 4 to 1 may be sequentially lit by dynamic lighting control with four interrupts as one cycle.
That is, the number of digits (indicators) is not limited to five, and can be set appropriately as required. Also, the period of dynamic lighting control is not limited to 5 interrupts, and can be appropriately set according to the number of digits and the like.

(12) In the tenth embodiment, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again, and the event that the power supply is cut off (power cutoff) occurred. Regarding the design value "T4" of the period from time to time when the event that the supply of the power is interrupted is detected, "T1<T4" is satisfied, but conversely, "T1>T4" is satisfied. can be configured to

FIG. 141 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and the selector retention notification can be executed again after the selector retention notification is canceled once. The relationship between the time "T1" until the power supply is cut off and the design value "T4" of the period from the time when the event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected is shown.

In FIG. 141, selector retention detection ON/OFF, door opening detection ON/OFF, selector retention notification ON/OFF, door opening notification ON/OFF, reset switch 153 ON/OFF, and release switch ON/OFF. About OFF, it is the same as that of FIG.
Also, the timings of "X71", "X72" and "X73" in FIG. 141 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22" and "X23" in FIG.

In FIG. 141, at timing "X73", when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. . After that, if an event (power cutoff) in which the supply of power is interrupted does not occur, the main control board 50 can execute the selector retention notification again at the timing of "X76".
The time from 'X73' to 'X76' is the time 'T1' from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification becomes executable again.

Also, in FIG. 141, assuming that an event (power cutoff) occurs at the timing of "X73", the power supply is cut off at the timing of "X74". It is detected, and power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X75".
Then, the time from "X73" to "X74" is the design value of the period from when the power supply cutoff event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected. It is "T4".
Also, the time from "X74" to "X75" is the time "T5" from when an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted is detected until the power shutdown process is executed.

FIG. 141 also shows the voltage level when an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power to the slot machine 10 is interrupted, similarly to FIG.
In FIG. 141, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0". Also, let "V1" be the voltage level (power interruption detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the supply of power is interrupted.

Also, FIG. 141 shows an example in which an event in which the supply of power is cut off (power cutoff) occurs at the timing of "X73". When power failure occurs at the timing of "X73", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at the timing of "X74". Also, the time from "X73" to "X74" is "T4".
Furthermore, if the power supply voltage falls below the drive limit voltage level, the power shutdown process cannot be executed. It is set to terminate disconnection processing.

Also, in FIG. 141, the timing (“X73” timing) at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, and the power supply after the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled. It also shows the timing (timing of "X76") at which the selector retention notification can be executed again if an event (power failure) that interrupts the supply does not occur.
Furthermore, FIG. 141 shows the timing when an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted, and the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed. are matching.

And it is configured to satisfy "T1>T4". In other words, the design value "T4" for the period from when the power supply cutoff event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected is determined by canceling the selector retention notification once. After that, if an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted does not occur, the time until the selector retention notification can be executed again is set to be shorter than "T1".

In FIG. 141, at timing "X73", when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. to execute the door open notification. It is also assumed that an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is cut off occurs substantially simultaneously with the operation (turning on) of the reset switch 153 . In this case, at the timing of "X74" in FIG. 141, an event that the supply of power is interrupted is detected, and thereafter, at the timing of "X75", power-off processing is executed. After that, if an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted does not occur, the selector retention notification can be executed again at the timing of "X76" in FIG.

Therefore, in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, when an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (power off) substantially simultaneously with the operation (turning on) of the reset switch 153, the selector retention notification is issued. Once released, after that, before executing the selector retention notification again, the power cutoff is detected and the power cutoff processing is executed. Therefore, in power-off processing, data indicating the execution of selector retention notification is not backed up, so when power supply is resumed (returned from power-off), selector retention notification can be prevented from being executed.

In FIG. 141, at the timing of "X75", the door open notification is executed instead of the selector stay notification. Therefore, in the power-off process, the data indicating that the door-open notification is being executed is backed up, so that when the power supply is resumed (recovered from the power-off), the door-open notification is executed.
Also, in FIG. 141, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

(13) In the tenth embodiment, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is once canceled, and then the selector retention notification is reset again without any operation. Although the selector stay notification is executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. When the release switch is operated in a situation where the door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the door open notification may be canceled and the selector retention notification may be executed again. .

FIG. 142 shows when the reset switch 153 is operated while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, and when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error is removed. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the release switch is operated in a state in which it is not
In FIG. 142, when the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M at timing "X81", and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 .
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as the selector stay notification, and displays the characters "selector stay error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

After that, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X82" in FIG. During the period, the selector stay notification is continued without executing the door open notification.
Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door open command indicating that the front door 12 is opened to the sub control board 80 . However, the sub-control board 80 continues the selector stay notification without executing the door open notification even if the door open command is received while the selector stay notification is being executed.

After that, at the timing of "X83" in FIG. 142, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stay notification and executes the door opening notification. Specifically, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification and executes the door open notification. Specifically, the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "please call the staff" to "the door is open", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "selector stay error" to "door open". switch to

After that, at timing "X84" in FIG. 142, when the front door 12 is closed while the factor of the selector retention error is not removed, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects the opening of the front door 12 . However, the door open notification is not canceled even if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and continues until the cancel switch is operated (turned on).

After that, at the timing of "X85" in FIG. 142, the door key is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) under the condition that the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, and the unlocking is performed. When the switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and executes the selector stay notification. Specifically, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from "dE", which indicates a selector retention error, to "CE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Further, when the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door opening notification. Then, when receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and executes the selector stay notification. Specifically, the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to "selector retention error". switch to

Here, in FIG. 142, using the selector retention error as an example, when the front door 12 is opened and the reset switch 153 is operated in a state where the cause of the error is not removed, and when the front door 12 is closed and The operation when the release switch is operated while the cause of the error has not been removed has been described.
However, not limited to this, when the reset switch 153 is operated while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error is not removed, such as when the selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error occurs. , and when the release switch is operated in a state in which the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error is not removed, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

Further, in FIG. 142, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on to execute the door opening notification. When detected, it may be configured to execute door open notification.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may detect that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17 and the front door 12 can be opened, the front door 12 is opened. It may be configured to perform the door open notification even when the door is closed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, the door key is turned counterclockwise to operate (turn on) the release switch, the main control board 50 is configured to release the door open notification. be able to.

Thus, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be executed. After that, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, and the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification (pressing the reset switch 153) is performed. operation) is performed, the door opening notification can be executed after the predetermined error notification is once canceled. After that, when an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed in a situation where the front door 12 is closed or locked and the predetermined error factor has not been eliminated, the door open notification is performed. is released, the predetermined error notification can be made again.

As a result, it is possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Since the fact that the front door 12 is open can be notified again, fraud can be prevented.

(14) In the tenth embodiment, processing related to error detection, execution of error notification, and cancellation of error notification is executed in interrupt processing.
Then, in the same interrupt process, there is a case where the error notification is canceled once and the error notification is executed again.
In the example shown in FIG. 136, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door is opened. performed the notification. After that, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification was canceled and the selector stay notification was executed again.

However, in the same interrupt process, there is a case where the selector retention notification is canceled and then the selector retention notification is executed again. In this case, door open notification is not executed.
In this way, the selector retention notification is canceled according to the order of error detection, error notification execution, and error notification cancellation in the interrupt process, and then the selector retention notification is executed again without executing the door open notification. have a case to do.

Also, in one interrupt process, only one of error detection, error notification execution, and error notification cancellation may be executed. In such a case, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled, the door opening notification is executed, and then, There is a case where the door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed again.

(15) In the tenth embodiment, when the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the near side toward the far side in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 126 . That is, the upper edge portion 135 may be slanted so that the height on the front side is high and the height on the back side is low in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG.

In this case, when the medal M is put in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135, the medal M is subjected to a force that tends to slide toward the inner side in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. work. In other words, a force acts on the medal M to make it slide toward the back side of the front door 12 . Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135 can easily stay in the gap 112 . Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal M inserted in the gap 112, even if the front door 12 is closed, the medal M is unlikely to fall out of the gap 112. - 特許庁

While one medal M remains in the gap 112, another medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 hits the one medal M in the gap 112 and stops. At this time, since other medals M stay in the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, and the selector retention notification is performed. It is possible to indirectly detect that

Contrary to the above, the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the back side to the front side in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 126 . That is, the upper edge portion 135 may be slanted such that the height on the far side is high and the height on the front side is low in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 126 .

In this case, when the medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135, the medal M is subjected to a force that tends to slide toward the near side in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. work. That is, the medal M is subjected to a force that tends to slide in the direction opposite to the back surface of the front door 12 (toward the inside of the cabinet 13). Therefore, the medal M put in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135 easily slides down from the gap 112 toward the inside of the cabinet 13 . Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135 is less likely to remain in the gap 112 .

(16) In the tenth embodiment, the upper opening of the hopper 35 is the storage receiving port 35a. The storage receiving port 35a is provided below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121).
However, for example, the upper edge of the side wall of the hopper 35 may be arranged above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). That is, the upper opening of the hopper 35 may be arranged above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).

In this case, for example, at a predetermined position of the side wall of the hopper 35, a concave portion is provided by notching downward from the upper end of the side wall of the hopper 35. As shown in FIG. In addition, the lower end of this concave portion is arranged below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121). This concave portion can be used as the storage receiving opening 35a for receiving the medals M guided by the chute member 120. As shown in FIG.

In this case, when the front door 12 is closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) faces the recess serving as the storage receiving port 35a. .
Also, when the front door 12 is closed, the vicinity of the hopper 35 side end of the chute member 120 (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) is inserted into the recess serving as the storage receiving port 35a. You may do so.

(17) The various modifications shown in the first to tenth embodiments and the first to tenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate. is.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
The eleventh embodiment relates to error detection. In the eleventh embodiment, after detecting an error, the error cannot be cleared until a predetermined condition is satisfied.
In the following description, "error" corresponds to "recoverable error" and does not include "unrecoverable error".
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered by removing the cause of the error without turning on/off the power.
In the following, hopper error, selector error, and door open error are exemplified as errors.
Hopper errors include, for example,
"HP" error: Medal clogging (accumulation) error in hopper 35 "HE" error: Medal empty error in hopper 35 "H0" error: Discharge sensor 37 of hopper 35 abnormal.
Note that the above errors do not mean all hopper errors.

The "HP" error is, for example, after the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b detects medals (the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b is turned on), and if the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b is turned off even after a predetermined period of time has passed. This error occurs when there is no power supply (when the power supply is always on).
The "HE" error is an error when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the payout process is executed, but the payout sensors 37a and/or 37b do not detect medals (the payout sensors 37a and/or 37b are off). be. Specifically, it is an error when the hopper 35 runs out of medals.
The "H0" error is generated when the on/off timings of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are not within the range of the reference value. It is an error when it is not settled within.

Also, as a selector error, for example,
"CE" error: Medal retention error in the medal selector "CP" error: Illegal passage of medals in the medal selector error "CH" error: Error in the path sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: In the medal selector "C1" error: Medal abnormal insertion error of the insertion sensor 44 arranged in.
Note that the above errors do not mean all selector errors.
A "CE" error occurs when the insertion sensor 44b located downstream of the two insertion sensors 44a and 44b is turned on (after medals are detected), and the insertion sensor 44b is turned off even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is an error when it does not become
A "CP" error is, for example, an error in which the closing sensor 44a is turned off without turning on the closing sensor 44b after the closing sensor 44a is turned on.

A "CH" error is an error when an abnormality of the path sensor 46 is detected. For example, the error occurs when the passage sensor 46 does not turn off even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the passage sensor 46 has detected a medal (the passage sensor 46 has turned on).
A "C1" error is an error when an abnormality in passage time of the path sensor 46 or the entry sensor 44a or 44b is detected.

Furthermore, a door open error is referred to as a "dE" error and is an error that is detected when the front door 12 is opened. The error is canceled by closing the front door 12 and turning the door key in a predetermined direction to perform an error canceling operation (described later).
When hereinafter referred to as a hopper error, it may refer to any of the above hopper errors or any other hopper errors.
Similarly, when a selector error is referred to hereinafter, it is assumed to be an error relating to any of the selectors described above, or any error relating to selectors other than those described above.

Errors such as "HP" and "CE" are displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (error display on the main side). For example, when the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 before the error occurrence is "*0"("*" indicates that it is turned off), when the "HP" error occurs, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "*0". Switch to "HP". Then, when the "HP" error is cleared, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 returns from "HP" to "*0".
Also, when an error occurs, a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it displays an image corresponding to the received error command on the image display device 23, outputs a sound corresponding to the error from the speaker 22, and turns the effect lamp 21 into an error. Light up with the corresponding color.
Then, when the error is cleared, a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it restores the states of the image display device 23, the speaker 22, and the effect lamp 21 to the states before the error occurred.

In the following example, the selector error, which is the second error, occurs while the hopper error, which is the first error, occurs (FIG. 146). 147 shows a case where a hopper error, which is an error, occurs (FIG. 147).
Here, it is almost impossible for a selector error and a hopper error to occur simultaneously during a game. Specifically, this is because the medal payout process cannot actually be executed when a selector error occurs.
Further, when a hopper error occurs, the blocker 45 is turned off, so even if medals are inserted, the medals do not reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, it is practically impossible for a selector error to occur when a hopper error occurs.

However, for example, firstly, when a medal is inserted while a hopper error (for example, "HE" error) is occurring, it passes through the blocker 45 for some reason (for example, when a problem occurs in driving the blocker 45, etc.), and the insertion sensor 44a and 44b. In addition, there is a case where the token insertion action is performed while the hopper error is occurring, and the abnormal insertion of medals is detected.
Secondly, there is a case where the hopper goto act is performed while the selector error is occurring and the payout sensor 37 is detected to be abnormal.
Thus, there is a possibility that a selector error may occur while a hopper error is occurring, or a hopper error may occur while a selector error is occurring.
Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the error notification is controlled including the above events.

Next, the flow from error detection to notification will be described using the flowchart shown in the third embodiment.
In the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 46, when it is determined in step S274 that medals have been inserted, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S276 and executes medal management. In this process, the presence or absence of a selector error is determined based on the detections of the path sensor 46 and the entry sensors 44a and 44b. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not a selector error is detected for each interrupt process.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector error, it transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 can notify the selector error.

Also, when the main control board 50 determines in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 46 that a minor win has been won, it executes a medal payout process in step S294. Alternatively, when the main control board 50 determines that the settlement switch 43 has been operated in medal management in step S276, the main control board 50 shifts to settlement processing and executes medal payout processing for stored medals.
During the medal payout process, the payout sensors 37a and 37b determine whether or not there is a hopper error. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not a medal hopper error has been detected for each interrupt process.

When detecting a hopper error, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 can notify the hopper error.
Furthermore, when a power failure occurs during error detection or error notification and it is necessary to back up the data related to the error, in the power failure processing (I_POWER_DOWN) of FIG. Then, backup processing of the data related to the error is executed.
Then, when the power is turned on, at some timing in the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 42, the data related to the backup error is read, and the state before the power interruption is restored.

FIG. 146 is a time chart showing Example 1 of error notification in the eleventh embodiment, in which the first error detection state, the first error notification state, the second error detection state, and the second error notification state, respectively. is shown.
In example 1 of FIG. 146, the first error is a hopper error and the second error is a selector error. However, it is not limited to this error.
Error reporting is performed by both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .
The main control board 50 gives an error notification by means of the acquired number display LED 78 . For example, when the medal retention error described above is detected, the obtained number display LED 78 is segmentally displayed as "CE". Also, the sub-control board 80 performs error notification by means of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. FIG. “BGM” of the error notification shown in the following example corresponds to the output of the error notification sound by the sub-control board 80 .

First, it is assumed that when the cause of the first error has occurred, no other error has occurred. When the cause of the first error occurs, the main control board 50 detects the first error. In this example, it is assumed that the timing at which the cause of the first error occurs and the timing at which the first error is detected are the same (no time lag). In practice, when an error factor occurs, the error is detected (determined that an error has occurred) by the interrupt processing that is executed afterward, so the maximum interrupt time (for example, "2.235" ms) is one. However, the time lag is ignored here.

As described above, when the main control board 50 detects the first error, the main control board 50 transmits an error command related to the first error to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command related to the first error, it notifies the first error.
On the other hand, after the first error is detected, the main control board 50 performs control so as not to enable the first error canceling operation for a predetermined period of time. Here, it is possible to remove the cause of the first error even within the predetermined period. However, even if the cause of the first error is removed within the predetermined period, the resetting operation of the first error is disabled until the predetermined period elapses. It is of course possible to eliminate the cause of the first error even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.
Therefore, the notification of the first error is executed for at least a predetermined period. The BGM related to the error is configured to make one loop within this predetermined period. In other words, at least one loop of BGM is performed as notification of the first error. The sub-control board 80 stores sound source data for outputting BGM, and reproduction of this sound source data from the beginning to the end corresponds to "one loop" of BGM.
If the first error cancellation operation is not executed even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the notification of the first error continues, and the BGM shifts to the second loop.

Here, the start time of the "predetermined period" is "predetermined timing after detection of the first error". The "predetermined timing after detecting the first error" means that when the main control board 50 detects the first error, when the main control board 50 sets the error state, and when the main control board 50 issues an error command. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, and when the sub-control board 80 starts error notification. In this embodiment, the "predetermined timing after detecting the first error" is assumed to be "when the first error is detected".
As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, "when the first error is detected" means "when the cause of the first error occurs" and "a predetermined timing after detecting the first error". is.
After a predetermined period of time has passed, when the first error is canceled, the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a of the front door 12 and turned 45 degrees counterclockwise, as will be described later in detail in a twelfth embodiment. This is done by turning on a reset sensor 175 (FIG. 160) provided inside.
It should be noted that the error cancellation operation is not limited to turning the door key DK counterclockwise, and various methods can be used. For example, pressing the reset switch 153 shown in FIG. 125 may be used as the error cancellation operation.

When the reset sensor 175 detects that it is on, it is determined whether or not the detected first error factor has been removed. When it is determined that the predetermined period has passed and the cause of the first error has been eliminated, the notification of the first error on the main control board 50 side ends. Also, a command indicating that the first error has been cleared is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it terminates the notification of the first error. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cause of the first error has not been removed even though the reset sensor 175 is turned on, the main control board 50 continues to report the first error. Also, the error cancellation command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the notification of the first error is continued on the sub-control board 80 side as well.

Further, even when it is determined that the reset sensor 175 is turned on and the cause of the first error has been eliminated, if the predetermined period has not elapsed, the main control board 50 returns to the first error. Continue reporting errors. Also, the error cancellation command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the notification of the first error is continued on the sub-control board 80 side as well.
It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the predetermined period of time has elapsed is made, for example, as follows. First, at the start timing of the predetermined period, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined period is set in the RWM 53, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Then, it is determined whether or not the timer value has become "0" for each interrupt processing, and when it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed, and the timer value is set to "0". , it is determined that the predetermined period has passed.

In the example of FIG. 146, after the cause of the first error is removed, the first error cancellation operation (the operation of turning the door key DK) is performed before the predetermined period elapses. is invalid, and the notification of the first error cannot be terminated.
When the first error cancellation operation is performed again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes effective, so the main control board 50 issues a command to the sub-control board 80 to the effect that the first error has been canceled. Send. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it terminates the notification of the first error.

Example 1 of FIG. 146 shows an example in which the cause of the second error occurs during a predetermined period. In this example 1, no other error is detected during the predetermined period. Therefore, although the cause of the second error occurs before the predetermined period elapses, the second error is not detected during the predetermined period.
As a control method in this way, it is possible to prevent the main process from proceeding to the second error detection process for a predetermined period of time.
In this example 1, the second error (selector error) is not detected during the predetermined period, but other errors may be detectable.
After the predetermined period of the first error has passed, the main control board 50 detects the second error and issues a command to that effect to the sub control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 notifies the second error. Therefore, the notification of the second error is performed substantially simultaneously with the end of the predetermined period corresponding to the first error (the predetermined period corresponding to the second error starts).
In this way, in this embodiment, the notification of the first error and the notification of the second error are not redundantly executed. Therefore, after the notification of the first error ends, the notification of the second error starts. It goes without saying that the second error is detected before the notification of the second error is started.
Further, when the notification of the second error is started, a predetermined period from the start of the notification of the second error becomes an invalid period of the cancellation operation of the second error. Therefore, this point is the same as the case of the first error. Therefore, the second error cannot be canceled (notification of the second error terminated) during the predetermined period.

As with the first error notification, the second error notification is configured such that the BGM makes one loop in a predetermined period. For this reason, at least one BGM is configured to loop by reporting the second error.
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second error can be cleared. The operation for canceling the second error is an operation of turning the door key DK counterclockwise by 45 degrees, like the operation for canceling the first error.
When the cause of the second error is removed and the second error canceling operation is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the canceling operation becomes effective. It terminates the notification of the error and transmits a command indicating that the second error has been cleared to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it terminates the notification of the second error.

As described above, when the first error occurs, the notification of the first error is performed at least for a predetermined period. Further, when the second error occurs, the notification of the second error is performed at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the second error occurs after the occurrence of the first error and before the notification of the first error ends, the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error is not shortened.
As for the first error, since the first error is detected substantially at the same time as the cause of the first error occurs, the error log (history) in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 stores the error when the first error was detected. is stored as the date and time of occurrence of the first error.
On the other hand, for the second error, the time of detection of the second error is stored as the date and time of occurrence of the second error. Therefore, strictly speaking, there may be a discrepancy between the date and time when the second error actually occurred and the date and time of occurrence (actually detection date and time) stored in the RWM 53 .

FIG. 147 is a time chart showing Example 2 of error notification. Example 2 differs from Example 1 in FIG. 146 in that the second error is detected even during the predetermined period of the first error. Also, in example 2, the first error is a selector error and the second error is a hopper error. However, it is not limited to these errors.
In FIG. 147, if the cause of the second error occurs within a predetermined period after the detection of the first error, the second error is detected even during the predetermined period. However, the notification of the second error is not executed overlapping with the notification of the first error. When the cause of the first error is removed, the predetermined period of time for the first error elapses, and the operation to cancel the first error is performed, the notification of the first error is terminated. When the notification of the first error ends, the notification of the already detected second error is started. When the notification of the second error is started, a predetermined period of time is restarted as the notification period of the second error, and the canceling operation of the second error is disabled until the predetermined period of time elapses. When the cause of the second error is removed, the predetermined period is over, and the operation to cancel the second error is performed, the notification of the second error is terminated.
As described above, when the first error occurs, the notification of the first error is performed at least for a predetermined period. Further, when the second error occurs, the notification of the second error is performed at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the second error occurs after the occurrence of the first error, the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error will not be shortened.

FIG. 148 is a time chart showing Example 3 of error notification. In example 3, the first error is either a hopper error or a selector error. Alternatively, it may be a recoverable error other than these two errors.
Example 3 of FIG. 148 shows an example in which the front door 12 is opened within a predetermined period of time after the first error is detected, and a door opening error (hereinafter simply referred to as "door error") is detected.
In the eleventh embodiment, a door error can be detected and notified even during a predetermined period. Further, the door error can be canceled at any time (even during a predetermined period), and when the front door 12 is closed and the cancellation operation is performed, the door error notification ends at that point. In other words, unlike the first error and the like, the door error is not an error that is reported over a predetermined period of time once it occurs.
When the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened. When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened, the main control board 50 notifies the main side of the error (displays "dE") and transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 80 . Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 notifies of a door error.
When the selector error or hopper error described above occurs, the hall clerk opens the front door 12 in order to eliminate the cause of the error. becomes.

In Example 3 of FIG. 148, when the front door 12 is opened within a predetermined period after the detection of the first error, the door error is immediately detected regardless of whether it is still within the predetermined period. Furthermore, when a door error is detected, a door error notification is immediately made. Therefore, the notification of the first error and the notification of the door error are redundantly performed. For example, the BGM corresponding to the notification of the first error and the door error sound (for example, an alarm sound or a sound of repeating "the door is open") are output in duplicate.
Here, while the door error is being notified, the notification volume of the first error may be made lower than normal. Alternatively, while the door error is being notified, the notification of the first error may be made only by the image and the sound output may be eliminated. Furthermore, the notification of the first error may be interrupted while the door error is being notified.

When the front door 12 is closed and a door error cancellation operation is performed, it is determined whether the front door 12 is closed regardless of whether it is within a predetermined period of time, and the front door 12 is closed ( When it is determined that the door error has been cleared, the door error notification ends. Therefore, only the notification of the first error continues.
As in the above example, the first error cannot be canceled until a predetermined period of time has passed, and can be canceled by performing the first error canceling operation after the predetermined period of time has passed.
Although not shown in FIG. 148, when the front door 12 is closed after a predetermined period of the first error has elapsed and after the cause of the first error has been removed, and the door error cancellation operation is performed, the door error notification and Both notification of the first error may be ended. In this case, the operation for canceling the door error also serves as the operation for canceling the first error.

FIG. 149 is a time chart showing Example 4 in which a power shutdown (an event that cuts off the supply of power) occurs while the first error is occurring.
In this example, it is assumed that "predetermined period=time t1+time t2", and that the first error is detected, the predetermined period starts, and then the power is turned off when time t1 elapses.
When the first error is detected, the notification of the first error is performed. However, when the power supply is interrupted, the supply of power is eventually stopped, so the notification of the first error is also interrupted.
Here, in the present embodiment, data indicating that the time t1 of the predetermined time has passed is stored as backup data in the RWM 53 at the time of power-off processing.
When the power is turned on after the power is turned off, it returns to the state before the power was turned off (regardless of whether an error was detected before the power was turned off). When an error is detected before the power is turned off, after the power restoration process shown in FIG. 42 is completed, the data related to the time t1 backed up when the power is turned off is read, and the notification of the first error is resumed at a predetermined timing. be.

Then, after the power is restored from the power-off, the resetting operation of the first error is disabled until the time t2 elapses. As a result, it is possible to secure the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error, in other words, the invalid period of canceling the operation of the first error. By doing so, even if the power is cut off by, for example, cheating after the first error is detected, the first error notification can be performed after recovery from the power cut, and the power cut occurs. A predetermined period can be secured before and after.
When the notification of the first error is resumed after recovery from power failure, the first error cannot be canceled until time t2 has elapsed since the notification was resumed. After time t2 has elapsed, the first error can be cleared if the cause of the first error is removed.

Example 5 of FIG. 150 is a time chart showing an example of power failure during the occurrence of the first error, and is a modification of FIG. 149 .
In this example, if a power failure occurs when time t1 has elapsed during the predetermined period, data relating to time t1 is not backed up.
After recovery from power failure, on the condition that the cause of the first error is removed, even if the notification time of the first error after recovery from power failure is less than time t2, the first error will not occur. Notification can be canceled. In this manner, although the notification of the first error is resumed after recovery from the power failure, the predetermined time period before and after the power failure may not be secured.
In the case of such control, for example, "0" is stored in the RWM 53 as a timer value corresponding to the remaining time of the predetermined period when power is restored. Therefore, if the cause of the first error has been removed after recovery from power failure, the notification of the first error can be terminated as soon as the operation for canceling the first error is performed.

Next, various occurrence situations of selector errors and hopper errors, and specific examples of notification modes in such cases will be described. In the following description, selector error 1 is an error due to the reverse flow of medals. For example, when the insertion sensor 44b (downstream side) detects medals first and then the insertion sensor 44a (upstream side) detects medals, it is determined that the medals have reversed flow, and a selector error 1 occurs.
Selector error 2 is an error due to the accumulation of medals. For example, the insertion sensors 44a and/or 44b are switched from off to on to off as the medal passes, and this corresponds to the case where the on state continues for a predetermined time.
In the following example, selector error 1 occurs first, and then selector error 2 occurs immediately thereafter.

Here, when backflow of medals occurs (including illegal insertion of medals due to cheating), selector error 1 (backflow) occurs due to detection of an abnormality in the insertion sensor 44. However, when backflow of medals occurs, Medal jamming usually occurs in the medal selector. Therefore, the cause of the selector error 1 is eliminated by removing the medal jam that has occurred.
Similarly, when selector error 2 (stagnation) occurs, medals are clogged in the medal selector, and the cause of selector error 2 is eliminated by removing the clogged medals.
Also, if the hopper error is, for example, a hopper empty error, the cause of the hopper error is eliminated by replenishing the hopper with medals. Also, if the hopper error is, for example, medal clogging at the hopper outlet, the cause of the hopper error is eliminated by removing the clogged medals.
Furthermore, if the hopper error is, for example, an abnormality in the payout sensor 37a (including illegal payout due to fraud), there is no operation to remove the cause of the hopper error. , the presence or absence of an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 is determined.

In the example below, the cause of the error is removed at the time the error cancellation operation is performed, regardless of whether it is during the error unrecoverable period (equivalent to the above-mentioned "predetermined time"). (The error has not occurred).
Furthermore, the "error cancellation operation" corresponds to an operation of turning the door key DK counterclockwise by 45 degrees (however, as described above, an operation such as turning on the reset switch 153 may also be used).

FIG. 151(a) is a time chart showing Example 6 of error notification.
In this example, selector error 1 first occurs, and selector error 2 occurs immediately thereafter. In this case, notification of selector error 1 is executed based on selector error 1 that occurs first. When the notification of selector error 1 is started, the notification of selector error 1 does not end even if the selector error cancellation operation is executed during the "(error) cancellation impossible period 1"("5seconds" in this example).
Further, an example in which selector error 1 is being reported and a cause of a hopper error is occurring during uncancellable period 1 is shown. As described above, the progress of the game is suspended after the occurrence of the selector error, so medals are not paid out. Therefore, it is difficult to assume that a hopper error will occur. In such a case, a hopper error will occur.

As described above, selector error 1, selector seller 2, and hopper error overlap during notification of selector error 1 (during unreleasable period 1).
When the factor of the selector error is removed during the first uncancellable period 1 and the selector error canceling operation is performed, the canceling operation is invalid and the notification of the selector error 1 does not end.
Next, when the selector error cancellation operation is executed when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the notification of the selector error 1, the operation is effective, so the notification of the selector error 1 ends.
It should be noted that the error cancellation operation executed after 5 seconds of the uncancellable period may be performed any time after 5 seconds have elapsed (the same applies to other uncancellable periods).
When the selector error cancellation operation (effective) is executed and the notification of the selector error 1 is finished, the notification is switched to the notification of the selector error 2 next. The unreleasable period 2 for announcing the selector error 2 is also continued again for "five seconds". Therefore, even if 5 seconds or more have passed since the factor of selector error 2 occurred and the factor of selector error 2 has been removed, selector error 2 will not be notified until the unreleasable period 2 ends. cannot be terminated.

If the selector error cancellation operation is executed after 5 seconds have passed since the start of the notification of the selector error 2, the operation is effective, so the notification of the selector error 2 ends. When the notification of the selector error 2 ends, the notification is switched to the hopper error. The unreleasable period 3 for notifying the hopper error is also continued again for "5 seconds". Therefore, even if five seconds or more have passed since the cause of the hopper error occurred and the cause of the hopper error has been removed, the notification of the hopper error cannot be terminated until the unreleasable period 3 ends. .
If the hopper error canceling operation is executed after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the hopper error notification, the operation is effective, so the hopper error notification ends.
As described above, even if three errors occur at the same time, error notification is performed for "five seconds" for each error, and the period for each "five seconds" is a non-cancellable period.

FIG. 151(b) is a time chart showing a modification of (a).
The example of FIG. 151(b) shows the case where the canceling operation of the selector error is executed after "20 seconds" have passed since the first notification of the selector error 1 in FIG. 151(a).
In this case, since "20" seconds have passed since selector error 1 was reported, the selector error cancellation operation has passed the first cancellation impossible period 1 ("5 seconds"). Therefore, the termination of the notification of selector error 1 by the error cancellation operation is the same as in FIG. 151(a).
However, no matter how many seconds elapse after the unreleasable period 1 elapses before the error is cleared, the other unreleasable periods (unreleasable period 2 and 3) may be canceled or other unreleasable periods may be canceled. The periods (non-cancellable period 2 and non-cancellable period 3) will not be shortened.
Therefore, even if the selector error is canceled after "20" seconds have passed since the notification of selector error 1, the notification of selector error 1 ends, but the notification of selector error 2 is started next. Since the notification of the selector error 2 has a cancellation impossible period 2 of "5 seconds", even if the selector error cancellation operation is performed during this cancellation impossible period 2, it is invalid. If the canceling operation of the selector error is executed after "five seconds" of the canceling impossible period 2 has elapsed, the canceling operation becomes valid and the notification of the selector error 2 ends. However, after that, the hopper error notification is executed.

FIG. 152 is a time chart showing Example 7 of error notification.
In example 7, if multiple errors occur within the initial unreleasable period of "5 seconds", the unresolvable period continues beyond 5 seconds.
In the example of FIG. 152, the cause of the hopper error first occurs, and the hopper error notification is performed. Next, selector error 1 (reverse flow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur before "5 seconds" have passed since the hopper error notification.
In this case, the hopper error notification cannot be terminated even if the hopper error cancellation operation is executed after "5 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the hopper error notification. In Example 7, the hopper error canceling operation becomes valid when 10 seconds have passed since the hopper error notification.
In this example 7, the period until the hopper error cancellation operation becomes effective is set to "10 seconds", but it is not limited to this, and may be set to "15 seconds". Assuming "15 seconds", "Hopper error notification uncancellable period (5 seconds) + Selector error 1 notification uncancellable period (5 seconds) + Selector error 2 notification uncancellable period (5 seconds)" equal to

Also, when 10 seconds have passed since the hopper error was reported, removing all factors of the hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2, and then executing the error cancellation operation, the hopper error End the notification. Furthermore, after the notification of the hopper error is finished, the notification of the selector error 1 and the notification of the selector error 2 are not executed.
As in Example 7, when other errors cumulatively occur during the first error notification period, and when a sufficient error notification period is secured, if the first error cancellation operation is executed, The normal state may be restored without executing other error notification. It goes without saying that all the causes of the error must be eliminated when the error cancellation operation is executed and the error notification is terminated.

FIG. 153 is a time chart showing Example 8 of error notification.
In this example 8, the cause of the hopper error first occurs, and after the hopper error is reported, selector error 1 (backflow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur within the first unreleasable period 1 (5 seconds). This is an example of what happened. That is, the error occurrence situation is the same as in Example 7 of FIG.
In this example, the first unreleasable period 1 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the hopper error, and even if the hopper error releasing operation is executed during this unreleasable period 1, the notification of the hopper error does not end.
After the unreleasable period 1 has elapsed, when the hopper error is released, the release operation becomes effective and the notification of the hopper error is terminated. When the notification of the hopper error ends, the next selector error 1 is notified (cannot be canceled period 2 (5 seconds)).

The uncancellable period 2 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the selector error 1, and even if the selector error is canceled during the uncancellable period 2, the notification of the selector error 1 does not end.
When the canceling operation of the selector error is performed after the uncancellable period 2 elapses, the canceling operation becomes effective, and the notification of the selector error 1 ends. When the notification of selector error 1 is completed, the next notification of selector error 2 (cancellable period 3 (5 seconds)) shifts to the notification of selector error 2 .
The non-cancellable period 3 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the selector error 2, and even if the selector error canceling operation is executed during this non-cancellable period 3, the notification of the selector error 2 does not end.
When the canceling operation of the selector error is performed after the elapse of the uncancellable period 3, the canceling operation becomes effective and the notification of the selector error 2 is ended.

Next, when the notification of the selector error 2 is completed, the notification of the hopper error is executed again (second time). No hopper error has occurred at this point. The hopper error that occurred first is alerted by re-notifying the hopper error.
The notification of the second hopper error continues for the unreleasable period 4 (5 seconds). Even if the error cancellation operation is executed during the cancellation impossible period 4, the notification of the second hopper error does not end. When the error canceling operation is performed after the elapse of the uncancellable period 4, the canceling operation becomes valid, and the notification of the second hopper error ends. When the notification of the second hopper error is completed, the operation returns to normal.
As described above, although no error has occurred at that time (although the cause of the error has been removed), the first error may be notified again for alerting the user.

Example 9 of FIG. 154 is a time chart showing a situation in which errors occur in the order of hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2, similar to FIG.
In Example 9 of FIG. 154, a hopper error factor first occurs, a hopper error notification is made, and during this hopper error notification, the hopper error factor is removed, and the selector error factor is also removed. This is an example.
If all error factors are removed within the unreleasable period 1, and the hopper error is released after the unreleasable period 1 has elapsed, the notification of the hopper error ends and the next selector error 1 is notified. Start. That is, although the cause of the selector error has been removed at this point, based on the occurrence of selector error 1, selector error 1 is reported regardless of whether or not the cause of the selector error has been removed at that point. and continues the notification until the non-cancellable period 2 elapses. Until the unrecoverable period 2 elapses, even if the error clearing operation is executed, it is invalid.

After the unrecoverable period 2 elapses, when the error is canceled, the notification of the selector error 1 ends and the notification of the next selector error 2 is started. As in the above, the cause of the selector error has been removed at this point, but based on the occurrence of selector error 2, regardless of whether or not the cause of the selector error has been removed at that point, the selector error 2, and continue the notification until the unreleasable period 3 elapses. Until the unrecoverable period 3 elapses, even if the error clearing operation is executed, it becomes invalid.
After the unrecoverable period 3 elapses, when the error is canceled, the notification of the selector error 2 is terminated and the normal state is restored.
In this way, regardless of whether or not the cause of the error has been removed at that time, the error notification having the unremovable period may be performed in the order of the errors that have occurred.

Although the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the example of FIG. 149, it is also possible to continue reporting the first error again for a predetermined period after recovery from power failure. That is, during the predetermined period after recovery from power-off, the resetting operation of the first error is disabled.
As a method of controlling in this way, for example, when power interruption is detected and power interruption processing is started, data corresponding to the entire time of a predetermined period is backed up.
Furthermore, in this case, it is possible to notify again for a predetermined period of time after recovery from power failure. It may be possible to end the notification of the first error even if the

(2) In the example of FIG. 149, when the power is turned off after the predetermined time has passed since the detection of the first error and before the operation to cancel the first error is executed, the following control is performed. It is possible to
A first method is not to report the first error after recovery from power failure. This is because the notification of the first error has already been executed for a predetermined period of time before the power is turned off.
As a second method, after the power is restored from the power failure, the notification of the first error is resumed. , the first error notification may be terminated even if the first error canceling operation is not executed.
Furthermore, as a third method, similar to the example of FIG. 150, after recovery from power failure, the first error notification is resumed. may be terminated.

(3) In Example 1 of FIG. 146, after detecting the first error, the second error is not detected until a predetermined time elapses. Also, in Example 2 of FIG. 147, after detecting the first error, the second error is detected even before the predetermined time has passed.
As a method other than these, for example, once the first error is detected, the first error may not be detected until a predetermined period of time elapses. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it may be determined whether or not the cause of the first error has been eliminated.
In this case, if the cause of the first error is not removed, the notification of the first error is continued. Further, even if the cause of the first error has been removed after a predetermined period of time has passed, the notification of the first error is continued if the cancellation operation of the first error is not executed.
On the other hand, when the cause of the first error has been removed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed and the first error canceling operation has been performed, the notification of the first error is terminated.

For example, it is assumed that a fraudulent act has been committed against the hopper and an illegal payment has been made. When a hopper error is detected based on the first fraudulent payout, the hopper error is notified. Next, it is assumed that the second fraudulent payout is performed during the notification of the hopper error. In this case, the second fraudulent payout may or may not be detected.
Before the predetermined period elapses, even if an error cancellation operation is performed, the operation is invalid, and the notification of the hopper error does not end. Next, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, when the error cancellation operation is executed, the notification of the hopper error is terminated and the normal state is restored. In other words, after the error cancellation operation is executed, the notification of the hopper error corresponding to the second illegal payout is not executed again.
It is also possible to control as described above.

(4) When the cause of the first error has been removed, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other error has been detected, the game can be played immediately.
Further, when the cause of the first error has been removed, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other error has been detected, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state. When the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees (FIG. 163 to be described later) during game standby, the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 45 can be performed. be.
(5) In the above embodiment, the specific "predetermined period" can be set in various ways. If the "predetermined period" is set to a relatively short period, it may be set to about "5 seconds", for example. On the other hand, when the period is set to be longer, for example, it is set to about "60 seconds".

<Twelfth Embodiment>
The twelfth embodiment relates to a door key (including a setting key to be compared with the door key).
In the twelfth embodiment (the same applies to other embodiments), the clockwise (also referred to as "right") and counterclockwise (also referred to as "counterclockwise") rotations of the door key DK and the setting key CK are It represents the direction of rotation as viewed from the key side.
155 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10. FIG. A door key insertion opening 160a is provided near the right edge of the front door 12 (on the side of the right side plate 13d) near the lower side of the medal insertion opening 47 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the player side. The front door 12 can be opened by inserting a later-described door key DK into the door key insertion opening 160a and rotating it clockwise by 45 degrees. When the front door 12 is opened, it opens relative to the cabinet 13 with the left side of the front door 12 as an axis in FIG.

156 shows the door key DK and the door key cylinder 160. FIG.
156, (a) is a front view showing the door cylinder 160, and (b) is a side view showing a state in which the door key DK is inserted from the door key insertion opening 160a of the door cylinder 160. FIG. In FIG. 4B, the door key DK is illustrated with a solid line, and the door key cylinder 160 is illustrated with a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIG. 156(a), the door key cylinder 160 includes an outer cylinder 161 and an inner cylinder 162 housed therein. An outer cylinder 161 of the door key cylinder 160 is fixed to the front door 12 , and an inner cylinder 162 is rotatable with respect to the outer cylinder 161 .

The inner cylinder 162 has a door key insertion opening 160a for inserting the door key DK at its central portion. In addition, two grooves 161a are provided on the inner cylinder 162 side of the outer cylinder 161 .
On the other hand, the door key DK has two protrusions DK1, and when the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, the two protrusions DK1 enter the two grooves 161a respectively. The total length L11 of the door key cylinder 160 is longer than the length of the keyway DK2 (the portion where the key groove is formed) of the door key DK. When the groove shape of the keyway DK2 of the door key DK and the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 are fitted when the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a (the door key DK matching the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 is inserted). ), the door key DK can be rotated, and the inner cylinder 162 can be rotated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 156(b), a cam 171 is connected to the front end of the door key cylinder 160. When the door key DK is inserted and the inner cylinder 162 is rotated, the cam 171 is also rotatable in conjunction with the inner cylinder 162 . Details of the cam 171 will be described later (FIG. 159, etc.).

FIG. 157 is a front view showing the door key insertion opening 160a and the positional relationship of the inserted door key DK. In FIG. 157, the door key DK is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.
The state of FIG. 157(b) is a so-called initial state (the state shown in FIG. 156(a)), and shows the position of the inner cylinder 162 when the door key DK is not inserted. In this state, the door key insertion opening 160a (the space into which the door key DK of the inner cylinder 162 is inserted) extends vertically in the figure. In the state shown in FIG. 157(b) with the front door 12 closed, the front door 12 is locked with respect to the cabinet 13 regardless of whether or not the door key DK is inserted. The front door 12 is closed (cannot be opened).

On the other hand, the state of (a) in FIG. 157 shows the state in which the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees with respect to the state of (b). This state indicates the direction of the door key DK to be operated when canceling the error that has occurred in the slot machine 10 .
As described above, when a hopper error, selector error, or the like occurs and the hall clerk removes these error factors, the error notification continues and the state before the error occurrence is restored. do not. After removing the cause of the error, the front door 12 is closed, the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, and the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise to obtain the state shown in FIG. 157(a). In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, the "error cancellation operation" corresponds to turning the door key DK to the position shown in FIG. 157(a).
As a result, the reset sensor 175, which will be described later, detects the error cancellation operation. When the error cancellation operation is detected, it is determined whether or not the error factor has been eliminated, and when it is determined that the error factor has not been eliminated, the error is not canceled and the error notification continues. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cause of the error has been removed, the error notification is terminated and the state before the error detection is restored.

When the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a in the state of FIG. 157(b) and the keyway DK2 of the door key DK enters the inner cylinder 162 as shown in FIG. DK1 enters into the groove 161a of the outer cylinder 161. As shown in FIG. In this state, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees as shown in FIG. Moving. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in FIG. 157(a), the projection DK1 abuts against the outer cylinder 161 and the door key DK cannot be pulled out. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a can be pulled out only when the position shown in FIG.
Further, the movable range when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise is 45 degrees. Therefore, the structure is such that the door key DK cannot be rotated counterclockwise beyond the position shown in FIG. 157(a). An attempt to rotate the door key DK counterclockwise beyond the position shown in FIG. 157(a) is restricted by a stopper (not shown).

Further, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 157(b), rotational torque is generated in the door key DK. After the door key DK is rotated to the position shown in FIG. 157(a), when the hand is released from the door key DK (when the force acting on the door key DK is removed), a force returning to the initial position is applied to the inner cylinder 162. . Therefore, after the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 157(b) to the state shown in FIG. 157(a), the state shown in FIG. 157(b) is obtained by releasing the door key DK. return. The state shown in FIG. 157(a) can be returned to the state shown in FIG. 157(b) by rotating it clockwise while holding the door key DK.

When the door key DK is released after the state shown in FIG. 157(a), the state shown in FIG. 157(b) is restored, but the inner cylinder 162 does not rotate clockwise any more. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 clockwise. Therefore, even if the force acting on the door key DK is removed in the state shown in FIG. 157(a), the door key DK will almost overrun in the direction shown in FIG. 157(c) from the state shown in FIG. 157(b). do not.
As a result, for example, a hopper empty error occurs, and the hall clerk opens the front door 12, refills the hopper 35 with medals (removes the cause of the hopper empty error), closes the front door 12, and turns the door key DK counterclockwise. To prevent a front door 12 from being unintentionally opened because the door key DK is not turned to the opening position of the front door 12 even if the release operation is performed by turning the door key DK and the hand is released from the door key DK at that position. can be done.

The state of FIG. 157(c) shows a state in which the door key DK is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees from the state of FIG. 157(b). When the door key DK is turned to the state shown in FIG. 157(b), the front door 12 can be opened.
The clockwise movable range of the door key DK is also 45 degrees, and the limit is the state shown in FIG. 157(c). That is, the door key DK is prevented from rotating clockwise from the state of FIG. 157(c). An attempt to rotate the door key DK clockwise beyond the position shown in FIG. 157(c) is restricted by a stopper (not shown).
In the state of FIG. 157(c), similarly to the state of FIG. 157(a), the projection DK1 of the door key DK moves to a position inside the outer cylinder 161 where the groove 161a is not formed. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in FIG. 157(c), the protrusion DK1 abuts against the outer cylinder 161 and the door key DK cannot be pulled out. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a can be pulled out only when it is returned to the position shown in FIG. 157(b).

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the state shown in FIG. 157(b) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 157(c), and then the door key DK is released, the state shown in FIG. , but the inner cylinder 162 does not rotate counterclockwise any further. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 counterclockwise. Therefore, even if the force acting on the door key DK is removed in the state shown in FIG. 157(c), the door key DK will almost overrun in the direction shown in FIG. do not.
As a result, even if the hall clerk opens the front door 12 and releases the door key DK before confirming the contents of the error, the door key DK does not turn to the error release operation position, so the error is released unintentionally. It is possible to prevent the error from being lost (the content of the error cannot be confirmed).
Further, when the door key DK is turned from the state shown in FIG. 157(b) to the state shown in FIG. 157(c) to open the front door 12 and then the door key DK is released, the state shown in FIG. 157(b) is obtained. The state may be returned to, or the state shown in FIG. 157(c) may be maintained. 157(c), the state shown in FIG. 157(c) can be returned to the state shown in FIG. 157(b) by releasing the door key DK. . If the door key DK is automatically returned in this manner, the working efficiency of the hall clerk can be improved.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162, which will be described later, after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise to open the front door 12, the door key DK has a lock mechanism that maintains the state shown in FIG. 157(c). It is also possible to provide This locking mechanism (FIG. 162) will be described later.

FIG. 158(a) is a front view illustrating various dimensions of the door key cylinder 160, and (b) is a plan view and a side view illustrating the dimensions of the power plug.
As shown in FIG. 158(a), the longitudinal length (excluding the groove 161a) of the door key insertion opening 160a is L14, and the lateral length (width) of the door key insertion opening 160a is L13.
Also, as shown in FIG. 158(a), the distance from the center of the door key insertion opening 160a to the side plate 13d is defined as L12.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 158(b), in the power plug PP, the length of the blade PP3 is L15, and the thickness is L16. Also, the distance (center-to-center distance) between the two blades PP3 is L17. Furthermore, the width of the blade PP3 is defined as L18.
Here, when the power plug PP is type A defined by "JIS C 8303",
L15: 17±1.3 (mm)
L16: 1.5±0.13 (mm)
L17: 12.7±0.13 (mm)
L18: 6.35±0.25 (mm)
is.
In the following description, it is assumed that the power plug PP is type A of "JIS C 8303".

Here, focusing on one blade PP3,
Width L18 of plug blade PP3<longitudinal length L14 of door key insertion opening 160a
The thickness L16 of the plug blade PP3 < the length L13 in the lateral direction of the door key insertion opening 160a
Then, the plug blade PP3 can enter the door key insertion opening 160a.
If it were possible for the plug blade PP3 to enter the door key insertion slot 160a, there is a risk that the plug blade PP3 of the power plug PP would be used to cheat.
Therefore, the distance L17 between the plug blades of the power plug PP and the distance L12 between the door key insertion opening 160a and the side plate 13d are
L17<L12
and
As a result, even if one of the plug blades PP3 of the power plug PP is to be inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, the other plug blade PP3 abuts against the front door 12. cannot be inserted into

Secondly, if the depth of the door key insertion opening 160a (L11 in FIG. 156(b)) is sufficiently longer than the length L15 of the blade PP3, even if the depth of the door key insertion opening 160a is longer than that of the blade PP3. Since it is thought that the inner cylinder 161 cannot be rotated even if it is inserted into the inner cylinder 161, such a configuration is preferable.
Thirdly, the relationship between the width L13 of the door key insertion opening 160a and the thickness L16 of the blade PP3 is
L13<L16
If it is,
and/or
The relationship between the longitudinal length L14 of the door key insertion opening 160a and the width L18 of the blade PP3 is
L14<L18
In this case, the plug blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, so it is preferable to configure in such a manner.
moreover,
If "L13<L16" and/or "L14<L18" are set, it is possible to prevent the cheating without setting "L17<L12" (even if "L17>L12").
If the blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, for example, when the actual machine is purchased and played at home, the blade PP3 may accidentally stick into the door key insertion slot 160a and the door key may be lost. It is possible to prevent an accident such as breaking while entering the insertion port 160a.

Next, a locking device operated by door key cylinder 160 will be described.
FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram for explaining the locking device 170 in the twelfth embodiment, and is a front view seen from the inside of the front door 12 toward the outside (player's side).
As shown in FIG. 156(b), the cam 171 is connected to the tip of the inner cylinder 162 of the door key cylinder 160, and rotates simultaneously when the door key DK and the inner cylinder 162 rotate. Since FIG. 159 is a view of the front door 12 seen from the back side, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise as seen from the outside as shown in FIG. 157(a), the cam 171 in FIG. Rotate clockwise. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 157(c), when the door key DK is rotated clockwise as seen from the outside, the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise in FIG.

FIG. 159 shows the state in which the front door 12 is closed, and the position of the cam 171 in FIG. 159 is the position shown in FIG. 157(b). At this position, an engaging member (not shown) provided on the cabinet 13 side engages with the cam 171, and the front door 12 is closed (locked) with respect to the cabinet 13. It is
The cam 171 has two protrusions 171a and 171b. In this example, protrusions 171a and 171b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees.
The locking device 170 includes moving members 172 and 173 configured to be vertically movable in the figure. A coil spring 176 is connected to the moving member 172 via a hook 172c.
Similarly, the moving member 173 is connected to a coil spring 177 via a hook 173b and to a coil spring 178 via a hook 173c.

Furthermore, the moving member 172 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). Then, when the moving member 172 moves upward in the drawing, the coil spring 176 is stretched and elastic force acts on the coil spring 176 .
Similarly, the moving member 173 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). Then, when the moving member 173 moves downward in the drawing, the coil springs 177 and 178 are stretched and elastic force acts on the coil springs 177 and 178 .
The moving member 172 is provided with a driven portion 172a extending toward the cam 171, and the tip of the driven portion 172a and the projection 171b of the cam 171 are in contact with each other. The downward movement of the moving member 172 in the drawing is restricted by the contact between the driven portion 172a and the projection 171b.

Further, the moving member 173 is provided with a driven portion 173a extending toward the cam 171, and the tip of the driven portion 173a and the projection 171a of the cam 171 are in contact with each other. The upward movement of the moving member 173 in the drawing is restricted by the contact between the driven portion 173a and the projection 171a.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 159, the length of the moving member 173 in the vertical direction in the drawing is formed longer than the length in the vertical direction of the moving member 172 in the drawing. That is, moving member 173 is larger than moving member 172 . Therefore, the weight of the moving member 173 is heavier than the weight of the moving member 172 .

Here, all the coil springs 176, 177 and 178 shall have the same shape (same performance). For this reason, let F1 be the elastic force of the coil spring 176 when the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure, and F2 be the elastic forces of the coil springs 177 and 178 when the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure. When
2×F1≈F2
is configured to be
With the above configuration, the force for moving the moving member 173 downward in the drawing is greater than the force for moving the moving member 172 upward in the drawing, even including the influence of gravity. is configured to be
With this configuration, when the door key DK is turned clockwise with the front door 12 closed, a larger force (rotational torque) is required than when it is turned counterclockwise. This prevents the front door 12 from being easily opened even if an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a and attempts to open the front door 12, for example. On the other hand, turning the door key DK counterclockwise does not require a large amount of force, so the hall clerk can easily perform an error canceling operation.

At the position shown in FIG. 159, almost no tensile force acts on the coil spring 176 . Therefore, even if the contact between the driven portion 172a and the projection 171b is released, the moving member 172 is configured not to move further downward in the drawing from the position shown in FIG.
At the position shown in FIG. 159, almost no tensile force acts on the coil springs 177 and 178 . Therefore, even if the contact between the driven portion 173a and the projection 171a is released, the moving member 173 is configured not to move further upward in the drawing from the position shown in FIG.
Also, the projection 171 a of the cam 171 is in contact with the driven portion 174 .
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the driven portion 174 is configured to be vertically movable in the figure. When the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise and the tip of the projection 171a moves downward, the driven portion 174 can move downward while being in contact with the projection 171a.

The moving member 172 is provided with a detection piece 172b. On the other hand, a reset sensor 175 is attached to the locking device 170 . 159, the reset sensor 155 is detecting the detection piece 172b. The state in which the reset sensor 175 detects the detection piece 172b is defined as "off".
On the other hand, when the moving member 172 moves upward in the drawing, the detection piece 172b is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175 . Thereby, the reset sensor 175 detects "ON".

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the state when the cam 171 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG.
In the state of FIG. 157(b), the door key DK is inserted and rotated clockwise by 45 degrees. When the state of FIG. 157(c) is reached, the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees in FIG. Then, the state shown in FIG. 160 is obtained. Therefore, the state of FIG. 160 is a state in which the front door 12 can be opened.
When the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees, the driven portion 174 in contact with the protrusion 171a moves downward while maintaining contact with the protrusion 171a. Further, the driven portion 173a moves downward while maintaining the contact state with the protrusion 171a. As a result, the moving member 173 moves downward in the drawing, and the coil springs 177 and 178 are stretched, so a rotational torque acts on the cam 171 to rotate it clockwise (to return to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178 .
On the other hand, the contact state between the projection 171b of the cam 171 and the driven portion 172a is released. The moving member 172 maintains the position shown in FIG. 159 even after the contact state with the projection 171b is released. Therefore, the detection piece 172b remains detected by the reset sensor 175 (off state). Also, since the moving member 172 does not move, no elastic force acts on the coil spring 176 .

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a state when the cam 171 is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees from the state shown in FIG.
In the state shown in FIG. 157(b), the door key DK inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise to bring the state shown in FIG. 157(a). It rotates and becomes the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the state in FIG. 161 is the state at the time of the error cancellation operation.
When the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state of FIG. 159, the abutment state between the projection 171a and the driven portion 174 is released, but the driven portion 174 is configured to remain at the uppermost position. Therefore, the driven portion 174 does not move downward even when the contact state with the projection 171a is released.

Further, when the cam 171 rotates clockwise, the driven portion 172a is moved upward in the drawing by the projection 171b. As a result, the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure. When the moving member 172 is moved upward in the drawing, the coil spring 176 is stretched, so that the cam 171 is subjected to rotational torque to rotate counterclockwise (to return to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of the coil spring 176 .
Since the driven portion 173a and the cam 171 are not in contact with each other, the position of the driven portion 173a does not change even when the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 159 and enters the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the position of the moving member 173 does not change.
Further, when the state shown in FIG. 159 changes to the state shown in FIG. 161, the detection piece 172a is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175. As a result, the reset sensor 175 is turned on, and it is determined that the error cancellation operation has been performed.

In FIG. 162, the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise (the state shown in FIG. 157(c)), the front door 12 is opened, and then the door key DK is locked at that position (the state rotated 45 degrees clockwise). It is a front view which shows a structure.
162, (a) shows the state of FIGS. 157(b) and 159 (before the door key DK is rotated, that is, before the moving member 173 moves downward), and (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 157(c) and the state of FIG. 160 (the state after the door key DK has been rotated clockwise by 45 degrees and the moving member 173 has moved downward).
In FIG. 162, a fixing member 179 is a member fixed to the front door 12 side. Therefore, the moving member 173 moves vertically with respect to the fixed member 179 .
As shown in FIG. 162, the moving member 173 is formed with an opening 173d. A substantially cylindrical stopper 173e protrudes forward in the drawing from the opening 173d. The stopper 173e is attached movably within the opening 173d.

In the state of FIG. 162(a), the fixing member 179 and the opening 173d are positioned at a height where they partially overlap in the vertical direction. Therefore, the stopper 173e is in contact with the right outer edge of the fixing member 179 in the drawing.
Then, when the moving member 173 moves downward from the state of FIG. 162(a) and enters the state of FIG. 162(b), the opening 173d is positioned below the fixing member 179. Then, when the front door 12 is opened, the stopper 173e moves leftward in the figure and comes into contact with the lower outer edge of the fixing member 179. As shown in FIG. As a result, the force that causes the moving member 173 to return upward is regulated. Therefore, even if the door key DK is turned clockwise by 45 degrees, the moving member 173 cannot move upward, so the door key DK does not automatically return. In other words, after the door key is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. The state of FIG. 157(c) is maintained.
Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the position of the stopper 173e is returned to the right, and the moving member 173 is allowed to move upward. As a result, the moving member 173 returns to the state shown in FIG. 162(a), and the door key DK automatically returns from the state shown in FIG. 157(c) to the state shown in FIG. 157(b).

Even if the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 157(b), the front door 12 will not be opened, so the lock shown in FIG. 162 will not be applied. Therefore, when the door key DK is released in the state shown in FIG. 157(a), the state automatically returns to the state shown in FIG. 157(b).
In this embodiment, the lock shown in FIG. 162 is applied when the front door 12 is opened. Therefore, if the door key DK is turned from the state of FIG. 157(b) to the state of FIG. 157(c) without opening the front door 12 and then released, the state of FIG. 157(b) is restored.

Next, the setting key CK will be described for comparison with the door key DK described above.
163 shows the setting key CK and the setting key cylinder 154. FIG. 4A is a side view showing a state in which the setting key CK is inserted from the setting key insertion opening 151, and FIG. 4B is a state in which the setting key CK is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees. is a side view showing. In FIG. 163, the setting key cylinder 154 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.
The setting key insertion opening 151 is mounted on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. When the setting key CK is inserted from the setting key insertion opening 151 as shown in FIG. 163(a) and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees as shown in FIG. It turns on, and it becomes a state in which the setting can be changed or the setting value can be confirmed.
The movable range of the setting key CK is from the state shown in FIG. 163(a) (rotation angle of 0 degrees) to the state shown in FIG. 163(b) (clockwise rotation angle of 90 degrees).
Further, unlike the locking device 170, even if the setting key CK is released after being rotated by 90 degrees as shown in (b), the setting key CK does not return to the state shown in (a).
Further, the rotational torque is substantially constant in the rotational movable range of the setting key CK, and the rotational torque hardly changes according to the rotational angle of the setting key CK.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angle of each key and the rotation torque corresponding to the rotation angle for the door key DK and the setting key CK. In the example of FIG. 164, it is assumed that the front door 12 is not opened (the lock shown in FIG. 162 is not applied) after the door key DK is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees.
As described above, the door key DK has a movable range of "-45 degrees" to "+45 degrees". Further, as described above, the rotational torque when rotating clockwise is greater than the rotational torque when rotating counterclockwise.

On the other hand, the setting key CK has a movable range from "0 degrees" to "+90 degrees". Further, unlike the door key DK, the setting key CK has a substantially constant rotation angle and acting torque. In this example, the rotational torque of the setting key CK is smaller than the rotational torque (T1) when the rotational angle of the door key DK is "0 degree", but it is not limited to this. The rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque "T1" when the rotational angle of the door key DK is "0 degree". Furthermore, the rotational torque of the setting key CK is greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "-45 degrees" and is smaller than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "+45 degrees". You may Alternatively, the rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "+45 degrees".

Although the twelfth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the front door 12 is open, the door key DK maintains the position shown in FIG. 157(c) and does not return to the position shown in FIG. 157(b), but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, if the structure shown in FIG. 162 is eliminated and the front door 12 is opened with the door key DK rotated 45 degrees clockwise, when the door key DK is released, the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178 causes the cam 171 to move. may be returned to the initial position, thereby returning the door key DK to the position shown in FIG. 157(b). If the door key DK returns to the position shown in FIG. 157(b), the door key DK can be pulled out even while the front door 12 is open.

(2) The shape of the door key DK shown in the twelfth embodiment is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, the door key DK without the protrusion DK1 may be used. In this case, the door key DK can be pulled out even when the door key DK is rotated.
(3) The configuration of the locking device 170 shown in the twelfth embodiment is not limited to that illustrated. For example, it may be designed so that the rotational torque is the same when the door key DK is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Also, the rotatable range of the door key DK is not limited to "-45 degrees" to "+45 degrees". It is also possible to

(4) Both the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK can be set arbitrarily. In the above embodiment, the door key DK is rotatable by a maximum of 45 degrees clockwise and a maximum of 45 degrees counterclockwise.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be some difference between the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK.
On the other hand, it is also possible to provide a sufficient difference between the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK. For example, it is possible to set the maximum clockwise rotation amount to "+60 degrees" and the counterclockwise rotation amount to "-30 degrees".
Alternatively, conversely, it is also possible to set the maximum amount of clockwise rotation to "+30 degrees" and the maximum amount of rotation to counterclockwise to "-60 degrees".

(5) The rotational torque (force required to rotate) when rotating the door key DK may be set to be the same for clockwise and counterclockwise rotations, or may be set differently.
For example, first, if the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise by "+45 degrees" is "T1" and the rotational torque when rotating it counterclockwise by "-45 degrees" is "T2", Any of "T1≈T2", "T1>T2", and "T1<T2" may be used.

Further, the rotational torque for rotating the door key DK clockwise (to the open side of the front door 12) may be the same or different depending on whether the front door 12 is closed or opened. For example, the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise when the front door 12 is closed may be greater than the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise when the front door 12 is open.
In particular, when the door key DK is rotated clockwise in the closed state of the front door 12, a force for unlocking is required, so the rotational torque increases. On the other hand, even if the door key DK is rotated clockwise while the front door 12 is in the open state, the force for unlocking does not act, so the rotational torque is smaller than the above case.

Further, whether or not the front door 12 is open and the clockwise/counterclockwise rotational torque of the door key DK can be set variously.
in particular,
a) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK≅ the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK b) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK>Door key DK Counterclockwise rotational torque c) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotational torque of the door key DK<Counterclockwise rotational torque of the door key DK d) With the front door 12 open, the clockwise rotational torque of the door key DK Rotational torque≈Counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK e) With the front door 12 open, clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK>Counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK f) With the front door 12 open, The clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK<counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK may be satisfied.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
The thirteenth embodiment is an invention relating to cuts and branches of effects.
The terms used in the thirteenth embodiment have the following meanings.
“Production stage” refers to a background production image that is displayed over a plurality of games. In this embodiment, the term “image” includes both “moving image (video)” and “still image”.
The performance stage is determined by a lottery or the like based on the game state, the winning combination, the number of games played, and the like. During the game, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to execute the change of the production stage, for example, every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is decided to change the performance stage, the performance stage is changed during the current game or from the end of the current game to the start of the next game.
The display of the effect stage is started in response to an operation by the player (for example, a bet operation, an operation of the start switch 41, etc.), similar to the event described later. The production stage continues to be displayed until the next production stage is switched.
As production stages, for example, a normal stage, an omen stage, a CZ stage, an AT stage, and the like are provided.
Here, the "precursor stage" is a stage for inciting whether or not to shift to AT. It should be noted that the portents include the main portent in the case of shifting to AT and the gaseous portent that does not shift to AT.
Also, the “CZ (chance zone) stage” is a stage in which the degree of expectation for shifting to AT (winning) is higher than in non-CZ. In other words, the CZ stage is a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal stage (a stage that easily shifts to a state that is advantageous to the player).
And when we say "normal stage", we do not include the premonitory stage and the CZ stage.
In addition, the term "AT stage" refers to a normal stage during AT, and does not include an AT-specialized zone stage or a sub-bonus stage during AT. The normal stage during AT is the stage with the highest staying ratio during AT.

An “event” is an effect triggered by an operation by a player, specifically, a bet operation (insertion of medals or operation of the bet switch 40), operation of the start switch 41, or operation of the stop switch 42. , a newly output effect, or a different effect than before. An event is the minimum unit of production, and by combining events, various productions such as one-shot production and continuous production described later are configured.
As described above, during the game, one of the production stages is selected and the background production is displayed. Then, when an effect in the current game is selected, an event determined by the effect is output at a predetermined trigger. In this case, the event is displayed as an image superimposed on the background production (production stage).
For example, as shown in FIG. 167, which will be described later, when the effect number 01 is selected, no event occurs or one or a plurality of events are determined to be output in response to a predetermined operation. For example, when the event "0101" is selected, the event "0101" is output when the start switch 41 is operated.

A "cut" is the minimum unit of continuous (uninterrupted) moving images, and is also called a "shot". For example, if there is a moving image of an appearing character A speaking, then the screen is switched to an appearing character B, and there is a moving image of an appearing character B speaking, the moving image of the appearing character A speaking a word is a break. If not, it will be one cut, and when the next appearance character B is switched, it will be another cut.
Therefore, if there is one cut as a continuous moving image of the appearing character A and then one cut as a continuous moving image of the appearing character B, there are a total of two cuts.
On the other hand, when the angle of the appearing character A is switched in the middle of the moving image in which the appearing character A speaks, and the moving image in which the appearing character A speaks continues, the angle is switched with the one cut before the angle is switched. The latter one cut makes a total of two cuts.
On the other hand, for example, a vertically long moving image that is panned up from the bottom is a continuous (unbroken) moving image, and is therefore one cut.
An event may consist of one cut or may consist of a plurality of cuts.
Also, in moving images, a series of cuts (one cut or a set of two or more cuts) at a certain location may be referred to as a "scene". Therefore, one event can also be called one scene.

In this embodiment, "branch" refers to switching from an event up to that point to a new event. This causes a cut or scene to switch.
In addition, the "number of branches" means the total number of effects to be divided when the effects are divided.
For example, when only event A can be output in a certain operation opportunity, and no other event is output (for example, in FIG. , when only event "1501" is output), the number of branches is set to "1".
Also, in the event that event A has been output up to that point and a certain operation trigger switches to either event B or event C (for example, in FIG. or "1504" is output), the number of branches at the operation trigger is set to "2".
Furthermore, when there is a case where no event is output and a case where event A is output in a certain operation opportunity (for example, in FIG. is output), the number of branches at the operation trigger is set to "2".
Furthermore, if event A has been output until then and there is no event to be newly output at a certain operation opportunity (for example, in FIG. displays the number of branches as "-".

In addition, from the viewpoint of how many games the performance continues, there are a single performance and a continuous performance.
"Single-shot effect" refers to an effect that is completed in one game. For example, it is output from the time of operation of the start switch 41 to the time of full stop (further, from the time of full stop to the time of bet operation, or from the time of full stop to the time of operation of the start switch 41 of the next game), and to the next game It is a production that does not carry over the production.
Furthermore, the "chance up pattern" is an effect that is output in a single effect or a continuous effect, and is output as the game progresses or triggered by a predetermined operation, and the expectation level is higher than before. point to Here, in the "expectation level", the expectation level related to winning a special role (bonus), shifting to CZ (chance zone), winning AT, shifting to AT specialized zone, winning sub-bonus during AT, etc. included.
In addition, "fixed effect" is a effect that is output in a single-shot effect, and the result is confirmed at the time the effect is output (special role, AT, confirmation of sub-bonus during AT, confirmation of winning to CZ It refers to production (premium production) that means confirmation of transition, confirmation of transition to AT specialized zone, etc.). As will be described later, during the continuous effect, there is a case where a "successful effect" is output, which means that a result that is advantageous to the player is fixed. It is output in continuous production.

On the other hand, "continuous effect" refers to a series of effects that are output in a plurality of times (at least two times or more), unlike the above-mentioned "single-shot effect". The continuous effect has an "introduction effect" (an effect indicating that the continuous effect is about to start) as an effect to be output first. However, the introduction performance may be omitted and the game may be started from the first game of the continuous performance.
Further, as the final game of the continuous production (game for notifying the result), there are a "failure production", a "success production", and a "reversal production".
As a result, the continuous production is a production that announces the winning of a special role (bonus), the shift to CZ (chance zone), the winning of AT, the shifting to AT specialized zone, the winning of sub-bonus during AT, etc. , "Failure effect" means not winning a special role, not moving to CZ, not winning AT, not moving to an AT specialized zone, not winning a sub-bonus during AT It is a performance that announces etc.
On the other hand, "successful production" means winning a special role, moving to CZ, winning AT, moving to an AT specialized zone, winning a sub-bonus during AT It is a performance to announce that
In addition, even in the above-described one-shot effect, there are cases where a failure effect or a success effect is output to indicate the end of the effect.

In addition, the "reversal effect" is when the bet operation for the next game is performed after the "failure effect" is output in the final game of the continuous effect, or when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. As a trigger, it is a production that switches from a "failure production" to a "success production".
In the continuous performance, when the reverse performance is not output in the next game after the failure performance is output, the game in which the failure performance is output becomes the final game of the continuous performance.
On the other hand, after the failure performance is output, when the reverse performance is output in the next game, the game in which the reverse performance is output becomes the final game of the continuous performance.

The "ending effect" is a effect that is output when it is confirmed that the AT has completed the run, and continues until the game ends when the AT ends. It should be noted that "complete the AT" means to continue until the parameters (the number of games played, the number of payouts, and the number of difference) in the AT exceed the upper limit (or reach the upper limit). Specifically, for example, this corresponds to a case where the difference counter value continues until it exceeds an upper limit value (for example, "2400").

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an effect stage in the thirteenth embodiment. Since the presentation stage in FIG. 165 is an example, it is not limited to these 12 stages. In addition, in FIG. 165, the number of cuts in each production stage is displayed.
The normal stage 0 is an effect stage that is selected only in the non-advantageous section. In this way, a production stage unique to the non-advantageous section may be provided, but it is also possible to share the production stage (for example, normal stage 1) in the advantageous section.
Normal stages 1 to 5 are provided as production stages selected during the normal period of the advantageous section. The “advantageous interval (normal)” is non-AT and does not include during the premonition or during the CZ. CZ stage 1 is selected during CZ, and precursor stage 1 is selected during precursor.

Also, an AT stage 1 is provided as a performance stage in the advantageous section AT. A plurality of types of performance stages may be provided in the advantageous section AT. In addition, the "advantageous section AT" does not include (additional) specialized zones in the advantageous section AT and sub-bonus states in the advantageous section AT. AT specialized stages 1 and 2 are provided as production stages in a specialized zone in the advantageous section AT, and an AT SB stage is provided as a production stage in the sub-bonus in the advantageous section AT.
As shown in FIG. 165, the number of production stages (5) selected in the normal advantageous section (non-AT) is provided more than the number of production stages (1) selected in the advantageous section AT. . This is to prevent the player from getting bored by increasing the variation of the effect during the normal period of the advantageous section.

FIG. 165 also shows the image capacity of the production stage. C1 (MB) is the image capacity of the production stage (normal stage 0) used in the non-advantageous section, and C2 (MB) is the total image capacity of the production stages (normal stages 1 to 5) used in the normal (non-AT) advantageous section. , When the image capacity of the production stage (AT stage 1) used in the advantageous section AT is C3 (MB),
C1<C3<C2
is.
The non-advantageous section has a very low rate of stay and, for example, AT lottery is not performed, so the image capacity of the effect is the smallest.
In addition, since the number of production stages in the normal advantageous section (non-AT) is greater than the number of production stages in the advantageous section AT, the image capacity is proportionally larger.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of production stages during the advantageous section AT may be increased. Furthermore, the number of production stages during the advantageous section AT may be larger than the number of production stages during the normal (non-AT) advantageous section.
Then, each image capacity is
C1<C2<C3
may be

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing the types of effects in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 166 exemplifies only part of the effects, and the effects shown in FIG. 166 do not mean all the effects.
The effect is each game, lottery, etc. depending on whether it is an advantageous section, whether it is a winning hand of the game this time, whether it is during CZ, whether it is a sign, whether it is during AT, etc. One of the production numbers is selected with .
Effects 01 to 18 are effects that are normally selected in the advantageous section.
Further, effects 14 to 18 are effects selected in a continuous effect. When the continuous performance is selected, the performance 14 is selected first, and it is notified that the continuous performance will start from the next game. Then, in the first game, the second game, and the third game of the continuous effects in the next game, the effects 15, 16, and 17 are selected, respectively. Furthermore, when a failure effect (described later) is selected in the third game of the continuous effect and the state is shifted to an advantageous state for the player, the effect 18 (reverse effect) is selected as the fourth game of the continuous effect. be done.
When the AT starts, the performance 21 is selected to notify the start of the AT, and when the AT ends, the performance 25 is selected to notify the end of the AT.

Figures 167 to 170 are diagrams showing event names, cut numbers, and branch numbers by extracting some effects from Figure 166, respectively.
In Figures 167-170,
Production 01 (Normal anticipation production) (Fig. 167)
Production 03 (Normal anticipation production) (Fig. 167)
Production 14 (continuous production (introduction)) (Fig. 167)
Production 15 (continuous production (first game)) (Fig. 168)
Production 16 (continuous production (second game)) (Fig. 168)
Production 17 (continuous production (3rd game)) (Fig. 168)
Production 18 (continuous production (reverse)) (Fig. 169)
Production 20 (fixed production) (Fig. 169)
Production 21 (AT start production) (Fig. 169)
Production 22 (AT normal production) (Fig. 169)
Production 23 (AT additional production) (Fig. 170)
Production 24 (AT expectation production) (Fig. 170)
Production 25 (AT end production) (Fig. 170)
is exemplified.

First, in FIG. 167, the event, the number of cuts, and the number of branches corresponding to the presentation will be described, taking the presentation 01 (normal expectation presentation) as an example.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the event name is indicated by a four-digit number, the upper two digits of the four digits represent the performance number, and the lower two digits represent the event number during the performance from "01". ing.
In the case where the effect is normal in the advantageous section and not the continuous effect (effect 01 to effect 13 in FIG. 166), there is a case where "no event" is selected. The production 01 has seven types of events "0101" to "0107".

"No event" may be selected for all operation triggers. For example, at the start (when the start switch 41 is operated or when the reels 31 start rotating), there are cases where "no event" is selected and event "0101" is selected. Similarly, at the time of one stop (when the first stop switch 42 is operated or when the first reel 31 is stopped), "no event", event "0102", "0103", "0104" or "0106" There is a case where either is selected.
Further, for example, the event "0102" corresponds to 1st stop, 2nd stop (when the second stop switch 42 is operated, or when the second reel 31 is stopped), and 3rd stop (when the third stop switch 42 is operated, or when the third When the reel 31 is stopped), it may be selected by any of the operation triggers. In the case of an event that has the possibility of being selected with a plurality of operation triggers, when it is selected with any of the operation triggers, the same event is not selected redundantly in the game. For example, if the event "0102" is selected during the first stop, the event "0102" will not be selected during the second or third stop. Moreover, the production 01 does not have an event to be selected after the full stop.
From the above, when the effect 01 is selected in the game this time, for example,
At the start: Event "0101"
1 stop: event "0104"
2nd stop: No event 3rd stop: Event "0102"
After a total stop: No event Events are output in such a flow.

In addition, when the effect 01 is selected in the game this time, there is a case where an event is selected with all the operation triggers.
for example,
At the start: Event "0101"
1 stop: event "0104"
2 stops: Event "0102"
3 stops: event "0105"
This is the case.
Furthermore, in contrast to this, when the effect 01 is selected in the game this time, there is a case where the event is not selected in all the operation triggers.
for example,
At start: no event At 1st stop: no event At 2nd stop: no event At 3rd stop: no event This is the case.
In this case, since one of the performance stages is selected, the game is in a state where only the background image is output.

Note that when an event that can be output with a plurality of operation triggers is provided, the same event may be output with a plurality of operation triggers. For example, after the event "0102" is output at the first stop, the event "0102" is output at the third stop as well.

Also, the number of cuts for each of the events "0101" to "0107" is "1". Therefore, even if any event in the effect 01 is selected, a continuous moving image without a break is output at least until the next operation opportunity.
However, the number of cuts is limited, and the length (time) is predetermined. For example, assume that the playback time of event "0101" is "T1". Assume that event "0101" is selected at the start.
In this case, if the first stop switch 42 is not operated until the time "T1" has passed after the start switch 41 is operated, one cut of the event "0101" is output to the end, and then the one cut is output. It will be in a stopped state at the final image of .
It is also assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated after the start switch 41 is operated and before the time "T1" elapses, but no event is selected during the first stop. Then, assuming that time "T1" has passed two stops before, one cut of event "0101" is output to the end between one stop after and two stops before, and then the final image of the one cut It will be in a stopped state.
Furthermore, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated after the start switch 41 is operated and before the time "T1" elapses, and the event "0102" is selected at the first stop. In this case, switching from event "0101" to "0102" is triggered by the first stop. That is, even if one cut of the event "0101" has not been output to the end, the output of one cut of the event "0101" is stopped with the first stop as a trigger, and the one cut of the event "0102" is output. Start.

Moreover, the branches of the production 01 are as follows.
First, at the start, there is a case where there is no event or the event "0101" is selected, so the number of branches at the start is "2".
Similarly, during one stop, there are cases where there is no event or events "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106" are selected, so the number of branches during one stop is "5". ”. In other words, at the time of one stop, there is no event, and one of the five events "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106" is branched.
Further, similarly, as shown in FIG. 167, the number of branches at 2 stops is "2", and the number of branches at 3 stops is "6".

Effect 03 is, like effect 01, a selectable effect in the normal time (non-AT) of the advantageous section. As described above, there is a case where "no event" is selected in the case where the effect is the normal time of the advantageous section and not the continuous effect.
Also, as shown in event "0307", the number of cuts in one event is not limited to "1", but may be "2" or more.
In addition, there is an operation opportunity in which an event is not selected, such as the 2nd stop of production 03 .

As shown in production 03, the average number of cuts for events with 3 stoppages (meaning the average value for all productions; the same shall apply hereinafter) is higher than the average number of cuts for events with 1 stop and 2 stoppages. set to increase. Taking production 03 as an example,
Average number of event cuts during one stop: 1
Average number of event cuts at 3 stops: 1.2
is.
As the average value of the number of cuts of events for each operation trigger,
a) The average value of the number of cuts for the event at 3 stops is the largest,
b) the average number of cuts for the event at the start is equal to or less than the average number of cuts for the event at the three stops;
c) The average number of cuts for events during one stop and two stops is less than the average number of cuts for events during three stops.
Furthermore, even if single-shot effects and continuous effects are combined, the average value of the number of cuts for events during 3 stops is the average number of cuts for events during 1 stop and 2 stops as effects executed in one game. more than value.

The reason for this is that the 3 stop time is the timing at which the player's operation necessary for one game is completed, so that the player can concentrate on the performance (the event can be fully shown). be.
Also, even if the number of event cuts is increased at the end of the game, the tempo of the game is not deteriorated, and the event that the player wants to see is not erroneously skipped in the flow of operations by the player. Because.
It is not necessarily the case that the more the number of cuts, the longer the length (time) of one event.

Furthermore, the average value of the number of branches of the production at the operation opportunity (excluding after all stops; the same applies hereinafter) is
a) The average value of the number of branches in the production at 3 stops is the largest,
b) The average value of the number of branches in the performance at the start is equal to or less than the average value of the number of branches in the performance at the 3 stops,
c) The average value of the number of branches in the effects during the 1st stop and the 2nd stop is less than the average value of the number of branches in the effects during the 3rd stop,
d) The average value of the number of branches in the performance at two stops is the smallest.
In production 01, the number of branches at the time of 3 stops is the largest (number of branches "6"), and in production 03, the number of branches at the time of start and at the time of 3 stops is the largest (number of branches "6").
Moreover, both the effects 01 and 03 have the smallest number of branches in the effect at the time of two stops (for example, in the case of effect 03, the number of branches in the effect at the time of two stops is "1").
Furthermore, when single-shot effects and continuous effects are combined, the average value of the number of branches for the effects at the 3rd stop is the average number of branches for the effects at the 1st and 2nd stops as the effects executed in one game. more than value.
However, as for the effects executed in one game of the continuous effects, the average value of the number of branches in the effects during the 1st stop and the 2nd stop is larger than the average value of the number of branches in the effects during the 3rd stop.

In production 14 to production 18, which are continuous productions, unlike the production at normal time, if there is an event provided at the operation opportunity, the event is always output at the operation opportunity. In addition, when there are a plurality of events provided at the operation trigger, one of the events is output at the operation trigger. Therefore, if at least one event is defined for a certain operation trigger, it will not be "no event".
For example, in production 14, event "1401" is always selected at the start. At the 1st stop and the 2nd stop, no event is selected because there is no defined event, and at the 3rd stop, either event "1402" or "1403" is selected.
In production 15, the number of branches at the start is "1", the number of branches at one stop is "2", and the number of branches at three stops is "1". In production 15, event "1501" is always selected at the start. Moreover, either event "1502" or "1504" is selected at the time of one stop. Here, event "1504" is a chance up pattern. Therefore, at the first stop, the chance up pattern may or may not be output. Furthermore, the event "1503" is always output at the third stop.

Also, the chance-up pattern of event "1504" is an event that can be selected during one stop. All of the chance up patterns in this embodiment are events that can be selected at the time of one stop, and are not selected with other operation triggers. However, not limited to this, the chance up pattern may be selectable with other operation triggers.
However, it is preferable that the chance-up pattern be output early during one game. Therefore, it is preferable to set the chance-up pattern to be more likely to be selected at the time of one stop (or at the start) rather than at the time of three stops. This is to give the player a sense of anticipation early in one game. In addition, in both the one-time performance and the continuous performance, the chance-up pattern is more likely to appear in the 1st stop than in the 2nd or 3rd stop.
Therefore, in the continuous effect, the number of branches for one stop is set larger than the number of branches for two or three stops. This is because it is possible to surprise the player more easily and increase the expectation for the success of the performance.
Although the chance-up pattern may be selected in the second game and the third game of the following continuous effect, it is configured to be selected with the first stop as a trigger.

Effect 16 is a effect output in the second game of the continuous effect (the next game after the game in which effect 15 is output), and the number of cuts for all events is "1". Event "1604" is a chance up pattern like event "1504".
Similarly to the effect 15, when the second and subsequent games of the continuous effect have an event determined by the operation opportunity, one of the events is selected and output. Therefore, in production 16, the event at the start is always "1601", the event at the 1st stop is either "1602" or "1604", there is no event at the 2nd stop, and the event at the 3rd stop is is "1603".

An effect 17 is an effect output in the third game of the continuous effect. The number of cuts of each event of the production 17 is relatively larger than the number of cuts of the events selected in the first game and the second game of the continuous production. The cut number average value of the event selected in the first game (effect 15) of the continuous effect is "1.25", and the cut number average value of the event selected in the second game (effect 16) of the continuous effect is While the value is "1.0", the cut number average value of the event selected in the third game (effect 17) of the continuous effect is "1.83".
Incidentally, since the continuous effect of the present embodiment continues for three games in principle, the effect 17 is the effect of the final game. However, the ending of the continuous effect is an ending that is advantageous to the player (when winning some kind of lottery, transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.), and the third game of the continuous effect ( When the event "1704" (failure) is selected in the effect 17), as an exception, the process shifts to the fourth game of the continuous effect, and the event "1801" of the effect 18 is output. Therefore, only in this case, the continuous effect continues for four games.

Since the third game of the continuous effect is positioned as the final game of the continuous effect in principle, either the event "1704" meaning "failure" or the event "1705" meaning success occurs after the total stop. selected and output. For example, in a continuous production, some mission production is output, and if the mission can be achieved, it will be "success", and if the mission cannot be achieved, it will be "failure".
For example, if CZ is won, AT is won, or special combination is won, event "1705", which is "success", is selected in principle. On the other hand, for example, when CZ is not won, AT is not won, or special role is not won, event "1704", which is "failure", is selected.

However, for example, if you win CZ, if you win AT, or if you win a special role, with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%), the event "1705 ' is selected, and event "1801" of production 18 is selected in the next game.
Here, the number of cuts for event "1704" corresponding to failure is "2", but the number of cuts for event "1705" corresponding to success is "4". This is because it is possible to create a feeling of anticipation for awarding a privilege by increasing the movement of the production at the time of success.

Further, the probability of selecting the chance-up pattern of the event "1706" during one stop when the event "1704 (failure)" is selected after the complete stop is defined as "X1", and the event "1705 (success)" after the complete stop is defined as "X1". When the probability that the chance-up pattern of event "1706" is selected during one stop when is selected is "X2",
"X1<X2"
is.
In other words, when the chance-up pattern is selected, the expected value of "success" is set to be high.

Effect 18 is a effect in which event "1801" is output at the start. The number of cuts for this event is "4", which is a large number for one event. In the above example, this corresponds to an effect in which a mission is “failed” once, but is “successful” when challenged again (for example, the character is revived).
Although the continuous effect is shown above, the effect similar to the continuous effect is output from the start of the CZ to the end of the CZ, for example. In the final game of CZ, a success or failure event is output.

An effect 20 is selected when outputting a fixed effect in normal times. In production 20, one cut of event "2001" is selected at the start and continued until a complete stop. However, the event is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the time of 1st stop, 2nd stop, or 3rd stop, and a fixed effect may be output.
This fixed effect is a so-called premium effect, and when a normal effect is being performed, this game (1 game) wins a special role, wins a CZ, or This is selected when notifying the winning of an AT or the like.
The reason why the event "2001" of the fixed effect is made up of one cut is to draw attention to the fixed effect by intentionally reducing the number of cuts of the fixed effect.

Effects 21 to 25 are effects selected during AT.
The effect 21 corresponds to an AT start effect. The number of cuts of the event "2101" selected here is "3" and is selected at the start. However, the event is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the time of 1st stop, 2nd stop, or 3rd stop, and the AT start effect may be output.
On the other hand, the number of event cuts in the AT end effect (effect 25), which will be described later, is "1". This is because, in the AT start scene, the number of cuts is increased (many movements are produced) to liven up the AT start and create a sense of anticipation. On the other hand, when the AT ends, the number of cuts is intentionally reduced so as to have the effect of fading out the AT.

The production 22 is an AT normal production. During the AT, different events are selected and always output at every game, at the start, at the first stop, at the second stop, and at the third stop. However, not limited to this, even during AT, when a winning combination is not won or when a replay is won, a specific event may not be output in all operation opportunities.
On the other hand, when the pressing order bell is won during AT, the correct pressing order is reported at the start, and a specific event is selected and output at the first stop, second stop, and third stop.
The production 23 is an additional production during AT. Many types of events are provided as extra effects during the AT, so that the effects can be diversified.
As for the effect 24, an event is output for each operation opportunity in the anticipation effect during AT (for example, the effect output when winning a winning combination for the additional lottery).
As shown in productions 22 to 24, the average value of the number of event cuts output at the start and the 3rd stop is output at the 1st stop and the 2nd stop, similarly to the normal production. more than the average number of cuts for events
Effect 25 is an AT end effect. An event with the number of cuts "1" is selected at the start. However, the event is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the time of one stop, the time of the second stop, the time of the third stop, or after a full stop, and the AT end effect may be output. In the presentation 25, one of the events is determined by lottery or the like according to the game results during the AT.

In the above description, it is determined by lottery or the like which event is selected when an effect is selected, but a combination pattern of events may be selected. For example, the pattern of the combination of events that can occur for each effect is stored, and the effect to be output in the current game at the start (for example, effect 01, etc.) and the pattern of the event combination in the effect are determined and determined. It is also possible to output an effect according to the pattern.

Although the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the number of cuts and the number of branches in each effect have been mainly explained, but the volume of the effect can be configured as follows.
First, when one of the production stages shown in FIG. 165 is selected, background music peculiar to the production stage (background music, hereinafter simply referred to as "BGM") is selected and output.
Then, for example, when effect 20 (fixed effect) is selected and event "2001" is output, the volume of BGM corresponding to event "2001" is greater than the volume of general BGM on the effect stage at that time. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to emphasize the fixed effect and draw the player's attention.
However, the volume of the BGM output at the time of error detection is higher than the volume of the BGM related to all effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to call attention to the surroundings when an error is detected, and to make the hall clerk easily aware of the occurrence of the error.

Further, for example, in the third game of the continuous effect (the game in which the effect 17 is selected), when the event "1705 (success)" is output after the complete stop, the BGM is changed. Here, assuming that a change in the BGM is one of the productions that signify "success", the BGM may be changed at the start of the output of the event "1705", or the BGM may be changed before the start of the output of the event "1705". , may suggest the output of event “1705”.
Also, the tempo (song speed) of the BGM of the event "1705 (success)" is faster than the tempo of the BGM of the event "1704 (failure)". Furthermore, the BGM volume of the event "1705 (success)" is higher than the BGM volume of the event "1704 (failure)".

Furthermore, in AT, the tempo of the BGM of the event "2101" of the effect 21 (AT start effect) is faster than the tempo of the BGM of the event "2501" or "2502" of the effect 25 (AT end effect).
Also, the volume of the BGM of the event "2101" of the effect 21 (AT start effect) is higher than the volume of the BGM of the event "2501" or "2502" of the effect 25 (AT end effect).
As described above, at the start of AT, the tempo of the BGM is increased and the volume is increased, thereby making the start of AT exciting and creating a sense of anticipation.

(2) In addition, regarding the color of the effect image, for example, the following configuration can be mentioned.
First, in production 17, the average value of the brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in the event “1705 (success)” is higher than the average value of the brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in the event “1704 (failure)”. expensive. This is to create a feeling of anticipation for the provision of the privilege by making the performance at the time of success bright.
On the other hand, for example, the normal stage has a low probability stage, a normal stage, and a high probability stage with different expected winning values for AT and CZ. , lower than the average values of brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed on the normal stage or the low-probability stage. For example, a high-probability stage may be an image with a night motif, a normal stage may be an image with an evening motif, and a low-probability stage may be an image with a daytime motif.

And when developing from a high-accuracy stage to a continuous production, rather than developing from a low-accuracy stage to a continuous production, the brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed during the continuous production are relatively low. It may be configured to facilitate development. By doing so, it is possible to match the brightness/chroma during the continuous production with the stage (brightness/chroma) before the continuous production.
In addition, even in the effects that are normally output, the average values of the brightness and saturation of the images that can be displayed in the effects with a high degree of expectation for winning CZ, AT, and special roles (so-called hot effects) are displayed in other effects. Lower than the average brightness and saturation of the resulting image. If the brightness/saturation and the winning expectation are related in this way, it is possible for the player to guess the winning expectation from the brightness/saturation of the game this time, in other words, to suggest the winning expectation. It becomes possible.
However, the brightness and saturation of UI images such as stay stages, characters, and game information (credit count) are constant throughout the game (irrespective of the degree of expectation for winning CZ, AT, special role, etc.).

<Appendix>
The inventions stated in the original specification, etc. of the present application (original inventions) can include, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 15, which solve the problem to be solved by the original invention and the problem related to the original invention, respectively. The means for doing so and the effects of the original invention are as follows.
1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of notifying detected errors.
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine that detects multiple errors and notifies each of the multiple errors (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-067621).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable appropriate error detection and reporting when multiple errors occur.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of Invention 1 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
capable of detecting a first error (hopper error) and a second error (selector error);
making it impossible to cancel the first error until a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined timing after the detection of the first error (including the timing of the moment when the first error is detected);
The second error is not detected until the predetermined period elapses (Fig. 146).
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, when the first error is detected, it is possible to secure the notification period of the first error by preventing the cancellation even if the cancellation operation is performed immediately. can.
In addition, after the first error occurs, it is possible to intentionally cause the second error to prevent the switching from the notification of the first error to the notification of the second error.

2. Original Invention 2
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 2 Same as original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problem of invention 2 (the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
capable of detecting a first error (hopper error) and a second error (selector error);
making it impossible to cancel the first error until a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined timing after the detection of the first error (including the timing of the moment when the first error is detected);
enabling loop playback of a predetermined error sound (BGM) corresponding to the first error based on detection of the first error;
At least one loop of the predetermined error sound can be reproduced within the predetermined period (FIG. 146).
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of the Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, when the first error is detected, it is possible to secure the reporting period of the first error by preventing the cancellation even if the cancellation operation is performed immediately. can.
In addition, after the first error occurs, it is possible to intentionally cause the second error to prevent the switching from the notification of the first error to the notification of the second error.
Furthermore, when the first error is detected, an error sound provided in advance can be reproduced to the end so as not to end in the middle.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 3 Same as original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problem of invention 3 (the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
capable of detecting certain errors (e.g. hopper or selector errors) and door open errors;
making it impossible to cancel a predetermined error until a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined timing after detecting the predetermined error (including the timing at the moment when the predetermined error is detected);
A predetermined error can be notified during the predetermined period,
When a door (front door 12) opening error is detected, the door opening error can be notified,
The door opening error can be canceled regardless of the period that has passed from the predetermined timing after detecting the door opening error,
When the door opening error is canceled within the predetermined period, the notification of the door opening error can be terminated (Fig. 148).
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, when a predetermined error is detected, it is possible to ensure a predetermined notification period of the error by preventing the cancellation even if the cancellation operation is performed immediately.
In addition, when the door is opened to remove the cause of the predetermined error and then the door is closed, the door error can be canceled immediately, and subsequent unnecessary door error notification can be eliminated.

4. Original Invention 4
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 4 Same as original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 4 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
capable of detecting a first error (hopper error) and a second error (selector error);
making it impossible to cancel the first error until a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined timing after the detection of the first error (including the timing of the moment when the first error is detected);
not detecting the second error until the predetermined period of time elapses;
Even if the second error factor occurs during the predetermined period, the predetermined period does not change (FIG. 146).
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, when the first error is detected, it is possible to secure the notification period of the first error by preventing the cancellation even if the cancellation operation is performed immediately. can.
Also, even if the second error is intentionally caused after the occurrence of the first error, the notification period of the first error can be prevented from being shortened.

5. original invention 5
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 5 Same as original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
capable of detecting a first error (selector error) and a second error (hopper error);
making it impossible to cancel the first error until a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined timing after the detection of the first error (including the timing of the moment when the first error is detected);
enabling notification of the first error during the predetermined period;
making it possible to detect a second error during the predetermined period;
After the first error is detected, when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the first error is canceled, the notification of the first error can be terminated;
After the notification of the first error is finished, when the second error is detected, the second error can be notified,
It is configured so that the second error cannot be canceled until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the notification of the second error was started (Fig. 147).
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of the original invention 5 According to the original invention, when a (first or second) error is detected, it is not canceled even if the cancellation operation is performed immediately, thereby securing the error reporting period. be able to.

6. original invention 6
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 6 Same as original invention 1.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 6 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
capable of detecting certain errors (e.g. hopper errors or selector errors);
making it impossible to cancel a predetermined error until a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined timing after detecting the predetermined error (including the timing at the moment when the predetermined error is detected);
A predetermined error can be notified during the predetermined period,
When a power failure occurs while a predetermined error is being reported during the predetermined period, and the power is recovered from the power failure, then the predetermined error notification is resumed,
It is configured so that the total of the predetermined error notification period before power failure and after recovery from power failure is the predetermined period (FIG. 149).
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, it is possible to ensure a predetermined error reporting period even if power is cut off after the occurrence of a predetermined error.

7. original invention 7
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a door key insertion slot.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines are known in which a door key is rotated (for example, clockwise) to open a front door, or a door key is rotated (for example, counterclockwise) to perform an error cancellation operation (for example, 2018-114235).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to improve the operability of the inserted door key.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 7 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is
a door key insertion opening (160a) into which a door key (DK) can be inserted when opening the front door (12);
a setting key insertion slot (151) into which a setting key (CK) can be inserted when changing or confirming settings;
When the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot, the door key is turned to a predetermined position (“+45 degree” position) where the front door can be opened, and then released from the door key at the predetermined position. It is configured to return to the position before being turned,
Under the condition that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, the setting key is set at the specific position after the setting key is turned to a specific position (“+90 degree” position) where it is possible to shift to the setting change state or setting confirmation state. The setting key is configured to maintain the specific position even if the key is released (Figs. 157, 163 and 164).
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of the Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, even if the door key is turned, it can be automatically returned to the position where the door key is removed and inserted by releasing the hand.
On the other hand, as for the setting key, when the setting key is turned, the setting key can be prevented from automatically returning, and the position of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be maintained.

8. original invention 8
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 8 Same as original invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 8 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is
a door key insertion opening (160a) into which a door key (DK) can be inserted when opening the front door (12);
a setting key insertion slot (151) into which a setting key (CK) can be inserted when changing or confirming settings;
In a situation where the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot, after the door key is turned to a predetermined position where the front door can be opened, when the door key is released at the predetermined position, the door key returns to the position before it was turned. is configured as
Under the condition that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, even if the setting key is released at the specific position after the setting key is turned to a specific position where it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the setting key is configured to maintain said specific position;
After removing the cause of the detected error, turn the door key in the opposite direction to the direction of rotation when opening the front door while the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot. can be released,
When the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot, the door key will not return to the error reset position even if the door key is turned to the predetermined position where the front door can be opened and then released. (Fig. 157, Fig. 163, Fig. 164)
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, even if the door key is turned, it can be automatically returned to the position where the door key is removed and inserted by releasing the hand.
On the other hand, as for the setting key, when the setting key is turned, the setting key can be prevented from automatically returning, and the position of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be maintained.
In addition, even if the door key is released after being turned, it does not return to the error canceling position, so that it is possible to prevent the error canceling operation from being performed unintentionally.

9. original invention 9
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 9 Same as original invention 7.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is
a door key insertion opening (160a) into which a door key (DK) can be inserted when opening the front door (12);
a setting key insertion slot (151) into which a setting key (CK) can be inserted when changing or confirming settings;
In a situation where the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot, after the door key is turned to a predetermined position where the front door can be opened, when the door key is released at the predetermined position, the door key returns to the position before it was turned. is configured as
Under the condition that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, even if the setting key is released at the specific position after the setting key is turned to a specific position where it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the setting key is configured to maintain said specific position;
Under the condition that the front door is closed and the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot, the rotational torque when turning the door key in the direction in which the front door can be opened is opposite to the direction in which the front door can be opened. greater than the rotational torque when turning the door key (Fig. 164)
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, even if the door key is turned, if the door key is released, it can be automatically returned to the position where the door key is removed and inserted.
On the other hand, as for the setting key, when the setting key is turned, the setting key can be prevented from automatically returning, and the position of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be maintained.
In addition, by providing a difference between the rotational torque of the door key when the front door is opened and the rotational torque of the door key when the error is canceled, the front door can be prevented from being easily opened by inserting an illegal device, etc., and the error can be canceled. can be made operable with a light force.

10. original invention 10
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of outputting an effect.
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that outputs an effect consisting of one or more cuts (see, for example, JP-A-2008-061881).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately set the number of cuts in the effect.
(b) Means for Solving the Problem of the Original Invention 10 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
Equipped with an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section,
The advantageous section includes an information game state (AT) that can notify the operation information of the stop switch and a non-notification game state (non-AT) that does not notify the operation information of the stop switch,
The number of production stages in the advantageous interval and non-informative gaming state (numbers "001" to "006" in FIG. 165) is greater than the number of production stages in the advantageous interval and informative gaming state (number "009" in FIG. 165) many,
The number of cuts of a specific effect (fixed effect) that informs the player of the transition to a specific state that is advantageous to the player (refers to the number of cuts in one effect when one cut is a moving image that continues without breaks. The same applies hereinafter. ) (in FIG. 166, the number of cuts for effect 20 is “1”) is smaller than the average value of the number of cuts for effects other than the specific effects.
(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, it is possible to draw attention to the specific effect by intentionally reducing the number of cuts in the specific effect.

11. original invention 11
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 11 Same as original invention 10.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
A pattern in which the production branches when the first stop switch is operated, a pattern in which the production branches when the second stop switch is operated, and a pattern where the production branches when the third stop switch is operated. With a pattern in which the production branches (for example, production 01 in FIG. 167),
The number of pattern effects in which the effect branches when the third stop switch is operated (for example, five events "0102", "0104", "0105", "0106", and "0107" during the effect 01) is the number of effects in the pattern in which the effect branches when the first stop switch is operated (for example, four events "0102", "0103", "0104", and "0106" during the effect 01) many,
The number of effects of the pattern in which the effect branches when the third stop switch is operated is the number of patterns in which the effect branches when the second stop switch is operated (for example, during effect 01, the event "0102") more than
The average value of the number of cuts of the effect output triggered by the operation of the third stop switch (referring to the number of cuts in one effect when a continuous moving image is regarded as one cut; the same shall apply hereinafter) (For example, the cut number "2" of the event "0307" in the production 03 in Fig. 167) is the cut number of the production output when the first stop switch is operated (the event "0308" in the production 03). more than the average value of the number of cuts "1")
The average number of production cuts output when the third stop switch is operated shall be greater than the average number of production cuts output when the second stop switch is operated. characterized by
(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, by increasing the number of cuts after all the operations are completed, it is possible to show the player an effect with a large number of cuts. Also, by reducing the number of cuts in the performance during the operation, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from being deteriorated.

12. original invention 12
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine capable of outputting an effect.
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that outputs an effect having a plurality of branches (see, for example, JP-A-2018-033525).
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately set the branches of the presentation.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
Continuous production (refers to a series of productions that are output over multiple consecutive games. The same shall apply hereinafter.)
In a game in the middle of a continuous effect (corresponding to a game that outputs a continuous effect, excluding a game that displays a title and a final game), the effect branches when the first stop switch is operated. The average value of the number is larger than the average value of the number of branches in the production triggered by the operation of the third stop switch (for example, during production 15 in FIG. The number of branches at 3 stops is "1"),
The number of effects that increase the degree of expectation among the effects output in response to the operation of the first stop switch exceeds the degree of expectation in the effects output in response to the operation of the third stop switch. More than the number of productions to be enhanced (for example, in production 15 in Fig. 168, the number of chance-up productions at 1st stop is "1" (event "1504"), but there is no chance-up production at 3rd stop)
It is characterized by
(c) Effect of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, by increasing the ratio of the effects that increase the degree of expectation during the game, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation.

13. original invention 13
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 13 Same as original invention 10.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
Equipped with a notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation information of the stop switch,
A first effect (effect 21 in FIG. 169) that can be output when starting the information game state, and a second effect (effect 25 in FIG. 170) that can be output when ending the information game state,
The average value of the number of cuts in the first production (refers to the number of cuts in one production when a continuous moving image is regarded as one cut without breaks; the same applies hereinafter) (During production 21, the number of cuts for event “2101” "3") is characterized by being larger than the average value of the number of cuts in the second effect (the number of cuts of events "2501" and "2502" during the effect 25 is "1").
(c) Effect of the original invention 13 According to the original invention, by increasing the number of cuts at the start of the information game state (creating an effect with many movements), it is possible to create an effect that excites the start of the information game state. . In addition, it is possible to appropriately display the game result (for example, give priority to the game result over the effect) at the end of the information game state.

14. original invention 14
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 14 Same as original invention 10.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
A first effect (for example, event “1705” in the effect 17 in FIG. 168) that informs the player that the state will shift to a state that is advantageous to the player, and a second effect that informs that the state will not shift to a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, In production 17 of FIG. 168, event "1704") is provided,
The average value of the number of cuts in the first production (referring to the number of cuts in one production when a continuous moving image is regarded as one cut without breaks; the same shall apply hereinafter) (number of cuts in event “1705” “4”) is , is larger than the average value of the number of cuts in the second effect (the number of cuts of event “1704” is “2”).
(c) Effect of the Original Invention 14 According to the original invention, when the game transitions to an advantageous state for the player, it is possible to make the effect more dynamic and give the player a sense of anticipation.

15. original invention 15
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 15 Same as original invention 10.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 15 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
A first effect (for example, event “1705” in effect 17 in FIG. 168) that informs the player that the state will shift to a state that is advantageous to the player, and a second effect that informs that the state will not shift to a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, In the production 17 of FIG. 168, the event "1704") is provided,
The average value of the number of cuts in the first production (referring to the number of cuts in one production when a continuous moving image is regarded as one cut without breaks; the same shall apply hereinafter) (the number of cuts in event “1705” “4”) is , more than the average value of the number of cuts in the second effect (number of cuts "2" for event "1704"),
The average value of brightness and saturation in the first effect is higher than the average value of brightness and saturation in the second effect.
(c) Effect of the Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, the effect that gives the player a sense of anticipation is achieved by making the effect more dynamic and brighter when the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player. can do.

10 slot machine (gaming machine)
10a Lower panel 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12c Control panel 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c Top plate 13d Side plate 14 Symbol display device 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door switch 18 Display window 19 Medal tray 21 Production lamp (decoration lamp part)
22 speaker 23 image display device 24 (24A, 24B) operation button 31 reel 32 motor 33 reel sensor 35 hopper 35a storage acceptance port 36 hopper motor 37a, 37b payout sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Input sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal slot 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a resistance 50b mark number 50c mark 50d boundary line 50e DP mark 51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROMs
55 Main CPU (main chip)
55a Pin 55b Recessed portion 55c Stepped portion 55d Stepped portion 55e Two-dimensional code 55f Model number seal 55g Product name 55h Company name 55i Stepped portion 55j Hidden character 56 Socket 56a Hollow portion 56b Stepped portion 56c Pin insertion port 56d Socket pin 56e Notch portion 57 Connector 57 a Foot 57b Lead wire 61 Hand lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Effect group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Set value display LED
74 management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 display substrate 76 credit number display LED
77 Advantageous period display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2bet indicator LED
79c 3bet indicator LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
80 sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROMs
85 Sub CPU
86 push button 87 cross key 91 effect output control means 110 medal selector 111 medal passage 111a vertical portion 111b inclined portion 111c entrance 111d exit 112 gap 113 selector base 120 chute member 121 medal guide passage 122 bottom portion 123 inner wall portion 124 outer wall portion 125 step portion 126 fixing portion 127 screw 130 return member 131 return acceptance opening 132 medal return passage 133 payout acceptance opening 134 medal payout passage 135 upper edge portion 140 closing member 151 setting key insertion opening 152 setting key switch 153 setting change (reset) switch 154 setting key cylinder 160 door key cylinder 160a door key insertion opening 161 outer cylinder 161a notch 162 inner cylinder 170 locking device 171 cam 171a projection 171b projection 172 moving member 172a driven member 172b detecting piece 172c hook 173 moving member 173a driven Member 173b Hook 173c Hook 173d opening 173e stopper 174 driven part 175 door sensor 176 coil spring 177 coil spring 178 coil spring 179 fixing member 200 hall computer 301 interrupt waiting monitor register 302 interrupt prohibition flag (IFF1 register, IFF2 register)
500 Timer circuit 501 (PTC) 8-bit counter 502 (PTC) Prescaler register 503 (PTC) Counter setting register 504 (PTC) Interrupt flag CK Setting key DK Door key DK1 Projection DK2 Keyway PP Power supply plug PP1 Code PP2 Plug PP3 Plug blade

Claims (1)

capable of detecting the first error and the second error;
making it impossible to cancel the first error until a predetermined period elapses from a predetermined timing after the detection of the first error (including the timing of the moment when the first error is detected);
not detecting the second error until the predetermined period of time elapses;
A gaming machine characterized in that even if a second error factor occurs during the predetermined period, the predetermined period does not change.

Images